Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer This help file provides documentation for the following X-Series Analyzers: PXA Signal Analyzer N9030A MXA Signal Analyzer N9020A EXA Signal Analyzer N9010A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application User's & Programmer's Reference Notices damages in connection with the furnishing, use, or performance of this document or of any information contained herein. Should Keysight and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms, the warranty terms in the separate agreement shall control. © Keysight Technologies, Inc. 2008-2014 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means (including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language) without prior agreement and written consent from Keysight Technologies, Inc. Technology Licenses as governed by United States and The hardware and/or software international copyright laws. described in this document are furnished under a license and may Acknowledgments be used or copied only in Microsoft® and Windows® are accordance with the terms of such U.S. registered trademarks of license. Microsoft Corporation. Manual Part Number N9020-90119 Edition August 2014 Printed in USA Keysight Technologies, Inc. 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa, CA 95403 Warranty The material contained in this document is provided “as is,” and is subject to being changed, without notice, in future editions. Further, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Keysight disclaims all warranties, either express or implied, with regard to this manual and any information contained herein, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Keysight shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential 2 Restricted Rights Legend If software is for use in the performance of a U.S. Government prime contract or subcontract, Software is delivered and licensed as “Commercial computer software” as defined in DFAR 252.227-7014 (June 1995), or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987) or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause. Use, duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Keysight Technologies’ standard commercial license terms, and non-DOD Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June 1987). U.S. Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52.22714 (June 1987) or DFAR 252.2277015 (b)(2) (November 1995), as applicable in any technical data. Safety Notices A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury or death. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Table Of Contents Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application User's & Programmer's Reference 1 Table Of Contents 3 1 Additional Documentation 61 Documentation Categories Downloading PDF Files 98 99 2 About the Instrument 101 Installing Application Software Viewing a License Key Obtaining and Installing a License Key Updating Measurement Application Software X-Series Options and Accessories Front & Rear Panel Features Display Annotations Window Control Keys Multi-Window Zoom Next Window Mouse and Keyboard Control Right-Click PC Keyboard Instrument Security & Memory Volatility 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application N9061A Application Description Documentation for the N9061A application Scope of this Document Where to Obtain this Document Instrument Updates General Rules and Limitations AC/DC Coupling Couplings Markers Numeric Ranges Parsing Predefined Functions Remote Control Returning Data Units User-defined Functions Supported Commands EP Parameter 3 102 102 102 103 104 105 106 107 107 107 108 110 110 111 115 117 118 119 119 119 119 120 120 120 121 121 121 121 121 121 122 122 122 122 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents OA Parameter Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A Installing the N9061A Application Installation Licensing Verify the Installation Setting up N9061A Hints and Tips Compatibility (Speed and Consistency) Compatibility and Sweep Times Timeout Synchronization (1) Synchronization (2) Changing Modes AC and DC Coupling Service and Calibration 4 Programming the Instrument What Programming Information is Available? List of Supported SCPI Commands * A C D F G H I M O R S T U IEEE 488.2 Common Commands All Clear Status Standard Event Status Enable Standard Event Status Register Query Identification Query Operation Complete Query Instrument Options Recall Instrument State Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 122 122 123 125 125 125 125 126 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 129 131 132 133 133 133 133 138 139 139 140 140 141 142 142 142 151 153 154 154 156 156 157 157 158 159 159 4 Table Of Contents *RST (Remote Command Only) Save Instrument State Service Request Enable Status Byte Query Trigger Self Test Query Wait-to-Continue Remote Measurement Functions Measurement Group of Commands MEASure Command :MEASure:<measurement>[n]? CONFigure Commands :CONFigure:<measurement> :CONFigure: <measurement>: NDEFault CONFigure? CONFigure:CATalog? FETCh Command :FETCh:<measurement>[n]? INITiate Command :INITiate:<measurement> READ Command :READ:<measurement>[n]? Other Common Measurement Commands Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only) Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only) Data Query (Remote Command Only) Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only) Sample Trace Data Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Data Format Commands Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only) Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only) STATus Subsystem Detailed Description What Are Status Registers What Are Status Register SCPI Commands How to Use the Status Registers Using a Status Register Using the Service Request (SRQ) Method Generating a Service Request Status Register System The Status Byte Register Standard Event Status Register 5 160 160 160 161 161 161 162 163 163 163 163 164 164 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 166 166 166 167 167 167 167 171 172 174 174 175 177 179 180 180 181 182 184 184 185 186 188 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Operation and Questionable Status Registers Operation Status Register Questionable Status Register STATus Subsystem Command Descriptions Operation Register Operation Condition Query Operation Enable Operation Event Query Operation Negative Transition Operation Positive Transition Preset the Status Byte Questionable Register Questionable Condition Questionable Enable Questionable Event Query Questionable Negative Transition Questionable Positive Transition Questionable Calibration Register Questionable Calibration Condition Questionable Calibration Enable Questionable Calibration Event Query Questionable Calibration Negative Transition Questionable Calibration Positive Transition Questionable Calibration Skipped Register Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Register Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Register Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition Questionable Frequency Register Questionable Frequency Condition Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 190 190 190 191 191 191 192 192 193 193 193 194 194 194 195 195 196 196 196 197 197 198 198 198 199 199 199 200 200 201 201 201 202 202 203 203 203 204 204 205 205 205 206 6 Table Of Contents Questionable Frequency Enable Questionable Frequency Event Query Questionable Frequency Negative Transition Questionable Frequency Positive Transition Questionable Integrity Register Questionable Integrity Condition Questionable Integrity Enable Questionable Integrity Event Query Questionable Integrity Negative Transition Questionable Integrity Positive Transition Questionable Integrity Signal Register Questionable Integrity Signal Condition Questionable Integrity Signal Enable Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition Questionable Power Register Questionable Power Condition Questionable Power Enable Questionable Power Event Query Questionable Power Negative Transition Questionable Power Positive Transition Questionable Temperature Register Questionable Temperature Condition Questionable Temperature Enable Questionable Temperature Event Query Questionable Temperature Negative Transition Questionable Temperature Positive Transition 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands 221 Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series" Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Command Syntax Command Description Notes A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A) Syntax 7 206 207 207 207 208 208 209 209 209 210 210 211 211 212 212 212 213 213 213 214 214 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 218 218 219 219 219 220 222 223 251 252 254 255 255 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Legacy Products Description A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products Description A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products Description A4 [four] (Blank Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 255 255 256 256 256 256 257 257 257 257 258 258 258 258 259 259 259 259 260 260 260 260 261 261 261 261 262 262 262 262 263 263 263 263 264 264 264 264 265 265 265 265 266 8 Table Of Contents Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power) Syntax Description ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results) Syntax Legacy Products Description Query Data Type Details ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting) Syntax Legacy Products Description ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power) Syntax Legacy Products Description ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments) Syntax Legacy Products Description AMB (A minus B into A) Syntax Legacy Products Description 9 266 266 266 267 267 267 268 268 268 268 269 269 269 269 271 271 271 271 272 272 272 272 273 274 274 274 274 275 275 275 275 276 276 276 276 277 277 277 277 278 278 278 278 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A) Syntax Legacy Products Description ANNOT (Annotation) Syntax Legacy Products Description APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A) Syntax Legacy Products Description AT (Input Attenuation) Syntax Legacy Products Description AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units) Syntax Legacy Products Description AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled) Syntax Legacy Products Description AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Description B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Description B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Description B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Description B4 [four] (Blank Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 279 279 279 279 280 280 280 280 281 281 281 281 282 282 282 282 283 283 283 283 285 285 285 285 286 286 286 286 287 287 287 287 288 288 288 288 289 289 289 289 290 290 290 10 Table Of Contents Description BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Description BLANK (Blank Trace) Syntax Legacy Products Description BML (Trace B Minus Display Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products Description BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products Description C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A) Syntax Legacy Products Description CA (Couple Attenuation) Syntax Legacy Products Description CARROFF (Carrier Off Power) Syntax Legacy Products Description CARRON (Carrier On Power) Syntax Legacy Products Description CF (Center Frequency) Syntax 11 290 291 291 291 291 292 292 292 292 293 293 293 293 294 294 294 294 295 295 295 295 296 296 296 296 297 297 297 297 298 298 298 298 299 299 299 299 300 300 300 300 301 301 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Legacy Products Description CHANNEL (Channel Selection) Syntax Legacy Products Description CHANPWR (Channel Power) Syntax Legacy Products Description CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description CLRAVG (Clear Average) Syntax Legacy Products Description CLRW (Clear Write) Syntax Legacy Products Description CONTS (Continuous Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products Description COUPLE (Input Coupling) Syntax Legacy Products Description CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description CS (Couple Frequency Step Size) Syntax Legacy Products Description CT (Couple Sweep Time) Syntax Legacy Products Description CV (Couple Video Bandwidth) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 301 301 303 303 303 303 304 304 304 304 305 305 305 305 306 306 306 306 307 307 307 307 309 309 309 309 310 310 310 310 311 311 311 311 312 312 312 312 313 313 313 313 314 12 Table Of Contents Syntax Legacy Products Description DA (Display Address) Syntax Legacy Products Description DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker) Syntax Legacy Products Description DET (Detection Mode) Syntax Legacy Products Description DL (Display Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description DLE (Display Line Enable) Syntax Legacy Products Description DLYSWP (Delay Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products Description DONE (Done) Syntax Legacy Products Description DR (Display Read) Syntax Legacy Products Description E1[one] (Peak Marker) Syntax Legacy Products Description E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products Description 13 314 314 314 315 315 315 315 316 316 316 316 317 317 317 317 318 318 318 318 320 320 320 320 321 321 321 321 322 322 322 322 323 323 323 323 324 324 324 324 325 325 325 325 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size) Syntax Legacy Products Description E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description EDITDONE (Edit Done) Syntax Legacy Products Description EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description ERR (Error) Syntax Legacy Products Description ET (Elapsed Time) Syntax Legacy Products Description EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Description FA (Start Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products Description FB (Stop Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products Description FDSP (Frequency Display Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description FOFFSET (Frequency Offset) Syntax Legacy Products Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 326 326 326 326 327 327 327 327 328 328 328 328 329 329 329 329 330 330 330 330 332 332 332 332 333 333 333 333 334 334 334 334 336 336 336 336 337 337 337 337 338 338 338 14 Table Of Contents Description FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak) Syntax Legacy Products Description FREF (Frequency Reference) Syntax Legacy Products Description FS (Full Span) Syntax Legacy Products Description GATE (Gate) Syntax Legacy Products Description GATECTL (Gate Control) Syntax Legacy Products Description GD (Gate Delay) Syntax Legacy Products Description GL (Gate Length) Syntax Legacy Products Description GP (Gate Polarity) Syntax Legacy Products Description GRAT (Graticule) Syntax Legacy Products Description HD (Hold Data Entry) Syntax Legacy Products Description I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC) Syntax 15 338 340 340 340 340 341 341 341 341 342 342 342 342 344 344 344 344 345 345 345 345 346 346 346 346 347 347 347 347 348 348 348 348 349 349 349 349 350 350 350 350 351 351 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Legacy Products 351 Description 351 I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC) 353 Syntax 353 Legacy Products 353 Description 353 ID (Identify) 355 Syntax 355 Legacy Products 355 Description 355 IP (Instrument Preset) 356 Syntax 356 Legacy Products 356 Description 356 KS, (Mixer Level) 357 Syntax 357 Legacy Products 357 Description 357 KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution) 358 Syntax 358 Legacy Products 358 Description 358 KS( (Lock Registers) 359 Syntax 359 Legacy Products 359 Description 359 KS) (Unlock Registers) 360 Syntax 360 Legacy Products 360 Description 360 KSA (Amplitude in dBm) 361 Syntax 361 Legacy Products 361 Description 361 KSa (Normal Detection) 362 Syntax 362 Legacy Products 362 Description 362 KSB (Amplitude in dBmV) 363 Syntax 363 Legacy Products 363 Description 363 KSb (Positive Peak Detection) 364 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 16 Table Of Contents Syntax Legacy Products Description KSC (Amplitude in dBμV) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSc (A Plus B to A) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSD (Amplitude in Volts) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSd (Negative Peak Detection) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSE (Title Mode) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSe (Sample Detection) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSG (Video Averaging On) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSg (Display Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSH (Video Averaging Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSh (Display On) Syntax Legacy Products Description 17 364 364 364 365 365 365 365 366 366 366 366 367 367 367 367 368 368 368 368 369 369 369 369 370 370 370 370 371 371 371 371 372 372 372 372 373 373 373 373 374 374 374 374 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents KSI (Extend Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSj (View Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSK (Marker to Next Peak) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSk (Blank Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSL (Marker Noise Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSM (Marker Noise On) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSm (Graticule Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSN (Marker Minimum) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSn (Graticule On) Syntax Legacy Products Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 375 375 375 375 376 376 376 376 377 377 377 377 378 378 378 378 379 379 379 379 380 380 380 380 381 381 381 381 382 382 382 382 383 383 383 383 384 384 384 384 385 385 385 18 Table Of Contents Description KSO (Marker Span) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSo (Annotation Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSP (GPIB Address) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSp (Annotation On) Syntax Legacy Products Description KST (Fast Preset) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSV (Frequency Offset) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSx (External Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSy (Video Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products Description KSZ (Reference Level Offset) Syntax Legacy Products Description L0 [zero] (Display Line Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description LF (Low Frequency Preset) Syntax 19 385 386 386 386 386 387 387 387 387 388 388 388 388 389 389 389 389 390 390 390 390 391 391 391 391 392 392 392 392 393 393 393 393 394 394 394 394 395 395 395 395 396 396 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Legacy Products Description LG (Logarithmic Scale) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed) Syntax Legacy Products Description Query Data Type Codes LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMISAV (Save Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function) Syntax Legacy Products Description Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 396 396 397 397 397 397 398 398 398 398 399 399 399 399 400 401 401 401 401 402 402 402 402 403 403 403 403 404 404 404 404 405 405 405 405 406 406 406 406 407 407 407 407 20 Table Of Contents LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products Description LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude) Syntax Legacy Products Description LN (Linear Scale) Syntax Legacy Products Description M1 [one] (Marker Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description M2 [two] (Marker Normal) Syntax Legacy Products Description M3 [three] (Delta Marker) Syntax Legacy Products Description M4 [four] (Marker Zoom) Syntax Legacy Products Description MA (Marker Amplitude Output) Syntax Legacy Products Description MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On) Syntax Legacy Products Description MDS (Measurement Data Size) Syntax Legacy Products 21 408 408 408 408 409 409 409 409 410 410 410 410 411 411 411 411 412 412 412 412 414 414 414 414 416 416 416 416 417 417 417 417 418 418 418 418 419 419 419 419 420 420 420 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Description MDU (Measurement Data Units) Syntax Legacy Products Description MEAN (Trace Mean) Syntax Legacy Products Description MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement) Syntax Legacy Products Description MEAS (Meas) Syntax Legacy Products Description MF (Marker Frequency Output) Syntax Legacy Products Description MINH (Minimum Hold) Syntax Legacy Products Description MINPOS (Minimum X Position) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKA (Marker Amplitude) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKACT (Activate Marker) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKBW (Marker Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency) Syntax Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 420 421 421 421 421 422 422 422 422 423 423 423 423 424 424 424 424 425 425 425 425 426 426 426 426 427 427 427 427 428 428 428 428 429 429 429 429 430 430 430 430 431 431 22 Table Of Contents Legacy Products Description MKD (Marker Delta) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKF (Marker Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKFC (Marker Counter) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKMIN (Marker Minimum) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKN (Marker Normal) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKNOISE (Marker Noise) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKOFF (Marker Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKP (Marker Position) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKPK (Marker Peak) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKPT (Marker Threshold) 23 431 431 432 432 432 432 434 434 434 434 435 435 435 435 436 436 437 437 438 438 438 438 439 439 439 439 441 441 441 441 442 442 442 442 443 443 443 443 444 444 444 444 445 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Syntax Legacy Products Description MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKREAD (Marker Readout) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKRL (Marker to Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKSP (Marker Span) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKSS (Marker to Step Size) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKT (Marker Time) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKTRACE (Marker Trace) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKTRACK (Marker Track) Syntax Legacy Products Description MKTYPE (Marker Type) Syntax Legacy Products Description ML (Mixer Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 445 445 445 446 446 446 446 447 447 447 447 449 449 449 449 450 450 450 450 451 451 451 451 452 452 452 452 453 453 453 453 454 454 454 454 455 455 455 455 456 456 456 456 24 Table Of Contents MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off) Syntax Legacy Products Description MT1 [one] (Marker Track On) Syntax Legacy Products Description MXMH (Maximum Hold) Syntax Legacy Products Description NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data) Syntax Legacy Products Description NRL (Normalized Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position) Syntax Legacy Products Description O1 [one] (Format - Display Units) Syntax Legacy Products Description O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes) Syntax Legacy Products Description O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units) Syntax Legacy Products Description O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte) Syntax Legacy Products Description OA or ? (Query Active Function) Legacy Products Description 25 458 458 458 458 459 459 459 459 460 460 460 460 461 461 461 461 462 462 462 462 463 463 463 463 464 464 464 464 465 465 465 465 466 466 466 466 467 467 467 467 468 468 468 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description OL (Output Learn String) Syntax Legacy Products Description OT (Output Trace Annotations) Syntax Legacy Products Description PEAKS (Peaks) Syntax Legacy Products Description PKPOS (Peak Position) Syntax Legacy Products Description PLOT (Plot) Syntax Legacy Products Description PP (Preselector Peak) Syntax Legacy Products Description PRINT (Print) Syntax Legacy Products Description PWRBW (Power Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection) Syntax Legacy Products Description Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection) Syntax Legacy Products Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 469 469 469 469 470 470 470 470 472 472 472 472 474 474 474 474 475 475 475 475 476 476 476 476 477 477 477 477 478 478 478 478 479 479 479 479 480 480 480 480 481 481 481 26 Table Of Contents Description R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products Description R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products Description R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products Description R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products Description RB (Resolution Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio) Syntax Legacy Products Description RC (Recall State) Syntax Legacy Products Description RCLS (Recall State) Syntax Legacy Products Description REV (Revision) Syntax Legacy Products Description RL (Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description RMS (Root Mean Square Value) Syntax 27 481 482 482 482 482 483 483 483 483 484 484 484 484 485 485 485 485 486 486 486 486 488 488 488 488 489 489 489 489 490 490 490 490 491 491 491 491 492 492 492 492 494 494 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Legacy Products Description ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset) Syntax Legacy Products Description RQS (Request Service Conditions) Syntax Legacy Products Description S1[one] (Continuous Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products Description S2 [two] (Single Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products Description SADD (Add Limit Line Segment) Syntax Legacy Products Description SAVES (Save State) Syntax Legacy Products Description SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment) Syntax Legacy Products Description SDON (Terminate SEDI Command) Syntax Legacy Products Description SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment) Syntax Legacy Products Description SER (Serial Number) Syntax Legacy Products Description SETDATE (Set Date) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 494 494 495 495 495 495 497 497 497 497 499 499 499 499 500 500 500 500 501 501 501 501 502 502 502 502 503 503 503 503 504 504 504 504 505 505 505 505 506 506 506 506 507 28 Table Of Contents Syntax Legacy Products Description SETTIME (Set Time) Syntax Legacy Products Description SMOOTH (Smooth Trace) Syntax Legacy Products Description SNGLS (Single Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products Description SP (Frequency Span) Syntax Legacy Products Description SRQ (Service Request) Syntax Legacy Products Description SS (Center Frequency Step Size) Syntax Legacy Products Description ST (Sweep Time) Syntax Legacy Products Description STB (Status Byte Query) Syntax Legacy Products Description STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes) Syntax Legacy Products Description SUM (Sum) Syntax Legacy Products Description 29 507 507 507 508 508 508 508 509 509 509 509 510 510 510 510 511 511 512 512 513 513 513 513 514 514 514 514 516 516 516 516 518 518 518 518 519 519 519 519 520 520 520 520 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents SV (Save State) Syntax Legacy Products Description SWPCPL (Sweep Couple) Syntax Legacy Products Description T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products Description T2 [two] (Line Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products Description T3 [three] (External Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products Description T4 [four] (Video Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products Description TA (Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products Description TB (Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products Description TDF (Trace Data Format) Syntax Legacy Products Description TH (Threshold) Syntax Legacy Products Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 521 521 521 521 522 522 522 522 523 523 523 523 524 524 524 524 525 525 525 525 526 526 526 526 527 527 527 527 528 528 528 528 529 529 529 529 530 530 530 530 531 531 531 30 Table Of Contents Description THE (Threshold Enable) Syntax Legacy Products Description TIMEDATE (Time Date) Syntax Legacy Products Description TITLE (Title) Syntax Legacy Products Description TM (Trigger Mode) Syntax Legacy Products Description TRA (Trace Data Input and Output) Syntax Legacy Products Description TRB (Trace Data Input and Output) Syntax Legacy Products Description TRC (Trace Data Input and Output) Syntax Legacy Products Description TRDSP (Trace Display) Syntax Legacy Products Description TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity) Syntax Legacy Products Description TRSTAT (Trace State) Syntax Legacy Products Description TS (Take Sweep) Syntax 31 531 533 533 533 533 534 534 534 534 535 535 535 535 536 536 536 536 537 537 537 537 538 538 538 538 539 539 539 539 540 540 540 540 541 541 541 541 542 542 542 542 543 543 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Legacy Products Description USERREV Syntax Legacy Products Description VAVG (Video Average) Syntax Legacy Products Description VB (Video Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products Description VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset) Syntax Legacy Products Description VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio) Syntax Legacy Products Description VIEW (View Trace) Syntax Legacy Products Description VTL (Video Trigger Level) Syntax Legacy Products Description XCH (Exchange) Syntax Legacy Products Description 543 543 544 544 544 544 545 545 545 545 547 547 547 547 549 549 549 549 550 550 550 550 551 551 551 551 552 552 552 552 553 553 553 553 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference 555 AMPTD Y Scale Reference Level Amplitude Representations Attenuation Dual Attenuator Configurations Single Attenuator Configuration Determining Attenuator Configuration (Mech) Atten Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 559 559 560 560 561 561 561 562 32 Table Of Contents Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man Enable Elec Atten More Information Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state: Examples in the dual attenuator configuration: When the Electronic Attenuation is disabled from an enabled state: Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons Elec Atten Adjust Atten for Min Clip Pre-Adjust for Min Clip Off Elec Atten Only Mech + Elec Atten (Mech) Atten Step Max Mixer Level Scale / Div Scale Type Presel Center Proper Preselector Operation Preselector Adjust Y Axis Unit dBm dBmV dBmA W V A dBµV dBµA dBpW Antenna Unit None dBµV/m dBµA/m dBpT dBG dBµA Reference Level Offset More Information µW Path Control Standard Path µW Preselector Bypass 33 563 564 565 565 565 565 565 566 566 567 567 568 568 569 569 570 570 570 571 572 572 573 575 575 575 576 576 576 577 577 577 578 578 578 578 579 579 579 580 580 581 582 582 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Internal Preamp Off Low Band Full Range Auto Couple More Information Auto/Man Active Function keys Auto/Man 1-of-N keys BW Res BW More Information Video BW Annotation Examples VBW:3dB RBW Auto Rules Span:3dB RBW RBW Control Filter Type More Information Gaussian Flattop Filter BW More Information –3 dB (Normal) –6 dB Noise Impulse Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) File File Explorer Page Setup Print Restore Down Minimize Exit FREQ Channel Zone Center Zoom Center Auto Tune Center Freq Center Frequency Presets RF Center Freq Ext Mix Center Freq Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 583 584 584 584 586 586 586 586 588 588 589 590 591 591 592 593 594 594 595 595 596 596 596 598 598 598 598 599 601 601 602 603 603 603 604 605 605 606 607 607 609 610 611 34 Table Of Contents I/Q Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq CF Step Freq Offset More Information Input/Output Input/Output variables - Preset behavior RF Input Input Z Correction RF Coupling I/Q Baseband I/Q (Option BBA) Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility I/Q Path I+jQ I Only Q Only I Setup I Differential Input I Input Z I Skew I Probe Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only) Q Setup Q Same as I Q Differential Input Q Input Z Q Skew Q Probe Reference Z I/Q Cable Calibrate… Next Exit Exit Confirmation I/Q Probe Setup Attenuation Offset Coupling Calibrate Clear Calibration I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only) I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only) 35 612 612 614 616 617 618 619 621 621 621 622 623 623 625 626 627 628 628 628 628 629 630 630 632 633 633 634 635 635 636 638 639 639 640 640 640 641 641 642 643 644 644 644 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents RF Calibrator 50 MHz 4.8 GHz Off External Gain Ext Preamp MS BTS I Ext Gain Q Ext Gain Restore Input/Output Defaults Corrections Select Correction Select Correction Select Correction Select Correction Select Correction Select Correction Select Correction Correction On/Off Properties Select Correction Antenna Unit Frequency Interpolation Description Comment Edit Delete Correction Apply Corrections Delete All Corrections Merge Correction Data (Remote Command Only) Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only) Freq Ref In Sense Internal External Ext Ref Freq External Reference Lock BW External Ref Coupling External Ref Coupling External Ref Coupling Output Config Trig Out (1 and 2) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 644 645 646 646 646 647 648 649 650 650 651 651 652 652 652 653 653 653 654 654 655 655 657 659 661 661 662 663 663 663 664 664 665 666 666 666 667 668 668 670 671 673 673 36 Table Of Contents Polarity Off Sweeping (HSWP) Measuring Main Trigger Gate Trigger Gate Odd/Even Trace Point Trig Out (1 and 2) Polarity Off Sweeping (HSWP) Measuring Main Trigger Gate Trigger Gate Odd/Even Trace Point Analog Out More Information Auto Off Screen Video Log Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Mixer Level) Linear Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Ref Level) Demod Audio Digital Bus Bus Out On/Off I/Q Cal Out 1 kHz Square Wave 250 kHz Square Wave Off Aux IF Out Off Second IF Arbitrary IF Fast Log Video I/Q Guided Calibration I/Q Isolation Calibration I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Command Only) Marker Marker Control Mode Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value Setting the Marker X Position in Trace Points 37 674 674 675 675 675 675 676 676 676 677 677 677 677 678 678 678 678 679 679 680 680 680 681 682 683 683 684 684 685 685 685 685 686 686 687 687 688 688 688 689 690 690 691 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value Querying the Marker Z Axis Value Setting or Querying the Marker Z Position Marker Backwards Compatibility Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Normal Delta Fixed Fixed Marker X Axis Value Fixed Marker Y Axis Value Fixed Marker Z Axis Value Fixed Fixed Marker X Axis Value Fixed Marker Y Axis Value Fixed Marker Z Axis Value Fixed Fixed Marker X Axis Value Fixed Marker Y Axis Value Fixed Marker Z Axis Value Off Properties Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 692 692 693 693 694 694 694 695 695 695 695 696 696 696 697 697 697 698 698 699 699 700 700 700 701 701 702 702 702 703 703 704 704 704 705 705 705 706 706 706 707 707 707 38 Table Of Contents Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Relative To Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker X Axis Scale More Information Auto Frequency Period Time Inverse Time Marker Trace Auto Init On Auto Init Rules Flowchart Auto Init OFF Marker Trace Marker Trace Marker Trace Marker Trace Marker Trace Marker Trace Marker Trace Lines Marker Table Marker Count Counter Query Count Value Understanding the Marker Counter Counting Off-screen Markers Delta Marker Fixed Markers 39 707 708 708 708 709 709 710 710 710 711 711 711 711 712 712 712 713 713 714 714 714 715 715 716 716 717 717 718 720 723 725 728 730 733 735 735 736 736 737 737 738 738 738 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents More Information on "Counter" Gate Time Couple Markers All Markers Off Marker Function More Information Fixed marker functions Interval Markers Band Function Backwards Compatibility 1. Marker Mode compatibility 2. Span Pair Compatibility 3. Delta Pair/Band Pair functionality 4. Arbitrary Marker Pair functionality 5. Band changes with analyzer settings 6. Offscreen Markers 7. Direct Marker Positioning Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Select Marker Marker Noise More Information Off-trace Markers Band/Interval Power Band/Interval Density More Information What is band/interval density? Marker Function Off Band Adjust Band/Interval Span Band/Interval Left Band/Interval Right Band Span Auto/Man Measure at Marker Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 738 739 740 740 742 742 743 743 743 745 746 746 747 747 747 747 748 748 749 749 749 750 750 750 750 751 751 751 752 752 753 753 753 754 755 755 755 755 756 757 759 760 761 40 Table Of Contents Measure at Marker Meas at Marker Window Window Position Detectors Detector 1 Detector 2 Detector 3 Detector 1 Dwell Time Detector 2 Dwell Time Detector 3 Dwell Time BW & Avg Type BW & Avg Type BW & Avg Type Center Presel On/Off Marker To Mkr->CF Mkr->CF Step Mkr->Start Mkr->Stop Mkr->Ref Lvl Mkr -> Zoom Center Mkr -> Zone Center MkrΔ->CF MkrΔ->Span Meas RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Measurement Commands and their Results for Swept SA Swept SA Measurement Description Meas Setup Average/Hold Number More Information AVER:CLE command Average Type More Information Auto Log-Pwr Avg (Video) Pwr Avg (RMS) Voltage Avg Limits Select Limit Select Limit Select Limit 41 761 764 765 765 765 766 770 775 780 780 781 781 782 783 784 785 785 785 786 786 787 787 788 788 789 790 790 790 792 794 794 794 795 795 796 796 797 797 798 798 799 799 799 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Select Limit 800 Select Limit 800 Select Limit 800 Select Limit 800 Limit 801 Properties 802 Select Limit 802 Test Trace 804 Type 808 Interpolation 809 Fixed / Relative 810 Description 812 Comment 812 Margin 813 Edit 814 Navigate 814 Frequency 814 Amplitude 815 Insert Point Below 815 Delete Point 815 Copy from Limit 815 Build from Trace 817 Offset 821 Scale X Axis 822 Delete Limit 823 Test Limits 823 X-Axis Unit 824 Delete All Limits 824 Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only) 825 Merge Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only) 825 Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only) 826 Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance) 826 Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance) 827 Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance) 828 Limit Clear (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance) 829 Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only) 829 Fixed / Relative Limit (Remote Command Only) 829 N dB Points 830 N dB Points Results Query 830 More Information 831 PhNoise Opt 833 Auto 834 Models with Option EP1 834 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 42 Table Of Contents Models with Option EP2 Models with Option EP4 All other Models Best Close-in Φ Noise Best Wide-offset Φ Noise Fast Tuning ADC Dither Auto High (Best Log Accy) Medium (Log Accy) Off (Best Noise) Swept IF Gain Auto Low Gain (Best for Large Signals) High Gain (Best Noise Level) FFT IF Gain Auto Autorange (Slower – Follows Signals) Low Gain (Best for Large Signals) High Gain (Best Noise Level) Analog Demod Tune & Listen AM Channel BW (AM Demod) FM Channel BW (FM Demod) De-emphasis (FM Demod only) ΦM Channel BW (ΦM Demod) Off Demod Time Demod State (Remote Command Only) Noise Source More Information Noise Source More Information Noise Source Noise Source State SNS Attached (Remote Command Only) Meas Preset Mode More Information Spectrum Analyzer 43 834 835 835 836 836 837 837 838 839 839 839 840 840 841 841 841 842 842 843 843 843 844 844 845 845 846 848 849 849 850 850 850 851 852 852 853 854 855 855 856 857 858 859 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents EMI Receiver IQ Analyzer (Basic) W-CDMA with HSPA+ GSM/EDGE/EDGE Evo 802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro) Vector Signal Analyzer (VXA) Phase Noise Noise Figure Analog Demod TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK cdma2000 1xEV-DO LTE LTE TDD DVB-T/H with T2 DTMB (CTTB) ISDB-T CMMB Combined WLAN Combined Fixed WiMAX 802.16 OFDM (Fixed WiMAX) iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk Remote Language Compatibility 89601 VSA Bluetooth SCPI Language Compatibility Digital Cable TV MSR WLAN Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only) Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only) Application Identification (Remote Commands Only) Current Application Model Current Application Revision Current Application Options Application Identification Catalog (Remote Commands Only) Application Catalog Number of Entries Application Catalog Model Numbers Application Catalog Revision Application Catalog Options Detailed List of Modes Mode Preset How-To Preset Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 859 860 860 860 861 861 862 862 862 862 863 863 863 864 864 864 865 865 865 865 866 866 866 867 868 868 868 869 869 869 871 871 871 872 872 872 873 873 873 874 874 876 877 44 Table Of Contents Mode Setup HP8560 series, HP8566/68 Cmd Error Logging Previous Page/Next Page Cmd Error Log Refresh Clear Log Preferences Limit RBW/VBW Atten Offset Swp Type Rule Limit Swp Time Restore Mode Defaults Preset Type (Remote Command Only) Global Settings Global Center Freq Restore Defaults Peak Search More Information Next Peak Next Pk Right Next Pk Left Marker Delta Mkr->CF Mkr->Ref Lvl Peak Criteria “Peak Search” Criteria Highest Peak Same as “Next Peak” Criteria “Next Peak” Criteria Pk Excursion Pk Threshold Pk Threshold Line Peak Table Peak Table On/Off Peak Sort Peak Readout More Information All Above Display Line Below Display Line Continuous Peak Search 45 879 879 880 881 881 881 881 882 882 882 883 883 884 884 884 885 885 886 887 887 887 888 888 889 889 889 889 890 891 891 891 891 892 893 894 894 895 895 896 897 897 897 898 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents More Information Pk-Pk Search Min Search Peak Data Query (RemoteCommand Only) Query the Signal Peaks (Remote Command Only) Query Number of Peaks Found (Remote Command Only) Peak Search All Traces Quick Save Recall State More Information From File… From File… From File… From File… From File… From File… From File… Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Trace (+State) To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace Register 1 thru Register 16 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 899 899 900 900 900 901 901 902 904 904 906 906 908 910 912 922 924 926 928 929 930 930 931 932 932 933 934 934 935 936 937 937 938 939 939 941 941 941 942 942 943 943 944 46 Table Of Contents Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 From File… From File… From File… From File… From File… From File… From File… Data (Import) Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Limit Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Open… Open… Open… Open… Open… Open… Open… Restart More Information Save 47 944 945 946 946 947 949 951 953 963 965 967 969 970 971 971 972 972 972 973 973 974 974 975 975 976 976 976 977 978 978 978 979 979 979 980 980 980 982 982 982 984 984 986 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents State To File . . . To File . . . To File . . . To File . . . To File . . . To File . . . To File . . . To File . . . Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Edit Register Names More Information Trace (+State) Data (Export) Amplitude Correction Correction Data File Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Amplitude Correction Trace Trace File Contents Metadata: Trace Specific Metadata: Display Specific Metadata: Measurement Related Select Trace Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 986 987 989 991 993 995 997 999 1001 1003 1003 1004 1005 1006 1006 1007 1008 1008 1009 1010 1011 1011 1012 1013 1013 1014 1015 1015 1016 1017 1017 1020 1020 1020 1021 1021 1021 1022 1022 1022 1022 1023 1026 48 Table Of Contents Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Limit Limits File Contents .csv file format .lim file format Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Limit Selection Measurement Results Meas Results File Contents Marker Table Peak Table Spectrogram Measurement Results Measurement Results Measurement Results Save As . . . Save As . . . Save As . . . Save As . . . Save As . . . Save As . . . Save As . . . Save As . . . Screen Image Themes 3D Color 3D Monochrome Flat Color Flat Monochrome Save As… Save As… Save As… Save As… Save As… 49 1027 1027 1028 1028 1029 1029 1030 1031 1031 1032 1032 1032 1032 1033 1033 1033 1033 1034 1034 1037 1040 1044 1055 1066 1077 1078 1079 1079 1080 1081 1081 1082 1083 1084 1084 1084 1085 1085 1085 1086 1086 1086 1087 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Save As… Save As… Save As… Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Delete (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Data (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Remove Directory (Remote Command Only) Single (Single Measurement/Sweep) More Information Source RF Output Amplitude Amplitude Power Sweep Amptd Offset Amptd Step Auto/Man Frequency Multiplier Numerator Multiplier Denominator Source Sweep Reverse Freq Offset Source Mode Select Source Point Trigger Select Highlighted Source Source Preset Source Setting Query (Remote Command Only) SPAN X Scale Span Span Presets Zone Span Zoom Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Signal Track (Span Zoom) More Information Sweep/Control Sweep Time Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1087 1088 1088 1088 1089 1089 1089 1090 1090 1090 1091 1092 1092 1093 1093 1093 1094 1094 1096 1097 1097 1098 1099 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1106 1107 1108 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1112 1114 1114 1115 1117 1117 50 Table Of Contents Sweep Setup Sweep Time Rules More Information Auto SA - Normal SA - Accuracy Stimulus/Response Sweep Type Auto Swept FFT Sweep Type Rules Auto Best Dynamic Range Best Speed FFT Width More Information FFT Width FFT Width FFT Width FFT Width FFT Width FFT Width FFT Width FFT Width FFT Width More Information Gate Gate On/Off Gate View On/Off Gate View Setup Gate View Sweep Time Gate View Start Time Gate Delay Gate Length Method LO Video FFT Gate Source Line External 1 External 2 51 1119 1119 1120 1120 1121 1121 1121 1122 1123 1123 1124 1124 1125 1125 1125 1126 1127 1128 1131 1134 1137 1140 1143 1146 1149 1152 1154 1155 1155 1157 1160 1160 1161 1161 1162 1162 1163 1163 1163 1164 1165 1165 1167 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents RF Burst Periodic Timer (Frame Trigger) TV Control Edge/Level Gate Holdoff Min Fast Position Query (Remote Command Only) Gate Preset (Remote Command Only) Gate Level (Remote Command Only) Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only) Points Zoom Points Pause/Resume Abort (Remote Command Only) System Show Errors Previous Page Next Page History History Verbose SCPI On/Off Refresh Clear Error Queue Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only) System System System Show System contents (Remote Command Only) Hardware LXI Power On Mode and Input/Output Defaults User Preset Last State Power On Application Configure Applications Preloading Applications Access to Configure Applications utility Virtual memory usage Select All Deselect All Move Up Move Down Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1169 1172 1183 1188 1189 1190 1191 1191 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1196 1196 1197 1198 1198 1198 1198 1199 1199 1200 1200 1201 1202 1202 1203 1203 1204 1204 1205 1205 1206 1206 1207 1207 1207 1208 1208 1208 1208 52 Table Of Contents Select/Deselect Save Changes and Exit Exit Without Saving Restore Power On Defaults Configure Applications - Remote Commands Configuration list (Remote Command Only) Configuration Memory Available (Remote Command Only) Configuration Memory Total (Remote Command Only) Configuration Memory Used (Remote Command Only) Configuration Application Memory (Remote Command Only) Alignments Auto Align Normal Partial Off All but RF Alert Execute Expired Alignments (Remote Command Only) Align Now All All but RF RF External Mixer Show Alignment Statistics Restore Align Defaults Backup or Restore Align Data… Alignment Data Wizard Perform Backup (Remote Command Only) Perform Restore (Remote Command Only) Advanced Characterize Preselector Timebase DAC Calibrated User I/O Config GPIB GPIB Address GPIB Controller SCPI LAN SCPI Telnet SCPI Socket SICL Server HiSLIP Server 53 1209 1209 1209 1210 1210 1211 1211 1211 1211 1212 1212 1212 1213 1214 1214 1215 1216 1219 1219 1219 1221 1222 1223 1224 1229 1230 1231 1236 1237 1237 1237 1238 1239 1239 1240 1240 1241 1241 1242 1242 1243 1243 1244 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Command Only) Reset Web Password LXI LAN Reset System IDN Response Factory User Query USB Connection (Remote Command Only) USB Connection Status (Remote Command Only) USB Packet Count (Remote Command Only) Restore Defaults Restore Input/Output Defaults Restore Power On Defaults Restore Align Defaults Restore Misc Defaults Restore Mode Defaults (All Modes) All Control Panel… Licensing… Security USB Read-Write Read only Diagnostics Show Hardware Statistics SCPI for Show Hardware Statistics (Remote Commands Only) Query the Mechanical Relay Cycle Count Query the Operating Temperature Extremes Query the Elapsed Time since First Power-On Service Internet Explorer… System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) System Powerdown (Remote Command Only) List installed Options (Remote Command Only) Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only) List SCPI Commands (Remote Command Only) SCPI Version Query (Remote Command Only) Date (Remote Command Only) Time (Remote Command Only) Trace/Detector Trace Mode Backwards Compatibility Trace Update Indicator Trace Annunciator Panel Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1244 1245 1245 1246 1246 1246 1247 1247 1247 1248 1248 1249 1249 1250 1251 1252 1252 1253 1254 1256 1256 1257 1257 1257 1258 1259 1259 1259 1260 1260 1260 1260 1261 1261 1261 1262 1262 1262 1263 1264 1266 1266 1266 54 Table Of Contents Trace Annotation Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Clear Write Trace Average Trace Averaging: More Information Max Hold Min Hold View/Blank Trace Update State On/Off Trace Display State On/Off More Information View/Blank Trace Update State On/Off Trace Display State On/Off More Information View/Blank Trace Update State On/Off Trace Display State On/Off More Information View/Blank Trace Update State On/Off Trace Display State On/Off More Information View/Blank Trace Update State On/Off Trace Display State On/Off More Information Detector More Information Multiple Detectors Auto Normal Average (Log/RMS/V) Peak Sample Negative Peak Quasi Peak 55 1267 1268 1268 1269 1269 1269 1269 1270 1270 1271 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1276 1277 1278 1278 1279 1279 1280 1281 1281 1282 1283 1283 1284 1284 1285 1286 1286 1287 1290 1290 1291 1291 1292 1293 1293 1294 1294 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents More Information EMI Average RMS Average Preset Detectors All Traces Auto Peak / Average / NPeak Peak / Sample / NPeak Clear Trace Clear All Traces Preset All Traces Math Math: More Information Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Select Trace Power Diff (Op1-Op2) Power Sum (Op1+Op2) Log Offset (Op1 + Offset) Log Diff (Op1-Op2+Ref) More Information Off Trace Operands Operand 1 Operand 2 Copy/Exchange From Trace From Trace From Trace From Trace From Trace From Trace From Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace To Trace Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1295 1295 1296 1297 1297 1297 1298 1298 1298 1299 1299 1300 1302 1302 1302 1303 1303 1303 1304 1304 1304 1305 1306 1306 1306 1307 1307 1309 1312 1312 1313 1313 1313 1313 1314 1314 1314 1314 1315 1315 1315 1315 1315 56 Table Of Contents Copy Now Exchange Now Normalize Normalize On/Off More Information Measurement Details Normalize Block Diagram Store Ref (1 -> 3) Show Ref Trace (Trace 3) Norm Ref Lvl Open/Short Cal Open/Short Guided Cal Norm Ref Posn Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Query Trace Data More Information Smooth Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Number of Points for Smoothing (Remote Command Only) Mean Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Display Trace Time Query (Remote Command Only) Trigger Trigger Source Presets RF Trigger Source I/Q Trigger Source More Information Free Run Video (IF Envelope) Trigger Level Trig Slope Trig Delay Line Trig Slope Trig Delay External 1 Trigger Level Trig Slope Trig Delay External 2 Trigger Level Trig Slope Trig Delay RF Burst Absolute Trigger Level 57 1316 1316 1316 1316 1317 1317 1318 1319 1319 1319 1320 1320 1320 1321 1322 1322 1323 1324 1325 1325 1326 1327 1330 1331 1332 1333 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1338 1339 1339 1340 1340 1341 1342 1342 1343 1343 1344 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents Relative Trigger Level Trigger Slope Trig Delay Periodic Timer (Frame Trigger) Period Offset Offset Adjust (Remote Command Only) Reset Offset Display Sync Source Off External 1 External 2 RF Burst Trig Delay TV TV Line Field Entire Frame Field One Field Two Standard NTSC-M NTSC-Japan NTSC–4.43 PAL-M PAL-N PAL-N-Combin PAL-B,D,G,H,I PAL–60 SECAM-L Auto/Holdoff Auto Trig Trig Holdoff User Preset User Preset User Preset All Modes Save User Preset View/Display View Display Annotation Meas Bar On/Off Screen Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1345 1346 1347 1347 1349 1350 1351 1351 1352 1352 1352 1354 1355 1359 1359 1360 1361 1361 1361 1362 1362 1363 1363 1363 1363 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1365 1365 1366 1367 1367 1368 1369 1370 1370 1371 1371 1372 1373 58 Table Of Contents Trace Active Function Values On/Off Title Change Title Clear Title Graticule Display Line System Display Settings Annotation Local Settings Theme Backlight Backlight Intensity Normal Spectrogram More Information Representation of Time Markers Trace Zoom Transition Rules Zone Span More Information Transition Rules Display Trace Full Screen Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 59 1373 1373 1374 1375 1375 1376 1376 1377 1377 1379 1380 1381 1381 1381 1382 1384 1385 1385 1386 1386 1387 1388 1388 1388 1389 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Table Of Contents 60 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation This section lists all available documentation for the X-Series instruments. All documents are available for download from the Keysight web site. In most cases, if your instrument has an internet connection, you can click on a hyperlink below to download the document directly. (If your instrument does not have an internet connection, see "Downloading PDF Files" on page 99 for alternative download methods.) Except for Specifications Guides, all the documents listed here are included on the Documentation DVD shipped with your instrument. Certain documents are also installed on the instrument’s hard disk. For these items, you can click an "On-disk" hyperlink below to open the document directly. For details of the types of documentation available, see "Documentation Categories" on page 98. The available documentation is divided into 4 groups as listed below. Click on a link for a detailed list of the documents in each group. l l "Documentation Common to All Measurement Applications" on page 62 "Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or Option" on page 63 l "Application Notes & Other Documentation" on page 96 l "Specifications Guides" on page 97 61 1 Additional Documentation Documentation Common to All Measurement Applications Click on any of the links below to open the document. l Getting Started Guide l l Keysight Web Site [N9020-90225.pdf] Instrument Messages Guide l Keysight Web Site [N9020-90095.pdf] l CXA Functional Tests Guide [N9000-90017.pdf] l EXA Functional Tests Guide [N9010-90013.pdf] l MXA Functional Tests Guide [N9020-90086.pdf] l PXA Functional Tests Guide [N9030-90018.pdf] l Programmer's Guide [N9020-90112.pdf] l Programming Conversion Guide [N9020-90090.pdf] l PSA Programming Compatibility Guide [N9020-90192.pdf] For details of the types of documentation available, see "Documentation Categories" on page 98. 62 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or Option For a list of links to all documents for a specific Measurement Application, click on one of the links below. l "N6141A & W6141A EMC Measurement Application" on page 65 l "N6149A iDEN/WiDEN/MotoTalk Measurement Application" on page 66 l "N6152A & W6152A Digital Cable TV Measurement Application" on page 67 l "N6153A & W6153A DVB-T/H with T2 Measurement Application" on page 68 l "N6155A & W6155A ISDB-T Measurement Application" on page 69 l "N6156A & W6156A DTMB (CTTB) Measurement Application" on page 70 l "N6158A & W6158A CMMB Measurement Application" on page 71 l "N9030A RTSA Option" on page 72 l "N9060A IQ Analyzer Mode" on page 73 l "N9060A Spectrum Analyzer Mode" on page 74 l "N9061A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application" on page 75 l "N9062A & W9062A SCPI Language Compatibility Measurement Application" on page 76 l "N9063A & W9063A Analog Demod Measurement Application" on page 77 l "N9064A & W9064A VXA Measurement Application" on page 78 l "N9068A & W9068A Phase Noise Measurement Application" on page 79 l "N9069A & W9069A Noise Figure Measurement Application" on page 80 l "N9071A & W9071A GSM/EDGE with EDGE Evolution Measurement Application" on page 81 l "N9072A & W9072A cdma2000 Measurement Application" on page 82 l "N9073A & W9073A W-CDMA & HSPA Measurement Application" on page 83 l "N9074A Single Acquisition Combined Fixed WiMAX Measurement Application" on page 84 l "N9075A & W9075A 802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro) Measurement Application" on page 85 l "N9076A & W9076A 1xEV-DO Measurement Application" on page 86 l "N9077A Single Acquisition Combined WLAN Measurement Application" on page 87 l "N9077A & W9077A WLAN Measurement Application" on page 88 l "N9079A & W9079A TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK Measurement Application" on page 89 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 63 1 Additional Documentation l "N9080A & W9080A LTE (FDD) Measurement Application" on page 90 l "N9080B & W9080B LTE Advanced (FDD) Measurement Application" on page 91 l "N9081A & W9081A Bluetooth Measurement Application" on page 92 l "N9082A & W9082A LTE TDD Measurement Application" on page 93 l "N9082B & W9082B LTE Advanced TDD Measurement Application" on page 94 l "N9083A & W9083A Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Measurement Application" on page 95 For details of the types of documentation available, see "Documentation Categories" on page 98. 64 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N6141A & W6141A EMC Measurement Application l User's & Programmer's Reference [N6141-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N6141-90002.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 65 1 Additional Documentation N6149A iDEN/WiDEN/MotoTalk Measurement Application l User's & Programmer's Reference [N6149-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N6149-90002.pdf] 66 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N6152A & W6152A Digital Cable TV Measurement Application l User's & Programmer's Reference [N6152-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N6152-90002.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 67 1 Additional Documentation N6153A & W6153A DVB-T/H with T2 Measurement Application l User's & Programmer's Reference [N6153-90003.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N6153-90004.pdf] 68 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N6155A & W6155A ISDB-T Measurement Application l User's & Programmer's Reference [N6155-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N6155-90002.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 69 1 Additional Documentation N6156A & W6156A DTMB (CTTB) Measurement Application l User's & Programmer's Reference [N6156-90003.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N6156-90004.pdf] 70 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N6158A & W6158A CMMB Measurement Application l User's & Programmer's Reference [N6158-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N6158-90002.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 71 1 Additional Documentation N9030A RTSA Option l User's & Programmer's Reference [N9030-90059.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9030-90060.pdf] 72 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9060A IQ Analyzer Mode l User's & Programmer's Reference [N9060-90029.pdf] l Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurement Guide [N9060-90034.pdf] Note that there is no separate Measurement Guide for IQ Analyzer Mode. Measurement setup information is included in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurement Guide. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 73 1 Additional Documentation N9060A Spectrum Analyzer Mode l User's & Programmer's Reference [N9060-90027.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9060-90034.pdf] 74 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9061A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application l Remote Language Compatibility Guide [N9020-90119.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 75 1 Additional Documentation N9062A & W9062A SCPI Language Compatibility Measurement Application l 76 SCPI Language Compatibility Guide [N9062-90001.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9063A & W9063A Analog Demod Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9063-90005.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9063-90006.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 77 1 Additional Documentation N9064A & W9064A VXA Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9064-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9064-90002.pdf] 78 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9068A & W9068A Phase Noise Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9068-90010.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9068-90011.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 79 1 Additional Documentation N9069A & W9069A Noise Figure Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9069-90005.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9069-90006.pdf] 80 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9071A & W9071A GSM/EDGE with EDGE Evolution Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9071-90015.pdf] l Single Acquisition Combined GSM Measurement Application [N9071-90014.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9071-90016.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 81 1 Additional Documentation N9072A & W9072A cdma2000 Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9072-90006.pdf] l Measurement Guide and Programming Examples [N9072-90005.pdf] 82 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9073A & W9073A W-CDMA & HSPA Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9073-90016.pdf] l Single Acquisition Combined W-CDMA Measurement Application [N9073-90015.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9073-90017.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 83 1 Additional Documentation N9074A Single Acquisition Combined Fixed WiMAX Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9074-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9074-90002.pdf] 84 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9075A & W9075A 802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro) Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9075-90012.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9075-90013.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 85 1 Additional Documentation N9076A & W9076A 1xEV-DO Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9076-90003.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9076-90004.pdf] 86 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9077A Single Acquisition Combined WLAN Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9077-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9077-90002.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 87 1 Additional Documentation N9077A & W9077A WLAN Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9077-90003.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9077-90004.pdf] 88 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9079A & W9079A TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9079-90007.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9079-90005.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 89 1 Additional Documentation N9080A & W9080A LTE (FDD) Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9080-90005.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9080-90006.pdf] 90 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9080B & W9080B LTE Advanced (FDD) Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9080-90007.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9080-90008.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 91 1 Additional Documentation N9081A & W9081A Bluetooth Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9081-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9081-90002.pdf] 92 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9082A & W9082A LTE TDD Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9082-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9082-90002.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 93 1 Additional Documentation N9082B & W9082B LTE Advanced TDD Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9082-90003.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9082-90004.pdf] 94 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation N9083A & W9083A Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Measurement Application l User's and Programmer's Reference [N9083-90001.pdf] l Measurement Guide [N9083-90002.pdf] Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 95 1 Additional Documentation Application Notes & Other Documentation Click on any of the links below to open the document in a new window. l Application Note 57-1: Fundamentals of RF and Microwave Noise Figure Measurements [59528255E.pdf] l Application Note 57-2: Noise Figure Measurement Accuracy - The Y-Factor Method [5952-3706E.pdf] l Application Note 150: Spectrum Analysis Basics [5952-0292.pdf] l Application Note 1325: Performing cdma2000 Measurements Today [5968-5858E.pdf] l Application Note 1355: Designing & Testing 3GPP W-CDMA Base Transceiver Stations [59801239E.pdf] l Application Note 1356: Designing & Testing 3GPP W-CDMA User Equipment [5980-1238E.pdf] l Application Note 1357: Designing and Testing cdma2000 Base Stations [5980-1303E.pdf] l Application Note 1358: Designing and Testing cdma2000 Mobile Stations [5980-1237E.pdf] l Application Note 1398: Forward Link Measurements for 1xEV-DO Access Networks [5988-6125EN.pdf] l Application Note 1414: Understanding Measurement of 1xEV-DO Access Terminals [5988-7694EN.pdf] l l l l Application Note 1578: IEEE 802.16e WiMAX OFDMA Signal Measurements and Troubleshooting [5989-2382EN.pdf] Application Note 1583: Maximizing Measurement Speed with Keysight’s X-Series Signal Analyzers [5989-4947EN.pdf] Application Note 1585: Using Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers for Measuring and Troubleshooting Digitally Modulated Signals [5989-4944EN.pdf] Application Note: Keysight 3GPP Long Term Evolution: System Overview, Product Development, and Test Challenges [5989-8139EN.pdf] l Application Note: Mobile WiMAX™ PHY Layer (RF) Operation and Measurement [5989-8309EN.pdf] l Application Note: Keysight Preamplifiers and System Noise Figure [5989-5742EN.pdf] l Tips for Preventing Damage to Spectrum Analyzer [5989-8791EN.pdf] l Keysight VISA Help for I/O Libraries This documentation is included in HTML Help (CHM) format in the Keysight I/O Libraries Suite installer, which may be downloaded from: www.agilent.com/find/iosuite After installing the library, you can access the help by clicking the IO taskbar icon, then selecting Documentation > API Documentation > VISA Documentation from the popup menus. For details of the types of documentation available, see "Documentation Categories" on page 98. 96 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation Specifications Guides Specifications documents are not located on the instrument's disk, but may be downloaded from the Keysight web site as PDF files. To download a copy, do the following: 1. Browse to one of the following URLs, according to the product name of your instrument: www.agilent.com/find/cxa www.agilent.com/find/exa www.agilent.com/find/mxa www.agilent.com/find/pxa 2. The home page for your instrument appears (in some cases, you may see an initial splash screen containing a button named View the Webpage, which you should click to display the home page). 3. Locate the Technical Support tab, at the top right of the screen, as highlighted in the example below, which shows the home page for the PXA. 4. Click the Technical Support tab, as highlighted above, to display the Technical Support page for your instrument. 5. Locate the Specifications tab on the Technical Support page, as highlighted in the PXA example below, and click the tab to display a list of available specification documents for the instrument. 6. Locate the "N90x0A Signal Analyzer Specifications Guide" in the list of available downloads, then click the title to open or copy the PDF file. (When the PDF is open, you can save it to your computer.) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 97 1 Additional Documentation Documentation Categories Documentation Categories All available documentation for X-Series instruments falls into one of the following categories. Type Description "Getting Started Guide" on page 62 Turn on process, Windows operating system use/configuration, Front and Rear panel. Specifications Guide Specifications for all available Measurement Applications and optional hardware (for example, Spectrum Analyzer and W-CDMA). For details of how to obtain these documents, see Specifications Guides. Functional Tests Guides Quick checks to verify overall instrument operation. The following manuals are available: l CXA Functional Tests Guide l EXA Functional Tests Guide l MXA Functional Tests Guide l PXA Functional Tests Guide Instrument Messages Guide Descriptions of displayed messages of Information, Warnings and Errors. Measurement Guides Includes examples of measurements made using the front panel keys, or over a remote interface. Measurement Guides are specific to each Measurement Application: see "Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or Option" on page 63. Programmer's Guide Provides information about how to program Keysight X-Series instruments using SCPI commands, and explains how to use the programming documentation. Describes programming examples, which are available in several languages. User's and Programmer's References Descriptions of front panel key functionality and the corresponding SCPI commands and queries. Also includes some concept information. User's and Programmer's Reference manuals are specific to each Measurement Application: see "Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or Option" on page 63. 98 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 1 Additional Documentation Downloading PDF Files Downloading PDF Files You can download any of the PDF files listed in this chapter by opening any internet browser program on an internet-connected computer, and entering a URL as follows. 1. Enter the following prefix: http://cp.literature.agilent.com/litweb/pdf/ 2. Append the file name of the manual you want to download, including the .pdf extension, as specified in the main "Additional Documentation" on page 61 list. The file name for each manual appears in square brackets, following its title text. (Note that the name is case-sensitive; letters in the part number portion of the name must be uppercase.) For example, if you want to download the Measurement Guide for the "N9060A Spectrum Analyzer Mode" on page 74, the correct file name is: N9060-90034.pdf, so the complete URL would be: http://cp.literature.agilent.com/litweb/pdf/N9060-90034.pdf 3. Depending on your browser settings, the PDF file for the manual you specified will be downloaded and opened automatically, or a dialog will appear that allows you to download the file. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 99 1 Additional Documentation Downloading PDF Files 100 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument The X-Series instrument measures and monitors complex RF and microwave signals. Analog baseband analysis is available on MXA. The instrument integrates traditional spectrum measurements with advanced vector signal analysis to optimize speed, accuracy, and dynamic range. The instrument has Microsoft Windows 7 built-in as an operating system, which expands its usability. With a broad set of applications and demodulation capabilities, an intuitive user interface, outstanding connectivity and powerful onebutton measurements, the instrument is ideal for both R&D and manufacturing engineers working on cellular, emerging wireless communications, general purpose, aerospace and defense applications. This chapter includes the following topics: l "Installing Application Software" on page 102 l "X-Series Options and Accessories" on page 104 l "Front & Rear Panel Features" on page 105 l "Display Annotations" on page 106 l "Window Control Keys" on page 107 l "Mouse and Keyboard Control" on page 110 l "Instrument Security & Memory Volatility" on page 115 101 2 About the Instrument Installing Application Software Installing Application Software If you want to install a measurement application after your initial hardware purchase, you need only to license it. All of the available applications are loaded in your instrument at the time of purchase. Thus, when you purchase a new application, you will receive an entitlement certificate that you can use to obtain a license key for that application. To activate the new measurement application, enter the license key that you obtain into the instrument. For the latest information on Keysight measurement applications and upgrade kits, visit the following web site: http://www.agilent.com/find/sa_upgrades This section includes the following topics: l "Viewing a License Key" on page 102 l "Obtaining and Installing a License Key " on page 102 l "Updating Measurement Application Software" on page 103 Viewing a License Key Measurement applications that you purchased with your instrument have been installed and activated at the factory before shipment. The instrument requires a unique License Key for every measurement application purchased. The license key is a hexadecimal string that is specific to your measurement application, instrument model number and serial number. It enables you to install, or reactivate, that particular application. Press System, Show, System to display the measurement applications that are currently licensed in your instrument. Go to the following location to view the license keys for the installed measurement applications: C:\Program Files\Agilent\Licensing You may want to keep a copy of your license key in a secure location. To do this, you can print out a copy of the display showing the license numbers. If you should lose your license key, call your nearest Keysight Technologies service or sales office for assistance. Obtaining and Installing a License Key If you purchase an additional application that requires installation, you will receive an "Entitlement Certificate", which may be redeemed for a license key for one instrument. To obtain your license key, follow the instructions that accompany the certificate. Installing a license key for the selected application can be done automatically using a USB memory device. To do this, you copy the license file to the USB memory device, at the root level. Follow the instructions that come with your software installation kit. Installing a license key can also be done manually using the built-in license management application, which may be found via the instrument front panel keys at System, Licensing. . . , or on-disk at: C:\Programming Files\Agilent\Licensing 102 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument Installing Application Software You can also use these procedures to reinstall a license key that has been accidentally deleted, or lost due to a memory failure. Updating Measurement Application Software All the software applications were loaded at the time of original instrument manufacture. It is a good idea to regularly update your software with the latest available version. This helps to ensure that you receive any improvements and expanded functionality. Because the software was loaded at the initial purchase, further additional measurement applications may now be available. If the application you are interested in licensing is not available, you will need to do a software update. (To display a list of installed applications, press System, Show, System.) Check the appropriate page of the Keysight web site for the latest available software versions, according to the name of your instrument, as follows: l http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa_software l http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_software l http://www.agilent.com/find/exa_software You can load the updated software package into the instrument from a USB drive, or directly from the internet. An automatic loading program is included with the files. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 103 2 About the Instrument X-Series Options and Accessories X-Series Options and Accessories You can view an online list of available Options and Accessories for your instrument as follows: 1. Browse to one of the following URLs, according to the product name of your instrument: l www.agilent.com/find/exa l www.agilent.com/find/mxa l www.agilent.com/find/pxa 2. The home page for your instrument appears (in some cases, you may see an initial splash screen containing a button named View the Webpage, which you should click to display the home page). 3. Locate the Options tab, as highlighted in the example below, which shows the home page for the MXA. 4. Click the Options tab, to display a list of available options and accessories for your instrument. 104 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument Front & Rear Panel Features Front & Rear Panel Features The instrument's front and rear panel features are fully detailed in the chapter "Front and Rear Panel Features" of the document: "Getting Started Guide" on page 62 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 105 2 About the Instrument Display Annotations Display Annotations Display Annotations are fully detailed under the chapter "Front and Rear Panel Features" of the document: "Getting Started Guide" on page 62 106 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument Window Control Keys Window Control Keys The instrument provides three front-panel keys for controlling windows. These are: l "Multi-Window" on page 107 l "Zoom" on page 107 l "Next Window" on page 108 These are all “immediate action” keys. Multi-Window The Multi-Window key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the display screen. Pressing the key toggles back and forth between the Normal View and the last Multi-Window View (Zone Span, Trace Zoom or Spectrogram) that you selected when using the Swept SA measurement of the Spectrum Analyzer Mode. The selected view is retained through a Preset. On a Restore Mode Defaults, the “previous view” is set to Zone Span. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Zoom The Zoom key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the display screen. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 107 2 About the Instrument Window Control Keys Zoom is a toggle function. Pressing this key once increases the size of the selected window; pressing the key again returns the window to the original size. When Zoom is on for a window, that window occupies the entire primary display area. The zoomed window, since it is the selected window, is outlined in green. Zoom is local to each Measurement. Each Measurement remembers its Zoom state. The Zoom state of each Measurement is part of the Mode’s state. Data acquisition and processing for the other windows continues while a window is zoomed, as does all SCPI communication with the other windows. Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:ZOOM Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:TILE Example :DISP:WIND:FORM:ZOOM sets zoomed :DISP:WIND:FORM:TILE sets un-zoomed Preset TILE Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Next Window The Next Window key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the display screen. Pressing the key selects the next window of the current view. When the Next Window key is pressed, the next window in the order of precedence becomes selected. If the selected window was zoomed, the next window will also be zoomed. The window numbers are as shown in the diagrams below. Note that these numbers also determine the order of precedence (that is, Next Window goes from 1 to 2, then 2 to 3, etc.): Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[:SELect] <number> :DISPlay:WINDow[:SELect]? Example :DISP:WIND 1 Preset 1 108 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument Window Control Keys Min 1 Max If <number> is greater than the number of windows, limit to <number of windows> Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 One and only one window is always selected. The selected window has the focus; this means that all window-specific key presses apply only to that window. You can tell which window is selected by the thick green border around it. If a window is not selected, its boundary is gray. If a window in a multi-window display is zoomed, it is still outlined in green. If there is only one window, the green outline is not used. This allows the user to distinguish between a zoomed window and a display with only one window. The selected window is local to each Measurement. Each Measurement remembers which window is selected. The selected window for each Measurement is remembered in the Mode state. When this key is pressed with Help open, it toggles focus between the table of contents window and the topic pane window. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 109 2 About the Instrument Mouse and Keyboard Control Mouse and Keyboard Control If you do not have access to the instrument front-panel, there are several ways that a mouse and PC Keyboard can give you access to functions normally accessed using the front-panel keys. l "Right-Click" on page 110 l "PC Keyboard" on page 111 Right-Click If you plug in a mouse, then right-click on the instrument screen, a menu appears as below: Placing the mouse on one of the rows marked with a right arrow symbol causes that row to expand, as in the example below, where the mouse is hovered over the “Utility” row: 110 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument Mouse and Keyboard Control This method can be used to access any of the front-panel keys by using a mouse; as for example if you are accessing the instrument via Remote Desktop. The array of keys thus available is shown below: PC Keyboard If you have a PC keyboard plugged into the instrument (or via Remote Desktop), certain key codes on the PC keyboard map to front-panel keys on the instrument. These key codes are listed below: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 111 2 About the Instrument Mouse and Keyboard Control Front-panel key Key code Frequency CTRL+SHIFT+F Span CTRL+SHIFT+S Amplitude CTRL+SHIFT+A Input/Output CTRL+SHIFT+O View/Display CTRL+SHIFT+V Trace/Detector CTRL+ALT+T Auto Couple CTRL+SHIFT+C Bandwidth CTRL+ALT+B Source CTRL+ALT-U Marker CTRL+ALT+K Peak Search CTRL+ALT+P Marker To CTRL+ALT+N Marker Function CTRL+ALT+F System CTRL+SHIFT+Y Quick Save CTRL+Q Save CTRL+S Recall CTRL+R Mode Preset CTRL+M User Preset CTRL+U Print CTRL+P File CTRL+SHIFT+L Mode CTRL+SHIFT+M Measure CTRL+ALT+M Mode Setup CTRL+SHIFT+E Meas Setup CTRL+ALT+E Trigger CTRL+SHIFT+T Sweep/Control CTRL+SHIFT+W Restart CTRL+ALT+R Single CTRL+ALT+S Cont CTRL+ALT+C Zoom CTRL+SHIFT+Z Next Window CTRL+SHIFT+N Split Screen CTRL+L Full Screen CTRL+SHIFT+B Return CTRL+SHIFT+R Mute Mute 112 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument Mouse and Keyboard Control Front-panel key Key code Inc Audio Volume Up Dec Audio Volume Down Help F1 Control CTRL Alt ALT Enter Return Cancel Esc Del Delete Backspace Backspace Select Space Up Arrow Up Down Arrow Down Left Arrow Left Right Arrow Right Menu key 1 CTRL+SHIFT+F1 Menu key 2 CTRL+SHIFT+F2 Menu key 3 CTRL+SHIFT+F3 Menu key 4 CTRL+SHIFT+F4 Menu key 5 CTRL+SHIFT+F5 Menu key 6 CTRL+SHIFT+F6 Menu key 7 CTRL+SHIFT+F7 Backspace BACKSPACE Enter ENTER Tab Tab 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 This is a pictorial view of the table: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 113 2 About the Instrument Mouse and Keyboard Control 114 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 2 About the Instrument Instrument Security & Memory Volatility Instrument Security & Memory Volatility If you are using the instrument in a secure environment, you may need details of how to clear or sanitize its memory, in compliance with published security standards of the United States Department of Defense, or other similar authorities. For X-Series instruments, this information is contained in the document "Security Features and Document of Volatility". This document is not included in the Documentation DVD, or the instrument's on-disk library, but it may be downloaded from Keysight's web site. To obtain a copy of the document, click on or browse to the following URL: http://www.agilent.com/find/security To locate and download the document, select Model Number "N9020A", then click Submit". Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download the file. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 115 2 About the Instrument Instrument Security & Memory Volatility 116 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application This chapter provides general information about the N9061A application. It includes the following topics: l "N9061A Application Description" on page 118 l "Documentation for the N9061A application" on page 119 l "General Rules and Limitations" on page 120 l "Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A" on page 123 l "Installing the N9061A Application" on page 125 l "Setting up N9061A" on page 126 l "Hints and Tips" on page 127 l "Service and Calibration" on page 129 117 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application N9061A Application Description N9061A Application Description N9061A is a Remote Language Compatibility application for Keysight Technologies X-Series instruments. It allows X-Series instruments to be controlled using many non-SCPI remote programming commands originally intended for the following analyzers: l 8560 E/EC Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers, comprising: l 8560E, 8560EC, 8561E, 8561EC, 8562E, 8562EC, 8563E, 8563EC, 8564E, 8564EC, 8565E, 8565EC l 8566A/B l 8568A/B (The 8566A/B and the 8568A/B are not considered part of the 8560 series of analyzers.) An X-Series instrument with N9061A installed can replace these analyzers in many automated systems with minimal or no modification to the existing measurement software. There are two options for N9061A: Option Description N9061A-1FP 8566A/B and 8568A/B remote language compatibility N9061A-2FP 8560 Series remote language compatibility. 118 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Documentation for the N9061A application Documentation for the N9061A application Scope of this Document This manual does not provide a comprehensive guide to all legacy commands. It provides brief descriptions of legacy commands that are supported by N9061A, and highlights important functional or behavioral differences that you should be aware of when using existing legacy code to control your X-Series instrument. For a complete description of all legacy commands, refer to the manuals supplied with your original analyzer. Where to Obtain this Document When you purchase an X-Series instrument with the Remote Language Compatibility Application (N9061A), this manual (N9061A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application User’s & Programmer’s Reference, part number N9020-90119) is included on the documentation DVD. It may also be downloaded from the Keysight web site at: http://cp.literature.agilent.com/litweb/pdf/N9020-90119.pdf This document contains exactly the same content as the instrument’s online Help file (CHM) for N9061A. Instrument Updates For the latest information about your X-Series instrument, including software upgrades, application information, and product information, please visit the URL below that corresponds to your instrument’s product name: l http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa/ l http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa/ l http://www.agilent.com/find/exa/ Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 119 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application General Rules and Limitations General Rules and Limitations The N9061A application has been designed to emulate as closely as possible the operation of the specified spectrum analyzers. It is not, however, intended as a fully-compatible, direct replacement for these analyzers. This section highlights the following specific emulation differences and limitations: l "AC/DC Coupling" on page 120 l "Couplings" on page 120 l "Markers" on page 121 l "Numeric Ranges" on page 121 l "Parsing" on page 121 l "Predefined Functions" on page 121 l "Remote Control" on page 121 l "Returning Data" on page 121 l "Units" on page 122 l "User-defined Functions" on page 122 l "Supported Commands" on page 122 l "EP Parameter" on page 122 l "OA Parameter" on page 122 l "Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries" on page 122 AC/DC Coupling The 44 GHz and 50 GHz X-Series instruments only have DC coupling. The X-Series instruments with a 26.5 GHz frequency range, and lower, default to AC coupling on preset. When the selected legacy instrument is HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8563, HP8564, or HP8565, N9061A defaults to DC coupling. When AC coupled, the 8560E/61E/62E have a 100 kHz low frequency limit, whereas X-Series instruments have a 10 MHz limit. For HP8568A/B compatibility and consistency, N9061A supports the I1 and I2 commands. These select AC or DC coupling at the RF input. Note that the HP8568A/B has two RF input ports, whereas X-Series instruments have only one. Couplings For optimal use of the X-Series instrument, N9061A uses the auto coupling features of the X-Series, and does not attempt to mimic the exact coupling behavior of the legacy analyzers. To eliminate the possibility of "Meas Uncal" errors between auto and manual values, values generally default to the X-Series auto 120 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application General Rules and Limitations settings where applicable (for example, Resolution Bandwidth). However, there are several exceptions, as follows: To prevent timeout errors in the legacy code, the Resolution Bandwidth minimum matches the minimum in the legacy analyzer. Resolution Bandwidth steps and resolution, however, conform to X-Series values. The Video Bandwidth couples to the Resolution Bandwidth according to the Video Bandwidth coupling offset value, specified by the VBO or VBR command. X-Series instruments set the Video Bandwidth according to the VBO or VBR setting, but use the X-Series instruments’ available bandwidths, to prevent 'Meas Uncal' errors. Markers N9061A emulates the behavior of legacy products. If any program uses a marker state that is not available in the legacy instrument, further marker behavior is undefined, until a subsequent instrument preset occurs. On systems that support MKACT, there are 4 completely different marker pairs, each with its own information. N9061A stores the currently active value of MKACT. For example, if MKACT is 2, then it uses Markers 3 and 4 instead of 1 and 2. Numeric Ranges Numeric ranges are limited to that of X-Series unless otherwise stated, although commands such as FS or IP that go to a default range use the range of the legacy instrument. Parsing For 8566B and 8568B emulation, N9061A remembers the active function and supports UP, DN, and OA, all of which change the active function. It also supports ?, which does not change the active function. Note that 8566/68 parses a command (for example CF 10.3GZ) immediately when it recognizes a complete command (in this example, following GZ), whereas N9061A parses at the end of a line, when it sees the line termination sequence. Predefined Functions In the 8566/8568/8560 Series analyzers, a “Predefined Function” is a command that returns a number that can be operated on by other commands. “Predefined Variables” follow the same concept, except that the value to be passed as a parameter to the next command is stored in a variable. N9061A does not support this type of behavior, so any commands that originally acted as Predefined Functions or Variables, or that accepted Predefined Functions or Variables as arguments in the 8566/8568/8560 Series, no longer do so. Remote Control N9061A supports remote operation via the GPIB interface. It does not support operation via LAN, USB or Telnet. Returning Data X-Series and legacy instruments adopt differing approaches when returning data to the controller. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 121 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application General Rules and Limitations X-Series and 8560-series analyzers operate a FIFO buffer for command return values. If a command returns a value that the controller does not read, the returned data is stored until such a time that the controller requires the value. The 8566, 8568, and 8590-series legacy analyzers only store one value at a time. Any value stored is overwritten each time a command returns a value. N9061A handles this difference appropriately only within a single command string. In the case of a query string, N9061A returns the query result for the last command in the string. For example, if CF?MA?FA? is sent, the result of FA? is returned. However, this rule does not apply if the query is located on either side of a TS command. When the command string MA;TS;CF? is sent, the result of CF? is returned in the next query. Units N9061A supports all units used in legacy products. The accepted units are HZ, KHZ, MHZ, GHZ, KZ, MZ, GZ, DBM, DBMV, DBUV, MV, UV, V, MW, UW, W, DB, DM, MS, US, SC, and S (case insensitive in 8566/68). A command terminator, such as ";", also acts as a unit terminator. User-defined Functions User-defined functions, traces, or variables (FUNCDEF, TRDEF or VARDEF) cannot be used as arguments or commands in programs for N9061A. In addition, the behavior of certain commands that rely on the “active functions” (UP, DN, etc.) may be slightly different. Supported Commands N9061A supports only a subset of 8566/8568/8560 Series commands. The list of supported commands was determined by feedback from customers, combined with technical considerations and constraints. Device Clear is supported by N9061A, and causes a mode preset of the instrument. EP Parameter The EP (Enable Parameter) is supported by N9061A for the same active functions as the 8560 series. When used as a secondary keyword after a command, EP transfers control to the analyzer’s front-panel. EP is not displayed in any of the format diagrams for individual commands listed in "Legacy Command Descriptions" on page 251. OA Parameter N9061A supports the OA parameter, which is used in conjunction with several legacy commands, such as AT and CF. OA is equivalent to a query; for example, CF OA is equivalent to CF?. Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries If a command is valid for legacy products but not supported by N9061A, no error message is generated, although a "Command Not Supported" comment is appended to the Command Log file. Note that this logging behavior can be controlled via the Logging menu, as described in "Logging" on page 881. If N9061A receives a query that is valid for legacy products, but is not supported by N9061A, it returns a "0", to avoid the situation where a program would otherwise halt indefinitely waiting for a return value. 122 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A For maximum compatibility, you should select an X-Series instrument that equals or exceeds the frequency range of the legacy analyzer you are replacing. The frequency limits of the legacy analyzers are listed below. Frequency Ranges of Legacy Analyzers Remote Language Start Frequency Stop Frequency 8560E/EC 30 Hz 2.9 GHz 8561E/EC 30 Hz 6.5 GHz 8562E/EC 30 Hz 13.2 GHz 8563E/EC 9 kHz 26.5 GHz 8564E/EC 9 kHz 40.0 GHz 8565E/EC 9 kHz 50.0 GHz HP8566A 2 GHz 22 GHz HP8566B 2 GHz 22 GHz HP8568A 0 Hz 1.5 GHz HP8568B 0 Hz 1.5 GHz The following table lists the Upper Frequency Limits and minimum firmware revisions for Keysight X-Series instruments that support N9061A. Compatible Keysight X-Series Instruments Product Name Instrument Model Number Upper Frequency Limit Firmware Revision PXA N9030A-503 3.6 GHz Rev A.04.00 or later N9030A-508 8.4 GHz N9030A-513 13.6 GHz N9030A-526 26.5 GHz N9030A-543 43 GHz N9030A-544 44 GHz N9030A-550 50 GHz N9020A-503 3.6 GHz N9020A-508 8.4 GHz N9020A-513 13.6 GHz N9020A-526 26.5 GHz MXA Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Rev A.01.64 or later 123 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A Product Name Instrument Model Number Upper Frequency Limit Firmware Revision EXA N9010A-503 3.6 GHz Rev A.01.64 or later N9010A-507 7 GHz N9010A-513 13.6 GHz N9010A-526 26.5 GHz N9010A-532 32 GHz N9010A-544 44 GHz 124 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Installing the N9061A Application Installing the N9061A Application N9061A is a licensed application for X-Series instruments. The option for 8560 Series emulation is N9061A-2FP, and the option for 8566/8568 emulation is N9061A-1FP. The application must be installed and licensed on a suitable X-Series instrument (PXA, MXA, or EXA) for it to work correctly. Installation The license is installed on the X-Series instrument in one of the following ways: If you purchased a new X-Series instrument with N9061A, then the product is already installed and licensed, and is ready to use. If you have an X-Series instrument and have subsequently purchased N9061A, then you can download N9061A from the Keysight website. N9061A is installed as part of a software upgrade. See the links below for instrument software upgrades. After upgrading your software you should then use your entitlement certificate to license the product (see "Licensing" on page 125 below). The latest revision of the software may be downloaded from: l http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa_software l http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_software l http://www.agilent.com/find/exa_software No calibration is required after N9061A is installed. Licensing For details of how to install and activate an N9061A license, see the section "Keysight X-Series Analyzer Licensing Options" in the chapter "Instrument Operating System" of the "Getting Started and Troubleshooting Guide", which may be downloaded in PDF format from the following location. http://www.agilent.com/find/xseries_getting_started_guide_windows7 Verify the Installation l Press System > Show > System, to display the list of installed applications. l Verify that N9061A appears in the Option list. If you require further assistance, please contact the Keysight support team. l l Online assistance: http://www.agilent.com/find/assist If you do not have access to the Internet, contact your local Keysight Technologies Sales and Service Office, or if in the United States, call 1-800-829-4444. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 125 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Setting up N9061A Setting up N9061A To set up your X-Series instrument for emulation of one of the supported legacy analyzers, do the following: Step Action Notes 1 Select the N9061A Measurement Application (Mode) Press the Mode hardkey on the front panel, then press the sofkey for Remote Language Compatibility mode. If there are more than six modes on the instrument, you may need to use the More softkey to display the Remote Language Compatibility selection. For details of the menu, see "Mode" on page 857. 2 Select the legacy analyzer you wish to emulate Press the Mode Setup hardkey on the front panel, then select the specific analyzer type from the keys in the submenu. For details of this menu, see "Mode Setup" on page 879. 126 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Hints and Tips Hints and Tips This section provides hints and tips that will help you get the most from the X-Series N9061A application. Compatibility (Speed and Consistency) To maximize compatibility with your legacy analyzer, the N9061A application should be used on the instrument whose frequency range most closely matches the frequency range of your legacy analyzer. For example, the best match for the 8563E, which has a 26.5 GHz upper frequency limit, is an X-Series instrument that also has an upper frequency limit of 26.5 GHz. Compatibility and Sweep Times To maximize compatibility between X-Series instruments and legacy analyzers, use the Manual Swept mode for 8566A/B, 8568A/B analyzers. Manual Swept mode is the default setting on X-Series instruments with N9061A installed. When analyzing stationary signals, you can change to the Best Speed setting, which is accessed from the Mode Setup > Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu. This results in faster sweep times on an X-Series instrument than on the legacy analyzers, due to the X-Series instrument’s better performance. In the majority of applications, this faster speed would be desirable, but that is not always the case. Timeout Keysight recommends increasing the timeout on a serial poll (SPOLL) due to differences in Sweep Times on some settings. Note, however, that this may not be necessary when using the Best Speed setting on the Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu (accessed from the Mode Setup hardkey). Synchronization (1) To synchronize after an IP command, Keysight recommends that you use the DONE command. We also suggest that the DONE command be used in conjunction with a timeout of about 5 seconds, in case the instrument starts to Auto Align. Alternatively, you can switch off auto alignment. To set auto alignment to Off, press System, Alignments, Auto Align on the front panel. Synchronization (2) Keysight recommends that synchronization (using the DONE command) be used with marker functions when signal tracking is turned on. Changing Modes After changing into or out of N9061A mode, allow at least a 1 second delay before sending subsequent commands. AC and DC Coupling The 8560 Series of legacy analyzers have one RF input port, and support AC and DC coupling through the command "COUPLE (Input Coupling)" on page 310. The 8568A/B has two RF input ports: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 127 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Hints and Tips l DC Coupled (with a BNC connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 Hz to 1.5 GHz l AC Coupled (with an N Type connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz If the input signal to the X-series instrument has a DC component, ensure that when you select legacy instrument emulation that involves a possible coupling change to DC, the input signal does not exceed the input specifications of the X-series instrument. X-series instruments also have one RF input port. When using X-Series instruments, you must use DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not calibrated when using AC coupling on these instruments. 128 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Service and Calibration Service and Calibration Since the Performance Verification and Adjustment Software uses the SCPI command language, you must exit the N9061A application and change to N9060A Spectrum Analyzer Mode, prior to calibration or service of your instrument. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 129 3 About the N9061A Measurement Application Service and Calibration 130 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument This section provides introductory information about the programming documentation included with your product. l "What Programming Information is Available?" on page 132 l "List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 133 l "IEEE 488.2 Common Commands" on page 154 l "Remote Measurement Functions" on page 163 l "STATus Subsystem " on page 177 131 4 Programming the Instrument What Programming Information is Available? What Programming Information is Available? The X-Series Documentation can be accessed through the Additional Documentation page in the instrument Help system and is included on the Documentation DVD shipped with the instrument. It can also be found online at: http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_manuals. The following resources are available to help you create programs for automating X-Series measurements: Resource Description X-Series Programmer's Guide Provides general SCPI programming information on the following topics: l Programming the X-Series Applications l Programming fundamentals l Programming examples Note that SCPI command descriptions for measurement applications are not in this book, but are in the User's and Programmer's Reference. User's and Programmer's Reference manuals Describes all front-panel keys and softkeys, including SCPI commands for a measurement application. Note that: l l Each measurement application has its own User's and Programmer's Reference. The content in this manual is duplicated in the instrument's Help (the Help that you see for a key is identical to what you see in this manual). Embedded Help in your instrument Describes all front-panel keys and softkeys, including SCPI commands, for a measurement application. Note that the content that you see in Help when you press a key is identical to what you see in the User's and Programmer's Reference. X-Series Getting Started Guide Provides valuable sections related to programming including: l Licensing New Measurement Application Software - After Initial Purchase l Configuring instrument LAN Hostname, IP Address, and Gateway Address l Using the Windows XP Remote Desktop to connect to the instrument remotely l Using the Embedded Web Server Telnet connection to communicate SCPI This printed document is shipped with the instrument. Keysight Application Notes Printable PDF versions of pertinent application notes. Keysight VISA User's Guide Describes the Keysight Virtual Instrument Software Architecture (VISA) library and shows how to use it to develop I/O applications and instrument drivers on Windows PCs. 132 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands List of Supported SCPI Commands When the N9061A application has been selected, the X-Series instrument supports only a subset of SCPI commands. The SCPI commands available while using the N9061A application are listed below. (Non-SCPI commands for legacy analyzers are not listed here; see instead "List of Legacy Analyzer Commands" on page 221.) To find a command in the list, search according to its first alphanumeric character, ignoring any leading ":" or "[" characters. The sole exception to this is the asterisk [*] prefix, identifying IEEE 488.2 Common commands and queries; all these appear at the start of the list. * *CAL? "All" on page 1219 *CLS "Clear Status " on page 156 *ESE "Standard Event Status Enable " on page 156 *ESE? *ESR? "Standard Event Status Register Query " on page 157 *IDN? "Identification Query " on page 157 *OPC "Operation Complete " on page 158 *OPC? *OPT? "Query Instrument Options " on page 159 *RCL "Recall Instrument State " on page 159 *RST "*RST (Remote Command Only)" on page 160 *SAV "Save Instrument State " on page 160 *SRE "Service Request Enable " on page 160 *SRE? *STB? "Status Byte Query " on page 161 *TRG "Trigger " on page 161 *TST? "Self Test Query " on page 161 *WAI "Wait-to-Continue " on page 162 A :ABORt "Abort (Remote Command Only)" on page 1195 C :CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB "N dB Points " on page 830 :CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult? "N dB Points " on page 830 :CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] "N dB Points " on page 830 :CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? "Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only)" on page 167 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 133 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :CALCulate:DATA{0:50}? "Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167 :CALCulate:DATA{0:50}:COMPress? "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167 :CALCulate:DATA{0:50}:PEAKs? "Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 172 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:CLEar "Limit Clear (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 829 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:CONTrol[:DATA] "Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 826 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:CONTrol:POINts? "Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 826 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:FAIL? "Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 828 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:LOWer[:DATA] "Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 827 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:LOWer:POINts? "Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 827 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:UPPer[:DATA] "Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 827 :CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:UPPer:POINts? "Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)" on page 827 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:ALL:DELete "Delete All Limits" on page 824 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:AMPLitude:CMODe:RELative "Relative to RL" on page 811 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE "Amplitude Interpolation" on page 810 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:BUILd "Build from Trace" on page 820 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:CMODe "Fixed / Relative Limit (Remote Command Only)" on page 829 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:COMMent "Comment" on page 812 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:CONTrol:DOMain "X-Axis Unit" on page 824 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE "Frequency Interpolation" on page 809 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:COPY "Copy from Limit" on page 817 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DATA "Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 825 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DATA:MERGe "Merge Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 825 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DELete "Delete Limit" on page 823 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DISPlay "Limit " on page 801 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:FAIL? "Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only)" on page 826 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative "Relative to CF" on page 811 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:MARGin "Margin" on page 813 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:MARGin:STATe "Margin" on page 813 134 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:OFFSet:UPDate "Apply Offsets to Limit Table" on page 822 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:OFFSet:X "X Offset" on page 821 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:OFFSet:Y "Y Offset" on page 821 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:TEST "Test Limits" on page 823 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:TRACe "Test Trace" on page 808 :CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:TYPE "Type" on page 808 :CALCulate:MAMarker:COUPling "BW & Avg Type" on page 783 :CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector{1:3} "Detectors" on page 765 :CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector{1:3}:DWELl "Detectors" on page 765 :CALCulate:MAMarker:PCENter "Center Presel On/Off" on page 784 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:AOFF "All Markers Off " on page 740 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:COUPle[:STATe] "Couple Markers " on page 740 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:CPSearch[:STATe] "Continuous Peak Search " on page 898 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:GATetime "Gate Time " on page 739 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:GATetime:AUTO "Gate Time " on page 739 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:RESolution "Gate Time " on page 739 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO "Gate Time " on page 739 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt[:STATe] "Counter " on page 736 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:X? "Counter " on page 736 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion "Marker Function" on page 742 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT "Band/Interval Left " on page 757 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt "Band/Interval Right " on page 759 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN "Band/Interval Span " on page 756 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN:AUTO "Band Span Auto/Man" on page 760 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:MAMarker "Measure at Marker" on page 761 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:LINes[:STATe] "Lines" on page 735 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:ALL "Peak Search All Traces" on page 901 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:LEFT "Next Pk Left " on page 888 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:NEXT "Next Peak " on page 887 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum[:PEAK] "Peak Search" on page 887 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:RIGHt "Next Pk Right " on page 888 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MINimum[:PEAK] "Min Search " on page 900 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MODE "Marker" on page 689 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:EXCursion "Pk Excursion " on page 891 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe "Pk Excursion " on page 891 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:SEARch:MODE "“Peak Search” Criteria" on page 890 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 135 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:SORT "Peak Sort " on page 895 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:TABLe:READout "Peak Readout " on page 895 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:TABLe:STATe "Peak Table On/Off" on page 894 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:THReshold "Pk Threshold " on page 892 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:THReshold:STATe "Pk Threshold " on page 892 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PTPeak "Pk-Pk Search " on page 899 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:REFerence "Relative To" on page 708 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:CENTer "Mkr->CF " on page 785 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:DELTa:CENTer "MkrΔ->CF" on page 788 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:DELTa:SPAN "MkrΔ->Span" on page 789 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:RLEVel "Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page 787 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:SPAN "MkrΔ->Span" on page 789 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:STARt "Mkr->Start" on page 786 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:STEP "Mkr->CF Step" on page 785 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:STOP "Mkr->Stop" on page 786 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:TZOom:CENTer "Mkr -> Zoom Center" on page 787 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:ZSPan:CENTer "Mkr -> Zone Center" on page 788 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:STATe "Normal " on page 698 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TABLe[:STATe] "Marker Table " on page 735 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TRACe "Marker Trace " on page 733 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TRACe:AUTO "Marker Trace " on page 733 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TRCKing[:STATe] "Signal Track (Span Zoom)" on page 1114 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X "Marker" on page 689 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:CENTer "Marker" on page 689 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition "Marker" on page 689 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:CENTer "Marker" on page 689 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:SPAN "Band/Interval Span " on page 756 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:STARt "Band/Interval Left " on page 757 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:STOP "Band/Interval Right " on page 759 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:READout "X Axis Scale" on page 713 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:READout:AUTO "X Axis Scale" on page 713 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:SPAN "Band/Interval Span " on page 756 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:STARt "Band/Interval Left " on page 757 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:STOP "Band/Interval Right " on page 759 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:Y "Marker" on page 689 :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:Z? "Marker" on page 689 136 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:Z:POSition "Marker" on page 689 :CALCulate:MATH "Math" on page 1299 :CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] "Normalize On/Off" on page 1316 :CALCulate:TRACe{1:6}:FAIL? "Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only)" on page 829 :CALibration[:ALL] "All" on page 1219 :CALibration:AUTO "Auto Align" on page 1212 :CALibration:AUTO:ALERt "Alert" on page 1216 :CALibration:AUTO:MODE "All but RF" on page 1215 :CALibration:AUTO:TIME:OFF? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:DATA:BACKup "Perform Backup (Remote Command Only)" on page 1236 :CALibration:DATA:DEFault "Backup or Restore Align Data…" on page 1230 :CALibration:DATA:RESTore "Perform Restore (Remote Command Only)" on page 1237 :CALibration:EMIXer "External Mixer" on page 1223 :CALibration:EXPired? "Execute Expired Alignments (Remote Command Only)" on page 1219 :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse "User" on page 1239 :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE "User" on page 1239 :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE "Timebase DAC" on page 1238 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:I "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:I:TIME? "I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 644 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:IBAR "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:IBAR:TIME? "I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 644 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:Q "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:Q:TIME? "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:QBAR "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:QBAR:TIME? "I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 644 :CALibration:IQ:ISOLation "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:ISOLation:TIME? "I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 688 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I:CLEar "Clear Calibration" on page 644 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I:TIME? "I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 644 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:IBAR "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:IBAR:TIME? "I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 137 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands 644 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q "Next" on page 637 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q:CLEar "Clear Calibration" on page 644 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q:TIME? "I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 644 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:QBAR "Next" on page 639 :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:QBAR:TIME? "I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 644 :CALibration:NRF "All but RF" on page 1221 :CALibration:RF "RF" on page 1222 :CALibration:SOURce:STATe "RF Calibrator" on page 644 :CALibration:TEMPerature:CURRent? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TEMPerature:LALL? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TEMPerature:LPReselector? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TEMPerature:LRF? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TEMPerature:RFPSelector:LCONducted? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TEMPerature:RFPSelector:LRADiated? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TEMPerature:SOURce:LALL? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TIME:LALL? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TIME:LPReselector? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TIME:LRF? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TIME:RFPSelector:LCONducted? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TIME:RFPSelector:LRADiated? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:TIME:SOURce:LALL? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :CALibration:YTF "Characterize Preselector " on page 1237 :CONFigure? "RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 790 :CONFigure:CATalog? "Measurement Group of Commands" on page 163 :CONFigure:SANalyzer "RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 790 :CONFigure:SANalyzer:NDEFault "RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 790 :COUPle "Auto Couple" on page 586 D :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] "Active Function Values On/Off" on page 1373 :DISPlay:ANNotation:MBAR[:STATe] "Meas Bar On/Off" on page 1372 138 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe] "Screen" on page 1373 :DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA "Change Title " on page 1375 :DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe] "Trace " on page 1373 :DISPlay:BACKlight "Backlight" on page 1380 :DISPlay:BACKlight:INTensity "Backlight Intensity" on page 1381 :DISPlay:ENABle "Display Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 1389 :DISPlay:FSCReen[:STATe] "Full Screen" on page 1388 :DISPlay:MENU[:STATe] "Full Screen" on page 1388 :DISPlay:THEMe "Theme" on page 1379 :DISPlay:VIEW1|VIEW[:SELect] "View " on page 1370 :DISPlay:WINDow:ANNotation[:ALL] "Annotation Local Settings" on page 1378 :DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:TILE "Zoom" on page 107 :DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:ZOOM "Zoom" on page 107 :DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition "Position " on page 765 :DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker[:STATe] "Window " on page 765 :DISPlay:WINDow[:SELect] "Next Window" on page 108 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] "Graticule " on page 1376 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe "Display Line" on page 1376 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe "Display Line" on page 1376 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel "Norm Ref Lvl" on page 1319 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition "Norm Ref Posn" on page 1320 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision "Scale / Div" on page 570 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel "Reference Level" on page 559 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet "Reference Level Offset" on page 580 :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing "Scale Type" on page 570 F :FETCh:SANalyzer{0:9}? "RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 790 :FORMat:BORDer "Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175 :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174 G :GLOBal:DEFault "Restore Defaults" on page 886 :GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe] "Global Center Freq" on page 885 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 139 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands H :HCOPy:ABORt "Print" on page 603 :HCOPy[:IMMediate] "Print" on page 603 I :ID? Also a legacy command. See "ID (Identify)" on page 355. :INITiate:CONTinuous "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599 :INITiate[:IMMediate] "Restart" on page 984 :INITiate:PAUSe "Pause/Resume" on page 1194 :INITiate:RESTart "Restart" on page 984 :INITiate:RESume "Pause/Resume" on page 1194 :INITiate:SANalyzer "RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 790 :INPut:COUPling "RF Coupling" on page 622 :INPut:COUPling? RLC option is available only in N9061A Mode. :INPut:COUPling:I "Coupling" on page 642 :INPut:COUPling:Q "Coupling" on page 642 :INPut:IMPedance:IQ "Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only)" on page 632 :INPut:IMPedance:REFerence "Reference Z" on page 638 :INPut:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] "I Differential Input" on page 628 :INPut:IQ:DIFFerential "I Differential Input" on page 628 :INPut:IQ:I:DIFFerential "I Differential Input" on page 628 :INPut:IQ:I:IMPedance "I Input Z" on page 629 :INPut:IQ:IMPedance "I Input Z" on page 629 :INPut:IQ:MIRRored "Q Same as I" on page 633 :INPut:IQ:Q:DIFFerential "Q Differential Input" on page 634 :INPut:IQ:Q:IMPedance "Q Input Z" on page 635 :INPut:IQ:TYPE "I/Q Path" on page 626 :INPut:MIXer "Input/Output" on page 619 :INPut:OFFSet:I "Offset" on page 641 :INPut:OFFSet:Q "Offset" on page 641 :INSTrument:CATalog? "Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 871 :INSTrument:COUPle:DEFault "Restore Defaults" on page 886 :INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer "Global Center Freq" on page 885 :INSTrument:DEFault "Restore Mode Defaults" on page 884 :INSTrument:NSELect "Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only)" on 140 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :INSTrument:NSELect? page 869 Specify parameter 266 to select N9061A :INSTrument[:SELect] "Mode" on page 857 :INSTrument[:SELect]? Specify parameter RLC to select N9061A :INSTrument:SOURce[:SELect] "Source Mode" on page 1101 M :MEASure:EMI:MARKer{1:12} "Measure at Marker" on page 761 :MEASure:SANalyzer{0:9}? "RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 790 :MMEMory:CATalog? "Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only)" on page 1088 :MMEMory:CDIRectory "Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only)" on page 1089 :MMEMory:COPY "Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only)" on page 1089 :MMEMory:DATA "Mass Storage Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1090 :MMEMory:DELete "Mass Storage Delete (Remote Command Only)" on page 1089 :MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection "Amplitude Correction " on page 970 :MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit "Limit" on page 976 :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe "State" on page 904 :MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe "Trace (+State)" on page 939 :MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe:DATA "Trace" on page 973 :MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe:REGister "Trace (+State)" on page 939 :MMEMory:MDIRectory "Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only)" on page 1090 :MMEMory:MOVE "Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only)" on page 1090 :MMEMory:RDIRectory "Mass Storage Remove Directory (Remote Command Only)" on page 1091 :MMEMory:REGister:STATe:LABel "Edit Register Names" on page 1014 :MMEMory:STORe:CORRection "Amplitude Correction " on page 1017 :MMEMory:STORe:LIMit "Limit " on page 1030 :MMEMory:STORe:RESults "Measurement Results" on page 1066 :MMEMory:STORe:RESults:MTABle "Measurement Results" on page 1066 :MMEMory:STORe:RESults:PTABle "Measurement Results" on page 1066 :MMEMory:STORe:RESults:SNGLS "Measurement Results" on page 1066 :MMEMory:STORe:RESults:SPECtrogram "Measurement Results" on page 1066 :MMEMory:STORe:SCReen "Screen Image" on page 1083 :MMEMory:STORe:SCReen:THEMe "Themes" on page 1084 :MMEMory:STORe:STATe "State" on page 986 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 141 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :MMEMory:STORe:TRACe "Trace (+State)" on page 1015 :MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:DATA "Trace" on page 1022 :MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:REGister "Trace (+State)" on page 1015 O :OUTPut:ANALog "Analog Out" on page 679 :OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO "Analog Out" on page 679 :OUTPut:AUX "Aux IF Out" on page 685 :OUTPut:AUX:AIF "Arbitrary IF" on page 687 :OUTPut:DBUS1|DBUS[:STATe] "Bus Out On/Off" on page 684 :OUTPut:DBUS2[:STATe] "Bus Out On/Off" on page 684 :OUTPut[:EXTernal][:STATe] "RF Output" on page 1093 :OUTPut:IQ:OUTPut "I/Q Cal Out" on page 684 R :READ:SANalyzer{0:9}? "RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page 790 S [:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer:AUTO[:STATe] "Auto " on page 838 [:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer[:STATe] "ADC Dither" on page 837 [:SENSe]:ADC:RANGe "Auto" on page 842 [:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar "Average/Hold Number" on page 794 [:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt "Average/Hold Number" on page 794 [:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe] "Trace/Detector" on page 1264 [:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE "Average Type" on page 795 [:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO "Average Type" on page 795 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution] "Res BW " on page 588 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO "Res BW " on page 588 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:SHAPe "Filter Type " on page 594 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:TYPE "Filter BW" on page 596 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo "Video BW " on page 590 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO "Video BW " on page 590 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio "VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591 [:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO "VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591 142 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN "BTS" on page 649 [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:LOSS "BTS" on page 649 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:ALL:DELete "Delete All Corrections " on page 663 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:ALL[:STATe] "Apply Corrections" on page 663 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:ANTenna[:UNIT] "Antenna Unit" on page 657 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:COMMent "Comment" on page 661 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DATA "Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 664 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DATA:MERGe "Merge Correction Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 664 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DELete "Delete Correction" on page 663 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DESCription "Description" on page 661 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}[:STATe] "Correction On/Off" on page 654 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:X:SPACing "Frequency Interpolation" on page 659 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude] "Input Z Correction " on page 621 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:ATTenuation "Attenuation" on page 641 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:ATTenuation:RATio "Attenuation" on page 641 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:GAIN "I Ext Gain" on page 650 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ[:I]:SKEW "I Skew" on page 630 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:ATTenuation "Attenuation" on page 641 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:ATTenuation:RATio "Attenuation" on page 641 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN "Q Ext Gain" on page 650 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:SKEW "Q Skew" on page 635 [:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:GAIN "MS " on page 648 [:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:LOSS "MS " on page 648 [:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude] "Ext Preamp " on page 647 [:SENSe]:CORRection:SA[:RF]:GAIN "Ext Preamp " on page 647 [:SENSe]:DEMod "Analog Demod Tune & Listen" on page 843 [:SENSe]:DEMod:AM:BANDwidth:CHANnel "Channel BW (AM Demod)" on page 844 [:SENSe]:DEMod:FM:BANDwidth:CHANnel "Channel BW (FM Demod)" on page 845 [:SENSe]:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis "De-emphasis (FM Demod only)" on page 848 [:SENSe]:DEMod:PM:BANDwidth:CHANnel "Channel BW (Φ M Demod)" on page 849 [:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe "Demod State (Remote Command Only)" on page 850 [:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME "Demod Time" on page 850 [:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO "Auto " on page 1291 [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] "Detector" on page 1287 [:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe{1:6} "Detector" on page 1287 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 143 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe{1:6}:AUTO "Auto " on page 1291 [:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage[:STATe] "Detector 3" on page 779 [:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:DWELl "Detectors" on page 765 [:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak[:STATe] "Detector 2" on page 775 [:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PCENter[:STATe] "Center Presel On/Off" on page 784 [:SENSe]:FEED "Input/Output" on page 619 [:SENSe]:FEED:AREFerence "RF Calibrator" on page 644 [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE "I/Q Path" on page 626 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer "Center Freq" on page 607 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO "CF Step" on page 616 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] "CF Step" on page 616 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:IQ:CENTer "Center Freq" on page 607 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet "Freq Offset" on page 617 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:RF:CENTer "Center Freq" on page 607 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN "Span " on page 1108 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio "Span:3dB RBW " on page 593 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BWIDth|BANDwidth [:RESolution]:RATio:AUTO "Span:3dB RBW " on page 593 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL "Full Span " on page 1112 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious "Last Span " on page 1114 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt "Start Freq" on page 612 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP "Stop Freq" on page 614 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO[:STATe] "Auto " on page 834 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis[:STATe] "PhNoise Opt " on page 833 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate "Auto Tune" on page 607 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:CENTer "Zoom Center " on page 606 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:SPAN "Zoom Span " on page 1111 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:CENTer "Zone Center " on page 605 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:SPAN "Zone Span " on page 1110 [:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:FFT:AUTO[:STATe] "Auto" on page 842 [:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:FFT[:STATe] "FFT IF Gain " on page 841 [:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:SWEPt:AUTO[:STATe] "Auto" on page 840 [:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:SWEPt[:STATe] "Swept IF Gain" on page 840 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation "(Mech) Atten " on page 562 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO "(Mech) Atten " on page 562 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement] "(Mech) Atten Step" on page 569 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation "Elec Atten" on page 566 144 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation:STATe "Enable Elec Atten" on page 564 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND "Internal Preamp" on page 583 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] "Internal Preamp" on page 583 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] "Max Mixer Level" on page 570 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MMW:PADJust "Preselector Adjust" on page 572 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust "Preselector Adjust" on page 572 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH "µW Path Control " on page 581 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PRESelector[:STATe] "µW Preselector Bypass " on page 582 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust "Preselector Adjust" on page 572 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector "Preselector Adjust" on page 572 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter "Presel Center" on page 571 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize "Adjust Atten for Min Clip" on page 567 [:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe "Atten Offset" on page 883 [:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe? [:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit "Limit RBW/VBW" on page 882 [:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit? [:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes "Swp Type Rule" on page 883 [:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes? [:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit ON|OFF "Limit Swp Time" on page 884 [:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit? [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth "External Reference Lock BW" on page 668 [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling "External Ref Coupling" on page 671 [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency "Ext Ref Freq" on page 667 [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce "Freq Ref In " on page 665 [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE "Freq Ref In " on page 665 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:CONTrol "Control Edge/Level" on page 1188 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay "Gate Delay " on page 1161 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:EXTernal{1:2}:LEVel "Gate Level (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff "Gate Holdoff" on page 1189 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff:AUTO "Gate Holdoff" on page 1189 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth "Gate Length " on page 1162 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod "Method" on page 1162 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:MINFast? "Min Fast Position Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 1190 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:POLarity "Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce "Gate Source" on page 1164 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe] "Gate On/Off " on page 1155 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 145 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME "Gate View Sweep Time" on page 1160 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW "Gate View On/Off" on page 1157 [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt "Gate View Start Time " on page 1161 [:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:SPAN:RATio "FFT Width" on page 1152 [:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:WIDTh "FFT Width" on page 1152 [:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:WIDTh:AUTO "FFT Width" on page 1152 [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts "Points " on page 1192 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME "Sweep Time" on page 1117 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO "Sweep Time" on page 1117 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes "Sweep Time Rules" on page 1119 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe] "Auto" on page 1120 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay "Gate Delay " on page 1161 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth "Gate Length " on page 1162 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel "Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity "Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:PRESet "Gate Preset (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe] "Gate On/Off " on page 1155 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE "Control Edge/Level" on page 1188 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE AUTO|SWEep|FFT "Sweep Type" on page 1122 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE? [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO "Auto" on page 1123 [:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes "Sweep Type Rules " on page 1124 [:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes? [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe] "Auto" on page 1125 [:SENSe]:SWEep:TZOom:POINts "Zoom Points" on page 1193 :SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet "Amptd Offset " on page 1096 :SOURce:EXTernal:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] "Amplitude" on page 1094 :SOURce:EXTernal:POWer:MODE "Power Sweep " on page 1094 :SOURce:EXTernal:SWEep:OFFSet:FREQuency "Freq Offset " on page 1100 :SOURce:EXTernal:SWEep:OFFSet[:STATe] "Freq Offset " on page 1100 :SOURce:FREQuency[:MULTiplier]:DENominator "Multiplier Denominator" on page 1099 :SOURce:FREQuency[:MULTiplier]:NUMerator "Multiplier Numerator" on page 1098 :SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet "Freq Offset " on page 1100 :SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe "Freq Offset " on page 1100 :SOURce:FREQuency:SSReverse "Source Sweep Reverse" on page 1099 :SOURce:NOISe:SNS:ATTached? "SNS Attached (Remote Command Only)" on page 855 146 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :SOURce:NOISe[:STATe] "State" on page 855 :SOURce:NOISe:TYPE "Noise Source " on page 854 :SOURce[:EXTernal]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] "Amplitude" on page 1094 :SOURce[:EXTernal]:POWer:MODE "Power Sweep " on page 1094 :SOURce:[EXTernal][:SWEep]:POWer:SPAN "Power Sweep " on page 1094 :SOURce:POWer:STARt "Amplitude" on page 1094 :SOURce:POWer:STEP:AUTO "Amptd Step Auto/Man" on page 1097 :SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] "Amptd Step Auto/Man" on page 1097 :SOURce:POWer:SWEep "Power Sweep " on page 1094 :SOURce:POWer:SWEep:STATe "Power Sweep " on page 1094 :SOURce:PRESet "Source Preset" on page 1106 :SOURce:SETTings? "Source Setting Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 1107 :SOURce:TRIGger:TYPE "Point Trigger" on page 1103 :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? "Operation Condition Query" on page 191 :STATus:OPERation:ENABle "Operation Enable" on page 192 :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? "Operation Event Query" on page 192 :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition "Operation Negative Transition" on page 193 :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition "Operation Positive Transition" on page 193 :STATus:PRESet "Preset the Status Byte " on page 193 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? "Questionable Calibration Condition" on page 196 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle "Questionable Calibration Enable" on page 197 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]? "Questionable Calibration Event Query" on page 197 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:CONDition? "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition" on page 201 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:ENABle "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable" on page 201 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure[:EVENt]? "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query" on page 202 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:NTRansition "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition" on page 202 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:PTRansition "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition" on page 203 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:CONDition? "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition" on page 203 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:ENABle "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable" on page 204 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed[:EVENt]? "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query" on page 204 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 147 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:NTRansition "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition" on page 205 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:PTRansition "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition" on page 205 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition "Questionable Calibration Negative Transition" on page 198 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition "Questionable Calibration Positive Transition" on page 198 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:CONDition? "Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition" on page 199 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:ENABle "Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable" on page 199 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped[:EVENt]? "Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query" on page 199 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:NTRansition "Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition" on page 200 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:PTRansition "Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition" on page 200 :STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? "Questionable Condition " on page 194 :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle "Questionable Enable " on page 194 :STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? "Questionable Event Query " on page 195 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? "Questionable Frequency Condition" on page 206 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle "Questionable Frequency Enable" on page 206 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? "Questionable Frequency Event Query" on page 207 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition "Questionable Frequency Negative Transition" on page 207 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition "Questionable Frequency Positive Transition" on page 207 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition? "Questionable Integrity Condition" on page 208 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle "Questionable Integrity Enable" on page 209 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]? "Questionable Integrity Event Query" on page 209 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition "Questionable Integrity Negative Transition" on page 209 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition "Questionable Integrity Positive Transition" on page 210 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:CONDition? "Questionable Integrity Signal Condition" on page 211 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle "Questionable Integrity Signal Enable" on page 211 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal[:EVENt]? "Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query" on page 212 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition "Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition" on page 212 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition "Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition" on page 212 148 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:CONDition? "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition" on page 213 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable" on page 213 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]? "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query" on page 214 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition" on page 214 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition" on page 215 :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition "Questionable Negative Transition " on page 195 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? "Questionable Power Condition" on page 216 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle "Questionable Power Enable" on page 216 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? "Questionable Power Event Query" on page 216 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition "Questionable Power Negative Transition" on page 217 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition "Questionable Power Positive Transition" on page 217 :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition "Questionable Positive Transition" on page 196 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition? "Questionable Temperature Condition" on page 218 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle "Questionable Temperature Enable" on page 219 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]? "Questionable Temperature Event Query" on page 219 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition "Questionable Temperature Negative Transition" on page 219 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition "Questionable Temperature Positive Transition" on page 220 :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog[:NAME]? "Current Application Model " on page 871 :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog[:NAME]:COUNt? "Application Catalog Number of Entries" on page 873 :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:OPTion? "Application Catalog Options" on page 874 :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:REVision? "Application Catalog Revision" on page 873 :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent][:NAME]? "Current Application Model " on page 871 :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:OPTion? "Current Application Options" on page 872 :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:REVision? "Current Application Revision" on page 872 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess "GPIB Address" on page 1241 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:CONTroller[:ENABle] "GPIB Controller" on page 1241 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:HISLip:ENABle "HiSLIP Server" on page 1244 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SICL:ENABle "SICL Server" on page 1243 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SOCKet:CONTrol? "SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Command Only)" on page 1244 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SOCKet:ENABle "SCPI Socket" on page 1243 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 149 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:TELNet:ENABle "SCPI Telnet" on page 1242 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SOURce[:EXTernal]:IP "Select Highlighted Source" on page 1104 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOURce:ADDRess "Select Highlighted Source" on page 1104 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:CONNection? "Query USB Connection (Remote Command Only)" on page 1247 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:PACKets? "USB Packet Count (Remote Command Only)" on page 1248 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:STATus? "USB Connection Status (Remote Command Only)" on page 1247 :SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]? "Show System contents (Remote Command Only) " on page 1202 :SYSTem:DATE "Date (Remote Command Only)" on page 1262 :SYSTem:DEFault "Restore Defaults" on page 1248 :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? "Errors" on page 1196 :SYSTem:ERRor:OVERload[:STATe] "Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 1200 :SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose "Verbose SCPI On/Off" on page 1198 :SYSTem:HELP:HEADers? "List SCPI Commands (Remote Command Only)" on page 1262 :SYSTem:HID? "Licensing…" on page 1254 :SYSTem:IDN "System IDN Response" on page 1246 :SYSTem:KLOCk "Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only)" on page 1261 :SYSTem:LANGuage "Mode Setup" on page 879 :SYSTem LANGuage? This command is only available if N9061A is installed on your instrument. :SYSTem:LKEY "Licensing…" on page 1254 :SYSTem:LKEY:DELete "Licensing…" on page 1254 :SYSTem:LKEY:LIST? "Licensing…" on page 1254 :SYSTem:MRELay:COUNt? "Query the Mechanical Relay Cycle Count" on page 1259 :SYSTem:OPTions? "List installed Options (Remote Command Only)" on page 1261 :SYSTem:PDOWn "System Powerdown (Remote Command Only)" on page 1261 :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:LLISt "Configuration list (Remote Command Only)" on page 1211 :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory[:AVAilable]? "Configuration Memory Available (Remote Command Only)" on page 1211 :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:TOTal? "Configuration Memory Total (Remote Command Only)" on page 1211 150 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:USED? "Configuration Memory Used (Remote Command Only)" on page 1211 :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:USED:NAME? "Configuration Application Memory (Remote Command Only)" on page 1212 :SYSTem:PON:ETIMe? "Query the Elapsed Time since First Power-On" on page 1260 :SYSTem:PON:MODE "Power On Application " on page 1206 :SYSTem:PON:TIME? "Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224 :SYSTem:PON:TYPE "Power On" on page 1204 :SYSTem:PRESet "Mode Preset" on page 876 :SYSTem:PRESet:USER "User Preset" on page 1367 :SYSTem:PRESet:USER:ALL "User Preset All Modes" on page 1368 :SYSTem:PRESet:USER:SAVE "Save User Preset " on page 1369 :SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe "Page Setup" on page 602 :SYSTem:PUP:PROCess "Save Changes and Exit" on page 1209 :SYSTem:SECurity:USB:WPRotect[:ENABle] "USB" on page 1256 :SYSTem:SHOW "Show" on page 1196 :SYSTem:TEMPerature:HEXTreme? "Query the Operating Temperature Extremes" on page 1259 :SYSTem:TEMPerature:LEXTreme? "Query the Operating Temperature Extremes" on page 1259 :SYSTem:TIME "Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 1263 :SYSTem:VERSion? "SCPI Version Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 1262 T :TRACe:CLEar "Clear Trace" on page 1298 :TRACe:CLEar:ALL "Clear All Traces" on page 1298 :TRACe:COPY "Copy/Exchange" on page 1312 :TRACe[:DATA] "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321 :TRACe{1:6}:DISPlay[:STATe] "View/Blank " on page 1284 :TRACe{1:6}:DISPlay:VIEW1|VIEW:SPECtrogram:POSition "Display Trace" on page 1388 :TRACe{1:6}:DISPlay:VIEW1|VIEW:SPECtrogram:TIME? "Display Trace Time Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 1325 :TRACe:EXCHange "Copy/Exchange" on page 1312 :TRACe:MATH:MEAN? "Mean Trace Data (Remote Command Only) " on page 1325 :TRACe:MATH:PEAK[:DATA]? "Query the Signal Peaks (Remote Command Only)" on Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 151 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands page 900 :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts? "Query Number of Peaks Found (Remote Command Only)" on page 901 :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT "Peak Sort " on page 895 :TRACe:MATH:SMOoth "Smooth Trace Data (Remote Command Only) " on page 1323 :TRACe{1:6}:MATH:SMOoth:POINts "Number of Points for Smoothing (Remote Command Only) " on page 1324 :TRACe{1:6}:MODE "Trace/Detector" on page 1264 :TRACe{1:6}:PRESet:ALL "Clear All Traces" on page 1298 :TRACe{1:6}:TYPE "Trace/Detector" on page 1264 :TRACe{1:6}:UPDate[:STATe] "View/Blank " on page 1284 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger "Auto Trig " on page 1365 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:STATe "Auto Trig " on page 1365 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay "Trig Delay " on page 1336 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe "Trig Delay " on page 1336 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:DELay "Trig Delay " on page 1340 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:DELay:STATe "Trig Delay " on page 1340 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:LEVel "Trigger Level " on page 1353 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:SLOPe "Trig Slope " on page 1353 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:ADJust "Offset Adjust (Remote Command Only)" on page 1351 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay "Trig Delay" on page 1359 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay:STATe "Trig Delay" on page 1359 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:EXTernal{1:2}:LEVel "Trigger Level " on page 1353 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:EXTernal{1:2}:SLOPe "Trig Slope " on page 1353 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet "Offset " on page 1350 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet "Reset Offset Display " on page 1351 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod "Period " on page 1349 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:RFBurst:LEVel:ABSolute "Absolute Trigger Level" on page 1356 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:RFBurst:SLOPe "Trigger Slope " on page 1358 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC "Sync Source " on page 1352 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff "Trig Holdoff " on page 1366 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:STATe "Trig Holdoff " on page 1366 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:DELay "Trig Delay " on page 1336 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel "Trigger Level " on page 1334 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe "Trig Slope " on page 1335 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LINE:DELay "Trig Delay " on page 1338 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LINE:DELay:STATe "Trig Delay " on page 1338 152 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument List of Supported SCPI Commands :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LINE:SLOPe "Trig Slope " on page 1338 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet "Trig Delay " on page 1336 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet:STATe "Trig Delay " on page 1336 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:DELay "Trig Delay " on page 1347 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:DELay:STATe "Trig Delay " on page 1347 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel "Relative Trigger Level" on page 1357 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:ABSolute "Absolute Trigger Level" on page 1356 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:RELative "Relative Trigger Level" on page 1357 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:TYPE "Absolute Trigger Level" on page 1356 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:SLOPe "Trigger Slope " on page 1358 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe "Trig Slope " on page 1335 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce "Trigger" on page 1326 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:FMODe "Field " on page 1361 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:LINE "TV Line " on page 1360 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:STANdard "Standard " on page 1362 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay "Trig Delay " on page 1336 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe "Trig Delay " on page 1336 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel "Trigger Level " on page 1334 :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:SLOPe "Trig Slope " on page 1335 :TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut "Trig Out (1 and 2)" on page 676 :TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity "Polarity " on page 677 U :UNIT:POWer "Y Axis Unit" on page 573 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 153 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands IEEE 488.2 Common Commands The instrument supports the following subset of IEEE 488.2 Common Commands, as defined in Chapter 10 of IEEE Standard 488.2–1992. As indicated in the detailed description of each command, some of these commands correspond directly to instrument front-panel key functionality, while others are available only as remote commands. Commands Description *CAL? "All" on page 1219 *CLS "Clear Status " on page 156 *ESE <int> "Standard Event Status Enable " on page 156 *ESE? *ESR? "Standard Event Status Register Query " on page 157 *IDN? "Identification Query " on page 157 *OPC "Operation Complete " on page 158 *OPC? *OPT? "Query Instrument Options " on page 159 *RCL <reg> "Recall Instrument State " on page 159 *RST "*RST (Remote Command Only)" on page 160 *SAV <reg> "Save Instrument State " on page 160 *SRE <int> "Service Request Enable " on page 160 *SRE? *STB? "Status Byte Query " on page 161 *TRG "Trigger " on page 161 *TST? "Self Test Query " on page 161 *WAI "Wait-to-Continue " on page 162 All Immediately executes an alignment of all subsystems. The instrument stops any measurement currently underway, performs the alignment, then restarts the measurement from the beginning (similar to pressing the Restart key). If an interfering user signal is present at the RF Input, the alignment is performed on all subsystems except the RF. After completion, the Error Condition message “Align skipped: 50 MHz interference” or “Align skipped: 4.8 GHz interference” is generated. In addition the Error Condition message “Align Now, RF required” is generated, and bits 11 and 12 are set in the Status Questionable Calibration register. The query form of the remote commands (:CALibration[:ALL]? or *CAL?) invokes the alignment of all subsystems and returns a success or failure value. An interfering user signal is not grounds for failure; if the alignment was able to succeed on all portions but unable to align the RF because of an interfering signal, the resultant will be the success value. 154 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Successful completion of Align Now, All will clear the “Align Now, All required” Error Condition, and clear bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register. It will also begin the elapsed time counter for Last Align Now, All Time, and capture the Last Align Now, All Temperature. If the Align RF subsystem succeeded in aligning (no interfering signal present), the elapsed time counter begins for Last Align Now, RF Time, and the temperature is captured for the Last Align Now, RF Temperature. In addition the Error Conditions “Align skipped: 50 MHz interference” and “Align skipped: 4.8 GHz interference” are cleared, the Error Condition “Align Now, RF required” is cleared, and bits 11 and 12 are cleared in the Status Questionable Calibration register Align Now, All can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel (ESC) front-panel key or remotely with Device Clear followed by the :ABORt SCPI command. When this occurs the Error Condition message “Align Now, All required” is generated, and bit 14 is set in the Status Questionable Condition register. This is because new alignment data may be employed for an individual subsystem, but not a cohesive set of data for all subsystems. In many cases, you might find it more convenient to change alignments to Normal, instead of executing Align Now, All. When the Auto Align process transitions to Normal, the analyzer will immediately start to update only the alignments that have expired, thus efficiently restoring the alignment process. In models with the RF Preselector, such as the N9038A, the Align Now All alignment will immediately execute an alignment of all subsystems in the Spectrum Analyzer and partial subsystems of the RF Preselector. The additional alignments are the System Gain, Mechanical attenuator and Electronic attenuator alignments on the RF Preselector path. The purpose of these alignments is to improve the RF Preselector path amplitude variation compared to the bypass path. Key Path System, Alignments, Align Now Mode All Remote Command :CALibration[:ALL] :CALibration[:ALL]? Example :CAL Notes :CALibration[:ALL]? returns 0 if successful :CALibration[:ALL]? returns 1 if failed :CALibration[:ALL]? is the same as *CAL? While Align Now, All is performing the alignment, bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set. Completion, or termination, will clear bit 0 in the Status Operation register. This command is sequential; it must complete before further SCPI commands are processed. Interrupting the alignment from remote is accomplished by invoking Device Clear followed by the :ABORt command. Successful completion will clear bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register. An interfering user signal is not grounds for failure of Align Now, All. However, bits 11 and 12 are set in the Status Questionable Calibration register to indicate Align Now, RF is required. An interfering user supplied signal will result in the instrument requiring an Align Now, RF with the interfering signal removed. Couplings Initializes the time for the Last Align Now, All Time. Records the temperature for the Last Align Now, All Temperature. If Align RF component succeeded, initializes the time for the Last Align Now, RF Time. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 155 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands If Align RF component succeeded, records the temperature for the Last Align Now, RF Temperature. Status Bits/OPC dependencies Bits 11, 12, or 14 may be set in the Status Questionable Calibration register. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Mode All Remote Command *CAL? Example *CAL? Notes *CAL? returns 0 if successful *CAL? returns 1 if failed :CALibration[:ALL]? is the same as *CAL? See additional remarks described with :CALibration[:ALL]? Everything about :CALibration[:ALL]? is synonymous with *CAL? including all conditions, status register bits, and couplings Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Clear Status Clears the status byte register. It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing all bits in all of the event registers. The status byte register summarizes the states of the other registers. It is also responsible for generating service requests. Key Path No equivalent key. Related key System, Show Errors, Clear Error Queue Remote Command *CLS Example *CLS Clears the error queue and the Status Byte Register. Notes For related commands, see the SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? command. See also the STATus:PRESet command and all commands in the STATus subsystem. Status Bits/OPC dependencies Resets all bits in all event registers to 0, which resets all the status byte register bits to 0 also. Backwards Compatibility Notes In general the status bits used in the X-Series status system will be backwards compatible with ESA and PSA. However, note that all conditions will generate events that go into the event log, and some will also generate status bits. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Standard Event Status Enable Selects the desired bits from the standard event status enable register. This register monitors I/O errors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete, request control, query error, device dependent error, status execution error, command error, and power on. The selected bits are OR’d to become a summary bit (bit 5) in the byte register which can be queried. 156 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands The query returns the state of the standard event status enable register. Key Path No equivalent key. Related key System, Show Errors, Clear Error Queue Remote Command *ESE <integer> *ESE? Example *ESE 36 Enables the Standard Event Status Register to monitor query and command errors (bits 2 and 5). *ESE? Returns a 36 indicating that the query and command status bits are enabled. Notes For related commands, see the STATus subsystem and SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? commands. Preset 255 State Saved Not saved in state. Min 0 Max 255 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Event Enable Register of the Standard Event Status Register. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Standard Event Status Register Query Queries and clears the standard event status event register. (This is a destructive read.) The value returned is a hexadecimal number that reflects the current state (0/1) of all the bits in the register. Remote Command *ESR? Example *ESR? Returns a 1 if there is either a query or command error, otherwise it returns a zero. Notes For related commands, see the STATus subsystem commands. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 255 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Standard Event Status Register (bits 0 – 7). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Identification Query Returns a string of instrument identification information. The string will contain the model number, serial number, and firmware revision. The response is organized into four fields separated by commas. The field definitions are as follows: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 157 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands l Manufacturer l Model l Serial number l Firmware version Key Path No equivalent key. See related key System, Show System. Remote Command *IDN? Example *IDN? Returns instrument identification information, such as: Keysight Technologies, N9020A, US01020004, A.01.02 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Operation Complete The *OPC command sets bit 0 in the standard event status register (SER) to “1” when pending operations have finished, that is when all overlapped commands are complete. It does not hold off subsequent operations. You can determine when the overlapped commands have completed either by polling the OPC bit in SER, or by setting up the status system such that a service request (SRQ) is asserted when the OPC bit is set. The *OPC? query returns a “1” after all the current overlapped commands are complete. So it holds off subsequent commands until the "1” is returned, then the program continues. This query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus. Remote Command *OPC *OPC? Example INIT:CONT 0 Selects single sweeping. INIT:IMM Initiates a sweep. *OPC? Holds off any further commands until the sweep is complete. Status Bits/OPC dependencies Not global to all remote ports or front panel. *OPC only considers operation that was initiated on the same port as the *OPC command was issued from. *OPC is an overlapped command, but *OPC? is sequential. Backwards Compatibility Notes 1. The ESA/PSA/VSA products do not meet all the requirements for the *OPC command specified by IEEE 488.2. This is corrected for X-Series. This will sometimes cause behavior that is not backward compatible, but it will work as customers expect. 2. Commands such as, *OPC/*OPC?/*WAI/*RST used to be global. They considered front panel operation in conjunction with the GPIB functionality. Now they are evaluated on a per channel basis. That is, the various rear panel remote ports and the front panel i/o are all considered separately. Only the functionality initiated on the port where the *OPC was sent, is considered for its operation. 3. *OPC used to hold off until the operation bits were cleared. Now it holds off until all overlapping commands are completed. Also, earlier instruments did not wait for completion of all processes, only the ones identified here (in the STATus:OPERation register): Calibrating: monitored by PSA, ESA, VSA (E4406A) 158 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Sweeping: monitored by PSA, ESA, VSA (E4406A) Waiting for Trigger: monitored by PSA, ESA, VSA (E4406A) Measuring: monitored by PSA and ESA (but not in all Modes). Paused: monitored by VSA (E4406A). Printing: monitored by VSA (E4406A). Mass memory busy: monitored by VSA (E4406A). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Query Instrument Options Returns a string of all the installed instrument options. It is a comma separated list with quotes, such as: “503,P03,PFR”. To be IEEE compliant, this command should return an arbitrary ascii variable that would not begin and end with quotes. But the quotes are needed to be backward compatible with previous SA products and software. So, the actual implementation will use arbitrary ascii. But quotes will be sent as the first and last ascii characters that are sent with the comma-separated option list. Remote Command *OPT? Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Recall Instrument State This command recalls the instrument state from the specified instrument memory register. • If the state being loaded has a newer firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, no state is recalled and an error is reported • If the state being loaded has an equal firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, the state will be loaded. • If the state being loaded has an older firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, the instrument will only load the parts of the state that apply to the older revision. Remote Command *RCL <register #> Example *RCL 7 Recalls the instrument state that is currently stored in register 7. Notes Registers 0 through 6 are accessible from the front panel in menu keys for Recall Registers. Min 0 Max 127 Status Bits/OPC dependencies The command is sequential. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 159 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands *RST (Remote Command Only) *RST is equivalent to :SYST:PRES;:INIT:CONT OFF, which is a Mode Preset in the Single measurement state. This remote command is preferred over Mode Preset remote command - :SYST:PRES, as optimal remote programming occurs with the instrument in the single measurement state. Remote Command *RST Example *RST Notes Sequential Clears all pending OPC bits and the Status Byte is set to 0. Couplings A *RST will cause the currently running measurement to be aborted and cause the default measurement to be active. *RST gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set. Backwards Compatibility Notes In legacy analyzers *RST did not set the analyzer to Single, but in the X-Series it does, for compliance with the IEEE 488.2 specification. In the X-Series, *RST does not do a *CLS (clear the status bits and the error queue). In legacy analyzers, *RST used to do the equivalent of SYSTem:PRESet, *CLS and INITiate:CONTinuous OFF. But to be 488.2 compliant, *RST in the X-Series does not do a *CLS. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Save Instrument State This command saves the current instrument state and mode to the specified instrument memory register. Remote Command *SAV <register #> Example *SAV 9 Saves the instrument state in register 9. Notes Registers 0 through 6 are accessible from the front panel in menu keys for Save Registers. Min 0 Max 127 Status Bits/OPC dependencies The command is sequential. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Service Request Enable This command enables the desired bits of the service request enable register. The query returns the value of the register, indicating which bits are currently enabled. Remote Command *SRE <integer> *SRE? 160 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Example *SRE 22 Enables bits 1, 2, and 4 in the service request enable register. Notes For related commands, see the STATus subsystem and SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? commands. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 255 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Service Request Enable Register (all bits, 0 – 7). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Status Byte Query Returns the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents. Remote Command *STB? Example *STB? Returns a decimal value for the bits in the status byte register. For example, if a 16 is returned, it indicates that bit 5 is set and one of the conditions monitored in the standard event status register is set. Notes See related command *CLS. Status Bits/OPC dependencies Status Byte Register (all bits, 0 – 7). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Trigger This command triggers the instrument. Use the :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce command to select the trigger source. Key Path No equivalent key. See related keys Single and Restart. Remote Command *TRG Example *TRG Triggers the instrument to take a sweep or start a measurement, depending on the current instrument settings. Notes See related command :INITiate:IMMediate. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Self Test Query This query performs the internal self-test routines and returns a number indicating the success of the testing. A zero is returned if the test is successful, 1 if it fails. Remote Command *TST? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 161 4 Programming the Instrument IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Example *TST? Runs the self-test routines and returns 0=passed, 1=some part failed. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Wait-to-Continue This command causes the instrument to wait until all overlapped commands are completed before executing any additional commands. There is no query form for the command. Remote Command *WAI Example INIT:CONT OFF; INIT;*WAI Sets the instrument to single sweep. Starts a sweep and waits for its completion. Status Bits/OPC dependencies Not global to all remote ports or front panel. *OPC only considers operation that was initiated on the same port as the *OPC command was issued from. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 162 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions Remote Measurement Functions This section contains the following topics: l "Measurement Group of Commands" on page 163 l "Other Common Measurement Commands" on page 166 l "Data Format Commands" on page 174 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Measurement Group of Commands The Measurement group of commands comprises the "MEASure Command" on page 163, which executes the entire measurement, plus the "CONFigure Commands" on page 164, "FETCh Command" on page 165, "INITiate Command" on page 165 and "READ Command" on page 166, which each accomplish only a part of the overall measurement. FETCh and READ are queries only. You can optimize measurements by creating programs that call MEASure and CONFigure a minimum number of times, and that emphasize repeated READ, INITiate, and FETCh commands. The diagram below illustrates the interactions between the Measurement family of commands: MEASure, CONFigure, FETCh, INITiate and READ. Not all measurements support all the commands: MEASure, CONFigure, FETCh, INITiate and READ. For measurement-specific information, see the introductory description for each measurement in the User’s and Programmer’s References or online Help. MEASure Command :MEASure:<measurement>[n]? This is a fast single-command way to make a measurement using the factory default instrument settings. These are the settings and units that conform to the Mode Setup settings (e.g. Radio Standard) that you Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 163 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions have currently selected. Sending this query: l Stops the current measurement (if any) and sets up the instrument for the specified measurement using the factory defaults, l Initiates the data acquisition for the measurement, l Blocks other SCPI communication, waiting until the measurement is complete before returning results, l l Turns on averaging (if the function does averaging), and sets the number of averages to 10, 25, or 50, depending upon the current measurement, After the data is valid, returns the scalar results, or the trace data, for the specified measurement. The type of data returned may be defined by an [n] value that is sent with the command. If the optional [n] parameter is not included, or is set to 1, the scalar measurement results are returned. If the [n] parameter is set to a value other than 1, the selected trace data results are returned. For details of the types of scalar results or trace data results that are available, see the introductory description for each measurement in the User’s and Programmer’s References or online Help. ASCII is the default format for the data output. The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are more compact than the ASCII format. Refer to "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174 for more information. If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settings, you can set up the measurement with the CONFigure command. Use the commands in the SENSe:<measurement> and CALCulate:<measurement> subsystems to change the settings. Then, use the READ? command to initiate the measurement and query the results. If you need to repeatedly make a given measurement with settings other than the factory defaults, you can use the commands in the SENSe:<measurement> and CALCulate:<measurement> subsystems to set up the measurement. Then, use the READ? command to initiate the measurement and query results. Measurement settings persist if you initiate a different measurement and then return to a previous one. If you want to use those persistent settings, use READ:<measurement>?. If you want to use the default settings, use MEASure:<measurement>?. CONFigure Commands :CONFigure:<measurement> This command stops the current measurement (if any) and sets up the instrument for the specified measurement using the factory default instrument settings. It does not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INITiate:CONTinuous is ON. If you change any measurement settings after using the CONFigure command, the READ command can be used to initiate a measurement without changing the settings back to their defaults. In the Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer mode, the CONFigure command also turns the averaging function on and sets the number of averages to 10 for all measurements. 164 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions :CONFigure: <measurement>: NDEFault Stops the current measurement and changes to the specified measurement. It does not change the settings to the defaults. It does not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INITiate:CONTinuous is ON. CONFigure? Returns the current measurement name. CONFigure:CATalog? Returns a quoted string of all licensed measurement names in the current mode. For example, "SAN, CHP, OBW, ACP, PST, TXP, SPUR, SEM, LIST". FETCh Command :FETCh:<measurement>[n]? This command puts selected data from the most recent measurement into the output buffer. Use FETCh if you have already made a good measurement and you want to return several types of data (different [n] values, for example, both scalars and trace data) from a single measurement. FETCh saves you the time of re-making the measurement. You can only FETCh results from the measurement that is currently active, it will not change to a different measurement. An error message is reported if a measurement other than the current one is specified. If you need to get new measurement data, use the READ command, which is equivalent to an INITiate followed by a FETCh. The scalar measurement results will be returned if the optional [n] value is not included, or is set to 1. If the [n] value is set to a value other than 1, the selected trace data results will be returned. See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available. The binary data formats should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII format. (FORMat:DATA) FETCh may be used to return results other than those specified with the original READ or MEASure command that you sent. INITiate Command :INITiate:<measurement> This command is not available for measurements in all the instrument modes. l l Initiates a trigger cycle for the specified measurement, but does not output any data. You must then use the FETCh<meas> command to return data. If a measurement other than the current one is specified, the instrument will switch to that measurement and then initiate it. For example, suppose you have previously initiated the ACP measurement, but now you are running the channel power measurement. If you send INIT:ACP? it will change from channel power to ACP and will initiate an ACP measurement. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 165 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions l l Does not change any of the measurement settings. For example, if you have previously started the ACP measurement and you send INIT:ACP? it will initiate a new ACP measurement using the same instrument settings as the last time ACP was run. If your selected measurement is currently active (in the idle state) it triggers the measurement, assuming the trigger conditions are met. Then it completes one trigger cycle. Depending upon the measurement and the number of averages, there may be multiple data acquisitions, with multiple trigger events, for one full trigger cycle. It also holds off additional commands on GPIB until the acquisition is complete. READ Command :READ:<measurement>[n]? l l Does not preset the measurement to the factory default settings. For example, if you have previously initiated the ACP measurement and you send READ:ACP?, a new measurement is initiated using the same instrument settings. Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer. If a measurement other than the current one is specified, the instrument switches to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results. For example, suppose you have previously initiated the ACP measurement, but now you are running the Channel Power measurement. If you then send READ:ACPower?, the measurement changes from Channel Power back to ACP and, using the previous ACP settings, the measurement is initiated and results are returned. l Blocks other SCPI communication, waiting until the measurement is complete before returning the results If the optional [n] value is not included, or is set to 1, the scalar measurement results are returned. If the [n] value is set to a value other than 1, the selected trace data results are returned. For details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available, see the introductory description for each measurement in the User’s and Programmer’s References or online Help. The binary data formats should be used when handling large blocks of data since they are more compact than the ASCII format (for details, see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Other Common Measurement Commands This group includes commands that affect or apply to all modes and measurements. It comprises the following commands: l "Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only) " on page 167 l "Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only)" on page 167 166 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions l "Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167 l "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167 l "Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 172 Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only) This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running. Remote Command :CONFigure? Example CONF? Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only) Queries the status of the current measurement limit testing. l Returns a 0 if the measured results pass when compared with the current limits. l Returns a 1 if the measured results fail any limit tests. Remote Command :CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? Example CALC:CLIM:FAIL? queries the current measurement to check whether it fails the defined limits. Returns 0 (pass) or 1 (fail). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Data Query (Remote Command Only) Returns the designated measurement data for the currently selected measurement and subopcode. l n = any valid subopcode for the current measurement. See the measurement command results table for your current measurement, for information about what data is returned for the subopcodes. This command uses the data setting specified by the FORMat:BORDer (see "Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175) and FORMat:DATA (see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174) commands, and can return real or ASCII data. Remote Command :CALCulate:DATA[n]? Notes The return trace depends on the selected measurement. n is any valid subopcode for the current measurement. This query returns the same data as FETCh:<meas>?, where <meas> is the current measurement. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only) Returns compressed data for the currently selected measurement and sub-opcode [n]. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 167 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions l n = any valid sub-opcode for that measurement. See the MEASure:<measurement>? command description of your specific measurement for information on the data that can be returned. The data is returned in the current Y Axis Unit of the instrument. The command is used with a sub-opcode <n> (default=1) to specify the trace. With trace queries, it is best if the instrument is not sweeping during the query. Therefore, it is generally advisable to be in Single Sweep, or Update=Off. This command is used to compress or decimate a long trace to extract and return only the desired data. A typical example would be to acquire N frames of GSM data and return the mean power of the first burst in each frame. The command can also be used to identify the best curve fit for the data. Remote Command :CALCulate:DATA<n>:COMPress? BLOCk | CFIT | MAXimum | MINimum | MEAN | DMEan | RMS | RMSCubed | SAMPle | SDEViation | PPHase [,<soffset> [,<length>[,<roffset>[,<rlimit>]]]] Example To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts: l Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts. l Select the IQ Waveform measurement (in IQ Analyzer Mode). l Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst. l Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position relative to a burst. l Notes Then query the mean burst levels using, CALC:DATA2:COMP? MEAN, 24e–6, 526e–6 (These parameter values correspond to GSM signals, where 526e–6 is the length of the burst in the slot and you just want 1 burst.) The command supports 5 parameters. Note that the last 4 (<soffset>,<length>,<roffset>,<rlimit>) are optional. But these optional parameters must be entered in the specified order. For example, if you want to specify <length>, then you must also specify <soffset>. See details below for a definition of each of these parameters. This command uses the data in the format specified by FORMat:DATA, returning either binary or ASCII data. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Option Description BLOCk Block data Returns all the data points from the region of the trace data that you specify. For example, it could be used to return the data points of an input signal over several timeslots, excluding the portions of the trace data that you do not want. (The points are x,y pairs for trace data, or I,Q pairs for complex data.) CFIT Curve fit Applies curve fitting routines to the data. <soffset> and <length> are required to define the data that you want. <roffset> is an optional parameter for the desired order of the curve equation. The query returns the following values: the x-offset (in seconds) and the curve coefficients ((order + 1) values). MINimum ("Note 1" on page 171) MAXimum 168 Returns the minimum data point (y value) for the specified region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the minimum magnitude of the I/Q pairs is returned. Returns the maximum data point (y value) for the specified region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions Option ("Note 1" on page 171) MEAN ("Note 1" on page 171) Description maximum magnitude of the I/Q pairs is returned. Returns a single value that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values (in dB/ dBm) for the specified region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the mean of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned. See the following equations. If the original trace data is in dB, this function returns the arithmetic mean of those log values, not log of the mean power which is a more useful value. The mean of the log is the better measurement technique when measuring CW signals in the presence of noise. The mean of the power, expressed in dB, is useful in power measurements such as Channel Power. To achieve the mean of the power, use the RMS option. Equation 1: Mean Value of Data Points for Specified Region(s) where Xi is a data point value, and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). Equation 2: Mean Value of I/Q Data Pairs for Specified Region(s) where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, and n is the number of I/Q pairs in the specified region(s). DMEan ("Note 1" on page 171) RMS ("Note 1" on page 171) Returns a single value that is the mean power (in dB/ dBm) of the data point values for the specified region (s) of trace data. See the following equation: Equation 3: DMEan Value of Data Points for Specified Region(s) Returns a single value that is the average power on a root-mean-squared voltage scale (arithmetic rms) of the data point values for the specified region(s) of trace data. See the following equation. For I/Q trace data, the rms of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned. See the following equation. This function is very useful for I/Q trace data. However, if the original trace data is in dB, this function returns the rms of the log values which is not usually needed. Equation 4: RMS Value of Data Points for Specified Region(s) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 169 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions Option Description where Xi is a data point value, and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). Equation 5: RMS Value of I/Q Data Pairs for Specified Region(s) where Xi is the complex value representation of an I/Q pair, Xi* its conjugate complex number, and n is the number of I/Q pairs in the specified region(s). Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data (linear or I/Q), you may want to calculate the mean power. You must convert this rms value (peak volts) to power in dBm: SAMPle ("Note 1" on page 171) SDEViation ("Note 1" on page 171) Returns the first data value (x,y pair) for the specified region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the first I/Q pair is returned. Returns a single value that is the arithmetic standard deviation for the data point values for the specified region(s) of trace data. See the following equation. For I/Q trace data, the standard deviation of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned. See the following equation. Equation 6: Standard Deviation of Data Point Values for Specified Region(s) where Xi is a data point value, X is the arithmetic mean of the data point values for the specified region(s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, X is the mean of the magnitudes for the specified region(s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). PPHase ("Note 1" on page 171) Returns the x,y pairs of both rms power (dBm) and arithmetic mean phase (radian) for every specified region and frequency offset (Hz). The number of pairs is defined by the specified number of regions. This parameter can be used for I/Q vector (n=0) in Waveform (time domain) measurement and all parameters are specified by data point in PPHase. The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as: 170 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions Option Description Power = 10 x log [10 x (RMS I/Q value)] + 10. The RMS I/Q value (peak volts) is: where Xi is the complex value representation of an I/Q pair, Xi* its conjugate complex number, and n is the number of I/Q pairs in the specified region. The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as: where Yi is the unwrapped phase of I/Q pair with applying frequency correction and n is the number of I/Q pairs in the specified region. The frequency correction is made by the frequency offset calculated by the arithmetic mean of every specified region’s frequency offset. Each frequency offset is calculated by the least square method against the unwrapped phase of I/Q pair. Note 1 MIN, MAX, MEAN, DME, RMS, RMSC, SAMP, SDEV and PPH return one data value for each specified region (or "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167) of trace data, for as many regions as possible until you run out of trace data (using "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167 to specify regions). Alternatively, they return the number of regions you specify (using "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167), ignoring any data beyond that. Sample Trace Data Constant Envelope See table below for explanation of variables. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 171 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions Non-Constant Envelope See table below for explanation of variables. Variable Description <soffset> Start Offset is an optional real number. Its unit is seconds for time-domain traces, or a dimensionless index (0 to Npoints – 1) for frequency-domain traces. It specifies the amount of data at the beginning of the trace that will be ignored before the decimation process starts. It is the time or frequency change from the start of the trace to the point where you want to start using the data. The default value is zero. <length> An optional real number. Its unit is seconds for time-domain traces, or a dimensionless index (0 to Npoints – 1) for frequency-domain traces. It defines how much data will be compressed into one value. This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length. <roffset> Repeat Offset is an optional real number. Its unit is seconds for time-domain traces, or a dimensionless index (0 to Npoints – 1) for frequency-domain traces. It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed. This is relative to the beginning of the previous field. This parameter has a default value equal to the <length> variable. Note that this parameter is used for a completely different purpose when curve fitting (see "CFIT" on page 168 above). <rlimit> Repeat Limit is an optional integer. It specifies the number of data items that you want returned, and ignores any additional items beyond that number. You can use the Start Offset and the Repeat Limit to pick out exactly which part of the data you want to use. The default value is all the data. Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Returns a list of all the peaks for the currently selected measurement and subopcode [n]. The peaks must meet the requirements of the peak threshold and excursion values. l n = any valid subopcode for the current measurement. See the MEASure:<measurement> command description of your specific measurement for information on the data that can be returned. The command can only be used with specific subopcodes, and with measurement results that are trace data. Both real and complex traces can be searched, but complex traces are converted to magnitude 172 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions in dBm. In many measurements, specifying subopcode n=0 retrieves the raw trace data, which cannot be searched for peaks. Specifying subopcode n=1 typically retrieves calculated results values, which also cannot be searched for peaks. This command uses the data setting specified by the FORMat:BORDer (see "Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175) and FORMat:DATA (see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174) commands and can return real or ASCII data. If the format is set to INT,32, it returns REAL,32 data. The command has four types of parameters: l Threshold (in dBm) l Excursion (in dB) l Sorting order (amplitude, frequency, time) l Optional in some measurements: Display line use (all, > display line, < display line) Remote Command For Swept SA measurement: :CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|...6:PEAKs? <threshold>,<excursion>[,AMPLitude | FREQuency | TIME[,ALL | GTDLine | LTDLine]] For most other measurements: :CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|...6:PEAKs? <threshold>,<excursion>[,AMPLitude | FREQuency | TIME] Example Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode: CALC:DATA4:PEAK? –40, 10, FREQ, GTDL This identifies the peaks of trace 4 that are above –40 dBm, with excursions of at least 10 dB. The peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency, starting with the lowest frequency. Only the peaks that are above the display line are returned. Query Results 1: With FORMat:DATA REAL, 32 selected, returns a list of floating-point numbers. The first value in the list is the number of peak points that are in the following list. A peak point consists of two values: a peak amplitude followed by its corresponding frequency (or time). If no peaks are found, then the peak list consists of only the number of peaks, (0). Notes l l l <n> - is the trace that will be used <threshold> - is the level below which trace data peaks are ignored. Note that the threshold value is required and is always used as a peak criterion. To effectively disable the threshold criterion for this command, provide a substantially low threshold value such as –200 dBm. Also note that the threshold value used in this command is independent of and has no effect on the threshold value stored under the Peak Criteria menu. <excursion> - is the minimum amplitude variation (rise and fall) required for a signal to be identified as peak. Note that the excursion value is required and is always used as a peak criterion. To effectively disable the excursion criterion for this command, provide the minimum value of 0.0 dB. Also note that the excursion value used in this command is independent of and has no effect on the excursion value stored under the Peak Criteria menu. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 173 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions Values must be provided for threshold and excursion, but the sorting and display line parameters are optional (defaults are AMPLitude and ALL). Note that there is always a Y-axis value for the display line, regardless of whether the display line state is on or off. It is the current Y-axis value of the display line, which is used by this command to determine whether a peak should be reported. l Sorting order: l l Initial S/W Revision AMPLitude - lists the peaks in order of descending amplitude, with the highest peak first (default if optional parameter not sent) l FREQuency - lists the peaks in order of occurrence, left to right across the x-axis. l TIME - lists the peaks in order of occurrence, left to right across the x-axis. Peaks vs. Display Line: l ALL - lists all of the peaks found (default if optional parameter not sent). l GTDLine (greater than display line) - lists all of the peaks found above the display line. l LTDLine (less than display line) - lists all of the peaks found below the display line. Prior to A.02.00 Data Format Commands This group includes commands that control the formatting of data transfers between the instrument and the controller. It comprises the following commands: l "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174 l "Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175 Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only) This command specifies the format of the trace data input and output. It specifies the formats used for trace data during data transfer across any remote port. It affects only the data format for setting and querying trace data for the :TRACe[:DATA], TRACe[:DATA]?, :CALCulate:DATA[n]? and FETCh:SANalyzer [n]? commands and queries. Remote Command :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ASCii|INTeger,32|REAL,32 |REAL,64 :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]? Notes The query response is: ASCii: ASC,8 REAL,32: REAL,32 REAL,64: REAL,64 INTeger,32: INT,32 When the numeric data format is REAL or ASCii, data is output in the current Y Axis unit. When the data format is INTeger, data is output in units of m dBm (.001 dBm). 174 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions The INT,32 format returns binary 32-bit integer values in internal units (m dBm), in a definite length block. Dependencies Sending a data format spec with an invalid number (for example, INT,48) generates no error. The analyzer simply uses the default (8 for ASCii, 32 for INTeger, 32 for REAL). Sending data to the analyzer which does not conform to the current FORMat specified, results in an error. Sending ASCII data when a definite block is expected generates message –161 "Invalid Block Data" and sending a definite block when ASCII data is expected generates message –121 "Invalid Character in Number". Preset ASCii Backwards Compatibility Notes Note that the INT,32 format is only applicable to the command, TRACe:DATA. This preserves backwards compatibility for the Swept SA measurement. For all other commands/queries which honor FORMat:DATA, if INT,32 is sent the analyzer will behave as though it were set to REAL,32. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 The specs for each output type follow: l ASCii - Amplitude values are in ASCII, in the current Y Axis Unit, one ASCII character per digit, values separated by commas, each value in the form: SX.YYYYYEsZZ Where: l S = sign (+ or -) l X = one digit to left of decimal point l Y = 5 digits to right of decimal point l E = E, exponent header l s = sign of exponent (+ or -) l ZZ = two digit exponent l REAL,32 - Binary 32-bit real values in the current Y Axis Unit, in a definite length block. l REAL,64 - Binary 64-bit real values in the current Y Axis Unit, in a definite length block. Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only) This command selects the binary data byte order for data transfer and other queries. It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode. This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the :TRACe[:DATA], TRACe[:DATA]? , :CALCulate:DATA[n]? and FETCh:SANalyzer[n]? commands and queries. By definition, any command that is dependent on FORMat:DATA uses any format supported by FORMat:DATA. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 175 4 Programming the Instrument Remote Measurement Functions l l NORMal order begins with the most significant byte (MSB) first, and ends with the least significant byte (LSB) last, in the sequence: 1|2|3|4. SWAPped order begins with the LSB first, and ends with the MSB last, in the sequence: 4|3|2|1. Remote Command :FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped :FORMat:BORDer? Preset NORMal Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 176 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem STATus Subsystem The following diagram provides a graphical overview of the entire X-Series Status Register System. For readability, the diagram is split into two sections: l "X-Series Status Register System (1) " on page 178 l "X-Series Status Register System (2) " on page 179 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 177 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem X-Series Status Register System (1) 178 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem X-Series Status Register System (2) Detailed Description The STATus subsystem remote commands set and query the status hardware registers. This system of registers monitors various events and conditions in the instrument. Software written to control the instrument may need to monitor some of these events and conditions. All status register commands are sequential. Most commands can be started immediately and will overlap with any existing commands that are already running. This is not true of status commands. All the commands in the spectrum analyzer are assumed to be overlapped unless a command description specifically says that it is sequential. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 179 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem What Are Status Registers The status system contains multiple registers that are arranged in a hierarchical order. The lower-level status registers propagate their data to the higher-level registers in the data structures by means of summary bits. The status byte register is at the top of the hierarchy and contains general status information for the instrument’s events and conditions. All other individual registers are used to determine the specific events or conditions. For a diagram of the registers and their interconnections, see above. The operation and questionable status registers are sets of registers that monitor the overall instrument condition. They are accessed with the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable commands in the STATus command subsystem. Each register set is made up of five registers: l l l l l Condition Register Reports the real-time state of the signals monitored by this register set. There is no latching or buffering for a condition register. Positive Transition Register This filter register controls which signals will set a bit in the event register when the signal makes a low to high transition (when the condition bit changes from 0 to 1). Negative Transition Register This filter register controls which signals will set a bit in the event register when the signal makes a high to low transition (when the condition bit changes from 1 to 0). Event Register Latches any signal state changes, in the way specified by the filter registers. Bits in the event register are never cleared by signal state changes. Event registers are cleared when read. They are also cleared by *CLS and by presetting the instrument. Event Enable Register Controls which of the bits, being set in the event register, will be summarized as a single output for the register set. Summary bits are then used by the next higher register. The STATus:QUEStionable registers report abnormal operating conditions. The status register hierarchy is: 1. The summary outputs from the six STATus:QUEStionable:<keyword> detail registers are inputs to the STATus:QUEStionable register. 2. The summary output from the STATus:QUEStionable register is an input to the Status Byte Register. See the overall system diagram in "STATus Subsystem " on page 177. The STATus:OPERation register set has no summarized inputs. The inputs to the STATus:OPERation:CONDition register indicates the real time state of the instrument. The STATus:OPERation:EVENt register summary output is an input to the Status Byte Register. What Are Status Register SCPI Commands Most monitoring of the instrument conditions is done at the highest level using the IEEE common commands indicated below. Complete command descriptions can be found in the section "IEEE 488.2 Common Commands" on page 154. Individual status registers can be set and queried using the commands described in "STATus Subsystem Command Descriptions" on page 191. l 180 *CLS (clear status) clears the status byte by emptying the error queue and clearing all the event registers. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem l l l l *ESE, *ESE? (event status enable) sets and queries the bits in the enable register part of the standard event status register. *ESR? (event status register) queries and clears the event register part of the standard event status register. *OPC, *OPC? (operation complete) sets the standard event status register to monitor the completion of all commands. The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current processing is complete, then returns a ‘1’. *PSC, *PSC? (power-on state clear) sets the power-on state so that it clears the service request enable register and the event status enable register at power on. l *SRE, *SRE? (service request enable) sets and queries the value of the service request enable register. l *STB? (status byte) queries the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents. How to Use the Status Registers A program often needs to be able to detect and manage error conditions or changes in instrument status. There are two methods you can use to programmatically access the information in status registers: l The polling method l The service request (SRQ) method In the polling method, the instrument has a passive role. It only tells the controller that conditions have changed when the controller asks the right question. In the SRQ method, the instrument takes a more active role. It tells the controller when there has been a condition change without the controller asking. Either method allows you to monitor one or more conditions. The polling method works well if you do not need to know about changes the moment they occur. The SRQ method should be used if you must know immediately when a condition changes. To detect a change using the polling method, the program must repeatedly read the registers. Use the SRQ method when: l you need time-critical notification of changes l you are monitoring more than one device which supports SRQs l you need to have the controller do something else while waiting l you can’t afford the performance penalty inherent to polling Use polling when: l l your programming language/development environment does not support SRQ interrupts you want to write a simple, single-purpose program and don’t want the added complexity of setting up an SRQ handler Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 181 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem To monitor a condition: a. Determine which register contains the bit that reports the condition. b. Send the unique SCPI query that reads that register. c. Examine the bit to see if the condition has changed. You can monitor conditions in different ways. l Check the current instrument hardware and firmware status. Do this by querying the condition registers which continuously monitor status. These registers represent the current state of the instrument. Bits in a condition register are updated in real time. When the condition monitored by a particular bit becomes true, the bit is set to 1. When the condition becomes false, the bit is reset to 0. l Monitor a particular condition (bit). You can enable a particular bit(s), using the event enable register. The instrument will then monitor that particular condition(s). If the bit becomes true (0 to 1 transition) in the event register, it will stay set until the event register is cleared. Querying the event register allows you to detect that this condition occurred even if the condition no longer exists. The event register can only be cleared by querying it or sending the *CLS command. l Monitor a particular type of change in a condition (bit). l The transition registers are preset to register if the condition goes from 0 to 1 (false to true, or a positive transition), l l l This can be changed so the selected condition is detected if the bit goes from 1 to 0 (true to false, or a negative transition), It can also be set for both types of transitions occurring, Or it can be set for neither transition. If both transition registers are set to 0 for a particular bit position, that bit will not be set in the event register for either type of change. Using a Status Register Each bit in a register is represented by a numerical value based on its location. See figure below. This number is sent with the command to enable a particular bit. If you want to enable more than one bit, you would send the sum of all the bits that you want to monitor. Figure: Status Register Bit Values 182 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Bit 15 is not used to report status. Example 1: 1. To enable bit 0 and bit 6 of standard event status register, you would send the command *ESE 65 because 1 + 64 = 65. 2. The results of a query are evaluated in a similar way. If the *STB? command returns a decimal value of 140, (140 = 128 + 8 + 4) then bit 7 is true, bit 3 is true and bit 2 is true. Example 2: 1. Suppose you want to know if an Auto-trigger Timeout occurs, but you only cared about that specific condition. So you would want to know what was happening with bit 10 in the Status Questionable Integrity register, and not about any other bits. 2. It’s usually a good idea to start by clearing all the status registers with *CLS. 3. Sending the STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 1024 command lets you monitor only bit 10 events, instead of the default monitoring all the bits in the register. The register default is for positive transition events (0 to 1 transition). That is, when an auto-trigger timeout occurs. If instead, you wanted to know when the Auto-trigger timeout condition is cleared, then you would set STAT:QUES:INT:PTR 0 and STAT:QUES:INT:NTR 32767. 4. So now the only output from the Status Questionable Integrity register will come from a bit 10 positive transition. That output goes to the Integrity Sum bit 9 of the Status Questionable register. 5. You can do a similar thing with this register to only look at bit 9, using STAT:QUES:ENAB 512. 6. The Status Questionable register output goes to the “Status Questionable Summary” bit 3 of the Status Byte Register. The output from this register can be enabled using the *SRE 8 command. 7. Finally, you would use the serial polling functionality available for the particular bus/software that you are using to monitor the Status Byte Register. (You could also use *STB? to poll the Status Byte Register.) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 183 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Using the Service Request (SRQ) Method Your language, bus, and programming environment must be able to support SRQ interrupts; for example, BASIC used with VXI–11.3 (GPIB over LAN). When you monitor a condition with the SRQ method, you must: 1. Determine which bit monitors the condition. 2. Determine how that bit reports to the request service (RQS) bit of the status byte. 3. Send SCPI commands to enable the bit that monitors the condition and to enable the summary bits that report the condition to the RQS bit. 4. Enable the controller to respond to service requests. When the condition changes, the instrument sets its RQS bit. The controller is informed of the change as soon as it occurs. As a result, the time the controller would otherwise have used to monitor the condition can be used to perform other tasks. Your program determines how the controller responds to the SRQ. Generating a Service Request To use the SRQ method, you must understand how service requests are generated. Bit 6 of the status byte register is the request service (RQS) bit. The *SRE command is used to configure the RQS bit to report changes in instrument status. When such a change occurs, the RQS bit is set. It is cleared when the status byte register is queried using *SRE? (with a serial poll.) It can be queried without erasing the contents with *STB?. When a register set causes a summary bit in the status byte to change from 0 to 1, the instrument can initiate the service request (SRQ) process. However, the process is only initiated if both of the following conditions are true: l l The corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1. The instrument does not have a service request pending. (A service request is considered to be pending between the time the instrument’s SRQ process is initiated and the time the controller reads the status byte register.) The SRQ process sets the SRQ true. It also sets the status byte’s request service (RQS) bit to 1. Both actions are necessary to inform the controller that the instrument requires service. Setting the SRQ line only informs the controller that some device on the bus requires service. Setting the RQS bit allows the controller to determine which instrument requires service. If your program enables the controller to detect and respond to service requests, it should instruct the controller to perform a serial poll when the SRQ is set true. Each device on the bus returns the contents of its status byte register in response to this poll. The device who's RQS bit is set to 1 is the device that requested service. When you read the instrument’s status byte register with a serial poll, the RQS bit is reset to 0. Other bits in the register are not affected. 184 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem If the status register is configured to SRQ on end-of-measurement and the measurement is in continuous mode, then restarting a measurement (INITiate command) can cause the measuring bit to pulse low. This causes an SRQ when you have not actually reached the "end-of-measurement" condition. To avoid this: 1. Set INITiate:CONTinuous off. 2. Set/enable the status registers. 3. Restart the measurement (send INITiate). Status Register System The hardware status registers are combined to form the instrument status system. Specific status bits are assigned to monitor various aspects of the instrument operation and status. See the diagram of the status system above for information about the bit assignments and status register interconnections. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 185 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem The Status Byte Register The RQS bit is read and reset by a serial poll. The same bit position (MSS) is read, non-destructively by the *STB? command. If you serial poll bit 6 it is read as RQS, but if you send *STB it reads bit 6 as MSS. For more information refer to Section 11 of IEEE Standard 488.2–1992. 186 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Bit Description 0, 1 These bits are always set to 0. 2 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the SCPI error queue is not empty which means that it contains at least one error message. 3 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the data questionable summary bit has been set. The data questionable event register can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set. 4 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument has data ready in the output queue. There are no lower status groups that provide input to this bit. 5 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the standard event summary bit has been set. The standard event status register can then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set. 6 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument has at least one reason to report a status change. This bit is also called the master summary status bit (MSS). 7 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the standard operation summary bit has been set. The standard operation event register can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set. To query the Status Byte register, send the command *STB? The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1. For example, if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8, so the decimal value 136 is returned. The *STB command does not clear the status register. In addition to the Status Byte register, the status byte group also contains the Service Request Enable register. This register lets you choose which bits in the Status Byte register will trigger a service request. Send the *SRE <integer> command where <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable plus the decimal value of bit 6. For example, assume that you want to enable bit 7 so that whenever the standard operation status register summary bit is set to 1 it will trigger a service request. Send the command *SRE 192 (because 192 = 128 + 64). You must always add 64 (the numeric value of RQS bit 6) to your numeric sum when you enable any bits for a service request. The query *SRE? returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the *SRE <integer> command. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 187 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem The service request enable register presets to zeros (0). Standard Event Status Register The Standard Event Status register contains the following bits: 188 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Bit Description 0 A 1 in this bit position indicates that all pending operations were completed following execution of the *OPC command. 1 This bit is for GPIB handshaking to request control. Currently it is set to 0 because there are no implementations where the spectrum analyzer controls another instrument. 2 A 1 in this bit position indicates that a query error has occurred. Query errors have SCPI error numbers from –499 to –400. 3 A 1 in this bit position indicates that a device dependent error has occurred. Device dependent errors have SCPI error numbers from –399 to –300 and 1 to 32767. 4 A 1 in this bit position indicates that an execution error has occurred. Execution errors have SCPI error numbers from –299 to –200. 5 A 1 in this bit position indicates that a command error has occurred. Command errors have SCPI error numbers from –199 to –100. 6 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the Local key has been pressed. This is true even if the instrument is in local lockout mode. 7 A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument has been turned off and then on. The Standard Event Status register is used to determine the specific event that set bit 5 in the Status Byte register. To query the Standard Event Status register, send *ESR?. The response will be the decimal sum of the bits that are enabled (set to 1). For example, if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are enabled, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8, so the decimal value 136 is returned. In addition to the Standard Event Status register, the standard event status group also contains a Standard Event Status Enable register. This register lets you choose which bits in the Standard Event Status register will set the summary bit (bit 5 of the status byte register) to 1. Send the *ESE <integer> command where <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. For example, to enable bit 7 and bit 6 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1, the standard event status summary Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 189 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem bit of the status byte register will be set to 1, send the command *ESE 192 (128 + 64). The query *ESE? returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the *ESE <integer> command. The Standard Event Status Enable register presets to zeros (0). Operation and Questionable Status Registers The Operation and Questionable Status registers monitor the overall instrument condition. They are accessed with the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable commands in the STATus command subsystem. See the diagram in "STATus Subsystem " on page 177. Operation Status Register The Operation Status register monitors the current instrument measurement state. It checks to see if the instrument is calibrating, sweeping, or waiting for a trigger. For more information see *OPC? located in the section "IEEE 488.2 Common Commands" on page 154. Bit Condition Operation 0 Calibrating The instrument is busy executing its Align Now process 3 Sweeping The instrument is busy taking a sweep. 4 Measuring The instrument is busy making a measurement. Measurements often require multiple sweeps. They are initiated by keys under the Meas key or with the MEASure group of commands. The bit is valid for most X-Series Modes. 5 Waiting for trigger The instrument is waiting for the trigger conditions to be met, then it will trigger a sweep or measurement. Questionable Status Register The Questionable Status register monitors the instrument’s condition to see if anything questionable has happened to it. It is looking for anything that might cause an error or a bad measurement like a hardware problem, an out of calibration situation, or a unusual signal. All the bits are summary bits from lower-level event registers. 190 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Bit Condition Operation 3 Power summary The instrument hardware has detected a power unleveled condition. 4 Temperature summary The instrument is still warming up. 5 Frequency summary The instrument hardware has detected an unlocked condition or a problem with the external frequency reference. 8 Calibration summary The instrument has detected a hardware problem while doing the automatic internal alignment process. 9 Integrity summary The instrument has detected a questionable measurement condition such as: bad timing, bad signal/data, timeout problem, signal overload, or “meas uncal”. STATus Subsystem Command Descriptions The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI-defined instrument status reporting structures. Each status register has a set of five commands used for querying or masking that particular register. Numeric values for bit patterns can be entered using decimal or hexadecimal representations, that is, decimal values 0 to 32767, which are equivalent to hexadecimal values #H0 to #H7FFF.) Operation Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Operation Condition Query" on page 191 l "Operation Enable" on page 192 l "Operation Event Query" on page 192 l "Operation Negative Transition" on page 193 l "Operation Positive Transition" on page 193 Operation Condition Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Status Operation Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? Example STAT:OPER:COND? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 191 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Operation Enable This command determines which bits in the Operation Event register, will set the Operation Status Summary bit (bit 7) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. The preset condition is to have all bits in this enable register set to 0. To have any Operation Events reported to the Status Byte Register, one or more bits need to be set to 1. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer> :STATus:OPERation:ENABle? Example STAT:OPER:ENAB 1 Sets the register so that Align Now operation will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Operation Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? Example STAT:OPER? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 192 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Operation Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition? Example STAT:OPER:NTR 1 Align Now operation complete will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Operation Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer> :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition? Example STAT:OPER:PTR 1 Align Now operation beginning will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Preset the Status Byte Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default state. Presets all the Transition Filters, Enable Registers, and the Error/Event Queue Enable. Has no effect on Event Registers, Error/Event Queue, IEEE 488.2 ESE, and SRE Registers as described in IEEE Standard 488.2–1992. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 193 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Remote Command :STATus:PRESet Example STAT:PRES Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Condition " on page 194 l "Questionable Enable " on page 194 l "Questionable Event Query " on page 195 l "Questionable Negative Transition " on page 195 l "Questionable Positive Transition" on page 196 Questionable Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Event register will set the Questionable Status Summary bit (bit3) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. The preset condition is all bits in this enable register set to 0. To have any Questionable Events reported to the Status Byte Register, one or more bits need to be set to 1. The Status Byte Event Register should be queried after each measurement to check the Questionable Status Summary (bit 3). If it is equal to 1, a condition during the test may have made the test results invalid. If it is equal to 0, this indicates that no hardware problem or measurement problem was detected by the analyzer. 194 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 16 :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle? Example STAT:OPER:PTR 1 Align Now operation beginning will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 16 :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:NTR 16 Temperature summary ‘questionable cleared’ will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 0 Min 0 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 195 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:PTR 16 Temperature summary ‘questionable asserted’ will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Calibration Condition" on page 196 l "Questionable Calibration Enable" on page 197 l "Questionable Calibration Event Query" on page 197 l "Questionable Calibration Negative Transition" on page 198 l "Questionable Calibration Positive Transition" on page 198 Questionable Calibration Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. 196 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register, which also sets the Calibration Summary bit (bit 8) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:ENAB 16384 Can be used to query if an alignment is needed, if you have turned off the automatic alignment process. Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:CAL? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 197 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Questionable Calibration Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:NTR 16384 Alignment is not required. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:PTR 16384 Alignment is required. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition" on page 199 l "Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable" on page 199 198 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem l "Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query" on page 199 l "Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition" on page 200 l "Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition" on page 200 Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register, which also sets bit 11 of the Questionable Calibration Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:ENABle <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:ENABle? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:ENAB 1 Can be used to query if an EMI alignment skipped condition is detected Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 199 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:NTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:NTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:NTR 1 Align RF skipped is not required. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:PTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:PTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:PTR 1 Align RF skipped is required. 200 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition" on page 201 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable" on page 201 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query" on page 202 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition" on page 202 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition" on page 203 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register, which also sets bit 9 of the Questionable Calibration Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:ENABle <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:ENABle? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 201 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:ENAB 1 Can be used to query if an EMI conducted alignment is needed. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:NTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:NTR 1 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:NTRansition? EMI conducted align failure is not required. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command 202 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:PTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:PTR 1 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:PTRansition? EMI conducted align failure is required. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition" on page 203 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable" on page 204 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query" on page 204 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition" on page 205 l "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition" on page 205 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 203 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register, which also sets bit 14 of the Questionable Calibration Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:ENABle <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:ENABle? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:ENAB 2 Can be used to query if an EMI conducted alignment is needed. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 204 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:NTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:NTR 2 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:NTRansition? Align EMI conducted is not required. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:PTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:PTR 2 :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:PTRansition? Align EMI conducted is required. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Frequency Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 205 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem l "Questionable Frequency Condition" on page 206 l "Questionable Frequency Enable" on page 206 l "Questionable Frequency Event Query" on page 207 l "Questionable Frequency Negative Transition" on page 207 l "Questionable Frequency Positive Transition" on page 207 Questionable Frequency Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:FREQ:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Frequency Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register, which also sets the Frequency Summary bit (bit 5) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <integer> Example STAT:QUES:FREQ:ENAB 2 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle? Frequency Reference Unlocked will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 206 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Questionable Frequency Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:FREQ? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Frequency Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:FREQ:NTR 2 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition? Frequency Reference ‘regained lock’ will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Frequency Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 207 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:FREQ:PTR 2 :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition? Frequency Reference ‘became unlocked’ will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Integrity Condition" on page 208 l "Questionable Integrity Enable" on page 209 l "Questionable Integrity Event Query" on page 209 l "Questionable Integrity Negative Transition" on page 209 l "Questionable Integrity Positive Transition" on page 210 Questionable Integrity Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:INT:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 208 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Questionable Integrity Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register, which also sets the Integrity Summary bit (bit 9) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <integer> Example STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 8 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle? Measurement Uncalibrated Summary will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:INT? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0) The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 209 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:INT:NTR 8 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition? Measurement ‘regained calibration’ Summary will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:INT:PTR 8 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition? Measurement ‘became uncalibrated’ Summary will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Signal Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: 210 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem l "Questionable Integrity Signal Condition" on page 211 l "Questionable Integrity Signal Enable" on page 211 l "Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query" on page 212 l "Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition" on page 212 l "Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition" on page 212 Questionable Integrity Signal Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Signal Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register, which also sets the Integrity Summary bit (bit 9) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle? Example STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:ENAB 4 Burst Not Found will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 211 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:NTR 4 Burst found will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition <integer> 212 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:PTR 4 Burst not found will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition" on page 213 l "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable" on page 213 l "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query" on page 214 l "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition" on page 214 l "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition" on page 215 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register, which also sets the Data Uncalibrated Summary bit (bit 3) in the Questionable Integrity Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 213 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle Example STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:ENAB 1 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle? Oversweep (Meas Uncal) will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:INT:UNC? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:NTR 1 214 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Oversweep cleared will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:PTR 1 :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition? Oversweep (Meas Uncal) occurred will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Power Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Power Condition" on page 216 l "Questionable Power Enable" on page 216 l "Questionable Power Event Query" on page 216 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 215 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem l "Questionable Power Negative Transition" on page 217 l "Questionable Power Positive Transition" on page 217 Questionable Power Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:POW:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Power Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Power Event register, which also sets the Power Summary bit (bit 3) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <integer> Example STAT:QUES:POW:ENAB 32 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle? 50 MHz Input Pwr too High for Cal will be reported to the Power Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Power Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Event register. 216 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:POW? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Power Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:POW:NTR 32 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition? 50 MHz Input Power became OK for Cal will be reported to the Power Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Power Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 217 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:POW:PTR 32 :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition?> 50 MHz Input Power became too high for Cal will be reported to the Power Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Temperature Register The following commands and queries are available for this register: l "Questionable Temperature Condition" on page 218 l "Questionable Temperature Enable" on page 219 l "Questionable Temperature Event Query" on page 219 l "Questionable Temperature Negative Transition" on page 219 l "Questionable Temperature Positive Transition" on page 220 Questionable Temperature Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:TEMP:COND? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 218 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Questionable Temperature Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Temperature Event register, which also sets the Temperature Summary bit (bit 4) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle <integer> Example STAT:QUES:TEMP:ENAB 1 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle? Reference Oscillator Oven Cold will be reported to the Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Temperature Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Temperature Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:TEMP? Preset 0 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Temperature Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Temperature Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 219 4 Programming the Instrument STATus Subsystem Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:TEMP:NTR 1 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition? Reference Oscillator Oven not cold will be reported to the Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 0 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Temperature Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Temperature Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable. Mode All Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition <integer> Example STAT:QUES:TEMP:PTR 1 :STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition? Reference Oscillator Oven became cold will be reported to the Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Min 0 Max 32767 Status Bits/OPC dependencies Sequential command Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 220 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands The following table ("Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support" on page 223) lists all legacy analyzer programming commands (that is, commands for 8566A/B, 8568A/B, and the 8560 Series), and indicates which are supported by N9061A. For more detailed information about each supported command, click on the link in the "More Information" column of the table to go to the relevant section in the "Legacy Command Descriptions" on page 251 (SCPI commands supported by N9061A are not listed here; see instead "List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 133.) 221 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series" Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series" The entries in these columns have the following significance: Entry Significance N/A This command is not available in this legacy instrument. No This command is available in this legacy instrument, but is not supported by N9061A. This situation may occur due to architectural differences between legacy and X-Series instruments, which make support of the command either unnecessary or technically unfeasible. Yes This command is available in this legacy instrument, and is supported by N9061A. Ext This is an "extension" command. It is supported by N9061A when emulating this legacy instrument, but does not appear in the native command set of the legacy instrument. 222 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series A1 Clear-writes trace A Yes Yes Yes "A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)" on page 255 A2 Max Holds trace A Yes Yes Yes "A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)" on page 256 A3 View trace A Yes Yes Yes "A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)" on page 257 A4 Blanks trace A Yes Yes Yes "A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)" on page 258 ABORT Interrupt operation of all user-defined functions N/A N/A No ABS Absolute No No No ACP Performs the adjacent channel power measurement N/A N/A N/A ACPACCL Accelerate adjacent channel power measurement N/A N/A No Not required in N9061A, because ACP measurement is faster than in legacy analyzers ACPALPHA Adjacent channel power alpha weighting N/A N/A Yes "ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting)" on page 259 ACPALTCH Adjacent channel power alternate channels N/A N/A Yes "ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)" on page 260 ACPBRPER Adjacent channel power burst period N/A N/A Yes "ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period)" on page 261 ACPBRWID Adjacent channel power burst width N/A N/A Yes "ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width)" on page 262 ACPBW Specifies channel bandwidth for ACP measurement N/A N/A Yes "ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth)" on page 263 ACPCOMPUTE Compute adjacent channel power N/A N/A Yes "ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)" on page 264 ACPCONTM Performs ACP measurement in continuous sweep N/A N/A N/A ACPE Adjacent channel power extended N/A N/A N/A ACPERR ACP measurement error query N/A N/A N/A ACPFRQWT Adjacent channel power frequency weighting N/A N/A Yes Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting)" on page 265 223 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series ACPGR Adjacent channel power graph on or off N/A N/A N/A ACPGRAPH Compute adjacent channel power graph N/A N/A No ACPLOWER Lower adjacent channel power N/A N/A Yes "ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 266 ACPMAX Maximum adjacent channel power N/A N/A Yes "ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 267 ACPMEAS Measure adjacent channel power N/A N/A Yes "ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 268 ACPMETHOD Adjacent channel power measurement method N/A N/A No ACPMK Adjacent channel power marker on or off N/A N/A N/A ACPMSTATE Adjacent channel power measurement state N/A N/A Yes ACPPAR ACP manual or auto N/A N/A N/A ACPPWRTX Total power transmitted N/A N/A Yes "ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted)" on page 271 ACPRSLTS Adjacent channel power measurement results N/A N/A Yes "ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)" on page 272 ACPSNGLM Performs ACP measurement in single sweep N/A N/A N/A ACPSP Channel spacing N/A N/A Yes "ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)" on page 274 ACPT Adjacent channel power T weighting N/A N/A Yes "ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting)" on page 275 ACPUPPER Upper adjacent channel power N/A N/A Yes "ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 276 ACTDEF Give user-defined function active status N/A N/A N/A ACTVF Active function N/A N/A N/A ACTVFUNC Creates a user defined active function N/A N/A No ADD Add No No No ADJALL LO & IF adjustment N/A N/A Yes 224 More Information "ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)" on page 269 "ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)" on page 277 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series ADJCRT Adjust CRT alignment N/A N/A No ADJIF Adjust IF N/A N/A No AMB Trace A - trace B -> trace A Yes Yes Yes "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 278 AMBPL Trace A - trace B + Display Line -> trace A Yes Yes Yes "AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)" on page 279 AMPCOR Applies amplitude correction at specified frequencies N/A N/A No AMPCORDATA Amplitude correction data N/A N/A No AMPCORRCL Amplitude correction recall N/A N/A No AMPCORSAVE Save amplitude correction data N/A N/A No AMPCORSIZE Amplitude correction data array size N/A N/A No AMPLEN Amplitude correction length N/A N/A N/A ANLGPLUS Turns on or off the Analog+ display mode N/A N/A N/A ANNOT Display Annotation Yes Yes Yes "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280 APB Trace A + trace B -> trace A Yes Yes Yes "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 281 ARRAYDEF Defines an array N/A N/A No AT Input Attenuation Yes Yes Yes "AT (Input Attenuation)" on page 282 AUNITS Amplitude Units Yes Yes Yes "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 283 AUTO Auto couple N/A N/A N/A AUTOCPL Auto couple N/A N/A Yes AUTOEXEC Turns on or off the function defined with AUTOFUNC N/A N/A No AUTOFUNC Defines a function for automatic execution N/A N/A No AUTOSAVE Automatically saves trace N/A N/A No AVG Average No No No AXB Exchange Traces A & B Yes Yes Yes Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)" on page 285 "AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" 225 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information on page 286 B1 Clear-writes trace B Yes Yes Yes "B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)" on page 287 B2 Max Holds trace B Yes Yes Yes "B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)" on page 288 B3 View trace B Yes Yes Yes "B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)" on page 289 B4 Blanks trace B Yes Yes Yes "B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)" on page 290 BAUDRATE Baud rate of spectrum analyzer N/A N/A N/A BIT Return or receive state of bit N/A N/A N/A BITF Bit flag N/A N/A N/A BL Trace B - Display line -> trace B Yes Yes N/A "BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)" on page 291 BLANK Blanks specified trace Yes Yes Yes "BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 292 BML Trace B - Display line -> trace B Yes Yes Yes "BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)" on page 293 BRD Bus Read No No N/A BTC Transfer trace B to C Yes Yes N/A BWR Bus Write No No N/A BXC Exchange Traces B & C Yes Yes N/A "BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 295 C1 Turns off A - B Yes Yes Yes "C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)" on page 296 C2 A - B -> A Yes Yes Yes "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page 297 CA Couples Attenuation Yes Yes Yes "CA (Couple Attenuation)" on page 298 CAL Calibrate N/A N/A N/A CARDLOAD Copies data from memory card to module memory N/A N/A No CARDSTORE Copies data to memory card N/A N/A No CARROFF Carrier off power N/A N/A Yes "CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)" on page 299 CARRON Carrier on power N/A N/A Yes "CARRON (Carrier On Power)" on page 300 226 "BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on page 294 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series CAT Catalog N/A N/A N/A CATALOG Catalog N/A N/A No CF Center Frequency Yes Yes Yes "CF (Center Frequency)" on page 301 CHANNEL Channel selection N/A N/A Yes "CHANNEL (Channel Selection)" on page 303 CHANPWR Channel power N/A N/A Yes "CHANPWR (Channel Power)" on page 304 CHP Performs the channel power measurement N/A N/A N/A CHPGR Channel power graph on or off N/A N/A N/A CHPWRBW Channel power bandwidth N/A N/A Yes "CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth)" on page 305 CLRAVG Reset avg. counter to 1 Yes Yes N/A "CLRAVG (Clear Average)" on page 306 CLRBOX Clears a rectangular area on the analyzer display N/A N/A N/A CLRDSP Clear display N/A N/A No CLRSCHED Clears autosave & autoexec schedule buffer N/A N/A No CLRW Clear-writes specified trace Yes Yes Yes CLS Clear status byte N/A N/A N/A CMDERRQ Command error query N/A N/A N/A CNF Confidence test N/A N/A N/A CNTLA Auxiliary interface control line A N/A N/A No CNTLB Auxiliary interface control line B N/A N/A No CNTLC Auxiliary interface control line C N/A N/A No CNTLD Auxiliary interface control line D N/A N/A No CNTLI Auxiliary interface control line input N/A N/A No CNVLOSS Selects ref level offset to calibrate amplitude display No N/A No COMB Turns the comb generator N/A N/A N/A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "CLRW (Clear Write)" on page 307 227 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information on or off COMPRESS Compress No No N/A CONCAT Concat No No N/A CONTS Continuous sweep mode Yes Yes Yes CORREK Correction factors on N/A N/A N/A COUPLE Selects AC or DC coupling N/A N/A Yes "COUPLE (Input Coupling)" on page 310 CR Couples Resolution BW Yes Yes Yes "CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 311 CRTHPOS Horizontal position of CRT display N/A N/A N/A CRTVPOS Vertical position of CRT display N/A N/A N/A CS Couples Step Size Yes Yes N/A "CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)" on page 312 CT Couples Sweep Time Yes Yes N/A "CT (Couple Sweep Time)" on page 313 CTA Converts display units to dBm No No N/A CTM Converts dBm to display units No No N/A CTRLHPIB Allows SA to control HPIB N/A N/A No CV Couples Video Bandwidth Yes Yes N/A D1 Sets display to normal size No No N/A D2 Sets display to full CRT size No No N/A D3 Sets display to expanded size No No N/A DA Display Memory Address Yes Yes N/A DATEMODE Set the date display format N/A N/A No DD Display write binary No No N/A DELMKBW Occupied power bandwidth within delta marker N/A N/A Yes 228 "CONTS (Continuous Sweep)" on page 309 "CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)" on page 314 "DA (Display Address)" on page 315 "DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)" on page 316 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series DEMOD Turns the demodulator on or off N/A N/A No DEMODAGC Demodulation automatic gain control N/A N/A No DEMODT Demodulation time N/A N/A No DET Detection Mode Yes Yes Yes DISPOSE Frees Memory No No No DIV Divide No No No DL Display Line Level Yes Yes Yes "DL (Display Line)" on page 318 DLE Turns the display line on/off Yes Yes N/A "DLE (Display Line Enable)" on page 320 DLYSWP Delay sweep N/A N/A Yes "DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)" on page 321 DN Reduces the active function by applicable step size N/A N/A N/A DONE Synchronizing function Yes Yes Yes DOTDENS Sets the dot density value in Analog+ display mode N/A N/A N/A DR Display Memory Address Read Yes Yes N/A DRAWBOX Draws a rectangular box on analyzer display N/A N/A N/A DSPLY Display No No No DT Define Terminator No No N/A DW Display Memory Address Write No No N/A E1 Active marker to maximum signal Yes Yes Yes "E1[one] (Peak Marker)" on page 324 E2 Active marker to center frequency Yes Yes Yes "E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency) " on page 325 E3 Active marker frequency to CF step size Yes Yes Yes "E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)" on page 326 E4 Active marker to reference level Yes Yes Yes "E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)" on page 327 EDITDONE Indicates limit line editing is complete N/A N/A Yes "EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328 EDITLIML Allows current limit line to be edited N/A N/A No "EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 329 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317 "DONE (Done)" on page 322 "DR (Display Read)" on page 323 229 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series EE Enable entry No No N/A EK Enable knob No No N/A ELSE Conditional Programming (If…then…else…endif) No No No EM Erase trace C memory No No No ENDIF Conditional Programming (If…then…else…endif) No No N/A ENTER Enter from HP-IB No No No EP Enter parameter function N/A N/A N/A ERASE User memory & registers erased N/A No N/A ERR Queries the error queue Yes Yes Yes "ERR (Error)" on page 330 ET Elapsed time N/A N/A Yes "ET (Elapsed Time)" on page 332 EX Exchanges trace A & B Yes Yes Yes "EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 333 EXP Exponential No No No EXTMXR Presets external mixing mode No N/A No FA Start frequency Yes Yes Yes "FA (Start Frequency)" on page 334 FB Stop frequency Yes Yes Yes "FB (Stop Frequency)" on page 336 FDIAG Frequency diagnostics N/A N/A No FDSP Frequency display off N/A N/A Yes FFT Fast fourier transform No No No FFTAUTO Marker to Auto FFT N/A N/A N/A FFTCLIP FFT signal clipped N/A N/A N/A FFTCONTS FFT continuous sweep N/A N/A N/A FFTKNL Fast fourier transform kernel No No N/A FFTMKR FFT markers N/A N/A N/A FFTMM FFT marker to midscreen N/A N/A N/A FFTMS FFT marker to FFT stop frequency N/A N/A N/A FFTOFF FFT off N/A N/A N/A FFTPCTAM FFT percent amplitude modulation N/A N/A N/A FFTPCTAMR FFT percent amplitude modulation readout N/A N/A N/A 230 More Information "FDSP (Frequency Display Off)" on page 337 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series FFTSNGLS FFT single sweep N/A N/A N/A FFTSTAT FFT status N/A N/A N/A FFTSTOP FFT stop frequency N/A N/A N/A FMGAIN FM gain N/A N/A N/A FOFFSET Frequency offset Yes Yes Yes FORMAT Erase & format the selected memory device N/A N/A No FPKA Fast preselector peak Yes N/A N/A "FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)" on page 340 FREF Frequency reference N/A N/A Yes "FREF (Frequency Reference)" on page 341 FS Full frequency span Yes Yes Yes "FS (Full Span)" on page 342 FULBAND Set start/stop freq for ext mixing bands No N/A No FUNCDEF Function definition No No No GATE Turn time-gating on or off N/A N/A Yes "GATE (Gate)" on page 344 GATECTL Gate control N/A N/A Yes "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345 GC Gate preset N/A N/A N/A GD Gate delay N/A N/A Yes GDRVCLPAR Clear pulse parameters N/A N/A N/A GDRVGDEL Gate Delay for the frequency window N/A N/A N/A GDRVGLEN Gate length for frequency & time windows N/A N/A N/A GDRVGT Turns gate in frequency window on or off N/A N/A N/A GDRVGTIM Gate trigger to marker position for time window N/A N/A N/A GDRVPRI Pulse repetition interval N/A N/A N/A GDRVPWID Pulse width N/A N/A N/A GDRVRBW Couple resolution bandwidth to pulse width N/A N/A N/A GDRVREFE Enter reference edge N/A N/A N/A GDRVST Couple sweep time to pulse repetition interval N/A N/A N/A GDRVSWAP Update the time or frequency window N/A N/A N/A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)" on page 338 "GD (Gate Delay)" on page 346 231 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series GDRVSWDE Delay sweep for time window N/A N/A N/A GDRVSWP Sweep time for the time window N/A N/A N/A GDRVUTIL Turns the gate utility on or off N/A N/A N/A GDRVVBW Couple video bandwidth to the gate length N/A N/A N/A GETPLOT Get plot N/A N/A N/A GETPRNT Get print N/A N/A N/A GL Gate length N/A N/A Yes "GL (Gate Length)" on page 347 GP Sets the polarity (positive/negative) of the gate trigger N/A N/A Yes "GP (Gate Polarity)" on page 348 GR Plot GPIB input as Graphs No No N/A GRAT Graticule on/off Yes Yes Yes HAVE Checks for options installed N/A N/A N/A HD Holds data entry Yes Yes Yes HN Harmonic number N/A N/A N/A HNLOCK Harmonic lock No N/A No HNUNLK Harmonic band unlock No N/A No I1 Sets the RF coupling to AC N/A Yes N/A "I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)" on page 351 I2 Sets the RF coupling to DC N/A Yes N/A "I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)" on page 353 IB Input to trace B memory No No N/A ID Instrument identification Yes Yes Yes IDCF Identified signal to center frequency N/A N/A No IDFREQ Identified signal frequency N/A N/A No IDSTAT Signal identifier status No N/A N/A IF Conditional Programming (If…then…else…endif) No No No IFTKNL 16 bit discrete fourier transform No No N/A INT Integer No No No 232 More Information "GRAT (Graticule)" on page 349 "HD (Hold Data Entry)" on page 350 "ID (Identify)" on page 355 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series INZ Input impedance N/A N/A N/A IP Instrument preset Yes Yes Yes KEYCLR Clear user defined keys N/A N/A No KEYCMD Define function & label of softkey N/A N/A N/A KEYDEF Assign function to soft key No No No KEYENH Key enhance N/A N/A N/A KEYEXC Executes specified soft key No No N/A KEYLBL Relabels softkey without changing its function N/A N/A N/A KS, Mixer level Yes Yes N/A "KS, (Mixer Level)" on page 357 KS= HP8566: Selects factory preselector setting HP8568: Marker counter frequency resolution Yes Yes N/A "KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution)" on page 358 KS( Locks the save registers Yes Yes N/A "KS( (Lock Registers)" on page 359 KS) Unlocks the save registers Yes Yes N/A "KS) (Unlock Registers)" on page 360 KS> Specifies preamp gain for signal input 2 N/A No N/A KS< Specifies preamp gain for signal input 1 N/A No N/A KS| Display memory address write No No N/A KS# Turns off YTX self-heating correction No N/A N/A KS/ Allows preselector to be peaked manually No N/A N/A KS39 Writes display memory address in fast binary No No N/A KS43 Sets SRQ 102 when frequency limit exceeded No No N/A KS91 Returns the amplitude error No No N/A KS92 Specifies value DL, TH, active mkr in display units No No N/A KS94 Returns code for No No N/A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 356 233 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information harmonic number in binary KS123 Returns up to 1001 words display memory No No N/A KS125 Writes up to 1001 display memory words No No N/A KS126 Returns every Nth value of a trace No No N/A KS127 Sets analyzer to accept binary display write No No N/A KSA Sets amplitude units to dBm Yes Yes N/A "KSA (Amplitude in dBm)" on page 361 KSa Selects normal detection Yes Yes N/A "KSa (Normal Detection)" on page 362 KSB Sets amplitude units to dBmV Yes Yes N/A "KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)" on page 363 KSb Selects positive peak detection Yes Yes N/A "KSb (Positive Peak Detection)" on page 364 KSC Sets amplitude units to dBuV Yes Yes N/A "KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)" on page 365 KSc Trace A + trace B -> trace A Yes Yes N/A "KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 366 KSD Sets amplitude units to V Yes Yes N/A "KSD (Amplitude in Volts)" on page 367 KSd Selects negative peak detection Yes Yes N/A "KSd (Negative Peak Detection)" on page 368 KSE Sets the analyzer title mode Yes Yes N/A "KSE (Title Mode)" on page 369 KSe Selects sample detection Yes Yes N/A "KSe (Sample Detection)" on page 370 KSF HP8566: Shifts the YTO HP8568: Measures the Sweep Time No No N/A KSf Recover last instrument state at power on No No N/A KSG Turns on video averaging Yes Yes N/A "KSG (Video Averaging On)" on page 371 KSg Turns off the display Yes Yes N/A "KSg (Display Off)" on page 372 KSH Turns off video averaging Yes Yes N/A "KSH (Video Averaging Off)" on page 373 KSh Turns on the display Yes Yes N/A "KSh (Display On)" on page 374 234 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series KSI Allows the reference level to be extended Yes Yes N/A "KSI (Extend Reference Level)" on page 375 KSi Exchanges traces B & C Yes Yes N/A "KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 376 KSJ Manual control of DACs No No N/A KSj Views trace C Yes Yes N/A "KSj (View Trace C)" on page 377 KSK HP8566: Active Mkr to next highest peak HP8568: Counts pilot IF at marker Yes No N/A "KSK (Marker to Next Peak)" on page 378 KSk Blanks trace C Yes Yes N/A "KSk (Blank Trace C)" on page 379 KSL Turns off marker noise function Yes Yes N/A "KSL (Marker Noise Off)" on page 380 KSl Moves trace B into trace C Yes Yes N/A "KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on page 381 KSM Turns on marker noise function Yes Yes N/A "KSM (Marker Noise On)" on page 382 KSm Turns off the graticule Yes Yes N/A "KSm (Graticule Off)" on page 383 KSN Marker minimum value detected Yes No N/A "KSN (Marker Minimum)" on page 384 KSn Turns on the graticule Yes Yes N/A "KSn (Graticule On)" on page 385 KSO Marker span Yes Yes N/A "KSO (Marker Span)" on page 386 KSo Turns off the annotation Yes Yes N/A "KSo (Annotation Off)" on page 387 KSP GPIB address Yes Yes N/A "KSP (GPIB Address)" on page 388 KSp Turns on the annotation Yes Yes N/A "KSp (Annotation On)" on page 389 KSQ Unlocks frequency band No No N/A KSq Decouples IF gain and input attenuation No No N/A KSR Turns on service diagnostics No No N/A KSr Sets service request 102 No No N/A KSS HP8566: Fast GPIB operation HP8568: Determine second LO frequency No No N/A KST HP8566: Fast preset HP8568: Shifts second LO down Yes No N/A KSt HP8566: Locks No No N/A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "KST (Fast Preset)" on page 390 235 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information frequency band HP8568: Continues sweep from marker KSU HP8566: External mixer preset HP8568: Shift second LO up No No N/A KSu Stops the sweep at the active marker No No N/A KSV Frequency offset Yes Yes N/A KSv HP8566: External mixer frequency identifier HP8568: Inhibits phase lock No No N/A KSW Amplitude error correction routine No No N/A KSw Displays amplitude error correction routine No No N/A KSX Amplitude correction factors on No No N/A KSx Sets trigger mode to external Yes Yes N/A KSY Amplitude correction factors off No No N/A KSy Sets trigger mode to video Yes Yes N/A "KSy (Video Trigger)" on page 393 KSZ Reference level offset Yes Yes N/A "KSZ (Reference Level Offset)" on page 394 KSz Sets the display storage address No No N/A L0 Turns off the display line Yes Yes Yes LB Writes text label No No No LCLVAR Defines a local variable for use N/A N/A No LF Preset 0-2.5GHz Yes N/A N/A "LF (Low Frequency Preset)" on page 396 LG Selects log scale Yes Yes Yes "LG (Logarithmic Scale)" on page 397 LIMD Delta amplitude value for limit line segment N/A N/A Yes LIMF Frequency value for limit- N/A N/A Yes 236 "KSV (Frequency Offset)" on page 391 "KSx (External Trigger)" on page 392 "L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)" on page 395 "LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)" on Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series line segment More Information page 398 LIMIDEL Erase contents of limit line table N/A N/A N/A LIMIDISP Controls when the limit line(s) are displayed N/A N/A N/A LIMIFAIL Limit line fail N/A N/A Yes LIMIFT Select frequency or time limit line N/A N/A N/A LIMIHI Upper limit N/A N/A N/A LIMILINE Limit line N/A N/A N/A LIMILO Lower limit N/A N/A N/A LIMIMIRROR Mirror limit line N/A N/A N/A LIMIMODE Limit line entry mode N/A N/A N/A LIMIPURGE Disposes of current limit line, not limit line table N/A N/A Yes "LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line)" on page 401 LIMIRCL Load stored limit line into limit line table N/A N/A Yes "LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)" on page 402 LIMIREL Determine whether limit line values absolute/relative N/A N/A Yes "LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)" on page 403 LIMISAV Save contents of limit line table for recall N/A N/A Yes "LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)" on page 404 LIMISEG Define slope & offset of limit line segments N/A N/A N/A LIMISEGT Enter limit line segment for sweep time N/A N/A N/A LIMITST Compare active trace data to limit line parameters N/A N/A Yes "LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)" on page 407 LIML Amplitude value for limit line segment in lower limit line N/A N/A Yes "LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)" on page 405 LIMM Middle amplitude value for limit-line segment N/A N/A Yes LIMTFL Specifies a flat limit-line segment N/A N/A Yes "LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)" on page 406 LIMTSL Specifies a sloped limitline segment N/A N/A Yes "LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page 408 LIMU Amplitude value for limit line segment in upper N/A N/A Yes "LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on page 409 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference "LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)" on page 399 237 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information limit line LINFILL Line fill N/A N/A N/A LL Provides lower left recorder output voltage at rear No No N/A LN Selects linear scale Yes Yes Yes LOAD Load article/file into internal memory N/A N/A N/A LOG Log No No No LOLIMOFF LO Limit Off No No N/A LSPAN Last span N/A N/A N/A M1 Turns off all markers Yes Yes N/A "M1 [one] (Marker Off)" on page 411 M2 Marker Normal Yes Yes N/A "M2 [two] (Marker Normal)" on page 412 M3 Marker Delta Yes Yes N/A "M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page 414 M4 Marker zoom Yes Yes N/A "M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)" on page 416 MA Returns the amplitude of active marker Yes Yes Yes "MA (Marker Amplitude Output)" on page 417 MBIAS Mixer bias No No N/A MBRD Processor memory block read No No N/A MBWR Processor memory block write No No N/A MC0 Turns off the marker frequency counter N/A Yes N/A "MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)" on page 418 MC1 Turns on the marker frequency counter N/A Yes N/A "MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)" on page 419 MDS Measurement data size Yes Yes N/A "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 420 MDU Measurement data units Yes Yes N/A "MDU (Measurement Data Units)" on page 421 MEAN Returns mean value of trace in display units Yes Yes Yes "MEAN (Trace Mean)" on page 422 MEANPWR Mean power measurement N/A N/A Yes "MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement)" on page 423 238 "LN (Linear Scale)" on page 410 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series MEANTH Trace mean above threshold N/A N/A N/A MEAS Measurement status Yes Yes Yes MEASOFF Measurement off No No N/A MEASURE Measure mode N/A N/A N/A MEM Returns amount of memory available No No No MENU Menu N/A N/A No MERGE Merge two traces No No N/A MF Returns frequency of the active marker Yes Yes Yes MIN Minimum No No No MINH Min Hold N/A N/A Yes "MINH (Minimum Hold)" on page 426 MINPOS Returns the minimum position in the trace Yes Yes N/A "MINPOS (Minimum X Position)" on page 427 MIRROR Mirror image of the trace No No N/A MKA Amplitude of the active marker Yes Yes Yes "MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page 428 MKACT Specifies the active marker Yes Yes N/A "MKACT (Activate Marker)" on page 429 MKACTV Marker as the active function N/A N/A N/A MKBW Marker bandwidth N/A N/A Yes "MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)" on page 430 MKCF Moves the active marker to center frequency Yes Yes Yes "MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)" on page 431 MKCHEDGE Marker to channel edge N/A N/A No MKCONT Continues sweeping from the marker after stop No No N/A MKD Delta marker Yes Yes Yes MKDELCHBW Delta markers to channel power bandwidth N/A N/A No MKDLMODE Marker delta display line mode N/A N/A N/A MKDR Reciprocal of marker delta N/A N/A No MKF Specifies the frequency of the active marker Yes Yes Yes "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434 MKFC Turns the marker N/A Yes Yes "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "MEAS (Meas)" on page 424 "MF (Marker Frequency Output)" on page 425 "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432 239 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information frequency counter on or off MKFCR Specifies the marker frequency counter resolution N/A Yes Yes MKMCF Marker mean to center frequency N/A N/A No MKMIN Moves active marker to minimum signal detected Yes Yes Yes "MKMIN (Marker Minimum)" on page 438 MKN Normal marker Yes Yes Yes "MKN (Marker Normal)" on page 439 MKNOISE Marker noise function Yes Yes Yes "MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page 441 MKOFF Turns all markers or the active marker off Yes Yes Yes "MKOFF (Marker Off)" on page 442 MKP Specifies the horizontal position of the marker Yes Yes N/A "MKP (Marker Position)" on page 443 MKPAUSE Pauses the sweep at the active marker No No N/A MKPK Marker peak Yes Yes Yes "MKPK (Marker Peak)" on page 444 MKPT Marker peak threshold N/A N/A Yes "MKPT (Marker Threshold)" on page 445 MKPX Marker peak excursion Yes Yes Yes "MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)" on page 446 MKREAD Specifies marker readout mode Yes Yes N/A "MKREAD (Marker Readout)" on page 447 MKRL Moves the active marker to reference level Yes Yes Yes "MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)" on page 449 MKSP Marker span Yes Yes Yes "MKSP (Marker Span)" on page 450 MKSS Marker step size Yes Yes Yes "MKSS (Marker to Step Size)" on page 451 MKSTOP Stops the sweep at the active marker No No N/A MKT Position marker in units of time N/A N/A Yes MKTBL Marker table N/A N/A N/A MKTRACE Marker trace Yes Yes N/A "MKTRACE (Marker Trace)" on page 453 MKTRACK Turns the marker signal track on or off Yes Yes Yes "MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page 454 MKTYPE Specifies the type of Yes Yes N/A "MKTYPE (Marker Type)" on page 455 240 "MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)" on page 436 "MKT (Marker Time)" on page 452 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information "ML (Mixer Level)" on page 456 active marker to be used ML Mixer Level Yes Yes Yes MOD Modulo No No No MODRCLT Recalls trace from module memory N/A N/A No MODSAVT Saves trace in module memory N/A N/A No MOV Move No No No MPY Multiply No No No MRD Memory Read No No N/A MRDB Memory read byte No No N/A MSDEV Specifies mass storage device N/A N/A No MSI Mass storage interface N/A N/A N/A MT0 Turns off marker signal track Yes Yes N/A "MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)" on page 458 MT1 Turns on marker signal track Yes Yes N/A "MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)" on page 459 MWR Memory Write No No N/A MWRB Memory write byte No No N/A MXM Maximum No No No MXMH Max Hold Yes Yes Yes MXRMODE Mixer mode N/A N/A No NDB Number of dB N/A N/A N/A NDBPNT Turns the N dB points function on or off N/A N/A N/A NDBPNTR N dB points bandwidth N/A N/A N/A NORMLIZE Normalize trace data N/A N/A Yes "NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)" on page 461 NRL Normalized reference level N/A N/A Yes "NRL (Normalized Reference Level)" on page 462 NRPOS Normalized reference position N/A N/A Yes "NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position)" on page 463 NSTART Start harmonic No N/A N/A NSTOP Stop harmonic No N/A N/A O1 Output format Yes Yes N/A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference "MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 460 "O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)" on page 464 241 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series O2 Output format Yes Yes N/A "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)" on page 465 O3 Output format Yes Yes N/A "O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)" on page 466 O4 Output format Yes Yes N/A "O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)" on page 467 OA Returns the active function value Yes Yes N/A "OA or ? (Query Active Function)" on page 468 OBW Occupied bandwidth N/A N/A N/A OBWBW Bandwidth measured by occupied bandwidth N/A N/A N/A OBWFERR Occupied bandwidth transmit frequency error N/A N/A N/A OBWLOWER Relative lower frequency limit of occupied bandwidth N/A N/A N/A OBWPCT Occupied bandwidth percent N/A N/A N/A OBWPWR Total power in the occupied bandwidth N/A N/A N/A OBWUPPER Relative upper frequency limit of occupied bandwidth N/A N/A N/A OCCUP Percent occupied power bandwidth N/A N/A Yes "OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth)" on page 469 OL Output learn string Yes Yes N/A "OL (Output Learn String)" on page 470 ONCYCLE On cycle N/A N/A N/A ONDELAY On delay N/A N/A N/A ONEOS On end of sweep No No No ONMKR On marker pause N/A N/A N/A ONMKRU On marker update N/A N/A N/A ONPWRUP On power up N/A N/A N/A ONSRQ On service request N/A N/A N/A ONSWP On sweep No No N/A ONTIME On time N/A N/A N/A OP Output parameters No No No OR Set position of origin N/A N/A No OT Output trace annotations Yes Yes N/A 242 More Information "OT (Output Trace Annotations)" on Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information page 472 OUTPUT Output - sending data to the GPIB from function No No No PA Plot absolute No No No PARSTAT Parallel status N/A N/A N/A PCTAM Turns the percent AM measurement on or off N/A N/A N/A PCTAMR Percent AM response N/A N/A N/A PD Pen down No No No PDA Probability distribution amplitude No No No PDF Probability distribution frequency No No No PEAKS Sorts the signal peaks by amplitude/frequency Yes Yes Yes PKDLMODE Peak table delta display line mode N/A N/A N/A PKPOS Peak position N/A Yes N/A PKRES Peak result N/A N/A N/A PKSORT Selects how to sort signal peaks listed in peak table N/A N/A N/A PKTBL Turns the peak table on or off N/A N/A N/A PKZMOK Peak zoom okay N/A N/A N/A PKZOOM Peak zoom N/A N/A N/A PLOT Prints the screen Yes Yes Yes PLOTORG Display origins N/A N/A No PLOTSRC Plot source N/A N/A No PLTPRT Plot port N/A N/A N/A POWERON Power on state N/A N/A N/A PP Peaks the preselector Yes N/A Yes PR Plot relative No No No PREAMPG External preamplifier gain N/A N/A N/A PREFX Change user memory entries file prefix N/A N/A N/A PRINT Print N/A N/A Yes PRNPRT Print port N/A N/A N/A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference "PEAKS (Peaks)" on page 474 "PKPOS (Peak Position)" on page 475 "PLOT (Plot)" on page 476 "PP (Preselector Peak)" on page 477 "PRINT (Print)" on page 478 243 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series PRNTADRS Print address N/A N/A N/A PS Skip page No No N/A PSDAC Preselector DAC number N/A N/A No PSTATE Protect state N/A N/A No PU Pen up No No No PURGE Purge file N/A N/A N/A PWRBW Power bandwidth Yes Yes Yes PWRUPTIME Power up time N/A N/A N/A Q0 Sets detector to EMI Peak detection N/A Yes N/A "Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection)" on page 480 Q1 Sets detector to Quasi Peak detection N/A Yes N/A "Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection)" on page 481 R1 Resets service request 140 Yes Yes N/A "R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)" on page 482 R2 Allows service request 140 & 104 Yes Yes N/A "R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)" on page 483 R3 Allows service request 140 & 110 Yes Yes N/A "R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)" on page 484 R4 Allows service request 140 & 102 Yes Yes N/A "R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)" on page 485 RB Resolution bandwidth Yes Yes Yes "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 486 RBR Resolution bandwidth/Span ratio N/A N/A Yes "RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio)" on page 488 RC Recalls state register Yes Yes Yes "RC (Recall State)" on page 489 RCLOSCAL Recall open/short average N/A N/A No RCLS Recall state Yes Yes Yes RCLT Recall trace N/A N/A No RCLTHRU Recall internal thrureference trace into trace B N/A N/A No RELHPIB Release control of GPIB N/A N/A No REPEAT Conditional Programming (Repeat ... Until …) No No No RESETRL Reset reference level N/A N/A N/A RETURN Return to user defined function origination point N/A N/A No 244 More Information "PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)" on page 479 "RCLS (Recall State)" on page 490 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series REV Returns the revision string to the controller Yes Yes Yes "REV (Revision)" on page 491 RL Reference level Yes Yes Yes "RL (Reference Level)" on page 492 RLCAL Reference level calibration N/A N/A No RLPOS Reference level position N/A N/A N/A RMS Root mean square Yes Yes N/A "RMS (Root Mean Square Value)" on page 494 ROFFSET Reference level offset Yes Yes Yes "ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)" on page 495 RQS SRQ mask Yes Yes Yes "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497 S1 Continuous sweep mode Yes Yes N/A "S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)" on page 499 S2 Single sweep mode Yes Yes N/A "S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 500 SADD Adds a limit line segment N/A N/A Yes "SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)" on page 501 SAVEMENU Save menu N/A N/A N/A SAVES Saves analyzer state to specified register Yes Yes Yes SAVET Save trace N/A N/A No SAVRCLF Save or recall flag N/A N/A N/A SAVRCLN Save or recall number N/A N/A N/A SAVRCLW Save or recall data N/A N/A N/A SDEL Deletes a limit line segment N/A N/A Yes "SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)" on page 503 SDON Indicates limit line segment is done N/A N/A Yes "SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)" on page 504 SEDI Edits limit line segment N/A N/A Yes "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 505 SEGDEL Delete specified segment from limit line tables N/A N/A N/A SENTER Segment entry for frequency limit lines N/A N/A No SENTERT Segment entry for sweep time limit lines N/A N/A N/A SER Serial number N/A N/A Yes "SER (Serial Number)" on page 506 SETDATE Set the date of spectrum N/A N/A Yes "SETDATE (Set Date)" on page 507 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502 245 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information "SETTIME (Set Time)" on page 508 analyzer SETTIME Set the time of spectrum analyzer N/A N/A Yes SHOWMENU Shows menu N/A N/A No SIGDEL Signal amplitude delta No N/A N/A SIGID External mixing frequency bands signal identifier No N/A No SKYCLR Clears user softkey N/A N/A No SKYDEF Defines user softkey N/A N/A No SMOOTH Smooths given trace over specified number points Yes Yes N/A "SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)" on page 509 SNGLS Single sweep mode Yes Yes Yes "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510 SP Frequency Span Yes Yes Yes "SP (Frequency Span)" on page 511 SPEAKER Turns the internal speaker on or off N/A N/A N/A SPZOOM Span Zoom N/A N/A N/A SQLCH Sets the squelch threshold N/A N/A N/A SQR Square root No No No SQUELCH Adjusts squelch level N/A N/A No SRCALC Selects internal or external level control N/A N/A No SRCAT Attenuate source output level N/A N/A N/A SRCCRSTK Coarse tracking adjust N/A N/A No SRCFINTK Fine tracking adjust N/A N/A No SRCNORM Source normalization N/A N/A N/A SRCPOFS Offset source power level N/A N/A No SRCPSTP Select source power step size N/A N/A No SRCPSWP Select sweep range of source output N/A N/A No SRCPWR Select source power level N/A N/A No SRCTK Adjust tracking of source output with SA sweep N/A N/A N/A SRCTKPK Auto adjust tracking of source output with SA sweep N/A N/A No 246 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series SRQ Service request Yes Yes Yes "SRQ (Service Request)" on page 513 SS Frequency Step Size Yes Yes Yes "SS (Center Frequency Step Size)" on page 514 ST Sweep Time Yes Yes Yes "ST (Sweep Time)" on page 516 STB Status byte query N/A N/A Yes "STB (Status Byte Query)" on page 518 STDEV Standard deviation of trace amplitude Yes Yes N/A "STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes)" on page 519 STOR Store file N/A N/A N/A STOREOPEN Save current instrument state N/A N/A No STORESHORT Store short N/A N/A No STORETHRU Store thru-calibration trace in trace B N/A N/A No SUB Subtract No No No SUM Sum of trace element amplitudes in display units No No Yes SUMSQR Squares trace element amplitudes & returns sum No No No SV Saves state Yes Yes N/A SW Skip to next control instruction No No N/A SWPCPL Sweep couple N/A N/A Yes SWPOUT Sweep output N/A N/A No SYNCMODE Synchronize mode N/A N/A N/A T0 Turns the threshold level off Yes Yes N/A "T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)" on page 523 T1 Sets the trigger mode to free run Yes Yes N/A "T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)" on page 524 T2 Sets the trigger mode to line Yes Yes N/A "T2 [two] (Line Trigger)" on page 525 T3 Sets the trigger mode to external Yes Yes N/A "T3 [three] (External Trigger)" on page 526 T4 Sets the trigger mode to video Yes Yes N/A "T4 [four] (Video Trigger)" on page 527 T7 Sets the trigger mode to level N/A N/A N/A T8 Sets the trigger mode to N/A N/A N/A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "SUM (Sum)" on page 520 "SV (Save State)" on page 521 "SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)" on page 522 247 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series More Information edge TA Returns trace A amplitude values to controller Yes Yes N/A "TA (Trace A)" on page 528 TB Returns trace B amplitude values to controller Yes Yes N/A "TB (Trace B)" on page 529 TDF Trace data format Yes Yes Yes "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530 TEXT Writes text on the analyzer screen No No No TH Threshold Yes Yes Yes "TH (Threshold)" on page 531 THE Turns the threshold on or off Yes Yes N/A "THE (Threshold Enable)" on page 533 THEN Conditional Programming (If…then…else…endif) No No No TIMEDATE Allows setting of time & date for analyzer N/A N/A Yes TIMEDSP Enables display of time & data on analyzer display N/A N/A N/A TITLE Title entry N/A N/A Yes "TITLE (Title)" on page 535 TM Trigger Mode Yes Yes Yes "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536 TOI Third order intermodulation measurement N/A N/A N/A TOIR Third order intermodulation response N/A N/A N/A TRA Returns trace A amplitude values to controller Yes Yes Yes "TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 537 TRB Returns trace B amplitude values to controller Yes Yes Yes "TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 538 TRC Returns trace C amplitude values to controller Yes Yes N/A "TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 539 TRCMEM Trace C memory N/A N/A N/A TRDEF Trace define No No No TRDSP Trace display Yes Yes N/A TRGRPH Trace graph display No No N/A 248 "TIMEDATE (Time Date)" on page 534 "TRDSP (Trace Display)" on page 540 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series TRIGPOL Trigger polarity N/A N/A Yes TRMATH Executes specified trace math at end of sweep No No N/A TRPRST Sets trace operations to their preset values No No N/A TRSTAT Returns current trace states to controller Yes Yes N/A "TRSTAT (Trace State)" on page 542 TS Takes a sweep Yes Yes Yes "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 TVLINE Selects which horizontal line of video to trigger on N/A N/A N/A TVLSFRM Selects the type of video frame to trigger on N/A N/A N/A TVSTND TV standard N/A N/A N/A TVSYNC Selects polarity of video modulation to trigger on N/A N/A N/A TWNDOW Formats trace information for FFT. N/A N/A No UNTIL Conditional Programming (Repeat…Until…) No No No UP Increases active function value by applicable step N/A N/A N/A UR Upper right x-y recorder output voltage at rear No No N/A USERREV Modifies response to query "REV (Revision)" on page 491 Ext Ext Ext USTATE Configures user defined states No No N/A VARDEF Variable definition No No No VARIANCE Returns the amplitude variance of specified trace No No No VAVG Turns video averaging on or off Yes Yes Yes "VAVG (Video Average)" on page 545 VB Video Bandwidth Yes Yes Yes "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547 VBO Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset Yes Yes N/A "VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)" on page 549 VBR Video Bandwidth Ratio N/A N/A Yes "VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)" on page 550 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference More Information "TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)" on page 541 "USERREV" on page 544 249 5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support Command Description 8566 8568 8560 Series VIEW Stores and views the specified trace Yes Yes Yes "VIEW (View Trace)" on page 551 VTL Video trigger level N/A N/A Yes "VTL (Video Trigger Level)" on page 552 WAIT Suspend program operation for specified time N/A N/A N/A WINNEXT Next window N/A N/A N/A WINOFF Turns off the window display mode N/A N/A N/A WINON Turns on the window display mode N/A N/A N/A WINZOOM Window zoom N/A N/A N/A XCH Exchanges the two specified traces. Yes Yes N/A ZMKCNTR Zone marker at center frequency N/A N/A N/A ZMKPKNL Zone marker for next peak left N/A N/A N/A ZMKPKNR Zone marker for next peak right N/A N/A N/A ZMKSPAN Zone marker span N/A N/A N/A 250 More Information "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions This chapter describes all the supported 8560 Series, 8566A/B and 8568A/B commands, and gives brief details of their syntax and operation. The commands are sorted alphabetically. For more detailed information about these commands, see the User’s Guides for the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, and 8560 Series. For a summary of all commands, see "List of Legacy Analyzer Commands" on page 221. For explanations of the entries in this chapter, see: l "Command Syntax" on page 252 l "Command Description Notes" on page 254 251 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Command Syntax Command Syntax Command syntax is represented pictorially. l l l Ovals enclose command mnemonics. The command mnemonic must be entered as shown, with the exception that the case can be upper or lower. Uppercase is recommended for entering all commands unless otherwise noted. Circles and ovals surround secondary keywords or special numbers and characters. The characters in circles and ovals are considered reserved words and must be entered as shown with the exception that the case can be upper or lower. l Rectangles contain the description of a syntax element defined in the table below. l A loop above a syntax element indicates that the syntax element can be repeated. l Solid lines represent the recommended path. l Dotted lines indicate an optional path for bypassing secondary keywords or using alternate units. l Arrows and curved intersections indicate command path direction. l l Semicolons are the recommended command terminators. Using semicolons makes programs easier to read, prevents command misinterpretation, and is recommended by IEEE-728-1982 (Recommended Practice for code and Format Conventions for IEEE Standard 488). Syntax Elements are shown in the syntax diagrams as elements within rectangles. In the syntax diagrams, characters and secondary keywords are shown within circles or ovals. Syntax Elements Syntax Component Definition/Range Analyzer command Any command in this chapter, with required parameters and terminators. Character SP a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z databyte. Character 8-bit byte containing only character data and followed by end-or-identify (EOI) condition, where the EOI control line 252 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Command Syntax Syntax Component Definition/Range & EOI on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the transmission. END signifies the EOI condition. Character string A list of characters. Data byte 8-bit byte containing numeric or character data. Data byte & EOI 8-bit byte containing numeric or character data followed by end-or-identify (EOI) condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the transmission. END signifies the EOI condition. Delimiter | \ @ ˆ $ % ; ! Matching characters that mark the beginning and end of a character string, or a list of commands. Choose delimiting characters that are not used within the string they delimit. Digit 0123456789 lsb length Represents the least significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of bytes returned or transmitted. See msb length. msb length Represents the most significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of bytes returned or transmitted. See lsb length. Number Expressed as integer, decimal, or in exponential (E) form. Integer Number Range: –32,768 through +32,767 General formatting restrictions: Real Number Range: ± 1.797693134862315 x 10 308, including 0. Up to 15 significant figures allowed. Numbers may be as small as ± 2.225073858507202 x 10 –308 Output termination Line feed (LF) and end-or-identify (EOI) condition. ASCII code 10 (line feed) is sent via GPIB and the end-or-identify control line on GPIB sets to indicate the end of the transmission. Units Represent standard scientific units: Frequency Units: GZ, GHZ, MZ, MHZ, KZ, KHZ, HZ Amplitude Units: DB, DBMV, DM, DBM, DBUV, V, MV, UV, W, MW, UW Time Units: SC, S, MS, US Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 253 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Command Description Notes Command Description Notes All supported commands are listed here, with descriptions and cross-references to similar commands. The information here does not provide a comprehensive guide to all 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series commands. It gives brief descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important functional or behavioral differences that you should be aware of when transferring existing 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series code to your X-Series instrument. For a complete description of the commands, refer to the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series Operating and Programming Manual. To avoid confusion between numbers and letters, all commands that incorporate numbers have the number spelled out and placed in square brackets after the command. For example, the command I1 is shown as ‘I1 [one]’ - that is, the capital letter ‘I’ followed by the number ‘1’, and then the word ‘one’ in square brackets. The word in brackets does not form part of the command. 254 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A) A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets Trace A to clear write, which means that it continuously displays any signal present at the instrument input. This command initially clears Trace A, setting all elements to zero. Format A1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of command A1 are identical to the command "CLRW (Clear Write)" on page 307. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 255 6 Legacy Command Descriptions A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A) A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected during the period that the trace has been active. Format A2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA command. See "MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 460. 256 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A) A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Displays Trace A and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A does not get updated with new data. Format A3 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of the command A3 are identical to the VIEW TRA command. See "VIEW (View Trace)" on page 551. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 257 6 Legacy Command Descriptions A4 [four] (Blank Trace A) A4 [four] (Blank Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks Trace A and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A is not updated. Format A4 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of the command A4 are identical to the BLANK TRA command. See "BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 292. 258 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting) ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the alpha weighting for ACP measurements. Format ACPALPHA <real> (Valid Range from 0 to 1) ACPALPHA? Query Data Type <real> (Valid Range from 0 to 1) SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default – 0.35 Not affected by preset or Power Cycle Couplings Errors Notes The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA command. See "MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 460. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 259 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels) ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the number of alternate channels to be measured by an adjacent channel power measurement to either 0, 1, or 2. The number of alternate channels is used with the command "ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)" on page 272. Specifying parameter value 0 makes the measurement with the adjacent channel pair, but no alternate channels. Specifying 1 selects the first alternate channel pair, which is centered at ±2 times the channel spacing away from the center frequency of the main channel. Specifying 2 selects the second alternate pair, which is at ±3 times the channel spacing. Format ACPALTCH <integer> (Valid Range: 0, 1, 2) ACPALTCH? Query Data Type <integer> (Valid Range: 0, 1, 2) SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. 260 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period) ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the cycle time (period) of the burst RF signal. The cycle time is needed to set the sweep times when using the peak, two bandwidth, burst power, and gated methods for adjacent channel power measurements. Format ACPBRPER <real> (in time unit) ACPBRPER? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. Notes N9061A supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only and therefore, although you can set ACPBRPER, it has no effect. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 261 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width) ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the on-time (pulse width) of the burst RF signal. The pulse width is needed to set the gating times when using the gated method for adjacent channel power measurements. Format Range: 5 μs to 9.5 seconds. Query Data Type <real> (in time units) SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. Notes N9061A supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only and therefore, although you can set ACPBRWID, it has no effect. 262 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth) ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the bandwidth of the channels as an active function for the commands "ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 268 and "ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)" on page 264. Format ACPBW <frequency> with frequency unit ACPBW? Range: <frequency>: 200 Hz to the double of max frequency range. UP: original value x 1.1. DN: original value x 0.9. Query Data Type Frequency in Hz SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: 8.5 kHz. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. Couplings Channel spacing does not couple with channel bandwidth. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 263 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute) ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Calculates the ACP of a transmitter based on data on the display. This function does not make a new measurement before computing. The measurement must have been made with ANALOG or PEAK method selected so the appropriate data is available for the calculation. This function is useful for recalculating ACP results on the same trace with different parameter settings. Format ACPCOMPUTE Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. 264 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting) ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description This command is used to control the frequency weighting when making an Adjacent Channel Power measurement. Weighting is not used in the measurement if OFF has been selected. Root-raised-cosine weighting is selected with the RRCOS parameter. Format ACPFRQWT RRCOS|OFF ACPFRQWT? Query Data Type RRCOS|OFF SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: OFF. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 265 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power) ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns the power ratio result of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement for the lower frequency channel. Format ACPLOWER? Query Data Type The power ratio result in dB. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. 266 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power) ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power) Syntax Description Returns the maximum adjacent channel power of the adjacent channel power measurement. Format ACPMAX? Query Data Type The maximum adjacent channel power in dB. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 267 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power) ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Makes a measurement and calculates the adjacent channel power (ACP) of a transmitter. The measurement determines the leakage power that is in the channels adjacent to the carrier. The result is the ratio of the leakage power in the channel adjacent to the total power transmitted by the transmitter. Format ACPMEAS Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. 268 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State) ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the parameters of the measurement state to either the default state (determined by the setup) or the current state. The state parameters that could change between the default state and a current state include: l Resolution bandwidth l Video bandwidth l Span l Sweep time l Detector mode l Gating parameters l Trigger parameters l Video averaging Format ACPMSTATE CURR|DFLT ACPMSTATE? Query Data Type CURR|DFLT SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: DFLT. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 269 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State) Couplings Notes 270 Changes the following parameters: l Resolution bandwidth l Video bandwidth l Span l Sweep time l Detector mode l Gating parameters l Trigger parameters l Video averaging The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted) ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns the result of the total power transmitted calculation of the adjacent channel power measurement. Format ACPPWRTX? Query Data Type A variable that contains the total transmit band carrier power. Unit is determined by command "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 283. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The measurement must be made with the analog or burst power method selected, but the N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 271 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results) ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns an array of power data resulting from an ACP measurement of an RF signal. The number of alternate channel pairs selected by the command "ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)" on page 260 determines the size of the array. Format ACPRSLTS? Query Data Type (Analog Method) Number of Results per Set: 2. See "Query Data Type Details" on page 273 below. Results (in order of output): l ACP ratio (lower channel) l ACP ratio (upper channel) SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. 272 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Query Data Type Details Query Data Type Details Alternate Channels 0 1 2 Channels used for Calculation l Main channel l Lower adjacent channel l Upper adjacent channel Above channels plus: l First alternate lower channel l First alternate upper channel Above channels plus: l Second alternate lower channel l Second alternate upper channel Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Number of Values Returned 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 273 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing) ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the channel spacing for the commands "ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 268 and "ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)" on page 264. Format ACP <real> with frequency units ACP? Range: <real>: Minimum: 100 Hz. Maximum: 25 GHz. UP: original value x 1.1. DN: original value x 0.9. Query Data Type <real> in Hz SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: 12.5 kHz. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. Couplings Channel spacing does not couple with channel bandwidth. Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. 274 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting) ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description This command is used to set the T used in weighting for an adjacent channel power measurement. Format ACPT <real> in time units ACPT? Range: 1 μs to 1 s. Query Data Type Real number in sec. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Default: 341 μs. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle. Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 275 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power) ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns the power ratio result of the adjacent channel power measurement for the upper frequency channel. Format ACPUPPER? Query Data Type The power ratio result in dB. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only. 276 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments) ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Activates the RF local oscillator (LO) and intermediate frequency (IF) alignment routines. These are the same routines that occur when the instrument is switched on. They are also the same routines that are performed when you press System, Alignments, Align Now, All. Commands following ADJALL are not executed until after the instrument has finished the alignment routines. Format ADJALL; Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALibration[:ALL] (see "All" on page 1219) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 277 6 Legacy Command Descriptions AMB (A minus B into A) AMB (A minus B into A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, AMB can restore the original trace after an "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 281 or a "KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 366 command has been executed. The query AMB? returns different responses depending on the language being used. The 8560 Series languages return either a 1 or a 0 to indicate the On or Off status.The 8566, 8568 Series languages all return either ON or OFF. Format AMB 0|1|OFF|ON AMB? Query Data Type 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset OFF Couplings Sets Trace B to View mode and turns "AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)" on page 279 (Normalize) OFF. All trace math is mutually exclusive, so turning one on turns the other off and vice versa. Similarly, when AMB is on and you change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold, it turns AMB off. Notes The functions of the command AMB are identical to the command "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A) " on page 297. 278 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A) AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Does a point-by-point subtraction of Trace B from Trace A, and then adds the display line point values to the difference. The results are sent to Trace A. The query command AMBPL? returns different responses depending on the language being used. Format AMBPL (0|1|OFF|ON) AMBPL? Query Data Type 8560: 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively. 8566A/B, 8568A/B: ON or OFF. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset OFF Couplings AMBPL sets Trace B to View mode and turns AMB (Normalize) OFF. All trace math is mutually exclusive, so turning one on turns the other off and vice versa. Similarly, when AMBPL is on and you change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold, it turns AMBPL off. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 279 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ANNOT (Annotation) ANNOT (Annotation) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns on or off all annotation on the instrument display. Softkey labels are not affected by this command and remain displayed. Format ANNOT (O|1|ON|OFF) Query Data Type 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively. SCPI Equivalent Commands DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 DISPlay::ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe]? (See "Screen" on page 1373) Preset ON Couplings Following FDSP, ANNOT does nothing until instrument preset. Notes The functions of ANNOT are identical to the commands "KSo (Annotation Off)" on page 387 and "KSp (Annotation On)" on page 389. The two alternative commands, KSo and KSp, are only valid when the remote language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B. 280 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A) APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, APB can restore the original trace after an "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 278 or a "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page 297 command has been executed. Format APB Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of APB are identical to the command "KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 366. The alternative command, KSc, is only valid when the remote language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 281 6 Legacy Command Descriptions AT (Input Attenuation) AT (Input Attenuation) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the RF input attenuation. Although the attenuation level in the X-series instruments can be specified using absolute values, you can never set attenuation below 10 dB using the DN parameter. This is a safety feature to prevent inadvertent setting of attenuation to a level that could damage the instrument. Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the instrument. Format AT <number> DB <number>: any real number or integer. If the value you enter is not a valid value for the instrument you are using, it switches automatically to the closest valid setting. Default unit: dB. Range: 0 to 70 dB specified absolutely, and 10 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps. (If 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC is selected, the range is limited to 0 to 60 dB.) AT OA|DN|UP|AUTO|MAN (AUTO|MAN available for 8560 Series only) AT? (Step Increment: 10 dB) Query Data Type <real> in dB. SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSE]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement] 10dB (on mode entry or preset: see " (Mech) Atten Step" on page 569) [:SENSE]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO (OFF|ON|0|1) (see "(Mech) Atten " on page 562) Preset 10 dB Notes In PXA/MXA, the auto attenuation range is 6-70 dB. In EXA, it is 6-60 dB. You cannot step down below 10 dB. To set levels below 10 dB, you must specify the attenuation absolutely. For example, to set attenuation to 0 dB, you must use the command AT 0DB. 282 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units) AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units) Syntax 8560 series 8566A/B, 8568A/B Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the amplitude readout units for the reference level, the marker, and the display line. If your selected remote language is any of the 8560 Series analyzers, and if the AUNITS setting is AUTO, then a change from log scale (LG) to linear scale (LN) automatically changes the AUNITS setting. For all other settings, no change to AUNITS occurs, even when the scale is changed. Format AUNITS AUTO|MAN|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W|DM AUNITS? Query Data Type DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 283 6 Legacy Command Descriptions AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units) SCPI Equivalent Commands :UNIT:POWer (DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W) :UNIT:POWer? (See "Y Axis Unit" on page 573) Preset DBM Notes The functions of AUNITS are identical to the commands "KSA (Amplitude in dBm)" on page 361, "KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)" on page 363, "KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)" on page 365, and "KSD (Amplitude in Volts)" on page 367. The four alternative commands, KSA, KSB, KSC, and KSD are only valid when the remote language is HP8566A/B or HP8568A/B. 284 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled) AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets video bandwidth, resolution bandwidth, input attenuation, sweep time and center frequency step-size to coupled mode. Format AUTOCPL Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :COUPle ALL (See "Auto Couple" on page 586) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 285 6 Legacy Command Descriptions AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B) AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point. Format AXB Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of the command AXB are identical to the command "EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 333 and to the XCH TRA,TRB form of the command "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553. 286 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B) B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets Trace B to clear write. That is, it continuously displays any signal present at the instrument input. The B1 command initially clears Trace B, setting all elements to zero. The sweep trigger then signals the start of the sweep, and Trace B is continually updated as the sweep progresses. Subsequent sweeps send new amplitude information to the display addresses. Format B1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of B1 are identical to the CLRW TRB form of the command "CLRW (Clear Write)" on page 307. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 287 6 Legacy Command Descriptions B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B) B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected while the trace is active. Format B2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of B2 are identical to the MXMH TRB form of the command "MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 460. 288 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B) B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Displays Trace B and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B does not get updated. Format B3 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of B3 are identical to the VIEW TRB form of the command "VIEW (View Trace)" on page 551. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 289 6 Legacy Command Descriptions B4 [four] (Blank Trace B) B4 [four] (Blank Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks Trace B and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B is not updated. Format B4 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of B4 are identical to the BLANK TRB form of the command "BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 292. 290 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B) BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Subtracts the display line from Trace B and sends the results to Trace B. The command BL is calculated differently depending on the language being used; for the 8560 Series the calculation is performed in units of dBm. 8560 Series The calculation is performed in units of dBm. 8566A/B The calculation is performed in display units. 8568A/B Format BL Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of BL are identical to the command "BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)" on page 293. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 291 6 Legacy Command Descriptions BLANK (Blank Trace) BLANK (Blank Trace) Syntax 8560 Series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks Trace 1 or trace 2 and stops taking new data into the specified trace. TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and so on. Format 8566A/B, 8568A/B: BLANK TRA|TRB|TRC 8560 Series: BLANK TRA|TRB Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6]:UPDate[:STATe] OFF TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6]:DISPlay[:STATe] OFF (See "View/Blank " on page 1284) Preset TRB, TRC Blank. Notes The functions of BLANK are identical to the commands "A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)" on page 258, "B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)" on page 290, KSJ, and "KSk (Blank Trace C)" on page 379. 292 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions BML (Trace B Minus Display Line) BML (Trace B Minus Display Line) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Subtracts the display line from trace B (point by point), and sends the difference to trace B. Trace B corresponds to Trace 2. The command BML is calculated differently depending on the language being used: l For the 8560 Series the calculation uses units of dBm. l For the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the calculation uses display units. Format BML Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of BML are identical to the command "BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)" on page 291. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 293 6 Legacy Command Descriptions BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C) BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transfers Trace B data to Trace C Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the four step process below. 1. Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command) 2. Select the desired instrument settings 3. Take one complete sweep 4. Transfer the data Format BTC Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe:COPY TRACE2, TRACE3 (see "Copy/Exchange" on page 1312) Notes The functions of BTC are identical to the command "KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on page 381. 294 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C) BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data. Trace C must not be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow the four step process below. 1. Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command) 2. Select the desired instrument settings 3. Take one complete sweep 4. Exchange the data Format BXC Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands TRACe3:TYPe? TRACe3:UPDate? TRACe3:DISPlay? TRACe2:TYPe? TRACe2:UPDate? TRACe2:DISPlay? TRACe:EXCHange TRACE2, TRACE3 (See "View/Blank " on page 1284, etc.) Couplings Trace Update is set to Off and Trace Display is set to On. Notes The functions of BXC are identical to the command "KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 376 and to the XCH TRB,TRC form of the command "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 295 6 Legacy Command Descriptions C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off) C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns the A Minus B mode off. That is, it switches off the functionality that was switched on by the command "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page 297 or by the AMB ON form of the command "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 278. Format C1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MATH TRACE4, OFF (see "Math" on page 1299) Notes The functions of C1 are identical to the AMB OFF form of the command "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 278. 296 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A) C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, C2 can restore the original trace after an "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 281 or a "KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 366 command has been executed. Format C2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of C2 are identical to the AMB ON form of the command "AMB (A minus B into A) " on page 278. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 297 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CA (Couple Attenuation) CA (Couple Attenuation) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description During normal operation, the instrument’s input attenuation is coupled to the reference level. This coupling keeps the mixer input at a level such that a continuous wave signal displayed at the reference level is at or below –10 dBm (or the value specified in the ML command.) The CA command sets the threshold to –10 dBm (or to the value specified by the commands "ML (Mixer Level)" on page 456 or "KS, (Mixer Level)" on page 357). The counterpart to the CA command is "AT (Input Attenuation)" on page 282, which allows levels less than the threshold value at the mixer input. Format CA Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENse]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON (see "(Mech) Atten " on page 562) 298 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CARROFF (Carrier Off Power) CARROFF (Carrier Off Power) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Measures the average and peak power of the carrier during the portion of time when the power is off (when it is not within 20 dB of its peak level). The powers are combined to provide a calculation of the leakage power. The measurement must be in zero span for the measurement to run. Format CARROFF TRA|TRB,? Query Data Type <ampl> in dBm. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 299 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CARRON (Carrier On Power) CARRON (Carrier On Power) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Measures the average power of the carrier during the portion of time when it is on and within 20 dB of its peak level. The measurement needs to be in zero span for the measurement to run. Format CARRON TRA|TRB,? Query Data Type <ampl> in dBm. SCPI Equivalent Commands None 300 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CF (Center Frequency) CF (Center Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the value of the center frequency. The step size depends on whether the frequency has been coupled to the span width using the command "CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)" on page 312 l l When coupled, the step size is 10% of the span, or one major graticule division. When uncoupled, the step size is determined by the command "SS (Center Frequency Step Size)" on page 514. Format CF <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ Range: Frequency range of the instrument Default unit is HZ. CF UP CF DN Step size: see Description above. CF OA CF? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 301 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CF (Center Frequency) Query Data Type <freq> in Hz. ASCII “0” if 0, otherwise scientific notation with precision to 1 Hz. SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer? (See "Center Freq" on page 607) Notes 302 Although the instrument allows entry of frequencies not in the specified frequency range, using frequencies outside the frequency span of the instrument is not recommended and is not warranted to meet specifications. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CHANNEL (Channel Selection) CHANNEL (Channel Selection) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Increments or decrements the instrument center frequency by one channel spacing. The channel spacing value is set using the command "ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)" on page 274. Format CHANNEL UP|DN Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer? (See "Center Freq" on page 607) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 303 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CHANPWR (Channel Power) CHANPWR (Channel Power) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Measures the power within the specified channel bandwidth. Format CHANPWR TRA|TRB, <frequency> with frequency unit,? Query Data Type <amplitude> in dBm (without explicit units). SCPI Equivalent Commands None 304 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth) CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Queries or sets the current value of the channel power bandwidth. Channel power can be measured with the command "CHANPWR (Channel Power)" on page 304. Format CHPWRBW <frequency> with frequency unit CHPWRBW? Query Data Type <frequency>, 2 digits to the right of the decimal place. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset 3 GHz Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 305 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CLRAVG (Clear Average) CLRAVG (Clear Average) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Restarts the VAVG command by resetting the number of averaged sweeps to one. The video averaging routine resets the number of sweeps, but does not stop video averaging. Use VAVG OFF to stop video averaging. Format CLRAVG Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar (see "Average/Hold Number" on page 794) 306 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CLRW (Clear Write) CLRW (Clear Write) Syntax 8560 series 8566A/B, 8568A/B Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Clears the specified trace and enables trace data acquisition. The CLRW command places the indicated trace in clear-write mode. Data acquisition begins at the next sweep. (See the command "TS (Take Sweep) " on page 543 for more information about data acquisition.) TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2. In the 8560 series, 8566A/B, and 8568A/B analyzers, the trace settings are controlled by the trace mode parameters, CLRW, VIEW, BLANK, MINH and MAXH and the averaging settings by VAVG. In the X-series the same settings are controlled by the Trace/Detector and View/Blank parameters. The following table describes the parameters set by N9061A in the X-series instrument when the legacy commands for trace mode and averaging are sent. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 307 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CLRW (Clear Write) Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings Legacy Products X-series Trace Commands Averaging (VAVG) Detector (DET) Trace/Detector Trace Type View/Blank Detector CLRW Off Normal ClearWrite On Last set CLRW On Sample Trace Average On Sample MXMH Off Peak Max Hold On Peak MXMH On Sample Trace Average On Peak MINH Off NegPeak Min Hold On NegPeak MINH On Sample Trace Average On NegPeak VIEW Off Normal No change View No change VIEW On Sample Trace Average View Sample BLANK Off Normal No change Blank No change BLANK On Sample Trace Average Blank Sample For example, if an 8560 series analyzer receives CLRW, and averaging is set to ON, then the analyzer's detector is automatically set to Sample. In the same circumstances, N9061A sets the X-series instrument trace type to Trace Average, View/Blank to On, and the Detector to Sample. Format CLRW TRA|TRB Preset: CLRW TRA Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE WRITe (see "Trace/Detector" on page 1264) Preset TRA (after a preset, only trace A is set to clearwrite) Notes The functions of CLRW are identical to the command "A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)" on page 255 and "B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)" on page 287. 308 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CONTS (Continuous Sweep) CONTS (Continuous Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the instrument takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface or from the front panel. Format CONTS Preset: CONTS Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :INITiate:CONTinuous 1 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599) Notes The functions of CONTS are identical to "S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)" on page 499. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 309 6 Legacy Command Descriptions COUPLE (Input Coupling) COUPLE (Input Coupling) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Selects AC or DC coupling. Format COUPLE AC|DC COUPLE? Query Data Type AC|DC SCPI Equivalent Commands :INPut:COUPling AC|DC :INPut:COUPling? (See "RF Coupling" on page 622) Preset AC (when possible) Notes When using the X-series instruments, you must use DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not calibrated when using AC coupling on these instruments. 310 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth) CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Couples the resolution bandwidth to the span. The counterpart to the CR command is the command "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 486 which breaks the coupling. Use the CR command to re-establish coupling after executing an RB command. Format CR Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENse]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON (see "Res BW " on page 588) Preset ON Notes CR uses the legacy instrument settings for resolution bandwidth only if Mode Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 311 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CS (Couple Frequency Step Size) CS (Couple Frequency Step Size) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Couples the center frequency step size to the span width, so that the step size equals 10% of the span width, or one major graticule division. The counterpart to the CS command is "SS (Center Frequency Step Size)" on page 514 which breaks the coupling. Use the CS command to re-establish coupling after an SS command has been executed. Format CS Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO ON (see "CF Step" on page 616) Preset ON 312 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CT (Couple Sweep Time) CT (Couple Sweep Time) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Couples the sweep time to the span, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth. The counterpart to the CT command is "ST (Sweep Time)" on page 516 which breaks the coupling. Use the CT command to re-establish coupling after an ST command has been executed. Format CT Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON (see "Sweep Time Rules" on page 1119) Preset ON Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 313 6 Legacy Command Descriptions CV (Couple Video Bandwidth) CV (Couple Video Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth. The counterpart to the CV command is "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547, which breaks the coupling. Use the CV command to re-establish coupling after executing a VB command. Format CV Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENse]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO ON (see "Video BW " on page 590) Preset ON Notes CV uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON. 314 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DA (Display Address) DA (Display Address) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the contents of the given display address to the controller. Format DA 1 (sets TRA) DA 1025 (sets TRB) DA 3073 (sets TRC) Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes This command only supports the use of DA 1, DA 1025, and DA 3073; these display addresses contain the trace data and are equivalent to using the queries and commands"TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 537, "TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 538, "TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 539, "TA (Trace A)" on page 528 and "TB (Trace B)" on page 529. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 315 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker) DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Calculates the OBW with respect to the power between the displayed delta markers. The power between the displayed markers is then used as the reference, rather than using the total power in the frequency span as is done in the command "PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)" on page 479. If the DELMKBW command is used when no marker is active, a delta marker is activated at the center frequency, and the returned bandwidth is 0. If the active marker is a normal marker when the DELMKBW command is used, the marker type is changed to delta, and the returned bandwidth is 0. Format DELMKBW TRA|TRB,<real>,? Query Data Type <frequency> in Hz SCPI Equivalent Commands None 316 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DET (Detection Mode) DET (Detection Mode) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Selects the type of instrument detection (NEGative peak, NoRMal, POSitive peak, or SaMPle). NEG Enables negative peak detection. NRM Enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm that selectively chooses between positive and negative values. POS Enables positive-peak detection, which displays the maximum video signal detected over a number of instantaneous samples for a particular frequency. SMP Enables sample detection, which uses the instantaneous video signal value. Video averaging and noise-level markers, when activated, activate sample detection automatically. Format DET NEG|NRM|POS|SMP (For option descriptions, see table above) DET? Query Data Type NEG|NRM|POS|SMP SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] (NEGative|NORMal|POSitive|SAMPle) [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]? (See "Detector" on page 1287) Preset NRM Notes The functions of DET are identical to the commands"KSa (Normal Detection)" on page 362, "KSb (Positive Peak Detection)" on page 364, "KSd (Negative Peak Detection)" on page 368, and "KSe (Sample Detection)" on page 370. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 317 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DL (Display Line) DL (Display Line) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Defines the level of the display line and displays it on the instrument screen. Format DL <number>DB|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM Default units are DBM 318 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DL (Display Line) Range: dependent on the reference level DL UP DL DN (Step Increment: 1 major graticule division) DL ON|OFF DL OA DL? Query Data Type <number> (Unit: V in LN, DBM in LG) SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe <ampl> :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE (ON|OFF) :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE? (See "Display Line" on page 1376) Preset OFF Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 319 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DLE (Display Line Enable) DLE (Display Line Enable) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Enables or disables the display line. Format DLE ON|OFF DLE? Query Data Type ON|OFF SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE ON|OFF (see "Display Line" on page 1376) Preset OFF Couplings Turning DL OFF, then ON again does not reset DL level. 320 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DLYSWP (Delay Sweep) DLYSWP (Delay Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Delays the start of the sweep until the specified time after the trigger event has elapsed. Format DLYSWP <number>US|MS|SC|S Range: 2 μS to 65.535 S DLYSWP ON|OFF|1|0 DLYSWP? Query Data Type Returns the value of the sweep delay length in seconds, or a ‘0’ indicating the delay sweep is turned OFF. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <time> :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay? :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe (OFF|ON|0|1) :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe? (See "Trig Delay " on page 1336) Preset OFF, 2 μS Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 321 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DONE (Done) DONE (Done) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Allows you to determine when the instrument has parsed a list of commands and has executed all commands prior to and including DONE. The DONE command returns a value of “1” when all commands in a command string or command list have been completed. If a "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 command precedes the command list, the TS command acts as a synchronizing function, since the command list execution begins after the sweep has been completed. Format DONE? Query Data Type 1 SCPI Equivalent Commands *WAI or *OPC? (see "Wait-to-Continue " on page 162) 322 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions DR (Display Read) DR (Display Read) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sends the contents of the current display address to the controller. Format DR Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 323 6 Legacy Command Descriptions E1[one] (Peak Marker) E1[one] (Peak Marker) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Positions the marker at the signal peak. Format E1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum (see "Peak Search" on page 887) Notes The functions of E1 are identical to MKPK (without secondary keyword) and MKPK HI. See "MKPK (Marker Peak)" on page 444. 324 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency) E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Positions the marker on the screen at the center frequency position. Format E2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:SET]:CENTer (see "Mkr->CF " on page 785) Notes Unlike "MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)" on page 431, which moves the CF to the current position of the active marker, E2 centers the active marker to the center frequency on the instrument screen. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 325 6 Legacy Command Descriptions E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size) E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Establishes the center frequency step size as being the frequency difference between the delta marker and the active marker. Format E3 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:STEP (see "Mkr->CF Step" on page 785) Notes The functions of E3 are identical to the command"MKSS (Marker to Step Size)" on page 451. 326 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level) E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the active marker to the reference level. Format E4 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:RLEVel (see "Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page 787) Notes Unlike "MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)" on page 449, this command moves to the level of the delta Marker when in delta Marker mode. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 327 6 Legacy Command Descriptions EDITDONE (Edit Done) EDITDONE (Edit Done) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description This command is used at the completion of limit-line editing, following an EDITLIML command. You can enter the limit line data between the limit line commands beginning with "EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line) " on page 329 and ending with EDITDONE. Format EDITDONE Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA <x>,<ampl>,<connect>,… (see "Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 825) Couplings "EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 329, "LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)" on page 403, "LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)" on page 398, "LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on page 409, "LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)" on page 405, "LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page 408 328 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line) EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description This command is used to initiate limit-line editing. You can enter the limit line data between the limit line commands beginning with EDITLIML and ending with "EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328. Format EDITLIML Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Couplings "EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328, "LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)" on page 403, "LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)" on page 398, "LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on page 409, "LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)" on page 405, "LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page 408 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 329 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ERR (Error) ERR (Error) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description The ERR? query returns a list of three-digit error codes if errors are present. A return value of “0” means that there are no errors present. Executing ERR? clears all GPIB errors. If a command is a valid legacy command but not accepted by the N9061A application, no error message is generated and the response to ERR? is 0. However, if logging is enabled, the N9061A application command log registers a “Cmd not Supported” error. If a command is not a valid legacy command, a command error is generated; CMD ERR is displayed on the front panel and the response to ERR? is 112. If logging is enabled then "Cmd Error" is written to the command error log. Error codes are provided in N9061A mode for some X-series errors such as external reference, hardware and alignment errors. The X-series error codes are translated to 8560 series error codes so that an error query returns the legacy instrument error code. To review the error via the front panel, select the System > Show > Errors. The following table shows the X-series error codes and the translated value. X-Series Error Code Description 8560 Series Error Code Description 40 TG Alignment Failure 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 42 RF Alignment Failure 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 44 IF Alignment Failure 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 46 LO Alignment Failure 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 330 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ERR (Error) X-Series Error Code Description 8560 Series Error Code Description 48 ADC Alignment Failure 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 50 FM Demod Alignment Failure 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 54 Extended Align Failure Sum 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 71 Characterize Preselector Failure 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error -200.3310 Execution Error; Preselector Centering failed 758 SYSTEM: Unknown system error 503 Frequency Reference Unlocked 336 10 MHz Ref Cal oscillator failed to lock when going to internal 10 MHz reference. 505 2nd LO Unlocked 336 10 MHz Ref Cal oscillator failed to lock when going to internal 10 MHz reference. 509 LO Unlocked 300 YTO UNL: YTO (1st LO) phase-locked loop (PLL) is unlocked. 513 IF Synthesizer Unlocked 450 IF SYSTM: IF hardware failure. Check other error messages. 515 Calibration Oscillator Unlocked 336 10 MHz Ref: Cal oscillator failed to lock when going to internal 10 MHz reference 521 External Ref missing or out of range 905,333 EXT REF: Unable to lock cal oscillator when set to external reference. Check that the external reference is within tolerance. 600 UNLK: 600 MHz reference oscillator PLL is unlocked Format ERR? Query Data Type 0 if no error present. 3-digit number if error present. For valid codes, see table above. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Remote error list cleared. Persistent errors are re-entered into the error list. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 331 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ET (Elapsed Time) ET (Elapsed Time) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns to the controller the elapsed time (in hours) of instrument operation. Format ET? Query Data Type <number> in hours. SCPI Equivalent Commands :SYSTem:PON:ETIMe? (see "Query the Elapsed Time since First Power-On" on page 1260) 332 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B) EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point. Format EX Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of EX are identical to "AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 286 and to the XCH TRA,TRB form of "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 333 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FA (Start Frequency) FA (Start Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the start frequency value. The start frequency is equal to the center frequency minus the span divided by two (FA = CF – SP/2). Changing the start frequency changes the center frequency and span. Format FA <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ <real>: Default unit is Hz. Range: frequency range of the instrument. FA UP|DN Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10. FA OA Specifying OA returns only the current value to the controller. It does not set the active function to the start frequency. FA? Query Data Type <real> in HZ. SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSE]:FREQuency:STARt <number> (HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ) [:SENSE]:FREQuency:STARt? [:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? 334 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FA (Start Frequency) [:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP? (See "Start Freq" on page 612) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 335 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FB (Stop Frequency) FB (Stop Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the stop frequency value. The stop frequency is equal to the center frequency plus the span divided by two (FB = CF + SP/2). Changing the stop frequency changes the center frequency and span. Format FB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ <real>: Default unit is Hz. Range: frequency range of the instrument. FB UP|DN Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10. FB OA Specifying OA returns only the current value to the controller. It does not set the active function to the start frequency. FB? Query Data Type <real> in HZ. SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSE]:FREQuency:STOP <real> (HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ) (see "Stop Freq" on page 614) Preset Instrument maximum frequency. Notes The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It does not set the active function to the stop frequency. 336 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FDSP (Frequency Display Off) FDSP (Frequency Display Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Turns the frequency annotation OFF. Format FDSP OFF FDSP? Query Data Type ‘1’ or ‘0’, indicating ON or OFF. SCPI Equivalent Commands See "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280. Preset ON Couplings It is not possible enable or disable the frequency annotation alone, leaving other annotation unaffected. Thus, the FDSP command behaves in the same way as "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280. If the FDSP command has been used to disable the frequency annotation, sending the command ANNOT ON does not re-enable the display annotation. The display annotation is only enabled by sending the command "IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 356. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 337 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FOFFSET (Frequency Offset) FOFFSET (Frequency Offset) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Selects a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts (for example, center frequency). Relative values such as span and marker delta are not offset. When an offset is in effect, it is displayed beneath the bottom graticule line on the instrument screen. Execute FOFFSET 0 or IP to turn off the offset. Format FOFFSET <real> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ <real>: Default unit is Hz. FOFFSET UP|DN UP or DN changes by 10% of Span. FOFFSET OA FOFFSET? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSE]:FREQuency:OFFSet <number> [:SENSE]:FREQuency:OFFSet? (See "Freq Offset" on page 617) 338 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FOFFSET (Frequency Offset) Preset 0 Hz Notes The functions of FOFFSET are identical to "KSV (Frequency Offset)" on page 391. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 339 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak) FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B Description Automatically adjusts the preselector frequency to yield the greatest signal level at the active marker. The FPKA command peaks the preselector faster than the preselector-peak command, PP Although this command can be executed in all frequency spans, it performs best when the instrument is in zero span. Use the standard preselector peak for all other frequency spans. The FPKA command also returns the amplitude value of active marker. Format FPKA Query Data Type Amplitude value of active marker. SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter (see "Presel Center" on page 571) 340 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FREF (Frequency Reference) FREF (Frequency Reference) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Specifies whether an external source or an internal source is being used. Format FREF INT|EXT FREF? Query Data Type INT|EXT SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE INTernal|EXTernal|SENSe [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE? (See "Freq Ref In " on page 665) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 341 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FS (Full Span) FS (Full Span) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description l l 8560 series: Sets the frequency span of the instrument to full span. Resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, and sweep time are all set to auto-coupled. 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Does an instrument preset, then sets the low band. Whenever the frequency range of the instrument you are using does not match the remote language’s own range, the span is limited by the capabilities of the replacement instrument. The tables below list the frequency ranges for all the supported remote languages when running on any supported X-series instrument. Format FS Range: see tables below Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENse]:FREQuency:CENTer (see "Center Freq" on page 607) [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN (see "Span " on page 1108) Notes The functions of FS are identical to "LF (Low Frequency Preset)" on page 396. PXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command N9030A-503 N9030A-508 N9030A-513 N9030A-526 Remote Language Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range 8560E/EC 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 8561E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 8562E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 342 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions FS (Full Span) N9030A-503 N9030A-508 N9030A-513 N9030A-526 Remote Language Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range 8563E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8564E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8565E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8566A 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 8566B 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 8568A 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 8568B 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz MXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command N9020A-503 N9020A-508 N9020A-513 N9020A-526 Remote Language Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range 8560E/EC 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 8561E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 8562E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 8563E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8564E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8565E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 8.4 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8566A 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 8566B 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 8568A 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 8568B 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz EXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command N9010A-503 N9010A-507 N9010A-513 N9010A-526 Remote Language Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range Frequency Range 8560E/EC 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 8561E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 8562E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 7.0 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 8563E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 7.0 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8564E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 7.0 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8565E/EC 0 Hz - 3.6 GHz 0 Hz - 7.0 GHz 0 Hz - 13.6 GHz 0 Hz - 27.0 GHz 8566A 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 8566B 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 8568A 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 8568B 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 343 6 Legacy Command Descriptions GATE (Gate) GATE (Gate) Syntax Preset State: GATE OFF Legacy Products 8560 series Description Turns the time-gating function on or off. When the time-gating function is turned on, the instrument activates the time gate circuitry according to the parameters controlled by gate length ("GL (Gate Length)" on page 347), gate delay ("GD (Gate Delay)" on page 346) and the gate trigger input. Format GATE ON|OFF|1|0 GATE? Query Data Type 1|0 SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Gate On/Off " on page 1155) Preset OFF 344 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions GATECTL (Gate Control) GATECTL (Gate Control) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Selects between the edge and level mode for time gate function. l l In the edge mode, a specified trigger edge starts the gate delay timer that in turn starts the gate length timer. In the level mode, the gate follows the trigger input level. The gate delay timer ("GD (Gate Delay)" on page 346) and the gate time length ("GL (Gate Length)" on page 347) are operational in the edge mode, but not in the level mode. Format GATECTL EDGE|LEVEL GATECTL? Query Data Type EDGE|LEVEL SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset EDGE Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 345 6 Legacy Command Descriptions GD (Gate Delay) GD (Gate Delay) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate is turned on. GD only applies if "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345 is set to EDGE. Format GD <real>US|MS|SC|S GD UP|DN GD OA GD? Query Data Type <real> S SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay <time> (see "Gate Delay " on page 1161) Preset 3 μs 346 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions GL (Gate Length) GL (Gate Length) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the length of time the time gate is turned on. GL only applies if "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345 is set to EDGE. Format GL <real>US|MS|SC|S GL UP|DN GL OA GL? Query Data Type <real> S SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <time> (see "Gate Length " on page 1162) Preset 1 μs Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 347 6 Legacy Command Descriptions GP (Gate Polarity) GP (Gate Polarity) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the polarity (positive or negative) for the gate trigger. l l If the "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345 is in EDGE mode, the gate delay timer can be triggered on either a positive or negative edge of the trigger input. If the Gate Control is in LEVEL mode and POSitive is selected, the gate is on when the trigger input is high. If the Gate Control is in LEVEL mode and NEGative is selected, the gate is on when the trigger is low. Format GP NEG|POS GP? Query Data Type NEG|POS SCPI Equivalent Commands :SWEep:EGATe:POLarity NEG|POS (see "Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191) Preset POS 348 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions GRAT (Graticule) GRAT (Graticule) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns the graticule on or off. Format GRAT ON|OFF|1|0 GRAT? Query Data Type ON|OFF|1|0 SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATE] (OFF|ON|0|1) (see "Graticule " on page 1376) Preset ON Notes The functions of GRAT are identical to "KSm (Graticule Off)" on page 383 and "KSn (Graticule On)" on page 385. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 349 6 Legacy Command Descriptions HD (Hold Data Entry) HD (Hold Data Entry) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Disables data entry via the instrument numeric keypad, knob, or step keys. The active function readout is blanked, and any active function is deactivated. Format HD Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None 350 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC) I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC) Syntax Legacy Products 8568A/B Description Sets the RF coupling to DC. The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series instruments, for both DC and AC coupling. 8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Analyzer Model Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. 8568A/B 100 Hz 1.5 GHz 100 kHz 1.5 GHz EXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Instrument Model (N9010A) Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Option 503 9 kHz 3.6 GHz 10 MHz 3.6 GHz Option 507 9 kHz 7.0 GHz 10 MHz 7.0 GHz Option 513 9 kHz 13.6 GHz 10 MHz 13.6 GHz Option 526 9 kHz 26.5 GHz 10 MHz 26.5 GHz Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 351 6 Legacy Command Descriptions I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC) MXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Instrument Model (N9020A) Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Option 503 20 Hz 3.6 GHz 10 MHz 3.6 GHz Option 508 20 Hz 8.4 GHz 10 MHz 8.4 GHz Option 513 20 Hz 13.6 GHz 10 MHz 13.6 GHz Option 526 20 Hz 26.5 GHz 10 MHz 26.5 GHz PXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Instrument Model (N9030A) Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Option 503 3 Hz 3.6 GHz 10 MHz 3.6 GHz Option 508 3 Hz 8.4 GHz 10 MHz 8.4 GHz Option 513 3 Hz 13.6 GHz 10 MHz 13.6 GHz Option 526 3 Hz 26.5 GHz 10 MHz 26.5 GHz The X-Series instruments only have a single RF input port. Format I1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :INPut:COUPling DC (see "RF Coupling" on page 622) 352 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC) I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC) Syntax Legacy Products 8568A/B Description Sets the RF coupling to AC. The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series instruments for both DC and AC coupling. 8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Analyzer Model Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. 8568A/B 100 Hz 1.5 GHz 100 kHz 1.5 GHz EXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Instrument Model (N9010A) Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Option 503 9 kHz 3.6 GHz 10 MHz 3.6 GHz Option 507 9 kHz 7.0 GHz 10 MHz 7.0 GHz Option 513 9 kHz 13.6 GHz 10 MHz 13.6 GHz Option 526 9 kHz 26.5 GHz 10 MHz 26.5 GHz Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 353 6 Legacy Command Descriptions I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC) MXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Instrument Model (N9020A) Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Option 503 20 Hz 3.6 GHz 10 MHz 3.6 GHz Option 508 20 Hz 8.4 GHz 10 MHz 8.4 GHz Option 513 20 Hz 13.6 GHz 10 MHz 13.6 GHz Option 526 20 Hz 26.5 GHz 10 MHz 26.5 GHz PXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications DC Coupled Range AC Coupled Range Instrument Model (N9030A) Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Option 503 3 Hz 3.6 GHz 10 MHz 3.6 GHz Option 508 3 Hz 8.4 GHz 10 MHz 8.4 GHz Option 513 3 Hz 13.6 GHz 10 MHz 13.6 GHz Option 526 3 Hz 26.5 GHz 10 MHz 26.5 GHz Format I2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :INPut:COUPling AC (see "RF Coupling" on page 622) Notes The X-Series instruments only have a single RF input port. 354 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ID (Identify) ID (Identify) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description The ID? query returns the current remote language to the controller (for example, “HP8563E”). The response value is determined by your remote language selection. This is configured via the selection in the front-panel Mode Setup menu when in N9061A mode. The remote language selection can also be set using the SCPI command :SYSTem:LANGuage (see "Mode Setup" on page 879). ID? also works when the instrument is not in N9061A mode. In this case the instrument model number is returned. The string that is returned is identical to the second field of text that is returned from the *IDN? command. For more information see: l "Setting up N9061A" on page 126 l "List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 133 Format ID OA ID? Query Data Type See Description above. SCPI Equivalent Commands *IDN? is similar; see "Identification Query " on page 157. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 355 6 Legacy Command Descriptions IP (Instrument Preset) IP (Instrument Preset) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Performs an instrument preset, setting the instrument back to its factory settings. IP does not affect the contents of any data or trace registers or stored preselector data. IP does not clear the input or output data buffers on the 8560-series analyzers, but does clear them on the 8566A/B, 8568A/B. Instrument preset automatically occurs when you turn on the instrument. IP is a good starting point for many measurement processes. When IP is executed remotely, the instrument does not necessarily execute a complete sweep, however. You should execute a "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 to ensure that the trace data is valid after an IP. N9061A executes this command after any language switch on the X-Series instrument. Format IP Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of IP are identical to the command "KST (Fast Preset)" on page 390. If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing IP does not reset this value. This is to protect the instrument. 356 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KS, (Mixer Level) KS, (Mixer Level) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below the reference level. The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting. When KS, is activated, the effective mixer level can be set from –10 dBm to –70 dBm in 10 dB steps. As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator automatically changes to limit the maximum signal at the mixer input to your specified setting for signals less than or equal to the reference level. Format KS, <real>DM|MV|UV KS, OA KS,? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <real> dBm :[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]? (See "Max Mixer Level" on page 570) Preset – 10 dBm Notes The functions of KS, are identical to "ML (Mixer Level)" on page 456. If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing IP does not reset this value. This is to protect the instrument. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 357 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution) KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description l 8566A/B: Reinstates automatic preselector tracking, after KS/ has been executed. Normally, the center of the preselector filter automatically tracks signal responses in the four frequency bands of the 2 to 22 GHz range. The KS/ command allows manual adjustment of the preselector tracking. X-Series instruments can consume this command with no action. l 8568A/B: Specifies the resolution of the marker frequency counter. Format KS= <real>HZ|KZ|MZ|GZ KS=? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> (see "Gate Time " on page 739) Notes For 8568A/B, the functions of KS= are identical to "MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)" on page 436. 358 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KS( (Lock Registers) KS( (Lock Registers) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Secures the contents of state registers one through six. When the registers are secured, the commands "SV (Save State)" on page 521 and "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502 cannot save more instrument states in the registers, but instead cause the display of "SAVE LOCK" on the instrument display. To save an instrument state in a locked register, first execute "KS) (Unlock Registers)" on page 360 to unlock the registers. The recall function of the instrument is not affected by this function. Format KS( Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Unlocked Couplings This state is not affected by IP. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 359 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KS) (Unlock Registers) KS) (Unlock Registers) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Unlocks the state registers, where instrument states are stored with "SV (Save State)" on page 521 and "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502. Format KS) Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Unlocked Couplings This state is not affected by IP. 360 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSA (Amplitude in dBm) KSA (Amplitude in dBm) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to dBm units. Format KSA Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of the KSA command are identical to AUNITS DBM . See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 283. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 361 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSa (Normal Detection) KSa (Normal Detection) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Selects normal input detection. That is, it enables the Rosenfell detection algorithm that selectively chooses between positive and negative values. Format KSa Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSa are identical to DET NRM. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317. 362 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSB (Amplitude in dBmV) KSB (Amplitude in dBmV) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to dBmV units. Format KSB Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSB are identical to AUNITS DBMV. See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 283. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 363 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSb (Positive Peak Detection) KSb (Positive Peak Detection) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Enables positive peak input detection for displaying trace information. Trace elements are only updated when the detected signal level is greater than the previous signal level. Format KSb Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSb are identical to DET POS. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317. 364 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSC (Amplitude in dBμV) KSC (Amplitude in dBμV) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to dBμV units. Format KSC Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSC are identical to AUNITS DBUV. See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 283. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 365 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSc (A Plus B to A) KSc (A Plus B to A) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Performs a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, KSc can restore the original trace after an AMB or a C2 command has been executed. Format KSc Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSc are identical to "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 281. 366 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSD (Amplitude in Volts) KSD (Amplitude in Volts) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to voltage units. Format KSD Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSD are identical to AUNITS V. See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 283. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 367 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSd (Negative Peak Detection) KSd (Negative Peak Detection) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Selects negative-peak input detection for displaying trace information. Each trace element is updated with the minimum value detected during the sweep. Format KSd Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] NEGative (see "Detector" on page 1287) Notes The functions of KSd are identical to DET NEG. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317. 368 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSE (Title Mode) KSE (Title Mode) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Activates the title mode, writing a message to the top line of the display. Format KSE <char><real><terminator> The only characters that N9061A accepts as <terminator> are ‘@’ and Carriage Return. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA “text” (see "Change Title " on page 1375) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 369 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSe (Sample Detection) KSe (Sample Detection) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Selects sample input detection for displaying trace information. Format KSe Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle (see "Detector" on page 1287) Notes The functions of KSe are identical to DET SMP. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317. 370 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSG (Video Averaging On) KSG (Video Averaging On) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Enables video averaging. The averaged trace is displayed in Trace A. Format KSG <average length> KSG ON KSG OA KSG? If video averaging is off when either KSG? or KSG OA is sent to the instrument, video averaging is turned ON and the current average count is returned to the controller. Query Data Type Current average count. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe:COPY TRACE#,TRACE3 :TRACe3:TYPE WRITe [:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle :TRACe#:TYPE AVERage [:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNT <integer> (See "Copy/Exchange" on page 1312, "Detector" on page 1287, etc.) Preset Preset state is OFF. If ON, <average length> is preset to 100. Notes The functions of KSG are identical to VAVG ON. See "VAVG (Video Average)" on page 545. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 371 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSg (Display Off) KSg (Display Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns the instrument’s display Off. Format KSg Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:ENABle OFF (see "Display Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 1389) Notes On the legacy spectrum analyzers, this command turned the CRT beam power off to avoid unnecessary wear on the CRT. Although this command is supported, displays used on the XSeries instruments have a much longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy spectrum analyzers. 372 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSH (Video Averaging Off) KSH (Video Averaging Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Switches video averaging Off. Format KSH Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe3:MODE BLANk :TRACe#:TYPE WRITe (See "View/Blank " on page 1284) Notes The functions of KSH are identical to VAVG OFF. See "VAVG (Video Average)" on page 545. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 373 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSh (Display On) KSh (Display On) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns the instrument’s display On. Format KSh Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:ENABle ON (see "Display Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 1389) Notes On the early models of spectrum analyzers, CRT beam power was often switched Off to prevent wear of the CRT. This command was used to turn the CRT beam power on again. Although this command is supported, displays used on the X-Series instruments have a much longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy spectrum analyzers. 374 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSI (Extend Reference Level) KSI (Extend Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description In legacy analyzers, KSI extends the reference level range to maximum limits of –139.9 dBm and +60 dBm. N9061A accepts this command but takes no action, because the standard reference level lower limit of XSeries instruments covers the “extended” range of the legacy instruments. Format KSI Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset Off Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 375 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C) KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data. Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow the four step process below. 1. Select single sweep mode ("S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 500 or "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510) 2. Select the desired instrument settings 3. Take one complete sweep using the command "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 4. Exchange the data Format KSi Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSi are identical to "BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 295 and the XCH TRB,TRC form of "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553. 376 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSj (View Trace C) KSj (View Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Displays Trace C. Format KSj Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSj are identical to VIEW TRC. See "VIEW (View Trace)" on page 551. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 377 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSK (Marker to Next Peak) KSK (Marker to Next Peak) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description If there is a marker on the screen, this command moves this marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude. Format KSK Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:NEXT :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl> :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> (See "Pk Excursion " on page 891) Notes The functions of KSK are similar to the MKPK NH form of "MKPK (Marker Peak)" on page 444, except that KSK does not take into account the marker peak threshold value or the marker peak excursion value. For more details on marker peak threshold, see the command "MKPT (Marker Threshold)" on page 445 and "TH (Threshold)" on page 531. For more details on marker peak excursion, see the command "MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion) " on page 446. 378 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSk (Blank Trace C) KSk (Blank Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks Trace C. Format KSk Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSk are identical to BLANK TRC. See "BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 292) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 379 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSL (Marker Noise Off) KSL (Marker Noise Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Disables the noise density function which displays the RMS noise density at the marker. KSL does not blank the marker. Format KSL Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion OFF (see "Marker Function" on page 742) Notes The functions of KSL are identical to MKNOISE OFF. See "MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page 441. 380 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C) KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transfers Trace B data to Trace C Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the four step process below. 1. Select single sweep mode ("S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 500 or "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510) 2. Select the desired instrument settings 3. Take one complete sweep using the command "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 4. Transfer the data Format KSl Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSl are identical to "BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on page 294. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 381 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSM (Marker Noise On) KSM (Marker Noise On) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Displays the noise density at the marker. The noise density is normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth. Format KSM OA KSM? Query Data Type Noise density at the marker. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion NOISe (see "Marker Function" on page 742) Notes The functions of KSM are identical to MKNOISE ON. See "MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page 441. 382 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSm (Graticule Off) KSm (Graticule Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks the graticule on the instrument display. Format KSm Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSm are identical to GRAT OFF. See "GRAT (Graticule)" on page 349. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 383 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSN (Marker Minimum) KSN (Marker Minimum) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the marker to the minimum value detected. Format KSN Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MINimum (see "Min Search " on page 900) Notes The functions of KSN are identical to "MKMIN (Marker Minimum)" on page 438. 384 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSn (Graticule On) KSn (Graticule On) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns on the graticule on the instrument display. Format KSn Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSn are identical to GRAT ON. See "GRAT (Graticule)" on page 349. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 385 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSO (Marker Span) KSO (Marker Span) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description This command operates only when the delta marker is On (see "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432 or "M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page 414). When the delta marker is on and KSO is executed, the left marker specifies the start frequency, and the right marker specifies the stop frequency. If the delta marker is off, the command does nothing. Format KSO Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer2[:SET]:DELTA:SPAN (see "MkrΔ->Span" on page 789) Notes The functions of KSO are identical to "MKSP (Marker Span)" on page 450. If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position. 386 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSo (Annotation Off) KSo (Annotation Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks the annotation on the instrument display. Format KSo Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSo are identical to ANNOT OFF. See "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 387 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSP (GPIB Address) KSP (GPIB Address) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Allows you to display or change the current read/write HP-IB address of the instrument. Note that the “HZ” in the command format string is required. Format KSP OA KSP <integer> HZ Query Data Type <integer> SCPI Equivalent Commands :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <integer> (see "GPIB Address" on page 1241) Preset Factory preset address: 18 388 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSp (Annotation On) KSp (Annotation On) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Activates the annotation on the instrument display. Format KSp Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSp are identical to ANNOT ON. See "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 389 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KST (Fast Preset) KST (Fast Preset) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Performs an instrument preset, setting the instrument back to its factory settings. Format KST Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes There is no fast preset for X-Series instruments. Instead, the Code Compatibility software performs an instrument preset (IP) when the KST command is issued. The functions of KST are therefore identical to "IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 356. 390 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSV (Frequency Offset) KSV (Frequency Offset) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Allows you to specify a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts, for example, center frequency. Relative values, for example, span and delta marker, are not offset. Format KSV Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSV are identical to "FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)" on page 338. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 391 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSx (External Trigger) KSx (External Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Activates the normal external trigger mode. When KSx is executed, the RF input signal is only displayed when the external trigger level exceeds the trigger threshold level. Format KSx Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSx are identical to TM EXT. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536. If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less than 20 msec, the display is refreshed only when a fresh trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to flicker. In X-Series instruments, all traces are displayed continuously, so are therefore free of flicker. 392 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSy (Video Trigger) KSy (Video Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Activates the normal video trigger mode. When KSy is executed, the RF input signal is only displayed when the video trigger signal, which is internally triggered off the input signal, exceeds the trigger threshold level. Format KSy Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of KSy are identical to the TM VID form of "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536 and to "T4 [four] (Video Trigger)" on page 527. If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less than 20 msec, the display is refreshed only when a fresh trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to flicker. In X-Series instruments, all traces are displayed continuously, so are therefore free of flicker. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 393 6 Legacy Command Descriptions KSZ (Reference Level Offset) KSZ (Reference Level Offset) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Offsets all amplitude readouts on the display but without affecting the trace. Once activated, KSZ displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen. Sending KSZ 0, or presetting the instrument, eliminates an amplitude offset. Format KSZ <real>DM|MV|UV 8566A/B only supports unit DM KSZ OA KSZ? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet? (See "Reference Level" on page 559) Preset 0 Notes The functions of KSZ are identical to "ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)" on page 495. 394 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions L0 [zero] (Display Line Off) L0 [zero] (Display Line Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Disables the display line. Format L0 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of L0 are identical to DLE OFF. See "DLE (Display Line Enable)" on page 320. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 395 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LF (Low Frequency Preset) LF (Low Frequency Preset) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B Description Performs a low frequency preset. That is, it selects a Start Frequency of 0 Hz and a Stop Frequency of 2.5 GHz, a Reference Level of 0 dBm, and sets all coupled functions to automatic. Format LF Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None 396 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LG (Logarithmic Scale) LG (Logarithmic Scale) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) as logarithmic units, without changing the reference level. Format LG <number>DB|DM Range: 1, 2, 5, and 10 LG UP|DN LG OA LG? Query Data Type <number> DB When in linear mode, LG? returns "0". SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing? :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <ampl> dB :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision? (See "Scale / Div" on page 570) Preset 10 dB Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 397 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value) LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description This command is used to enter a frequency value for a limit-line segment. Format LIMF <number>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ The response to the query LIMF? is not supported by N9061A. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset N/A Couplings "EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 329, "EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328 398 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed) LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns a number between 0 and 3, which specifies whether the active trace passed or failed the upper and lower limit line tests. Format LIMIFAIL? Query Data Type The meanings of the returned numbers (0-3) are shown in the "Query Data Type Codes" on page 400 table below. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:FAIL? (see "Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only)" on page 826) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 399 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Query Data Type Codes Query Data Type Codes Results of the LIMIFAIL Query Result Meaning 0 The active trace passed both the upper and the lower limit tests. This value is also returned if there are no limits, or if LIMITST is OFF. 1 The active trace failed the lower limit test. 2 The active trace failed the upper limit test. 3 The active trace failed both the upper and the lower limit tests. 400 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line) LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Deletes the current limit line. Format LIMIPURGE Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete (see "Delete All Limits" on page 824) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 401 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line) LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Recalls a limit-line set from the limit-line table in the module user memory. The table is stored in user memory with the command "LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)" on page 404. The command displays a limit line, which is recalled by the name assigned to it. A limit line may be saved and given a name using LIMISAV, or entered from the front panel with the screen-title function. To display the line, send the command LIMITST 1 (see "LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)" on page 407). Format LIMIRCL delimeter identifier delimiter Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2, <“filename”> (see "Limit" on page 976) 402 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines) LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative. Format LIMIREL ON|OFF|1|0 LIMIREL? Query Data Type 1|0 SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:LLINe:CMODe FIXed|RELative (see "Fixed / Relative Limit (Remote Command Only) " on page 829) Preset OFF Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 403 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMISAV (Save Limit Line) LIMISAV (Save Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Saves the active limit line to module memory under the name assigned to it. Any previously existing limit line having the same name is overwritten with the new limit-line table data. Refer also to the command "LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)" on page 402. Format LIMISAV delimeter identifier delimiter Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2, <“filename”> (see "Limit " on page 1030) 404 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude) LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Assigns the lower-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment. Format LIML <number>DB|DBM Query Data Type N/A. The query is not supported by N9061A. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 405 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line) LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Used with the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 505 to make the selected limit-line segment flat. Format LIMTFL 0|1 LIMTFL? Query Data Type 0|1 SCPI Equivalent Commands None 406 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function) LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Activates the limit-line test function, which compares the trace data in the current sweep with the limits set up in the limit table of the active limit line. The results of the current active trace compared with the active limit line can be read using the command "LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)" on page 399. When this option is set to 1 (ON), the active limit-line test limits are displayed on-screen, along with a LIMIT FAILED message if the trace data fails. Format LIMITST 1|0 LIMITST? Query Data Type 1|0 SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Limit " on page 801) :CALCulate:LLINe:TEST OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Test Limits" on page 823) Preset 0 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 407 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line) LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Makes the selected limit-line segment sloped. Format LIMTSL 0|1 LIMTSL? Query Data Type 0|1 SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset 1 (Sloped) 408 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude) LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Assigns the upper-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment. Format LIMU <number>DB|DBM Query Data Type N/A (Query is not supported by N9061A) SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 409 6 Legacy Command Descriptions LN (Linear Scale) LN (Linear Scale) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Scales the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) proportional to the input voltage (that is, linearly), without changing the reference level. The bottom line of the graticule represents 0 V. Format LN Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear (see "Scale Type" on page 570) Preset Off 410 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions M1 [one] (Marker Off) M1 [one] (Marker Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks any markers showing on the display. Format M1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE OFF (see "Marker" on page 689) Notes Unlike the MKOFF ALL form of "MKOFF (Marker Off)" on page 442, M1 also blanks inactive markers. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 411 6 Legacy Command Descriptions M2 [two] (Marker Normal) M2 [two] (Marker Normal) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the active marker to the marker frequency. If the active marker type is not currently Normal (for example, if it is Delta), the M2 command changes it to a Normal marker. Format M2 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC M2 UP|DN UP or DN increments 10% of span M2 OA M2? Query Data Type <real>. See "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X <freq|time> :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE POSition (See "Marker" on page 689) Notes 412 The functions of M2 are identical to "MKN (Marker Normal)" on page 439. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions M2 [two] (Marker Normal) If the active marker has not been declared with "MKACT (Activate Marker)" on page 429, a Normal marker is turned on and this active marker is assumed to be marker number 1. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 413 6 Legacy Command Descriptions M3 [three] (Delta Marker) M3 [three] (Delta Marker) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Computes the frequency and amplitude difference between the active marker and the delta (or difference) marker. If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, M3 places one at the specified frequency or on the right hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, M3 places an active marker at the center of the screen. Format M3 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC M3 UP|DN UP or DN increments 10% of span M3 OA M3? 414 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions M3 [three] (Delta Marker) Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer2:MODE POSition|DELTa|OFF :CALCulate:MARKer2:REFerence 1 :CALCulate:MARKer2:X <freq|time> (See "Marker" on page 689) Preset 0 Notes The functions of M3 are identical to "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432. The active marker is the number 1 marker unless otherwise specified by the command "MKACT (Activate Marker)" on page 429. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 415 6 Legacy Command Descriptions M4 [four] (Marker Zoom) M4 [four] (Marker Zoom) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description This command increases or decreases the frequency span. With the UP/DN parameters, the change is by one step. With a numeric value, the command moves the marker's horizontal (X) position to the specified position in frequency or time. Format M4 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC M4 UP|DN UP or DN increases or decreases the frequency span by one step M4 OA The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the active function to the active marker. M4? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands None 416 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MA (Marker Amplitude Output) MA (Marker Amplitude Output) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If both the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the command returns the amplitude difference between the two markers. Format MA Query Data Type 8566A/B, 8568A/B: dependent on the currently set trace data format (see "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530, MDS, O1, O2, O3, or O4). 8560 Series: Amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P). SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Y? (see "Marker" on page 689) Notes The functions of MA are identical to "MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page 428. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 417 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off) MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8568A/B Description Turns the marker frequency counter off. Format MC0 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF (see "Counter " on page 736) Preset Off Notes The functions of MC0 are identical to MKFC OFF. See "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435. 418 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On) MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On) Syntax Legacy Products 8568A/B Description Turns the marker frequency counter on. Format MC1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt[:STATe] ON :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt:X? (See "Counter " on page 736) Preset Off Notes The functions of MC1 are identical to MKFC ON. See "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 419 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MDS (Measurement Data Size) MDS (Measurement Data Size) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Formats binary data in one of the following formats: B Selects a data size of one byte (8 bits). W Selects a data size of one word (16 bits). If no keyword is specified in the command, the default value of W is assumed. Format MDS B|[W] MDS? Query Data Type B|W SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset W 420 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MDU (Measurement Data Units) MDU (Measurement Data Units) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the measurement data units, as a list of four values. N9061A returns the values in display units. Format MDU[?] Query Data Type The four data values returned are as follows: 1. Lower vertical scale limit 2. Upper vertical scale limit 3. Baseline (dBm) 4. Reference level (dBm) SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 421 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MEAN (Trace Mean) MEAN (Trace Mean) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the mean value of the specified trace in display units. Format MEAN TRA|TRB TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2. Query Data Type Mean value of the specified trace in display units. SCPI Equivalent Commands CALCulate:DATA[1|2|3|4|5|6:COMPress? MEAN TRACe:MATH:MEAN? TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4|TRACE5|TRACE6 (See "Mean Trace Data (Remote Command Only) " on page 1325) 422 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement) MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Measures the average power of the carrier during that portion of the time when it is on. The on state is defined as the time when the signal is within a selected number of dB of its peak level. The range of amplitudes that is defined as the on state can be set with the command. The amplitude range is set relative to the peak value of the signal. Format MEANPWR TRA|TRB,<number>,? Range: 0.01 dB to 100 dB Query Data Type <number> in double. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes MEANPWR is similar to "CARRON (Carrier On Power)" on page 300, except that CARRON defines ‘on’ as that time when the signal is within 20 dB of its peak level. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 423 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MEAS (Meas) MEAS (Meas) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the current sweep status. l If the instrument is set to sweep and make measurements continuously, the command returns CONTS. l If it is set to make a single sweep with a single measurement, the command returns SNGLS. The instrument can be set to single sweep using the command "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510 and it can be set to continuous sweep using the command "CONTS (Continuous Sweep)" on page 309. Format MEAS? Query Data Type SNGLS|CONTS SCPI Equivalent Commands :INITiate:CONTinuous? (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599) Note that the response values for this command differ from those of the legacy command 424 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MF (Marker Frequency Output) MF (Marker Frequency Output) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the frequency (or time) of the on-screen active marker. If both an active marker and the delta marker are on the screen, the frequency difference is returned. Format 8560 series: MF? 8566A/B, 8568A/B: MF Query Data Type 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Dependent on the current trace data format (see "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530, MDS, O1, O2, O3 and O4). 8560 series: Always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P). SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:X? (see "Marker" on page 689) Notes 8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On when using the MF command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the controller. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 425 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MINH (Minimum Hold) MINH (Minimum Hold) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Updates the chosen trace with the minimum signal level detected at each trace-data point from subsequent sweeps. Format MINH TRA|TRB Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE MINHold (see "Trace/Detector" on page 1264) Preset After a Preset, all Minhold traces are set to 1000 dBm. 426 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MINPOS (Minimum X Position) MINPOS (Minimum X Position) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the X co-ordinate value that corresponds to the minimum amplitude of the specified trace. Format MINPOS TRA|TRB|TRC Query Data Type Value in X-axis display units. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer12:MINimum :CALCulate:MARKer12:X? (See "Marker" on page 689) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 427 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKA (Marker Amplitude) MKA (Marker Amplitude) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If both the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the command returns the amplitude difference between the two markers. Format MKA? Query Data Type 8560 Series: The marker amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P). 8566 and 8568 Series: Specifies the amplitude of the active marker in dBm when the active marker is the fixed or amplitude type (see "MKTYPE (Marker Type)" on page 455). SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer1|2:Y? (see "Marker" on page 689) Notes The functions of MKA are identical to "MA (Marker Amplitude Output)" on page 417. 428 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKACT (Activate Marker) MKACT (Activate Marker) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the active marker. There can be four different markers, but only one marker can be active at any time. Format MKACT <integer> Range: 1,2,3,4. Default: 1 MKACT? Query Data Type <integer> SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset 1 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 429 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKBW (Marker Bandwidth) MKBW (Marker Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns the bandwidth at the specified power level relative to an on-screen marker (if present) or the signal peak (if no on-screen marker is present). Format MKBW <number>? Query Data Type <number> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:BANDwidth[:STATe] ON :CALCulate:BANDwidth:NDB <rel_ampl> :CALCulate:BANDwidth:RESult? :CALCulate:BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF (See "N dB Points " on page 830) 430 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency) MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency and moves the marker to the center of the screen. Format MKCF Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:X:CENTer (see "Marker" on page 689) Notes The functions of MKCF are identical to "E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)" on page 325. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 431 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKD (Marker Delta) MKD (Marker Delta) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Computes the frequency and amplitude difference of the active marker and the delta marker. These values are displayed on the screen. If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the command places one at the specified frequency or on the left or right hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the command places an active marker at the center of the screen. Format MKD <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC MKD UP|DN UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span. MKD OA MKD? 432 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKD (Marker Delta) Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer2:MODE POSition|DELTa|OFF :CALCulate:MARKer2:REFerence 1 :CALCulate:MARKer2:X (See "Marker" on page 689) Preset 0 Notes For 8566A/B and 8568A/B, the functions of MKD are identical to "M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page 414. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 433 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKF (Marker Frequency) MKF (Marker Frequency) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the frequency value of the active marker. 8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On when using the MKF? command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the controller. Format MKF <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC MKF UP|DN UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span. MKF OA MKF? Query Data Type 8560 Series: The data is returned in ASCII format. For all other languages, the format of the returned data is determined by "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530 command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 420. SCPI Equivalent Commands 434 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 689) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKFC (Marker Counter) MKFC (Marker Counter) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. The resolution of the frequency marker counter is determined by "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435. Format MKFC ON|OFF|1|0 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt ON|OFF :CALCulate:MARKer2:FCOunt:X? (See "Counter " on page 736) Preset OFF Notes The functions of MKFC are identical to "MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)" on page 418 and "MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)" on page 419. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 435 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution) MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: 436 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution) Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. The marker counter resolution value is always given either in Hertz or in seconds depending on whether the instrument is operating in the frequency domain or the time domain. Format MKFCR <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ MKFCR UP|DN (8566A/B, 8568A/B only) MKFCR OA MKFCR? Query Data Type <real> in Hz or S. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> (see "Gate Time " on page 739) Preset 10 kHz Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKFCR are identical to "KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution)" on page 358. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 437 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKMIN (Marker Minimum) MKMIN (Marker Minimum) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the active marker to the minimum value detected. Format MKMIN Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MINimum (see "Min Search " on page 900) Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKMIN are identical to "KSN (Marker Minimum)" on page 384. 438 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKN (Marker Normal) MKN (Marker Normal) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the active marker to the specified frequency. If no marker is currently turned on, a normal marker is turned on. If the active marker type is not currently Normal (for example, it is Delta), the command changes it to a Normal marker. Format MKN <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC MKN UP|DN UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span. MKN OA MKN? Query Data Type See "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 439 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKN (Marker Normal) :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE POSition (See "Marker" on page 689) Notes 440 The functions of MKN are identical to "M2 [two] (Marker Normal)" on page 412. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKNOISE (Marker Noise) MKNOISE (Marker Noise) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Displays the average RMS noise density at the marker. Format MKNOISE ON|OFF|1|0 MKNOISE? Query Data Type 1|0 SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion NOISe :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion OFF :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion? (Returns OFF|NOIS) (See "Marker Function" on page 742) Preset OFF Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKNOISE are identical to "KSM (Marker Noise On)" on page 382. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 441 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKOFF (Marker Off) MKOFF (Marker Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns off either the active marker or all the markers. If the ALL parameter is omitted, only the active marker is turned off. Format MKOFF [ALL] Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE OFF (see "Marker" on page 689) 442 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKP (Marker Position) MKP (Marker Position) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the marker position horizontally, in display units. Format MKP <integer> Range: 1 to 1001 MKP? Query Data Type <integer> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 689) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 443 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKPK (Marker Peak) MKPK (Marker Peak) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Executing MKPK HI, or simply MKPK (no secondary keyword), positions the active marker at the highest signal detected. If an active marker is on the screen, the MKPK parameters move the marker as follows: HI (highest) Moves the active marker to the highest peak. NH (next highest) Moves the active marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude. NR (next right) Moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the right of the current marker. NL (next left) Moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the left of the current marker. Format MKPK [HI]|NH|NR|NL Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:NEXT :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:LEFT|RIGHt (See "Peak Search" on page 887) Notes The functions of MKPK (no secondary keyword) and MKPK HI are identical to "E1[one] (Peak Marker)" on page 324. For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKPK NH are similar to "KSK (Marker to Next Peak)" on page 378, except that KSK does not take in to account the marker peak excursion or marker peak threshold values. For more details on marker peak excursion, see "MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)" on page 446. 444 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKPT (Marker Threshold) MKPT (Marker Threshold) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the minimum amplitude level from which a peak on the trace can be detected. Format MKPT <number>DBM MKPT UP|DN UP or DN increments by one step size MKPT OA MKPT? Query Data Type <number> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> (see "Pk Threshold " on page 892) Preset –130 dBm Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 445 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion) MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion) Syntax Preset State: 6 dB Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the minimum signal excursion for the instrument’s internal peak identification routine. The default value is 6 dB. In this case, any signal with an excursion of less than 6 dB on either side of the marker would not be identified. Thus, if an MKPK NH command were to be executed on such a signal, the instrument would not place a marker on this signal peak. Format MKPX <real>DB MKPX UP|DN UP or DN increments by one vertical display division MKPX OA MKPX? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl> (see "Pk Excursion " on page 891) 446 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKREAD (Marker Readout) MKREAD (Marker Readout) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Selects the type of active trace information displayed by the instrument marker readout. The MKREAD command can select the following types of active trace information: FRQ frequency SWT sweep time IST inverse sweep time PER period The results of the data depend on the MKREAD parameter and the frequency span, and whether the marker delta function is used. MKREAD Type Non-Zero Span FRQ Reads frequency SWT Non-Zero Span Delta Zero Span Zero Span Delta Reads delta frequency N/A N/A Reads time since the start of sweep Reads delta time between end points Waveform measurements of detected modulation Waveform measurements of detected modulation IST N/A N/A N/A Computes frequency corresponding to delta of markers. Performs 1/ (T1 – T2) PER Period of frequency (Pulse measurement) delta time N/A N/A Format MKREAD FRQ|SWT|IST|PER MKREAD? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 447 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKREAD (Marker Readout) Query Data Type FRQ|SWT|IST|PER SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X:READout FREQuency|TIME|ITIMe|PERiod :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X:READout:AUTO ON (See "X Axis Scale" on page 713) Preset FRQ Notes The Inverse Sweep Time (IST) readout is only available when using a delta marker in zero span. FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is not available in N9061A. 448 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKRL (Marker to Reference Level) MKRL (Marker to Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the active marker to the reference level. Format MKRL Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:RLEVel (see "Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page 787) Notes The functions of MKRL are identical to "E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)" on page 327. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 449 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKSP (Marker Span) MKSP (Marker Span) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description This command operates only when the delta marker is On (see "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432 or "M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page 414). When the delta marker is On and MKSP is executed, the delta marker and active marker determine the start and stop frequencies. The left marker specifies the start frequency, and the right marker specifies the stop frequency. If marker delta is Off, there is no operation. Format MKSP Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer2[:SET]:DELTA:SPAN (see "MkrΔ->Span" on page 789) Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, The functions of MKSP are identical to "KSO (Marker Span)" on page 386. If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position. 450 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKSS (Marker to Step Size) MKSS (Marker to Step Size) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the center-frequency step-size equal to the marker frequency. If the instrument is in the delta mode, the step size is set to the frequency difference between the active and the delta marker. Format MKSS Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:STEP (see "Mkr->CF Step" on page 785) Notes When the marker is a delta marker, the functions of MKSS are identical to "E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)" on page 326. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 451 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKT (Marker Time) MKT (Marker Time) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Places a marker at a position that corresponds to a specified point in time during the sweep. Format MKT <real>S|MS|US|SC Default unit of time is seconds (‘S’ or ‘SC’). MKT OA MKT? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 689) Preset ½ Sweep time 452 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKTRACE (Marker Trace) MKTRACE (Marker Trace) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the active marker to the corresponding position in Trace 1, Trace 2, or Trace 3. Format MKTRACE TRA|TRB|TRC TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3. MKTRACE? Query Data Type TRA|TRB|TRC SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 453 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKTRACK (Marker Track) MKTRACK (Marker Track) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the instrument display and keeps the signal peak at center screen. To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before turning on MKTRACK. Format MKTRACK ON|OFF|1|0 MKTRACK? Query Data Type 8560 series: 0 |1 8566A/B, 8568A/B: ON|OFF SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer#:TRCKing[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Signal Track (Span Zoom)" on page 1114) Preset OFF Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKTRACK are identical to "MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)" on page 458 and "MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)" on page 459. 454 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MKTYPE (Marker Type) MKTYPE (Marker Type) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the type of marker. Type Function Commands Used to Position Marker PSN Allows the marker to be positioned horizontally in display units (default) "MKP (Marker Position)" on page 443 "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434 AMP Allows the marker to be positioned according to amplitude "MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page 428 FIXED Allows a marker to be placed at any fixed point on the display "MKP (Marker Position)" on page 443 "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434 "MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page 428 Format MKTYPE PSN|AMP|FIXED MKTYPE? Query Data Type PSN|AMP|FIXED SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE POSition :CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE FIXed :CALCulate:MARKer#:X :CALCulate:MARKer#:Y (See "Marker" on page 689) Preset PSN Notes Marker type can only be set for an active marker. The marker type is reset to PSN when the marker is turned off (using "MKOFF (Marker Off)" on page 442), or when the instrument is preset. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 455 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ML (Mixer Level) ML (Mixer Level) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below the reference level. The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting. If an external amplifier gain value is set, the mixer level is determined using the following equation: l Mixer Level = Ref. Level - Attenuation + Ext. Amplifier Gain The external amplifier gain is not preset by doing an IP command in case the instrument is measuring a large signal. This is to protect the instrument from damage from a large signal. Format ML <real>DB|DM|MV|UV ML UP|DN 456 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ML (Mixer Level) UP or DN increments by 10 dB ML OA ML? Query Data Type <real> in dBm SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <ampl> dBm [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]? (See "Max Mixer Level" on page 570) Preset –10 dBm Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of ML are identical to "KS, (Mixer Level)" on page 357. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 457 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off) MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Disables the marker tracking mode. Format MT0 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of MT0 are identical to MKTRACK OFF. See "MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page 454. 458 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MT1 [one] (Marker Track On) MT1 [one] (Marker Track On) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the instrument display and keeps the signal peak at center screen. To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before issuing an MT1 command. Format MT1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of MT1 are identical to MKTRACK ON. See "MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page 454. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 459 6 Legacy Command Descriptions MXMH (Maximum Hold) MXMH (Maximum Hold) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected. MXMH updates the specified trace (either Trace A or Trace B) with a new value from a detector only if the new value is larger than the previous trace data value. Format MXMH TRA|TRB TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE MAXHold [:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt <integer> (See "Average/Hold Number" on page 794) Notes 460 The functions of MXMH are identical to "A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)" on page 256 and "B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)" on page 288. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data) NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Activates or de-activates the normalization routine for stimulus-response measurements. This function subtracts trace B from trace A, offsets the result by the value of the normalized reference position (NRL) and displays the result in trace A. Normalization is automatically turned off by an instrument preset (IP), or at power on. Normalization is not available when using linear mode and is mutually exclusive of other trace math. Format NORMLIZE ON|OFF|1|0 NORMLIZE OA The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the active function to the normalization state. NORMLIZE? Query Data Type 1|0 SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe:COPY TRACE1, TRACE3 (if necessary) :TRACe[2]:UPDate OFF (blank Trace2, which corresponds to TRB) :TRACe[2]:DISPlay OFF :CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]? (See "Normalize On/Off" on page 1316) Preset OFF Couplings NORMLIZE sets Trace B to Blank mode and turns AMBPL or AMB off. All trace math is mutually exclusive, so turning one on turns the other off and vice versa. Similarly, when Normalize is on and you change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold (that is, Active), Normalize is turned off. Errors Accurate normalization occurs only if the reference trace and the measured trace are onscreen. If any of these traces are off-screen, an error message will be displayed. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 461 6 Legacy Command Descriptions NRL (Normalized Reference Level) NRL (Normalized Reference Level) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the normalized reference level. Intended for use with the NORMLIZE command. When using NRL, the input attenuator and IF step gains are not affected. This function is a trace-offset function enabling the user to offset the displayed trace without introducing hardware switching errors into the stimulus-response measurement. The unit of measurement for NRL is dB. Format NRL <number>DB NRL? Query Data Type Returns the current Normalized Reference Level. SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel <rel ampl> (see "Norm Ref Lvl" on page 1319) Preset 0 dB 462 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position) NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Adjusts the normalized reference-position that corresponds to the position on the graticule where the difference between the measured and calibrated traces reside. The dB value of the normalized reference position is equal to the normalized reference level. The normalized reference position can be adjusted between 0.0 and 10.0, corresponding to the bottom and top graticule lines, respectively. Format NRPOS <number> Range: Min = 0; Max = 10 NRPOS UP|DN UP or DN increments by 1.0 NRPOS OA NRPOS? Query Data Type Returns the current Normalized Reference Position. SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition <integer> (see "Norm Ref Posn" on page 1320) Preset 10 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 463 6 Legacy Command Descriptions O1 [one] (Format - Display Units) O1 [one] (Format - Display Units) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transmits trace amplitude and position information as decimal values in display units. Format O1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None 464 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes) O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transmits trace amplitude and position information as two 8-bit binary numbers (one instruction word). Format O2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 465 6 Legacy Command Descriptions O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units) O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transmits trace vertical axis information only, in measurement units of Hz, dBm, dB, volts or seconds. Format O3 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None 466 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte) O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transmits trace amplitude information only as a binary number. Format O4 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset N/A Couplings TDF B ("TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530) or "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)" on page 465. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 467 6 Legacy Command Descriptions OA or ? (Query Active Function) OA or ? (Query Active Function) Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Query active function. The active functions are ACPBW, ACPSP, AT, CF, CRTHPOS, CRTVPOS, DA, DL, DOTDENS, FA, FB, FMGAIN, GD, GL, LG, MKA, MKD, MKFCR, MKN, MKPAUSE, MKPX, ML, NDB, NRL, RB, RCLS, ROFFSET, RL, RLPOS, SAVES, SAVRCLN, SETDATE, SETTIME, SP, SQLCH, SRCALC, SRCAT, SRCPOFS, SRCPSWP, SRCPWR, SRCTK, SS, ST, TH, TVLINE, VB, VBR, and user-defined active function specified by the ACTDEF command. Format OA|? Note that OA sets the active function, whereas ? does not. Thus, for example, SP CF? 100MZ sets the Span, whereas SP CF OA 100 MZ sets the Center Frequency. Query Data Type Depends on active function. SCPI Equivalent Commands None 468 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth) OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description This command is used to query the current value of the percent occupied power. This value is set by "DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)" on page 316 and "PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)" on page 479. This command can also be used to set the percent occupied power. Format OCCUP <number> OCCUP? Range: 0.10 to 100 Query Data Type <number> SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset 90 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 469 6 Legacy Command Descriptions OL (Output Learn String) OL (Output Learn String) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transmits information to the controller that describes the state of the instrument when the OL command is executed. This information is called the “Learn String.” The Learn String can be sent from the controller memory back to the instrument to restore the instrument to its original state. The OL command is not completely supported, due to differences between the X-Series and 8566/8568. The following table outlines each byte of the array and the bits supported within that byte. Byte Support Information 1 Fixed decimal value 31 2 Fixed decimal value 118 3 to 9 Supported 10 Supported 11 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 12 to 17 Supported 18 Supported: Bits 6, 2, 1 and 0 Unsupported: Bits 7, 5, 4, and 3 19 Supported: Bits 7, 6, 4, 3, and 0 Bit 5 on X-Series only Unsupported: Bits 1 and 2 20 Supported: Trigger Mode, Sweep Mode, TRB Clearwrite status Unsupported: Recorder Output 21 Supported 22 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 23 to 25 Supported 26 Supported: Scale Type, Log Scale Factor, and Display State 470 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions OL (Output Learn String) Byte Support Information Unsupported: XY Recorder 27 Supported 28 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 29 to 30 Supported 31 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 32 to 37 Supported 38 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 39 to 45 Supported 46 to 47 VAVG count limit, value returned is always current count value * 2. 48 to 53 Supported 54 to 57 If active marker is a delta marker, active marker absolute Y position only supported for X-Series 58 to 61 If active marker is a delta marker, reference marker absolute Y position only supported for X-Series 62 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 63 Supported 64 Supported: Log Amp Units, R3, R2, and R4 Unsupported: Stop sweep 65 Supported: Lin Amp Units, TRC View Status Unsupported: Bits 5 and 4 (always set HI) 66 to 71 Supported 72 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 73 Supported: Video Avg Unsupported: Power on last, Ext Ref Lvl, Fast HP-IB, Bit 4 (always set HI) 74 to 77 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 78 Unsupported 79 Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0 80 Fixed decimal 162 Format OL <80-byte string> OL? Query Data Type See table above. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 471 6 Legacy Command Descriptions OT (Output Trace Annotations) OT (Output Trace Annotations) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sends 32 character-strings to the controller. Each of the 32 character-strings can be up to 64 characters long. The significance of each string is as follows: Index Content 1 "BATTERY" 2 "CORR’D" 3 resolution bandwidth 4 video bandwidth 5 sweep time 6 attenuation 7 reference level 8 scale 9 trace detection 10 center frequency or start frequency 11 span or stop frequency 12 reference level offset 13 display line 14 threshold 15 marker frequency 16 marker amplitude 17 frequency offset 18 video averaging 19 title 20 "PL1 UNLOCK" 21 "PL2 UNLOCK" 22 "Y-I-0 UNLOCK" 23 "HET UNLOCK" 24 "M/N UNLOCK" 472 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions OT (Output Trace Annotations) Index Content 25 "REFUNLOCK" 26 "EXT/OVEN" 27 "MEASUNCAL" 28 frequency diagnostics 29 - 30 "SRQ" 31 center frequency "STEP" 32 active function Format OT Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The 'data invalid indicator' status report in string 27 of the returned text is only supported on X-Series instruments. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 473 6 Legacy Command Descriptions PEAKS (Peaks) PEAKS (Peaks) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sorts the signal peaks in the source trace by frequency or amplitude, and sends the results to destination trace. Format PEAKS TRA|TRB|TRC,TRA|TRB|TRC,AMP|FRQ[?] The first trace specified is the destination; the second trace specified is the source. Query Data Type Number of peaks found. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT FREQuency|AMPLitude :CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|3|4:PEAK? :TRACe[:DATA] TRACE[1]|2|3 (See "Peak Sort " on page 895) 474 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions PKPOS (Peak Position) PKPOS (Peak Position) Syntax Legacy Products 8568 Description Returns the X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified trace. Format PKPOS TRA|TRB|TRC Query Data Type The X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified trace. SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer12:MAXimum :CALCulate:MARKer12:X? (See "Marker" on page 689) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 475 6 Legacy Command Descriptions PLOT (Plot) PLOT (Plot) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Allows you transfer trace data, graticule and annotation information to a printer using a parallel port. The legacy analyzers transferred data directly to a plotter via the GPIB connection. PLOT now transfers data to a printer, and prints the entire screen. Although PLOT reads in plotter dimension values, N9061A ignores these. Format PLOT <value>,<value>,<value>,<value> N9061A ignores all plotter dimension <value> parameters. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :HCOPY[:IMMediate] (see "Print" on page 603) Notes In legacy instruments, PLOT also returns HPGL. The X-series instruments with N9061A installed do not return HPGL. 476 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions PP (Preselector Peak) PP (Preselector Peak) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B Description Optimizes preselector tracking to peak the amplitude of a signal at the active marker. If a marker is not on the screen, PP places a marker at the highest signal level, and optimizes preselector tracking at that frequency. Format PP Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter (see "Presel Center" on page 571) Notes This command is only supported when the X-series instrument’s maximum frequency limit is greater than 3.6 GHz. If the command is sent to an instrument with a maximum frequency limit of 3.6 GHz or less, the command is not executed, and no error is generated. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 477 6 Legacy Command Descriptions PRINT (Print) PRINT (Print) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Transfers trace data, graticule and annotation of the screen directly to the instrument’s default printer. Format PRINT [0|1] N9061A ignores all parameters for this command. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :HCOPY[:IMMediate] (see "Print" on page 603) 478 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions PWRBW (Power Bandwidth) PWRBW (Power Bandwidth) Syntax 8560 Series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Computes the combined power of all signal responses in the specified trace, and returns the bandwidth of the specified percentage of total power. The number in the command is a percentage value, that is, it has a range of 0 to 100. Format 8560 series: PWRBW TRA|TRB, <real>,? 8566A/B, 8568A/B: PWRBW TRA|TRB|TRC, <real> Range: 0-100 (percentage) Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes If the percent total power is 100%, the power bandwidth equals the frequency span. On the 8566A/B analyzer, this command stops the trace. That is not the case for N9061A. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 479 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection) Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection) Syntax Legacy Products 8568A/B Description Sets the detector function to EMI Peak detection. This is the same as the Peak detector but uses CISPR related bandwidths. Format Q0 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The effect of Q0 is identical to that of the DET EPK command. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317. 480 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection) Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection) Syntax Legacy Products 8568A/B Description Sets the detector function to Quasi Peak detection. This is a fast-rise, slow-fall detector used to make CISPR compliant EMI measurements. Format Q1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The effect of Q1 is identical to that of the DET QPD command. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 481 6 Legacy Command Descriptions R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ) R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Deactivates all instrument service requests (SRQs) except SRQ140, the illegal-command service request. The function is identical to RQS 32 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497). Format R1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None 482 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ) R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Activates the end-of-sweep and illegal-command service requests. The function is identical to RQS 36 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497). Format R2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 483 6 Legacy Command Descriptions R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ) R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Activates the hardware-broken and illegal-command service requests. The function is identical to RQS 40 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497). Format R3 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None 484 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ) R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Activates the units-key-pressed and illegal-command SRQs. The function is identical to RQS 34 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497). Format R4 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes X-Series instruments cannot replicate the units-key-pressed Service Request since no front panel interaction is supported. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 485 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RB (Resolution Bandwidth) RB (Resolution Bandwidth) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the resolution bandwidth. Available bandwidths are 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz. The resolution bandwidths, video bandwidths, and sweep time are normally coupled, but executing RB decouples them. Execute "CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 311 to re-establish coupling. Format RB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ RB UP|DN 486 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RB (Resolution Bandwidth) UP or DN increments in a 1, 3, 10 sequence RB AUTO|MAN (8560 series only) RB OA RB? Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <real> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO? (See "Res BW " on page 588) Preset 8560 series: Coupled mode, 1 MHz 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Coupled mode, 3 MHz Notes Default values on X-Series instruments may vary from the legacy analyzers. Refer to the XSeries User’s and Programmer’s Reference to find out any restrictions that may apply. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 487 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio) RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the coupling ratio between the frequency span and the resolution bandwidth. It allows you to set the Span/RBW ratio to 1/<value>, where <value> is set by the user. Format RBR <real> RBR UP|DN UP or DN increments in a 1, 2, 5 sequence RBR OA RBR? Query Data Type <real> in RBR units SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio <integer> (see "Span:3dB RBW " on page 593) 488 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RC (Recall State) RC (Recall State) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Recalls instrument state data from the specified state register in the instrument’s memory. l l l Registers 1 through 6 are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel configuration) saved with "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502 or "SV (Save State)" on page 521. Option LAST: recalls the instrument state that existed previous to executing the IP command or switching the instrument off. 8566/8 instruments use register 7 for this purpose. Option PWRON: sets the instrument state to the same state that occurred when the instrument was switched on. This state was originally saved using the SAVES command. Format RC <integer> Range: 1-6 RC LAST|PWRON See Description above. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands *RCL <integer> (see "Recall Instrument State " on page 159) Notes The functions of RC are identical to "RCLS (Recall State)" on page 490. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 489 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RCLS (Recall State) RCLS (Recall State) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Recalls instrument state data from the specified state register in the instrument’s memory. l l l Registers 1 through 6 are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel configuration) saved with "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502 or "SV (Save State)" on page 521. Option LAST: recalls the instrument state that existed previous to executing the IP command or switching the instrument off. 8566/8 instruments use register 7 for this purpose. Option PWRON: sets the instrument state to the same state that occurred when the instrument was switched on. This state was originally saved using SAVES. Format RCLS <integer> Range: 1-6 RCLS LAST|PWRON See Description above. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands *RCL <integer> (see "Recall Instrument State " on page 159) Notes The functions of RCLS are identical to "RC (Recall State)" on page 489. 490 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions REV (Revision) REV (Revision) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the firmware revision number. In X-Series instruments, this command returns the build date of the N9061A application that you have installed in your instrument. The date is returned in YYMMDD format (where YY is the number of years since 1950, and MM is the month and DD is the date). Format REV? Query Data Type Firmware revision number. SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 491 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RL (Reference Level) RL (Reference Level) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the amplitude level of the top graticule line on the display. This represents the reference level. Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the instrument. 492 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RL (Reference Level) Format 8560 series: RL <real>DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM 8566A/B, 8568A/B: RL <real>DB|DM|MV|UV Range (MXA and PXA): –170 dBm to +30 dBm, with 0 dB attenuation Range (EXA): –170 dBm to +23 dBm RL UP|DN UP or DN increments by one vertical division in log mode, and in a 1, 2, 5 sequence in linear mode RL OA RL? Query Data Type <real> in dBm [LG] or V [LN] SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> (see "Reference Level" on page 559) Preset 0 Couplings If the display line is on, changing the reference level does not adjust the position of the display line. Notes The Reference Level range for the 8566A/B and 8568A/B is –89.9 dBm to +30 dBm. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 493 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RMS (Root Mean Square Value) RMS (Root Mean Square Value) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the RMS value of the trace, in display units. Format RMS TRA|TRB|TRC Query Data Type RMS value of the trace, in display units. SCPI Equivalent Commands None 494 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset) ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Offsets all amplitude readouts without affecting the trace. Once activated, ROFFSET displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen. Sending ROFFSET 0 or presetting the instrument eliminates any amplitude offset. Format ROFFSET <real>DM|MV|UV|DB ROFFSET UP|DN (8560 series only) UP or DN increments one vertical division ROFFSET OA ROFFSET? Query Data Type <real> in dB SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRAC:eY[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 495 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset) :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet? (See "Reference Level Offset" on page 580) Preset 0 Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of ROFFSET are identical to "KSZ (Reference Level Offset)" on page 394. 496 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RQS (Request Service Conditions) RQS (Request Service Conditions) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets a bit mask for service requests, each service request has a corresponding bit number and decimal equivalent of that bit number as shown in the table below. Use the decimal equivalents to set the bit mask. For example, to set a mask for bits 4 and 5, add the decimal equivalents (16 + 32 = 48), then send RQS 48. Status Byte Definition Bit# State Description 6 RQS Request Service 5 Error Present 4 Command Complete Any command completed. 2 End of Sweep Any sweep completed. 1 Message Display message appears. 0 Trigger Trigger activated. 7 3 Format RQS <bit number> RQS OA RQS? Query Data Type The current bit mask. SCPI Equivalent Commands *SRE *SRE? (See "Service Request Enable " on page 160) STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer> Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 497 6 Legacy Command Descriptions RQS (Request Service Conditions) STATus:OPERation:ENABle? STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> STATus:OPERation:NTRansition? (See "Operation Enable" on page 192) 498 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions S1[one] (Continuous Sweep) S1[one] (Continuous Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the instrument takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface. Format S1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :INITiate:CONTinuous 1 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599) Preset Couplings Errors Notes The functions of S1 are identical to "CONTS (Continuous Sweep)" on page 309. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 499 6 Legacy Command Descriptions S2 [two] (Single Sweep) S2 [two] (Single Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument to single sweep mode. Each subsequent time that this command is sent, one sweep is started if the trigger conditions are met. Format S2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :INITiate:CONTinuous 0 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599) Notes The functions of S2 are similar to "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510. 500 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SADD (Add Limit Line Segment) SADD (Add Limit Line Segment) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Used to add a limit-line segment to the current limit line. Format SADD Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 501 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SAVES (Save State) SAVES (Save State) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Saves the current state of the instrument in any of the registers one through six. Format SAVES <integer> Range: 1-6 SAVES PWRON PWRON sets the instrument to the state it was in when power was turned on. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands *SAV <integer> (see "Save Instrument State " on page 160) Notes The functions of SAVES are identical to "SV (Save State)" on page 521. 502 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment) SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Deletes the limit-line segment specified with the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 505. Format SDEL Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 503 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SDON (Terminate SEDI Command) SDON (Terminate SEDI Command) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Used to terminate the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 505. Format SDON Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None 504 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment) SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Activates the limit-line segment you identify by its segment number in the limit-line table. Format SEDI <integer> Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 505 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SER (Serial Number) SER (Serial Number) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns the X-series instrument serial number to the controller. Format SER OA SER? Query Data Type Serial number. SCPI Equivalent Commands *IDN? (see "Identification Query " on page 157) 506 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SETDATE (Set Date) SETDATE (Set Date) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument. The date takes the form YYMMDD (Year, Month, Day) Format SETDATE <number> SETDATE? Query Data Type YYMMDD SCPI Equivalent Commands :SYSTem:DATE “YYYY,MM,DD” Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 507 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SETTIME (Set Time) SETTIME (Set Time) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument. The time takes the form HHMMSS (Hour, Minute, Second). Format SETTIME <number> SETTIME? Query Data Type HHMMSS SCPI Equivalent Commands :SYSTem:TIME “HH,MM,SS” 508 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SMOOTH (Smooth Trace) SMOOTH (Smooth Trace) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified for the running average. Each point value is replaced with the average of the values (in measurement units) of the given number of points centered on it. Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution. If the number of points is an even number, then the number of points is increased by one. Smoothing decreases at the endpoints. Format SMOOTH TRA|TRB|TRC,<number> TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe:MATH:SMOoth TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Smooth Trace Data (Remote Command Only) " on page 1323) :CALCulate:DATA:COMPress? ... Notes Prerequisite Commands: "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 when using trace data. Some differences may be noticed between the smoothed trace in the legacy analyzers and the smoothed trace using the same signal in X-Series instruments. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 509 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SNGLS (Single Sweep) SNGLS (Single Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument to single-sweep mode. Each time "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 is sent, one sweep taken as long as the trigger conditions are met. Format SNGLS Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :INITiate:CONTinuous 0 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599) Notes The functions of SNGLS are identical to "S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 500. 510 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SP (Frequency Span) SP (Frequency Span) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 511 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SP (Frequency Span) Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Changes the total displayed frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency. Format SP <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ SP UP|DN Step Increment: 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence (up to the stop frequency of the instrument) SP FULL|ZERO|LAST (8560 series only) SP OA SP? Query Data Type <real> in Hz SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious (See "Last Span " on page 1114) Preset 856x: Full Span 8566: 20 GHz Couplings If resolution and video bandwidths are coupled to the span width, the bandwidths change with the span width to provide a predetermined level of resolution and noise averaging. Likewise, the sweep time changes to maintain a calibrated display, if coupled. All of these functions are normally coupled, unless "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 486, "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547, or "ST (Sweep Time)" on page 516 have been executed. 512 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SRQ (Service Request) SRQ (Service Request) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sends a service request to the controller when the SRQ operand fits the mask supplied with "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497. Format SRQ <digit> Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes N9061A does not support the setting of bit 1 (units-key-pressed) of the status byte. Bit 1 of the status byte is always set to Off. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 513 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SS (Center Frequency Step Size) SS (Center Frequency Step Size) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the center frequency step size. Format SS <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ Range: 25 to hardware maximum 514 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SS (Center Frequency Step Size) SS UP|DN UP or DN increments in a 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence SS AUTO|MAN (8560 series only) SS OA SS? Query Data Type <real> in Hz SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO ON|OFF [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> (See "CF Step" on page 616) Preset 10 percent of span (1/4 of Res BW if zero-span) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 515 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ST (Sweep Time) ST (Sweep Time) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the displayed frequency or time span. Format ST <real>S|MS|US|SC ST UP|DN UP or DN: Increments in a 1,2,5 sequence ST AUTO|MAN (8560 series only) ST OA ST? 516 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions ST (Sweep Time) The OA option in the ST command behaves in the same manner as the ST? query, in that it returns the current value to the controller. However, the OA option does not set the active function to Sweep Time. Query Data Type <real> in seconds SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME <time> [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON (See "Sweep Time" on page 1117) Preset AUTO Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 517 6 Legacy Command Descriptions STB (Status Byte Query) STB (Status Byte Query) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns to the controller the decimal equivalent of the bits set in the status byte (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497 and "SRQ (Service Request)" on page 513). STB is equivalent to a serial poll. Format STB? Query Data Type Status Byte (8 bits) SCPI Equivalent Commands *STB? (see "Status Byte Query " on page 161) 518 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes) STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns the standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units. Format STDEV TRA|TRB|TRC TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3. Query Data Type Standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe[:DATA]? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321) Notes Prerequisite Commands: "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 when using trace data Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 519 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SUM (Sum) SUM (Sum) Syntax 8560 Series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series Description Returns the sum of all the trace values to the controller. Format SUM TRA|TRB|TRC(,)(?) Query Data Type Sum of all the trace values. The 8560 series returns display units, range (0-610)*601 points, or, if "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530 is set to M, it returns ASCII. SCPI Equivalent Commands 520 None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SV (Save State) SV (Save State) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Saves the current state of the instrument in any of the registers one through six. Format SV <integer> Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands *SAV <integer> (see "Save Instrument State " on page 160) Notes The functions of SV are identical to "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 521 6 Legacy Command Descriptions SWPCPL (Sweep Couple) SWPCPL (Sweep Couple) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Selects either a stimulus-response (SR) or signal-analyzer (SA) auto-coupled sweep time. In stimulus response mode, auto-coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements. Stimulus response auto-coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus-response measurements when the system frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test. Format SWPCPL SA|SR SWPCPL? Query Data Type SA|SR SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes NORMal|ACCuracy|SRESponse [:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes? (See "Sweep Time Rules" on page 1119) Preset 522 SA Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level) T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Removes the threshold boundary and its readout from the display. Format T0 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of T0 are identical to THE OFF. See "THE (Threshold Enable)" on page 533. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 523 6 Legacy Command Descriptions T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger) T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument sweep to free run trigger mode. Format T1 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of T1 are identical to TM FREE. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536. 524 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions T2 [two] (Line Trigger) T2 [two] (Line Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument sweep to line trigger mode. Format T2 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of T2 are identical to TM LINE. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 525 6 Legacy Command Descriptions T3 [three] (External Trigger) T3 [three] (External Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument sweep to external trigger mode. Format T3 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of T3 are identical to TM EXT. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536. 526 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions T4 [four] (Video Trigger) T4 [four] (Video Trigger) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Sets the instrument sweep to video trigger mode. Format T4 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Notes The functions of T4 are identical to TM VID. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 527 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TA (Trace A) TA (Trace A) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns trace A amplitude values from the instrument to the controller. Format TA? Query Data Type The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the screen. Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as determined by "O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)" on page 464, "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)" on page 465, "O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)" on page 466 and "O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)" on page 467. The format of the returned data is also affected by "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530, and if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 420. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe[:DATA]? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) :FORMat:[:TRACe][:DATA] (See "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321) 528 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TB (Trace B) TB (Trace B) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns trace B amplitude values from the instrument to the controller. Format TB? Query Data Type The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the screen. Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as determined by "O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)" on page 464, "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)" on page 465, "O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)" on page 466 and "O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)" on page 467. The format of the returned data is also affected by "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530, and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 420. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] (See "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 529 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TDF (Trace Data Format) TDF (Trace Data Format) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Formats trace information for return to the controller. The different trace data formats are as follows: Option Format P Parameter data format. Numbers are in Hz, Volts, Watts, dBm, dBmV, DBuV, DBV. A Returns data as an A-block data field. MDS determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 420.) I Returns data as an I-block data field. MDS determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 420.) M ASCII data format. B Binary data format. MDS determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on page 420.) Format TDF P|A|I|M|B TDF? Query Data Type P|A|I|M|B SCPI Equivalent Commands :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ASCii | INTeger,32 | REAL,32 | REAL,64 (See "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174) Preset 530 P Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TH (Threshold) TH (Threshold) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Blanks signal responses below the threshold level, similar to a base line clipper. The threshold level is nine major divisions below the reference level, unless otherwise specified. Format TH <real>DM|MV|UV|DB TH UP|DN UP or DN increments by one step size TH ON|OFF (8560 series only) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 531 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TH (Threshold) TH OA TH? Query Data Type <real> in dB SCPI Equivalent Commands :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> (see "Pk Threshold " on page 892) Preset –130 dBm 532 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions THE (Threshold Enable) THE (Threshold Enable) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Turns the threshold on or off. Format THE ON|OFF THE? Query Data Type ON|OFF SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset OFF Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 533 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TIMEDATE (Time Date) TIMEDATE (Time Date) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets and returns the date and time of the real-time clock of the instrument. The number takes the form YYMMDDHHMMSS (Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second). TIMEDATE ON and TIMEDATE OFF commands are supported on some models of the 8560 series. This set of commands displays or hides the time and date in the graticule. N9061A does not support these commands, but accepts them and does not display a CMD ERR error or CMD NOT SUPPORTED error. Format TIMEDATE <number> TIMEDATE? Query Data Type <number> (YYMMDDHHMMSS) SCPI Equivalent Commands :SYSTem:DATE ... :SYSTem:DATE? :SYSTem:TIME ... :SYSTem:TIME? Notes 534 This command changes the system clock of the instrument and may invalidate any time-based licenses installed on the instrument. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TITLE (Title) TITLE (Title) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Activates the screen title mode, enabling you to enter your own title for the screen. Valid string delimiters, which must be used to start and terminate the title, are listed below. See the 8560 Series User’s Guide for more details. Format TITLE <string delimiter>(<char>)(<real>)<string delimiter> Valid string delimiters: !, ", $, %, &, ’, /, :, =, \, ~, @ Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA “text” (see "Change Title " on page 1375) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 535 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TM (Trigger Mode) TM (Trigger Mode) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Selects a trigger mode: free, line, video, or external. The options are as follows: Option Mode Selected EXT External mode. Connect an external trigger source to J5 EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT on the rear panel of the instrument. The source must range from 0 to 5 V (TTL). The trigger occurs on the rising, positive edge of the signal (about 1.5 V). FREE Free-run mode. Sweep triggers occur as fast as the instrument will allow. LINE Line mode. Sweep triggers occur at intervals synchronized to the line frequency. VID Video mode. Sweep triggers occur whenever the positively-sloped part of the input signal passes through the video trigger level. This trigger level can be changed (refer to the VTL command), and a dashed line appears on the screen to denote (approximately) the selected level. Video triggering is not available for resolution bandwidths £100 Hz. TV Allows TV triggering if Options 101 and 102, or Option 301 is installed. The functions of TM TV and TV TRIG are similar. TM TV does not select the TV line number, set up the amplitude level, change the span, change the bandwidth, or change the sweep time. Format TM FREE|VID|LINE|EXT|TV TM? Query Data Type FREE|VID|LINE|EXT|TV SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal1|EXTernal2|IMMediate|LINE|FRAMe|RFBurst|VIDeo|TV Preset FREE Notes The functions of TM are identical to "T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)" on page 524, "T2 [two] (Line Trigger)" on page 525, "T3 [three] (External Trigger)" on page 526 and "T4 [four] (Video Trigger)" on page 527. 536 (See "Trigger" on page 1326) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TRA (Trace Data Input and Output) TRA (Trace Data Input and Output) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transfers Trace A amplitude values from the instrument to the controller. Format TRA? Query Data Type The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530 for details on formatting. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321) :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ... :FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 537 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TRB (Trace Data Input and Output) TRB (Trace Data Input and Output) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transfers Trace B amplitude values between the instrument and the controller. Format TRB? Query Data Type The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530 for details on formatting. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321) :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ... :FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped 538 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TRC (Trace Data Input and Output) TRC (Trace Data Input and Output) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Transfers Trace Amplitude values from the instrument to the controller. Format TRC? Query Data Type The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530 for details on formatting. SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321) :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ... :FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 539 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TRDSP (Trace Display) TRDSP (Trace Display) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Displays a trace or turns it off. Format TRDSP TRA|TRB|TRC ON|OFF|1|0 TRDSP TRA|TRB|TRC ? (Not supported in 8566A/B) Query Data Type 1|0 SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 (see "View/Blank " on page 1284) Preset ON for TRA, OFF for TRB and TRC 540 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity) TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Selects the edge (positive or negative) of the trigger input that causes the trigger event. TRIGPOL is available in all trigger modes. Format TRIGPOL POS|NEG TRIGPOL? Query Data Type POS|NEG SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative (see "Trig Slope " on page 1335) Preset POS Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 541 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TRSTAT (Trace State) TRSTAT (Trace State) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Returns trace states to the controller. Valid trace states are Clear-write, View, Blank, Maximum Hold, and Off. Possible Trace States Trace State Description Trace State Data Returned Clear-write CLRW View VIEW Blank BLANK Maximum Hold MXMH Off No data is returned Format TRSTAT? Query Data Type CLRW|VIEW|BLANK|MXMH SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe[1]|2|3:UPDate? :TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay? (See "View/Blank " on page 1284) 542 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions TS (Take Sweep) TS (Take Sweep) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Starts and completes one full sweep before the next command is executed. A TS command is required for each sweep in the single-sweep mode. TS always restarts a sweep even if a sweep is already in progress. Format TS Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :INITiate[:IMMediate] (see "Restart" on page 984) *OPC? (see "Operation Complete " on page 158) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 543 6 Legacy Command Descriptions USERREV USERREV Syntax USERREV ""|"NNNNNNN" Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Modifies the response returned by the query "REV (Revision)" on page 491. This command sets the response to be either the supplied parameter value, or else, if this command's parameter is empty or missing, the system-defined value. This is an N9061A "extension" command, which is not defined in the command set of any legacy instrument. Format USERREV ""|"NNNNNNN" "N" is any digit 0-9 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Preset System-defined value Notes Usually, you need to set the REV? response only once with this command, and the setting is retained while power is on. However, you will need to set the response again in the following 3 cases: 1. Keysight recovery 2. Instrument software upgrade 3. Restore Mode Defaults 544 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VAVG (Video Average) VAVG (Video Average) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Enables the video-averaging function, which averages trace points to smooth the displayed trace. The VAVG? query returns the number of averages for the 8560 series of analyzers. There are a few differences in the way video averaging works in the N9061A application compared to the legacy analyzers. See the following table for a summary of these differences. Legacy Analyzers - Video Averaging Behavioral Differences Condition Legacy Spectrum Analyzers N9061A application All conditions. 8566 and 8568 only - Original trace is displayed in Trace C. Only displays the averaged trace. The averaged trace is displayed in Trace A. Average Count value set to 0. Cannot be set to 0. Video averaging is turned off if the Averaging Count is set to 0. Change in Average Count 8566 and 8568 only - Continues Resets the counter to zero and starts the measurement Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 545 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VAVG (Video Average) Condition Legacy Spectrum Analyzers N9061A application setting to a higher value. counting from where the previous value left off. again. Change in average counter setting to a lower value. 8566 and 8568 only - Updates the screen annotation with the lower averaging value. If the new count value has not been reached, continues until the new lower count has been reached. Averaging turned on. Sweep time remains unchanged. Sweep time changes due to the selection of the sample detector. Change in resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time, reference level or attenuation. 8566 and 8568 only - In single sweep mode, resets counter to zero and starts the averaging again. Continues the measurement without resetting the counter. Change in center frequency or span. In single sweep mode, resets counter to zero and starts the averaging again. In single sweep mode the X-Series instrument uses all stored averages. Does not reset the counter after changes in RBW, VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level and Attenuation. 8566 and 8568 only - Also resets the counter after changes in RBW, VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level and Attenuation. Format If the new, lower count value has already been reached, the instrument will stop and wait until you take a new sweep. VAVG <average length> Range: Integer from 1 to 999 VAVG UP|DN (8560 series only) UP or DN: Increments by 1 VAVG ON|OFF VAVG? Query Data Type <number>, or 0 if it is OFF SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe#:TYPE AVERage (for VAVG ON) :TRACe#:TYPE WRITe (for VAVG OFF) [:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNT <integer> (See "Average/Hold Number" on page 794) Preset 100, OFF Notes For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of VAVG are identical to "KSG (Video Averaging On)" on page 371 or "KSH (Video Averaging Off)" on page 373. 546 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VB (Video Bandwidth) VB (Video Bandwidth) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the video bandwidth, which is a post-detection, low-pass filter. When auto coupled, the video bandwidth is calculated as Resolution Bandwidth x Video Resolution Bandwidth Ratio. See "VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)" on page 549 for more details. Format VB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ VB UP|DN Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 547 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VB (Video Bandwidth) UP or DN increments in a 1, 3, 10 sequence VB AUTO|MAN (8560 series only) VB OA VB? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo <freq> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO ON (See "Video BW " on page 590) Preset 548 Coupled mode, 1 MHz Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset) VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths which is maintained when these bandwidths are coupled. The bandwidths are usually coupled unless "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 486 or "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547 have been executed. The options specify the behavior as follows: Option Behavior 1 The video bandwidth is one step higher than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is 3. –1 The video bandwidth is one step lower than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is 0.3. 0 The ratio remains fixed at 1. That is, the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth are always equal. Format VBO 1|–1|0 Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands None Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 549 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio) VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths that is maintained when these bandwidths are coupled. Format VBR <number> <number> Range: 0.003 to 3 VBR UP|DN UP or DN: increment in a 1, 3, 10 sequence VBR OA VBR? Query Data Type <number> SCPI Equivalent Commands [:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio <real> (see "VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591) Preset 1 Notes VBR uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON. 550 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VIEW (View Trace) VIEW (View Trace) Syntax 8560 series: 8566A/B, 8568A/B: Legacy Products 8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Displays Trace A, Trace B, or Trace C, and stops taking new data into the viewed trace. Format VIEW TRA|TRB|TRC TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2. Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:UPDate OFF :TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe] ON (See "View/Blank " on page 1284) Notes The functions of VIEW are identical to "A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)" on page 257 and "B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)" on page 289. For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, VIEW is also identical to "KSj (View Trace C)" on page 377. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 551 6 Legacy Command Descriptions VTL (Video Trigger Level) VTL (Video Trigger Level) Syntax Legacy Products 8560 series Description Sets the signal level that triggers a sweep. Format VTL <number>DB|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM <number> Range: –220 to 30 VTL UP|DN UP or DN increments by 1 vertical division VTL? Query Data Type <real> SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl> (see "Trigger Level " on page 1334) Preset 0 dBm Notes Setting a value for VTL sets the trigger mode to VIDEO, even if it was not already set to VIDEO. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536. 552 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 6 Legacy Command Descriptions XCH (Exchange) XCH (Exchange) Syntax Legacy Products 8566A/B, 8568A/B Description Exchanges the contents of the source and destination traces. The traces are analyzed and adjusted to fit the number of display points on the screen. Format XCH TRA|TRB|TRC,TRA|TRB|TRC Query Data Type N/A SCPI Equivalent Commands :TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe]? :TRACe#:UPDate[:STATe]? :TRACe:EXCHange TRACE#, TRACE# :TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe] :TRACe#:UPDate[:STATe] (See "View/Blank " on page 1284) Notes The functions of XCH TRA,TRB are identical to "AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 286 and "EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 333. The functions of XCH TRB,TRC are identical to "BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 295 and "KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 376. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 553 6 Legacy Command Descriptions XCH (Exchange) 554 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference The Swept SA measurement uses both swept and FFT analysis, and the frequency and time domains. For more details, see "Swept SA Measurement Description" on page 558 . In many of the key and command descriptions that follow, reference is made to the "Spectrum Analyzer Mode" and "Swept SA Measurement". In all cases, the information applicable to this mode and measurement also applies to the RLC Mode and RLC Swept SA Measurement. 555 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Measurement Commands and their Results for Swept SA The INITiate and CONFigure syntax, as well as the data returned by the queries FETCh, MEASure and READ, are described in this section. Note that the data returned by FETCh?, MEASure? and READ? uses the data settings specified by the commands FORMat:BORDer (see "Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175) and FORMat:DATA (see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174), and can return real or ASCII data. If the format is set to INT,32, it returns REAL,32 data. For more measurement related commands, see the SENSe subsystem, and the "Remote Measurement Functions" on page 163. The INITiate command works in a slightly different fashion in the Spectrogram view. In the other Views (Normal, Trace Zoom and Zone Span), the following two commands perform exactly the same function: l :INITiate:RESTart l :INITiate:IMMediate However, in the Spectrogram View, the command :INITiate:RESTart works like the Restart key, and clears out the Spectrogram trace history. The command :INITiate:IMMediate does not clear out the Spectrogram trace history but performs all other functions of performing a restart. The table below lists the measurement commands and their responses for the SANalyzer measurement. Note that the marker values are x, y pairs. Command n Return Value INITiate:SANalyzer n/a n/a CONFigure? n/a long form name of current measurement, for example, "SANalyzer" CONFigure:SANalyzer n/a n/a (selects SAN measurement with Meas Setup settings in preset state – same as Meas Preset) CONFigure:SANalyzer:NDEFault n/a n/a (selects SAN measurement without affecting settings) FETCh:SANalyzer[n]? 0 Returns the following comma-separated results: MEASure:SANalyzer[n]? 1. 1 if there is any margin or limit failure, otherwise 0 READ:SANalyzer[n]? 2. 0 (future). 3. 0 (future). 4. 0 (future). 5. N dB points result (not a number if off) 6. Current average count k (the current number of data measurements that have already been combined, in the averaging calculation). 7. Number of points in the sweep 556 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Command n Return Value 8. 0 (future). 9. 0 (future). 10. 0 (future). 11. Marker 1 value (x,y) 12. Marker 2 value (x,y) 13. Marker 3 value (x,y) 14. Marker 4 value (x,y) 15. Marker 5 value (x,y) 16. Marker 6 value (x,y) 17. Marker 7 value (x,y) 18. Marker 8 value (x,y) 19. Marker 9 value (x,y) 20. Marker 10 value (x,y) 21. Marker 11 value (x,y) 22. Marker 12 value (x,y) not specified or n=1 This query returns Trace 1 data as a list of x,y pairs. The yvalues are in the current Y Axis Unit of the analyzer. The x-axis values are the values of the trace, in the x-axis scale units of the trace (Hz for frequency domain traces, seconds for time domain traces). When querying trace data, it is best if the analyzer is not sweeping during the query. Therefore, it is good to be in Single Sweep, or Update=Off when querying trace data from the analyzer. 2 Returns Trace 2 data as a series of x,y pairs 3 Returns Trace 3 data as a series of x,y pairs 4 Returns Trace 4 data as a series of x,y pairs 5 Returns Trace 5 data as a series of x,y pairs 6 Returns Trace 6 data as a series of x,y pairs 7& above Future use Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 557 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Swept SA Measurement Description l l l Swept Spectrum Analysis (Freq Domain): The analyzer sweeps the LO to generate a heterodyned IF signal that can be detected to analyze the signal content of a range of frequencies. The x-axis of the display is frequency, the Y Axis is amplitude. Swept FFT Analysis (Freq Domain): In some cases there is an advantage to not actually sweeping the LO, but instead analyzing the signal by taking a time record and performing FFT analysis. This is what is done in swept FFT analysis, but the data is still presented as though it were a sweeping spectrum analyzer. The x-axis of the display is frequency, the Y Axis is amplitude. Zero Span Analysis (Time Domain): In Zero Span analysis, the analyzer stops sweeping the LO, placing it at the center frequency, and then takes time data from the detector while stopped at that frequency. Because the LO is not moving, the frequency span is zero. The time data is presented left to right across the screen just like on an oscilloscope. The x-axis of the display is time, and the Y Axis is amplitude. All of the tools such as markers, peak tables, limit lines, trace math, N dB points, and marker functions are available in Zero Span measurement analysis, although some work differently in the time and frequency domains. Key Path Meas Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 558 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale AMPTD Y Scale The Amplitude front-panel key activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level or Reference Value (depending on the measurement) as the active function. Some features in the Amplitude menu apply to multiple measurements; others apply only to specific measurements. Keys that only apply to some measurements are blanked or grayed out in measurements that are not supported. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Reference Level The Reference Level specifies the amplitude represented by the topmost graticule line. Changing the reference level does not restart a measurement, because it is a display function only; instead it vertically ‘pans’ all displayed traces and markers to the new value. If a change to the reference level changes the attenuation value (e.g. through an auto coupling), then the measurement will be restarted. See "Amplitude Representations" on page 560 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 20 dBm Sets the reference level to 20 dBm, which displays in the current Y axis unit. For example, if the Y axis unit is dBµV, then 126.99 dBµV will be displayed. Couplings If you reduce the attenuation, the analyzer may have to lower the reference level to keep it below its allowed maximum. This allowed maximum level is specified in the “Max” row, below, along with other variables which affect it. When you increase attenuation, the reference level does not change. Preset 0 dBm State Saved Saved in instrument state Min RefLevelMin = –170 dBm + RefLevelOffset - ExtGain. Max The maximum Ref Level is typically: +30 dBm + RL Offset – External Gain (for MXA and PXA) +23 dBm + RL Offset – External Gain (for EXA and CXA) This maximum value is determined by the maximum power that can be safely applied to the input circuitry. The actual maximum value at any given time may be even less than this, depending on other values including Mech Atten, Int Preamp Gain, Swept IF Gain, FFT IF Gain, Max Mixer Level, and the total attenuation currently available. Note that the maximum reference level is unaffected by the input choice of external mixing. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 559 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Default Unit Depends on the current selected Y axis unit Backwards Compatibility Notes 1. In PSA, there was a restriction on Ref Level Max which was that it could not exceed 0 dBm when the preamp was on. This restriction does not apply to X-Series. 2. Ref Level – Ref Level is a display function, not a measurement control function, so a change in the setting does not start a new sweep (unless attenuation changes). This behavior differs from that of legacy analyzers Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Amplitude Representations The following is an illustration of the reference level and Y Axis scales under various conditions: Attenuation This menu controls the attenuator functions and interactions between the attenuation system components. There are two attenuator configurations in the X-Series. One is a dual attenuator configuration consisting of a mechanical attenuator and an optional electronic attenuator. The other configuration uses a single attenuator with combined mechanical and electronic sections that controls all the attenuation functions. Different models in the X-Series come with different configurations, as described in more detail below: l "Dual Attenuator Configurations" on page 561 l "Single Attenuator Configuration" on page 561 l "Determining Attenuator Configuration" on page 561 Most Attenuation settings are the same for all measurements; they do not change as you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global” and are unaffected by Meas Preset. Key Path 560 AMPTD Y Scale Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Scope Meas Global Dependencies In measurements that support the I/Q inputs, this key is unavailable when I/Q is the selected input, and is replaced by the Range key in that case. Readback Line Contains a summary in [ ] brackets of the current total attenuation. See the descriptions of the " (Mech) Atten " on page 562, "Enable Elec Atten" on page 564, and "Elec Atten" on page 566 keys for more detail on the contributors to the total attenuation. Note that when "Pre-Adjust for Min Clip" on page 567 is on, this value can change at the start of every measurement. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Dual Attenuator Configurations Configuration 1: Mechanical attenuator + optional electronic attenuator Configuration 2: Mechanical attenuator, no optional electronic attenuator (note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual Attenuator” configuration) Single Attenuator Configuration Determining Attenuator Configuration You can tell which attenuator configuration you have by pressing the Attenuation key, which (in most modes) opens the Attenuation menu. As shown in the examples below, if the first key in the Attenuation Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 561 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale menu says Mech Atten, then you have the dual attenuator configuration. If the first key says Atten, then you have the single attenuator configuration. Dual Attenuator Single Attenuator In the single attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states. In the dual attenuator configuration, both stages have significant range so you are given separate control of the mechanical and electronic attenuator stages. When you have the dual attenuator configuration, you may still have only a single attenuator, because unless option EA3 (the Electronic Attenuator option) is available, and you purchase it, you will have only the mechanical attenuator. (Mech) Atten This key is labeled Mech Atten in dual attenuator models and Atten in single attenuator models. In the dual attenuator configuration, this key only affects the mechanical attenuator. This key lets you modify the attenuation applied to the RF input signal path. This value is normally auto coupled to the Ref Level, the Internal Preamp Gain, any External Gain that is entered, and the Max Mixer Level, as described in the table below. See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation? [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO? Example POW:ATT 20 Dual attenuator configuration: sets the mechanical attenuator to 20 dB Single attenuator mode: sets the main attenuation to 20 dB (see below for definition of “main” attenuation). If the attenuator was in Auto, it sets it to Manual. Dependencies Some measurements do not support the Auto setting of (Mech) Atten. In these measurements, the Auto/Man selection is not available, and the Auto/Man line on the key disappears. In dual attenuator configurations, when the electronic attenuator is enabled, the mechanical attenuator has no auto setting and the Auto/Man line on the key disappears. The state of Auto/Man is remembered and restored when the electronic attenuator is once again disabled. This is described in more detail in the "Enable Elec Atten" on page 564 key description. See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563 for more information on the Auto/Man functionality of Attenuation. 562 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Couplings When (Mech) Atten is in Auto, it uses the following algorithm to determine a value: Atten = ReferenceLevel + PreAmpGain + ExternalGain – RefLevelOffset - MaxMixerLevel + IF Gain. Limit this value to be between 6 dB and the Max value. No value below 6 dB can ever be chosen by Auto. The resulting value is rounded up to the largest value possible given the attenuation step setting. That is, 50.01 dB would change to 60 dB (for a 10 dB attenuation step). The “IF Gain” term in the equation above is either 0 dB or +10 dB, depending on the settings of FFT IF Gain, Swept IF Gain, max Ref Level and the Auto/Man setting of Mech Atten. In External Mixing and BBIQ,where the Attenuator is not in the signal path, the Attenuator setting changes as described above when (Mech) Atten is in Auto, but no changes are made to the actual attenuator hardware setting until the input is changed back to the RF Input. Preset The preset for Mech Attenuation is “Auto.” The Auto value of attenuation is: CXA, EXA, MXA and PXA: 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 dB The attenuation set by this key cannot be decreased below 6 dB with the knob or step keys. To get to a value below 6 dB it has to be directly entered from the keypad or via SCPI. This protects from adjusting the attenuation to a dangerously small value which can put the instrument at risk of damage to input circuitry. However, if the current mechanical attenuation is below 6 dB it can be increased with the knob and step keys, but not decreased. Max CXA N9000A–503/507: 50 dB CXA N9000A–513/526: 70dB EXA: 60 dB MXA and PXA: 70 dB In the single attenuator configuration, the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB, so if the EATT is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly; if the main attenuator is set to 40 dB first, EATT cannot be greater than 10 dB. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man As described in the Attenuation key description, there are two distinct attenuator configurations available in the X-Series, the single attenuator and dual attenuator configurations. In dual attenuator configurations, we have the mechanical attenuation and the electronic attenuation, and the current total attenuation is the sum of the electronic + mechanical attenuation. In single attenuator configurations, we refer to the attenuation set using the (Mech) Atten key (or POW:ATT SCPI) as the “main” attenuation; and the attenuation that is set by the SCPI command POW:EATT as the “soft” attenuation (the POW:EATT command is honored even in the single attenuator configuration, for compatibility purposes). Then the Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 563 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale current total attenuation is the sum of the main + soft attenuation. See the Elec Atten key description for more on “soft” attenuation. In the dual attenuator configuration, when the electronic attenuator is enabled, there is no Auto/Man functionality for the mechanical attenuator, and the third line of the key label (the Auto/Man line) disappears: Enable Elec Atten Enables the Electronic Attenuator. The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. These advantages primarily aid in remote operation and are negligible for front panel use. See "Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons" on page 566 for a detailed discussion of the pros and cons of using the electronic attenuator. For the single attenuator configuration, for SCPI backwards compatibility, the “soft” attenuation feature replaces the dual attenuator configuration’s electronic attenuator. All the same couplings and limitations apply. See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563 See "More Information" on page 565 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation:STATe? Example POW:EATT:STAT ON Dependencies This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does not appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator configuration there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator (which has both a mechanical and electronic stage). However, in the single attenuator configuration, EATT SCPI commands are accepted for compatibility with other X-series instruments and set a “soft” attenuation as described in "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563 The electronic attenuator (and the “soft” attenuation function provided in single attenuator configurations) is unavailable above 3.6 GHz. Therefore, if the Stop Frequency of the analyzer is > 3.6 GHz then the Enable Elec Atten key will be OFF and grayed out. If the Internal Preamp is on, meaning it is set to Low Band or Full, the electronic attenuator (and the “soft” attenuation function provided in single attenuator configurations) is unavailable. In this case the Enable Elec Atten key will be OFF and grayed out. If either of the above is true, if the SCPI command is sent, an error indicating that the electronic attenuator is unavailable will be sent. If the electronic/soft Attenuator is enabled, then the Stop Freq of the analyzer is limited to 3.6 GHz and the Internal Preamp is unavailable. The SCPI-only “soft” electronic attenuation for the single-attenuator configuration is not available in 564 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale all measurements; in particular, it is not available in the Swept SA measurement. Couplings Enabling and disabling the Electronic Attenuator affects the setting of the Mechanical Attenuator (in dual attenuator configurations). This is described in more detail below this table. Preset OFF for Swept SA measurement; ON for all other measurements that support the electronic attenuator State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 More Information Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules When the Electronic Attenuator is enabled, the Mechanical Attenuator transitions to a state that has no Auto function. Below are the rules for transitioning the Mechanical Attenuator. NOTE that the information below ONLY applies to the dual attenuator configurations, and ONLY when the Electronic Attenuator is installed: When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state: • The Mechanical Attenuator is initialized to 10 dB (this is its optimal performance setting). You can then set it as desired with SCPI, numeric keypad, step keys, or knob, and it behaves as it normally would in manual mode • The Auto/Man state of (Mech) Atten is saved • The Auto/Man line on the (Mech) Atten key disappears and the auto rules are disabled • The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the Mechanical Attenuator, within the limitation that it must stay within the range of 0 to 24 dB of attenuation. Examples in the dual attenuator configuration: • Mech Atten at 20 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec Atten set to 10 dB. New total attenuation equals the value before Elec Atten enabled. • Mech Atten at 0 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec Atten set to 0 dB. New total attenuation does not equal the value before Elec Atten enabled. • Mech Atten at 40 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec Atten set to 24 dB. New total attenuation does not equal the value before Elec Atten enabled. When the Electronic Attenuation is disabled from an enabled state: • The Elec Atten key is grayed out • The Auto/Man state of (Mech) Atten is restored • If now in Auto, (Mech) Atten recouples Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 565 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale • If now in Man, (Mech) Atten is set to the value of total attenuation that existed before the Elec Atten was disabled. The resulting value is rounded up to the smallest value possible given the (Mech) Atten Step setting - (That is, 57 dB changes to 58 dB when (Mech) Atten Step is 2 dB.) Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. The “finer steps” advantage of the electronic attenuator is beneficial in optimizing the alignment of the analyzer dynamic range to the signal power in the front panel as well as remote use. Thus, you can achieve improved relative signal measurement accuracy. Compared to a mechanical attenuator with 2 dB steps, the 1 dB resolution of the electronic attenuator only gives better resolution when the odd-decibel steps are used. Those odd-decibel steps are less accurately calibrated than the even-decibel steps, so one tradeoff for this superior relative accuracy is reduced absolute amplitude accuracy. Another disadvantage of the electronic attenuator is that the spectrum analyzer loses its “Auto” setting, making operation less convenient. Also, the relationship between the dynamic range specifications (TOI, SHI, compression and noise) and instrument performance are less well-known with the electrical attenuator. With the mechanical attenuator, TOI, SHI and compression threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and the noise floor does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about 1 to 3 dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less well known. Excess attenuation is the actual attenuation relative to stated attenuation. Excess attenuation is accounted for in the analyzer calibration Elec Atten Controls the Electronic Attenuator in dual attenuator configurations. This key does not appear in single attenuator configurations, as the control of both the mechanical and electronic stages of the single attenuator is integrated into the single Atten key. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation? Notes Electronic Attenuation’s specification is defined only when Mechanical Attenuation is 6 dB. Dependencies This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does not appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator configuration there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator (which has both a mechanical and electronic stage). However, in the single attenuator configuration, EATT SCPI commands are accepted for compatibility with other X-series instruments and set a “soft” attenuation as described in "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563. The “soft” attenuation is treated as an addition to the “main” attenuation value set by the Atten softkey or the POW:ATT SCPI command and affects the total attenuation displayed on the Attenuation key and the Meas Bar. When Enable Elec Atten is off or grayed out, the Elec Atten key is grayed out. Preset 566 0 dB Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 dB Max Dual attenuator configuration: 24 dB Single attenuator configuration: the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB, so if the EATT is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly; if the main attenuator is set to 40 dB first, EATT cannot be greater than 10 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Adjust Atten for Min Clip Sets the combination of mechanical and electronic attenuation based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum. This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is pressed. This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize IMMediate Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Pre-Adjust for Min Clip If this function is on, it does the adjustment described under "Adjust Atten for Min Clip" on page 567 each time a measurement restarts. Therefore, in Continuous measurement mode, it only executes before the first measurement. In dual attenuator models, you can set Elec+Mech Atten, in which case both attenuators participate in the autoranging, or Elec Atten Only, in which case the mechanical attenuator does not participate in the autoranging. This latter case results in less wear on the mechanical attenuator and is usually faster. This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation OFF | ELECtrical | COMBined [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation? Notes The SCPI parameter ELECtrical sets this function to On in single attenuator models. The SCPI parameter COMBined is mapped to ELECtrical in single attenuator models; if you send COMBined, it sets the function to On and returns ELEC to a query. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 567 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Dependencies This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does not appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator configuration there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator (which has both a mechanical and electronic stage). When Enable Elec Atten is off or grayed out, the Pre-Adjust for Min Clip key is grayed out. Preset OFF for Swept SA measurement; ON for all other measurements that support Pre-Adjust for Min Clip State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Dual attenuator models: Off | Elec Atten Only | Mech + Elec Atten Single attenuator models: Off | On Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:AUTO? Notes ON aliases to "Elec Atten Only" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT ELEC) OFF aliases to "Off" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT OFF) The query :POW:RANG:AUTO? returns true if :POW:RANG:OPT:ATT is not "Off" Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Off Turns Pre-Adjust for Min Clip off. This is the default setting. This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip Example :POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT OFF Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Elec Atten Only Selects only the electric attenuator to participate in auto ranging. This offers less wear on the mechanical attenuator and is usually faster. This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality. 568 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip Example :POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT ELEC Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Mech + Elec Atten In dual attenuator models, this selects both attenuators participate in the autoranging. This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip Example :POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT COMB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 (Mech) Atten Step This controls thestep size used when making adjustments to the input attenuation. This key is labeled Mech Atten Step in dual attenuator models and Atten Step in single attenuator models. In the dual attenuator configuration, this key only affects the step size of the mechanical attenuator. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement] 10 dB | 2 dB [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]? Example POW:ATT:STEP 2 Notes Note this feature works like a 1-N choice from the front panel, but it takes a specific value (in dB) when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10. Dependencies Blanked in CXA and EXA if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present. If blanked, attempts to set it via SCPI will yield an error. Couplings When the attenuation step size changes, the current mechanical attenuation value is adjusted (if necessary) to be quantized to the new step size. That is, if step is set to 10 dB, mech atten is increased if necessary so it is a multiple of 10 dB Preset PXA and MXA: 2 dB EXA and CXA: 10 dB (2 dB with option FSA) State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 569 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Max Mixer Level Controls the limitation on the Ref Level for a given attenuation setting, and therefore also interacts with the Auto rules for selecting the attenuation as a coupling from the reference level. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <real> [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]? Example POW:MIX:RANG –15 dBm Preset –10 dBm State Saved Saved in instrument state Min –50 dBm Max –10 dBm Default Unit Depends on the current selected Y axis unit, see Swept SA discussion of Y Axis Unit Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Scale / Div Sets the units per vertical graticule division on the display. This function is only available when Scale Type (Log) is selected and the vertical scale is power. When Scale Type (Lin) is selected, Scale/Div is grayed out. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl> :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision? Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV 5 DB Dependencies Scale/Div is grayed out in linear Y scale. Sending the equivalent SCPI command does change the Scale/Div, though it has no affect while in Lin. Preset 10.00 dB / Div State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0.10 dB Max 20 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Scale Type Chooses a linear or logarithmic vertical scale for the display and for remote data readout. When Scale Type (Log) is selected, the vertical graticule divisions are scaled in logarithmic units. The top line of the graticule is the Reference Level and uses the scaling per division Scale/Div to assign values to the other locations on the graticule. 570 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale When Scale Type (Lin) is selected, the vertical graticule divisions are linearly scaled with the reference level value at the top of the display and zero volts at the bottom. Each vertical division of the graticule represents one-tenth of the Reference Level. The Y Axis Unit used for each type of display is set by pressing Y Axis Unit. The analyzer remembers separate Y Axis Unit settings for both Log and Lin. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing? Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC? Dependencies If Normalize is on, Scale Type forced to Log and is grayed out. Couplings Changing the Scale Type always sets the Y Axis unit to the last unit specified for the current amplitude scale. In other words, we restore the Y Axis unit setting appropriate per log/lin. Preset LOG State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Presel Center When this key is pressed, the centering of the preselector filter is adjusted to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the frequency of the selected marker. If the selected marker is not on when Presel Center is pressed, the analyzer will turn on the selected marker, perform a peak search, and then perform centering on the marker’s center frequency. If the selected marker is already on and between the start and stop frequencies of the analyzer, the analyzer performs the preselector calibration on that marker’s frequency. If the selected marker is already on, but outside the frequency range between Start Freq and Stop Freq, the analyzer will first perform a peak search, and then perform centering on the marker’s center frequency. The value displayed on the Presel Adjust key will change to reflect the new preselector tuning (see Presel Adjust. A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation. See "Proper Preselector Operation" on page 572. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter Example POW:PCEN Notes Note that the rules outlined above under the key description apply for the remote command as well as the key. The result of the command is dependent on marker position, and so forth. Any message shown by the key press is also shown in response to the remote command. Dependencies • Grayed out if the microwave preselector is off. ) • If the selected marker’s frequency is below Band 1, advisory message 0.5001 is generated and no Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 571 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale action is taken. • Grayed out if entirely in Band 0. • Blank in models that do not include a preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in these instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0. • Grayed out in the Spectrogram View. Couplings The active marker position determines where the centering will be attempted. If the analyzer s in a measurement such as averaging when centering is initiated, the act of centering the preselector will restart averaging but the first average trace will not be taken until the centering is completed. Status Bits/OPC dependencies When centering the preselector, *OPC will not return true until the process is complete and a subsequent measurement has completed, nor will results be returned to a READ or MEASure command. The Measuring bit should remain set while this command is operating and should not go false until the subsequent sweep/measurement has completed. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Proper Preselector Operation A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation: 1. If the selected marker is off, the analyzer will turn on a marker, perform a peak search, and adjust the preselector using the selected marker’s frequency. It uses the "highest peak" peak search method unqualified by threshold or excursion, so that there is no chance of a ‘no peak found’ error. It continues with that peak, even if it is the peak of just noise. Therefore, for this operation to work properly, there should be a signal on screen in a preselected range for the peak search to find. 2. If the selected marker is already on, the analyzer will attempt the centering at that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about 3.6 GHz, therefore if the marker is on a signal below 3.6 GHz, no centering will be attempted and an advisory message generated 3. In some models, the preselector can be bypassed. If it is bypassed, no centering will be attempted in that range and a message will be generated. Preselector Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its response to the signal of interest. This function is only available when "Presel Center" on page 571 is available. For general purpose signal analysis, using Presel Center is recommended. Centering the filter minimizes the impact of long-term preselector drift. Presel Adjust can be used instead to manually optimize the preselector. One application of manual optimization would be to peak the preselector response, which both optimizes the signal-to-noise ratio and minimizes amplitude variations due to small (short-term) preselector drifting. 572 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust <freq> [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust? Example POW:PADJ 100KHz POW:PADJ? Notes The value on the key reads out to 0.1 MHz resolution. Dependencies • Grayed out if microwave preselector is off. ) • Grayed out if entirely in Band 0. • Blank in models that do not include a preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in these instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0. • Grayed out in the Spectrogram View. Preset 0 MHz State Saved The Presel Adjust value set by Presel Center, or by manually adjusting Presel Adjust, is not saved in instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle. Min –500 MHz Max 500 MHz Default Unit Hz Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MMW:PADJust PSA had multiple preselectors, but the X-Series has only one. These commands simply alias to [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector MWAVe | MMWave | EXTernal [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector? Notes PSA had multiple preselectors, and you could select which preselector to adjust. Since the X-Series has only one mm/uW preselector, the preselector selection softkey is no longer available. However, to provide backward compatibility, we accept the legacy remote commands. The command form has no effect, the query always returns MWAVe Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Y Axis Unit Displays the menu keys that enable you to change the vertical (Y) axis amplitude unit. The analyzer retains the entered Y Axis Unit separately for both Log and Lin amplitude scale types. For example, if Scale Type Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 573 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale has been set to Log, and you set Y Axis Unit to dBm, pressing Scale Type (Log) sets the Y Axis Unit to dBm. If Scale Type has been set to Lin and you set Y Axis Unit to V, pressing Scale Type (Lin) sets the Y Axis Unit to V. Pressing Scale Type (Log) again sets the Y axis unit back to dBm. The units of current (A, dBmA, dBuA) are calculated based on 50 ohms input impedance. All four of the EMI units (dBµA/m, dBµV/m, dBG, dBpT) are treated by the instrument exactly as though they were dBuV. The user must load an appropriate correction factor using Amplitude Corrections for accurate and meaningful results. If a SCPI command is sent to the analyzer that uses one of the EMI units as a terminator, the analyzer treats it as though DBUV had been sent as the terminator. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode SA Scope Meas Global Remote Command :UNIT:POWer DBM | DBMV | DBMA | V | W | A | DBUV | DBUA | DBPW | DBUVM | DBUAM | DBPT | DBG :UNIT:POWer? Example UNIT:POW dBmV UNIT:POW? Notes The Y axis unit has either logarithmic or linear characteristics. The set of units that is logarithmic consists of dBm, dBmV, dBmA, dBµV, dBµA, dBµV/m, dBµA/m, dBpT, and dBG. The set of units that are linear consists of V, W, and A. The chosen unit will determine how the reference level and all the amplitude-related outputs like trace data, marker data, etc. read out. Notes The settings of Y Axis Unit and Scale Type, affect how the data is read over the remote interface. When using the remote interface no unit is returned, so you must know what the Y axis unit is to interpret the results: Example 1, set the following: Scale Type (Log) Y Axis Unit, dBm Scale/Div, 1 dB Ref Level, 10 dBm This sets the top line to 10 dBm with each vertical division representing 1 dB. Thus, if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 5 dBm and will read out remotely as 5. Example 2, set the following: Scale Type (Lin) Y Axis Unit, Volts Ref Level, 100 mV (10 mV/div) This sets the top line to 100 mV and the bottom line to 0 V, so each vertical division represents 10 mV. Thus, if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 50 mV and will read out remotely as 50. Dependencies 574 If an amplitude correction with an Antenna Unit other than None is applied and enabled, then that antenna unit is forced and the key with that unit is the only Y Axis Unit available. All other Y Axis Unit keys are grayed out. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale If an amplitude correction with an Antenna Unit other than None is applied and enabled, and you then turn off that correction or set Apply Corrections to No, the Y Axis Unit that existed before the Antenna Unit was applied is restored. Couplings The analyzer retains the entered Y Axis Unit separately for both Log and Lin amplitude scale types Preset dBm for log scale, V for linear. The true ‘preset’ value is dBm, since at preset the Y Scale type is set to logarithmic. State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback line 1-of-N selection Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00, A.04.00, A.11.00 dBm Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBm. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBM Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback dBm Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 dBmV Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmV. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBMV Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback dBmV Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 dBmA Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmA. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBMA Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 575 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback dBmA Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 W Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to watt. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW W Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback W Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 V Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to volt. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW V Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback V Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 A Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to Ampere. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW A Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback A Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 576 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale dBµV Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµV. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBUV Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback dBµV Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA. The unit dBuA can also appear as an Antenna Unit. This will be used by customers using current probes, because current probes are often supplied with conversion tables that provide the transducer factors. When dBuA is used as an Antenna Unit the normal conversion from power to amps for dBuA (based on the analyzer input impedance) is not done, but instead the conversion is based solely on the Correction that contains the transducer factors. This is what distinguishes dBuA as a normal unit from dBuA as an antenna unit. When querying the Y-Axis unit, you can query the Antenna Unit to distinguish between regular dBuA and the dBuA antenna unit. If :CORR:CSET:ANT? returns NOC (for No Conversion), you are using a normal Y Axis dBuA. If it returns UA you are using an Antenna Unit dBuA. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBUA Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback dBµA Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 dBpW Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpW. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBPW Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback dBµA Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 577 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Antenna Unit When a Correction is turned on that uses an Antenna Unit, the Y Axis Unit changes to that Antenna Unit. All of the keys in the Y-Axis Unit menu are then greyed out, except the Antenna Unit key. The unit being used is shown on this key and is shown as selected in the submenu. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback line Currently selected unit Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 None This is selected if no Antenna Unit is currently on, however you cannot actually set this value, since it is always grayed out. The key is included simply to provide an indication on the Readback line of the Antenna Unit key when there is no Antenna Unit selected. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit Readback “None” Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 dBµV/m Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµV/m. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit Example UNIT:POW DBUVM Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback dBµV/m Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA/m Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA/m. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit Example UNIT:POW DBUAM Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. 578 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Readback dBµA/m Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBpΤ Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpT. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit Example UNIT:POW DBPT Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback dBpT Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBG Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBG. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit Example UNIT:POW DBG Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback dBG Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit Example UNIT:POW DBUAM Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback dBµA Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 579 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Reference Level Offset Adds an offset value to the displayed reference level. The reference level is the absolute amplitude represented by the top graticule line on the display. See "More Information" on page 580 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode SA Scope Meas Global Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet? Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS 12.7 Sets the Ref Level Offset to 12.7 dB. The only valid suffix is dB. If no suffix is sent, dB will be assumed. Preset 0 dBm State Saved Saved in instrument state Min The range for Ref Lvl Offset is variable. It is limited to values that keep the reference level within the range of –327.6 dB to 327.6 dB. Max 327.6 dB Backwards Compatibility Notes 1. In pre-X-Series instruments, Ref Level Offset could not be adjusted by the knob or step keys. That is no longer the case. 2. In ESA and PSA, Ref Level Offset was applied to the data as it was acquired; thus if the Offset changed the new offset was not applied until new trace data was taken. In X-Series, the offset is applied as the data is displayed/queried, so if you change the offset, it will change the data immediately. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.04.00 More Information Offsets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the analyzer input. Thus, the signal level measured by the analyzer may be thought of as the level at the input of an external amplitude conversion device. Entering an offset does not affect the trace position or attenuation value, just the value of the top line of the display and the values represented by the trace data. Thus, the values of exported trace data, queried trace data, marker amplitudes, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points, trace math, peak threshold, and so forth, are all affected by Ref Level Offset. Changing the offset causes the analyzer to immediately stop the current sweep and prepare to begin a new sweep, but the data will not change until the trace data updates, because the offset is applied to the data as it is taken. If a trace is exported with a nonzero Ref Level Offset, the exported data will contain the trace data with the offset applied. The maximum reference level available is dependent on the reference level offset. That is, Ref Level - Ref Level Offset must be in the range –170 to +30 dBm. For example, the reference level value range can be 580 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale initially set to values from –170 dBm to 30 dBm with no reference level offset. If the reference level is first set to –20 dBm, then the reference level offset can be set to values of –150 to +50 dB. If the reference level offset is first set to –30 dB, then the reference level can be set to values of –200 dBm to 0 dBm. In this case, the reference level is “clamped” at 0 dBm because the maximum limit of +30 dBm is reached with a reference level setting of 0 dBm with an offset of –30 dB. If instead, the reference level offset is first set to 30 dB, then the reference level can be set to values of –140 to +60 dBm. µW Path Control The µW Path Control functions include the µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB) and Low Noise Path (Option LNP) controls in the High Band path circuits. When the µW Preselector is bypassed, the user has better flatness, but will be subject to spurs from out of band interfering signals. When the Low Noise Path is enabled, the analyzer automatically switches around certain circuitry in the high frequency bands which can contribute to noise, when it is appropriate based on other analyzer settings. For most applications, the preset state is Standard Path, which gives the best remote-control throughput, minimizes acoustic noise from switching and minimizes the risk of wear out in the hardware switches. For applications that utilize the wideband IF paths, the preset state is the µW Preselector Bypass path, if option MPB is present. This is because, when using a wideband IF such as the 140 MHz IF, the µW Preselector’s bandwidth can be narrower than the available IF bandwidth, causing degraded amplitude flatness and phase linearity, so it is desirable to bypass the preselector in the default case. Selecting the Low Noise Path Enable option provides a lower noise floor, especially in the 21–26.5 GHz region, though without improving many measures of dynamic range, and without giving the best possible noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and used, gives better noise floor than does the Low Noise Path, however its compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of the non-preamp Low Noise Path. There are some applications, typically for signals around −30 dBm, for which the thirdorder dynamic range of the standard path is good enough, but the noise floor is not low enough even with 0 dB input attenuation. When the third-order dynamic range of the preamp path is too little and the noise floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best dynamic range. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Mode SA, BASIC, PNOISE, VSA , LTE, LTETDD Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD|LNPath|MPBypass|FULL [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH? Example :POW:MW:PATH LNP Enables the Low Noise path Notes If a Presel Center is performed, the analyzer will momentarily switch to the Standard Path, regardless of the setting of µW Path Control The DC Block is always switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding circuitry from DC. Note that this does not mean “when the low noise path is enabled” but when, based on the Low Noise Path rules, the path is actually switched in. This can happen when the selection is Low Noise Path Enable . In the case where the DC Block is switched in the analyzer is now AC coupled. However, if you have selected DC coupling, the UI will still behave as though it were DC coupled, including all annunciation, warnings, status bits, and responses to SCPI queries. This is because, based on other settings, the analyzer could switch out the low noise path at any time and hence go back to being DC coupled. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 581 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Alignment switching ignores the settings in this menu, and restores them when finished. Dependencies Preset Unavailable in BBIQ and External Mixing l l All modes other than IQ Analyzer mode and VXA: STD IQ Analyzer, VXA and WLAN mode: l MPB option present and licensed: MPB l MPB option not present and licensed: STD State Saved Save in instrument state Readback Value selected in the submenu Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.10.00 Standard Path This path gives the best remote-control throughput, minimizes acoustic noise from switching and minimizes the risk of wear in the hardware switches, particularly in remote test scenarios where both low band and high band setups will follow in rapid succession. In this path, the bypass of the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp is never activated, which can cause some noise degradation but preserves the life of the bypass switch. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, µW Path Control Example :POW:MW:PATH STD Readback Text Standard Path Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 µW Preselector Bypass This key toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the microwave presel is on, the signal path is preselected. When the microwave preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected. The preselected path is the normal path for the analyzer. The preselector is a tunable bandpass filter which prevents signals away from the frequency of interest from combining in the mixer to generate in-band spurious signals (images). The consequences of using a preselector filter are its limited bandwidth, the amplitude and phase ripple in its passband, and any amplitude and phase instability due to center frequency drift. Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis. The disadvantage is that, without the preselector, image signals will be displayed. Another disadvantage of bypassing the preselector is increased LO emission levels at the front panel input port. 582 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, µW Path Control Example :POW:MW:PATH MPB Dependencies Key is blanked if current mode does not support it. Key is grayed out if mode supports it but current measurement does not support it. Key is blank unless Option MPB is present and licensed. If SCPI command sent when MPB not present, error –241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated. Readback Text µW Preselector Bypass Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PRESelector[:STATe] ON|OFF|0|1 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PRESelector[:STATe]? Example :POW:MW:PRES OFF Bypasses the microwave preselector Notes The ON parameter sets the STD path (:POW:MW:PATH STD) The OFF parameter sets path MPB (:POW:MW:PATH MPB) Preset ON Internal Preamp Accesses a menu of keys that control the internal preamps. Turning on the preamp gives a better noise figure, but a poorer TOI to noise floor dynamic range. You can optimize this setting for your particular measurement. The instrument takes the preamp gain into account as it sweeps. If you sweep outside of the range of the preamp the instrument will also account for that. The displayed result will always reflect the correct gain. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]? Dependencies Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the key is not shown. The preamp is not available when the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled. Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 583 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND LOW|FULL [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND? Dependencies Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the key is not shown. If a POW:GAIN:BAND FULL command is sent when a low band preamp is available, the preamp band parameter is to LOW instead of FULL, and an "Option not installed" message is generated. Preset LOW State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Off Turns the internal preamp off Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp Example :POW:GAIN OFF Readback Off Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Low Band Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band key label. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp Example :POW:GAIN ON :POW:GAIN:BAND LOW Readback Low Band Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Full Range Sets the internal preamp to use its full range. The low band (0–3.6 GHz or 0–3GHz, depending on the model) is supplied by the low band preamp and the frequencies above low band are supplied by the high band preamp. The frequency range of the installed (optional) preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Full Range key label. If the high band option is not installed the Full Range key does not appear. 584 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp Example :POW:GAIN ON :POW:GAIN:BAND FULL Readback Full Range Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 585 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Auto Couple Auto Couple The Auto Couple feature provides a quick and convenient way to automatically couple multiple instrument settings. This helps ensure accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. When the Auto Couple feature is activated, either from the front panel or remotely, all parameters of the current measurement that have an Auto/Manual mode are set to Auto mode and all measurement settings dependent on (or coupled to) the Auto/Man parameters are automatically adjusted for optimal performance. However, the Auto Couple key actions are confined to the current measurement only. It does not affect other measurements in the mode, and it does not affect markers, marker functions, or trace or display attributes. For more details, see "More Information" on page 586 below. Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :COUPle ALL|NONE Example :COUP ALL Notes :COUPle ALL puts all Auto/Man parameters in Auto mode (equivalent to pressing the Auto Couple key). :COUPLE NONE puts all Auto/Man parameters in manual mode. It decouples all the coupled instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 More Information There are two types of functions that have Auto/Manual modes, as described below: Auto/Man Active Function keys An Auto/Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling between Auto (where the parameter is automatically coupled to the other parameters it is dependent upon) and Man (where the parameter is controlled independent of the other parameters), as well as making the parameter the active function. The current mode is indicated on the softkey with either Auto or Man underlined as illustrated below. Auto/Man 1-of-N keys An Auto/Man 1-of-N key allows you to manually pick from a list of parameter values, or place the function in Auto, in which case the value is automatically selected (and indicated) as shown below. If in Auto, Auto is underlined on the calling key. If in manual operation, manual is indicated on the calling key. But the calling key does not actually toggle the function, it simply opens the menu. 586 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Auto Couple Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 587 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW BW The BW key opens the bandwidth menu, which contains keys to control the Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth functions of the instrument. The Resolution BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two filter types, Gaussian and Flattop. The Gaussian filters have a response curve that is parabolic on a log scale. The Flattop filter shape is a close approximation of a rectangular filter. The AVERAGE functions, which appeared in the BW menu in earlier analyzers, can now be found in the Trace/Detector menu and the Meas Setup menu. In the Trace/Detector menu, you may turn Trace Averaging on or off for the desired traces (rather than globally as in the past); and in the Meas Setup menu you may configure Averaging, by setting the Average Number and the Average Type. Key Path Front-panel key Backwards Compatibility Notes In previous analyzers, the BW hardkey was labeled “BW/Avg” and included menu keys to control the averaging behavior of the instrument, which was global. In the X-Series, averaging is performed on a trace-by-trace basis, with a corresponding impact on the SCPI functions. A backwards compatibility command ([:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]) is provided to preserve the old global behavior. See the section "Trace/Detector" on page 1264 for details. The control for the Average number is now found in the Meas Setup menu. See the section "Meas Setup" on page 794 for details. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Res BW Activates the resolution bandwidth active function, which allows you to manually set the resolution bandwidth (RBW) of the analyzer. Normally, Res BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Res BW to Span using the ratio set by the Span:3 dB RBW key. To decouple the resolution bandwidth, press Res BW until Man is underlined, or simply enter a different value for Res BW. See "More Information" on page 589 Key Path BW Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO? Example BAND 1 KHZ BAND? BWID:AUTO ON BWID:AUTO? Notes 588 For numeric entries, all RBW Types choose the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW available RBW to the value entered. The setting and querying of values depends on the current bandwidth type. Dependencies When in Zero Span with no EMI Standard selected, there is no Auto setting for Res BW. The Auto/Man line on the Res BW softkey disappears in this case, and if the SCPI command [:SENSe]:BWID[:RESolution]:AUTO ON is sent, it generates a message. While using the Tracking Generator, you must make sure the Start Frequency is high enough to avoid capturing LO feedthrough in the trace. How high you must make the Start Frequency to avoid this will depend on the RBW you have set. The analyzer displays a condition warning message if the Start Frequency falls below roughly 2.5 times the current RBW. The warning is “Source Uncal;adj Start Freq|RBW|Points”. When you see this warning, you should increase the Start Freq, narrow the RBW, or increase the number of Sweep Points. Couplings Res BW is normally coupled to Span; if Res BW is set to Auto, as the Span decreases, so will the Res BW. Normally, in Zero Span, this coupling is turned off and Res BW has no Auto setting. When a CISPR or MIL EMI Standard is in use, the Res BW is coupled to Center Frequency and not to Span, and this is true even in Zero Span. Sweep time is coupled to RBW when in a non-zero span. If Sweep Time is set to Auto, then the sweep time is changed as the RBW changes, to maintain amplitude calibration. Video bandwidth (VBW) is normally coupled to RBW. If VBW is set to Auto, then the VBW is changed as the RBW changes, to maintain the ratio set by VBW:3 dB RBW. See the "VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591"VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591 key description. Preset 3 MHz ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Hz Max 8 MHz is the max equivalent –3 dB RBW, which means that the named RBW (the one shown on the key etc) can actually exceed 8 MHz if using a filter other than –3 dB Gaussian Default Unit Hz Backwards Compatibility Notes For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 For ESA, the maximum Res BW was 5 MHz; on X-Series it is 8 MHz. More Information When the Res BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the Res BW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset. When Res BW is set to Auto, the bandwidth selected depends on the Filter Type (see “Filter Type” below). Only certain discrete resolution bandwidths are available. The available bandwidths are dependent on the Filter Type or the EMC Standard. If an unavailable bandwidth is entered with the numeric keypad, the closest available bandwidth is selected. The zero-span case deserves some mention, because RBW is coupled to Span when in a swept (non-zero) span and in zero span there is normally no meaningful RBW coupling in Zero Span. However, when a MIL or Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 589 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW CISPR EMC Standard is selected, there IS a meaningful coupling for RBW in Zero Span – in fact, it is coupled to Center Frequency, in order to make measurements according to the EMI specifications. The annotation under RBW in the bottom left of the screen shows the type of filter or bandwidth that is being used. The following examples illustrate this: –3 dB (Normal) filter BW: Res BW 300 Hz –6 dB filter BW: Res BW (–6 dB) 422 Hz Noise filter BW: Res BW (Noise) 317 Hz Impulse filter BW: Res BW (Impulse) 444 Hz CISPR filter BW :Res BW (CISPR) 200 Hz MIL filter BW:Res BW (MIL) 1 kHz Flattop filter type:Res BW (Flattop) 300 Hz Video BW Lets you change the analyzer post-detection filter (VBW or “video bandwidth”) from 1 Hz to 8 MHz in approximately 10% steps. In addition, a wide-open video filter bandwidth may be chosen by selecting 50 MHz. The VBW is annotated at the bottom of the display, in the center. An * is displayed next to the VBW annotation when certain detector types (Average, EMI Average, Quasi Peak, and RMS Average) are in use. This is because the VBW filter is out of the circuit for these detectors and does not affect any traces which use them. If there is any active trace using one of these detectors the * is displayed. See "Annotation Examples" on page 591. Normally, Video BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Video BW filter to the resolution bandwidth filter using the ratio set by the VBW:3 dB RBW key. To decouple the video bandwidth, press Video BW until Man is underlined, or simply enter a new value. When the Video BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the Video BW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset. Key Path BW Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <freq> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO? Example 590 BAND:VID 1 KHZ Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW BAND:VID? BWID:VID:AUTO ON BWID:VID:AUTO? Notes For numeric entries, the analyzer chooses the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available VBW to the value entered. The 50 MHz VBW is defined to mean “wide open”. The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset. Dependencies Sometimes the displayed Video BW is not actually used to process the trace data: • When the Average Detector is selected and Sweep Type is set to Swept, the video bandwidth filter cannot be used, because it uses the same hardware as the Average Detector. • When the Quasi-Peak, EMI Average or RMS Average detector is selected the VBW is implemented by the digital IF as part of the detector When this is the case, the VBW still acts to change the Sweep Time, if Sweep Time is in Auto, and still affects the data on other traces for which this is not the case. Preset 3 MHz ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 1 Hz Max 50 MHz Default Unit Hz Backwards Compatibility Notes For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 Annotation Examples All active traces using VBW One or more active traces not using VBW VBW:3dB RBW Selects the ratio between the video bandwidth and the equivalent 3 dB resolution bandwidth to be used for setting VBW when VBW is in Auto. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 591 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW VBW:3dB RBW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the VBW:3 dB RBW ratio to Detector using the rules described below in "Auto Rules" on page 592. To decouple the ratio, press VBW:3 dB RBW until Man is underlined, or simply enter a new value. When the VBW:3dB RBW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the VBW:3 dB RBW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset. Key Path BW Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <real> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO? Example BAND:VID:RAT 2 BAND:VID:RAT? BAND:VID:RAT:AUTO 0 BAND:VID:RAT:AUTO? Notes The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset. Couplings See “Coupling Auto Rules” Preset 1 ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0.00001 Max 3000000 Backwards Compatibility Notes For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 Auto Rules The Auto Rules for the VBW:3dB RBW function follow. First, if Source Mode is set to “Tracking”: Use 1.0 Otherwise, we go through the following list of detector numbers and find the lowest numbered detector being used on any active traces (traces for which Update is On): 1. Peak 2. Normal 3. Average 4. Sample 592 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW 5. Negative Peak 6. EMI Average 7. Quasi Peak 8. RMS Average Use that detector to pick the ratio based on the following criteria: 1. If the detector is Peak and the EMC Standard is set to either CISPR or MIL, use 10.0 (we use wide VBWs to capture peak levels accurately). 2. Otherwise, if the detector is Negative Peak, use 1.0 (in the Negative Peak case, there are no known significant use models so we use a medium ratio). 3. Otherwise, if the detector is Normal, use 1.0. 4. Otherwise, if the detector is Average, and the span in nonzero, use 0.1. The use of a small ratio in Average detection is desirable because of its effect on the sweep time equations. The VBW filter is not actually in-circuit when the average detector is on. If the detector is Average, and the span is zero, use 10.0, which gives optimal behavior for Interval Markers in zero span. 5. Otherwise, if the detector is EMI Average, Quasi Peak or RMS Average, use 10.0. In fact this is a “don’t care” since no VBW is used for these detectors, as noted under “Dependencies” for the VBW key 6. Otherwise, the detector is simply Peak or Sample. These two detectors can use the same rules. In these cases, if any active trace is in max hold or min hold, use 10.0, because Max and Min Hold operations will usually be intended to capture peaks and pits without smoothing from the VBW filter; otherwise, use 1.0 as a compromise, because you have not set the analyzer in a way that implies that you are measuring noise, pulsed-RF or CW signals, and for backward compatibility with earlier analyzers. Note that because the above couplings depend on which traces are active, they are re-examined whenever any trace goes active or inactive, except when this leaves no traces active. Transitioning to the state where no traces are active should not affect the couplings; in that way, the annotation will always reflect the state of the last trace which was active. Span:3dB RBW Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth. Normally, Span:3dB RBW (Auto) selects a Span:3 dB RBW ratio of 106:1. If you manually enter the ratio, Man will become underlined, which enables you to manually select ratios more suitable for certain measurements. When the Span:3dB RBW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the Span:3dB RBW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset. Key Path BW Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio <integer> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 593 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio:AUTO? Example FREQ:SPAN:BAND:RAT 200 sets a ratio of 200:1, and turns off the auto coupling. FREQ:SPAN:BAND:RAT:AUTO ON FREQ:SPAN:BAND:RAT? Notes The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset. Dependencies Grayed out when the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, since RBW is coupled to Center Frequency rather than Span in this case. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, the command is acted upon, but it doesn’t affect the current measurement. Preset 106 ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 2 Max 10000 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 RBW Control Selects the type/shape for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW filters in Agilent spectrum analyzers were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart. In the X-Series you can, using the Filter BW key, specify bandwidths other than the –3 dB bandwidth (–6 dB, Noise, Impulse) for the width of the Gaussian filters. Furthermore, the Filter BW menu lets you choose between a Gaussian and Flat Top filter shape, for varying measurement conditions. Key Path BW Dependencies The RBW Control key is grayed out if the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL. In this case the Filter Type is always Gaussian; the Filter BW is chosen as appropriate for the filter and the standard. Readback line [<filter type>] or, if Filter Type is Gaussian, [Gaussian,<filter BW>] Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 Filter Type Besides the familiar Gaussian filter shape, there are certain special filter types, such as Flat Top, that are desirable under certain conditions. The Filter Type menu gives you control over these types. See "More Information" on page 595 Key Path BW, RBW Control Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:SHAPe GAUSsian|FLATtop 594 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:SHAPe? Example BAND:SHAP GAUS Notes GAUSsian= Gaussian FLATtop = Flattop Dependencies When EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, the Filter Type is always Gaussian. Any attempt to set it to Flattop will give an error. Preset Auto Couple chooses the preset value State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback line 1-of-N selection Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 More Information Gaussian filters When the Gaussian filter type is chosen, a set of 160 RBW filters are available whose shape is approximately Gaussian. The actual bandwidths used to realize the X-Series’ Gaussian filters are chosen to come as close as possible to a 24 step per decade series, within the limitations of the digital IF. For Gaussian filters, the annotation at the bottom of the screen shows the filter bandwidth type (unless it is Normal). This will be shown parenthetically between the words “Res BW” and the value, for example Res BW 10.0 Hz (Normal bandwidth) Res BW (Impulse) 14.8 Hz (Impulse bandwidth) Flattop filters When the Flattop filter type is chosen, a new set of 134 RBW hardware settings are available. These settings realize filters that are approximately rectangular in shape. When this shape is chosen the filter bandwidth options are irrelevant and therefore unavailable. The annotation at the bottom of the screen will show that the Flattop shape is being used, for example: Res BW (Flattop) 10 Hz Gaussian Selects the Gaussian filter type. There are 160 of these RBWs. They are arranged in a 24-per-decade sequence from 1 Hz through 3 MHz, plus the 4, 5, 6 and 8 MHz settings. Key Path BW, RBW Control, Filter Type Example BAND:SHAP GAUS Notes Parameter is GAUSsian. See remote command in section "Filter Type " on page 594. Readback Gaussian Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 595 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW Flattop Selects the flat top filter type Key Path BW, RBW Control, Filter Type Example BAND:SHAP FLAT Readback Flattop Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Filter BW When using the Gaussian filters for certain types of applications it can be useful to be able to specify the filter width using points other than the –3 dB points. The Filter BW function allows you to pick the filter based on its –3 dB (Normal) bandwidth, its –6 dB bandwidth, its Noise bandwidth, or its Impulse bandwidth.Note that in all four cases the –3 dB bandwidth is the same. The filter does not change, but the way you specify it changes. See "More Information" on page 596 Key Path BW, RBW Control Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:TYPE DB3|DB6|IMPulse|NOISe [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:TYPE? Example BAND:TYPE NOIS Notes DB3 = –3 dB (Normal) DB6 = –6 dB IMPulse = Impulse NOISe = Noise Dependencies Grayed out if the Flattop filter type is selected. When EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, the Filter BW key is greyed out and the readback annotation on the key is blanked. This is because the Filter BW is chosen as appropriate for the filter and the standard and not selected by this key.Any attempt to set it otherwise will give an error. Preset Auto Couple chooses the preset value State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback line 1-of-N selection Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 More Information The analyzer provides four ways of specifying the bandwidth of a Gaussian filter: 596 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW 1. The –3 dB bandwidth of the filter 2. The –6 dB bandwidth of the filter 3. The equivalent Noise bandwidth of the filter, which is defined as the bandwidth of a rectangular filter with the same peak gain which would pass the same power for noise signals. 4. The equivalent Impulse bandwidth of the filter, which is defined as the bandwidth of a rectangular filter with the same peak gain which would pass the same power for impulsive (narrow pulsed) signals. The figure below shows the relationships of the various filter bandwidths for filters with the X-Series’ shape factor (shape factor is defined as the ratio of the –60 dB bandwidth to the – 3 dB bandwidth): The Filter Type menu lets you choose the filter bandwidth (–3 dB, –6 dB, Noise or Impulse) that will be used when specifying the width of the filter. Note that for a given Gaussian filter, changing the filter bandwidth specification does not affect the filter width at all but only the means of specifying it. For example, the filter whose –3 dB bandwidth is 1.0 kHz is the same as the filter whose –6 dB bandwidth is 1.41 kHz, whose Noise bandwidth is 1.06 kHz, and whose Impulse bandwidth is 1.48 kHz. As you cycle through these various filter bandwidths the filter does not change, but the way the filter is annotated and the value which appears in the active function area and on the softkey does. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 597 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference BW –3 dB (Normal) Selects the normal Gaussian-shaped bandwidths that are defined by their –3 dB bandwidths. Key Path BW, RBW Control, Filter BW Example BAND:TYPE DB3 Readback –3 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 –6 dB Selects the filter bandwidths where the bandwidth is defined at the –6 dB points. This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value displayed on the key, active function line and screen annotation changes to reflect the –6 dB bandwidth instead of the –3 dB bandwidth. Key Path BW, RBW Control, Filter BW Example BAND:TYPE DB6 Readback –6 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Noise Selects the noise filter bandwidths. This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value displayed on the key, active function line and screen annotation changes to reflect the equivalent noise bandwidth, instead of the –3 dB bandwidth. Key Path BW, RBW Control, Filter BW Example BAND:TYPE NOIS Readback Noise Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Impulse Selects the impulse bandwidths. This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value displayed on the key, active function line and screen annotation changes to reflect the equivalent impulse bandwidth instead of the –3 dB bandwidth. Key Path BW, RBW Control, Filter BW Example BAND:TYPE IMP Readback Impulse Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 598 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) Sets the analyzer for Continuous measurement operation. The single/continuous state is Meas Global so the setting will affect all measurements. If you are Paused, pressing Cont does a Resume. Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1 :INITiate:CONTinuous? Example :INIT:CONT 0 puts analyzer in Single measurement operation. :INIT:CONT 1 puts analyzer in Continuous measurement operation Preset ON (Note that SYST:PRESet sets INIT:CONT to ON but *RST sets INIT:CONT to OFF) State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA, there is no Cont hardkey, instead there is a Sweep Single/Cont key. In these analyzers, switching the Sweep Single/Cont key from Single to Cont restarts averages (displayed average count reset to 1), but does not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. The X-Series has Single and Cont keys in place of the SweepSingleCont key. In the X-Series, if in single measurement, the Cont key (and INIT:CONT ON ) switches to continuous measurement, but never restarts a measurement and never resets a sweep. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 In Swept SA Measurement (Spectrum Analysis Mode): l The analyzer takes repetitive sweeps, averages, measurements, etc., when in Continuous mode. When the average count reaches the Average/Hold Number the count stops incrementing, but the analyzer keeps sweeping. See the Trace/Detector section for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average/Hold Number is reached. The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep. The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps, is set under the Trace/Detector key, with choices of Trace Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold. In Other Measurements/Modes: l With Avg/Hold Num (in the Meas Setup menu) set to Off or set to On with a value of 1, a sweep is taken after the trigger condition is met; and the analyzer continues to take new sweeps after the current sweep has completed and the trigger condition is again met. However, with Avg/Hold Num set to On with a value >1, multiple sweeps (data acquisitions) are taken for the measurement. The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep. The sweep is not stopped when the average count k equals the number N set for Avg/Hold Num is reached, but the number k stops incrementing. A measurement average usually applies to all traces, marker results, and numeric results. But sometimes it only applies to the numeric results. If the analyzer is in Single measurement, pressing the Cont key does not change k and does not cause the sweep to be reset; the only action is to put the analyzer into Continuous measurement operation. If it is already in continuous sweep: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 599 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) l l 600 the INIT:CONT 1 command has no effect the INIT:CONT 0 command places the analyzer in Single Sweep, but has no effect on the current sequence until k = N, at which point the current sequence stops and the instrument goes into the idle state. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference File File Opens a menu that enables you to access various standard and custom Windows functions. Press any other front-panel key to exit. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 File Explorer Opens the standard Windows File Explorer. The File Explorer opensin the My Documents directory for the current user. The File Explorer is a separate Windows application, so to return to the analyzer once you are in the File Explorer, you may either: Exit the File Explorer by clicking on the red X in the upper right hand corner, with a mouse Or use Alt-Tab: press and hold the Alt key and press and release the Tab key until the Analyzer logo is showing in the window in the center of the screen, as shown above, then release the Alt key. Key Path File Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 601 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference File Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Page Setup The Page Setup key brings up a Windows Page Setup dialog that allows you to control aspects of the pages sent to the printer when the PRINT hardkey is pressed. Key Path File Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Paper size, the printer paper source, the page orientation and the margins are all settable. Just like any standard Windows dialog, you may navigate the dialog using the front-panel keys, or a mouse. There are no SCPI commands for controlling these parameters. Also contained in this dialog is a drop-down control that lets you select the Theme to use when printing. For more on Themes, see information under View/Display, Display, System Display Settings, Theme. The Theme control has a corresponding SCPI command. Parameter Name Print Themes Parameter Type Enum Mode All Remote Command :SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe TDColor|TDMonochrome|FCOLor|FMONochrome :SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe? Example :SYST:PRIN:THEM FCOL Setup :SYSTem:DEFault MISC Preset FCOL; not part of Preset, but is reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All and survives subsequent running of the modes. 602 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference File State Saved No Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Print This front-panel key is equivalent to performing a File, Print, OK. It immediately performs the currently configured Print to the Default printer. The :HCOPy command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT key. The HCOPy:ABORt command can be used to abort a print which is already in progress. Sending HCOPy:ABORt will cause the analyzer to stop sending data to the printer, although the printer may continue or even complete the print, depending on how much data was sent to the printer before the user sent the ABORt command. Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :HCOPy[:IMMediate] Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Key Path SCPI command only Remote Command :HCOPy:ABORt Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Restore Down This key allows you to Restore Down the Instrument Application and reverses the action taken by Maximize. This key is only visible when the application has been maximized, and after the Restore Down action has been completed this key is replaced by the Maximize key. Key Path File Mode All Notes No equivalent remote command for this key. State Saved No Initial S/W Revision A.05.01 Minimize The Minimize key causes the analyzer display to disappear down into the task bar, allowing you to see the Windows Desktop. You can use Alt-Tab ( press and hold the Alt key) to restore the analyzer display. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference key and press and release the Tab 603 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference File Key Path File Mode All Notes No equivalent remote command for this key. State Saved No Initial S/W Revision A.05.01 Exit This key, when pressed, will exit the Instrument Application. A dialog box is used to confirm that you intended to exit the application: Key Path File Mode All Notes The Instrument Application willclose. No further SCPI commands can be sent. Use with caution! Initial S/W Revision 604 Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel FREQ Channel Accesses a menu of keys that allow you to control the Frequency and Channel parameters of the instrument. Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements – they do not change as you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global” and are unaffected by Meas Preset. For example, the Center Freq setting is the same for all measurements - it does not change as you change measurements. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Zone Center Zone Center appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Trace Zoom View of the Spectrum Analyzer & RLC Modes. Zone Center allows you to change the frequency of the zone without changing the zone span. As the zone center is changed, the center frequency of the lower window is changed. Note that the lower window is not updated to reflect the change unless it is selected as the active window. The center frequency for the lower window is not limited by the selected start and stop frequencies in the upper window. However, if the frequency span of the lower window is at all outside of the span for the upper window, an orange arrow pointing left or right will be displayed at the left or right edge of the top window. Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:CENTer <frequency> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:CENTer? Example :FREQ:ZSP:CENT 20 MHz Notes Min and Max values depend on the Hardware Options (5xx) Dependencies Only appears when the Zone Span View of the Swept SA measurement is selected. If the SCPI command is sent in other Views, an error is generated. Couplings Center Frequency of lower window changes so that it is always the same as Zone Center, and viceversa Affected by Freq Offset exactly the same as is Center Frequency. Preset On entry to Zone Span, the Zone Center frequency is the same as the analyzer Center Frequency. So if you do a Mode Preset and then immediately go into Zone Span, Zone Center matches the Preset values listed in the table under the Center Freq key description. State Saved Saved in instrument state Min Hardware dependent; Zone Span dependent. Zone Center cannot go so low as to force Zone Left to be <0. Max The maximum Zone Center frequency is the same as the maximum analyzer Center Frequency, which is basically the instrument maximum frequency minus 5 Hz. See the table under the key description Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 605 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel for "Center Freq" on page 607. Default Unit Hz Status Bits/OPC dependencies Non-overlapped Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Zoom Center Zoom Center appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Trace Zoom View of the Spectrum Analyzer Mode. Zoom Center allows you to change the frequency of the zoom region, and hence of the lower window, without changing the Zoom Span. The Zoom Center value is displayed in the lower left corner of the zoom window (below the graticule) when the frequency entry mode is Center/Span (pressing Center Freq or Span sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span). When the frequency entry mode is Start/Stop, Zoom Start is displayed in this lower left annotation position (pressing Start Freq or Stop Freq sets the frequency entry mode to Start/Stop). Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:CENTer <frequency> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom CENTer? Example FREQ:TZO:CENT 20 MHz Dependencies Only appears in the Trace Zoom View of the Swept SA measurement. If the SCPI command is sent in other Views, an error is reported. Couplings The center frequency for the lower window is limited by the start and stop frequencies in the upper window. You cannot move the zoom region out of the upper window, nor does changing the Zoom Center frequency ever change the Zoom Span. When Zoom Center increases or decreases to a value that causes the zoom region to touch an edge of the top window, the Zoom Center is clipped at that value. If the analyzer Start and/or Stop frequencies change such that the Zoom Region is no longer between them, the Zoom Region is moved to the far left or right of the top window as appropriate. Affected by Freq Offset exactly the same as is Center Frequency. Preset 13.255 GHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min Start Frequency of top window Max The maximum Zoom Center frequency is the same as the maximum analyzer Center Frequency, which is basically the instrument maximum frequency – 5 Hz. See the table under the Center Freq key description. Default Unit Hz Initial S/W Revision A.07.01 Preset On entry to Trace Zoom, the Zoom Center frequency is the same as the analyzer Center Frequency. So if you do a Mode Preset and then immediately go into Trace Zoom, Zoom Center matches the Preset values listed in the table under the Center Freq key description. 606 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Auto Tune Auto Tune appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Normal and Spectrogram views of the Spectrum Analyzer Mode. Auto Tune is an immediate action key. When it is pressed, it causes the analyzer to change Center Frequency to the strongest signal in the tunable span of the analyzer, excluding the LO. It is designed to quickly get you to the most likely signal(s) of interest, with no signal analysis knowledge required. As such, there are no configurable parameters for this feature. There are only pre-selected values that work in most real world situations. Auto Tune performs a Preset as part of its function, so it always returns you to the Normal View and a preset state, although it does leave the AC/DC coupling and Single/Cont state unaffected. You may see a slight pause before the signal of interest is presented at midscreen. Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate Dependencies Auto Tune is not available (grayed out) when Source Mode=Tracking. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Center Freq Sets the frequency that corresponds to the horizontal center of the graticule (when frequency Scale Type is set to linear). While adjusting the Center Frequency the Span is held constant, which means that both Start Frequency and Stop Frequency will change. Pressing Center Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span. In Center/Span mode, the center frequency and span values are displayed below the graticule, and the default active function in the Frequency menu is Center Freq. The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode, that is, it is Meas Global. Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value. If this is the case, the Mode will have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu. The Center Freq function sets (and queries) the Center Frequency for the currently selected input. If your analyzer has multiple inputs, and you select another input, the Center Freq changes to the value for that input. SCPI commands are available to directly set the Center Freq for a specific input. Center Freq is remembered as you go from input to input. Thus you can set a Center Freq of 10 GHz with the RF Input selected, change to BBIQ and set a Center Freq of 20 MHz, then switch to External Mixing and set a Center Freq of 60 GHz, and when you go back to the RF Input the Center Freq will go back to 10 GHz; back to BBIQ and it is 20 MHz; back to External Mixing and it is 60 GHz. See "RF Center Freq" on page 610 See Ext Mix Center Freq Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 607 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel See "I/Q Center Freq" on page 612 See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 Key Path FREQ Channel Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer? Example FREQ:CENT 50 MHz FREQ:CENT UP changes the center frequency to 150 MHz if you use FREQ:CENT:STEP 100 MHz to set the center frequency step size to 100 MHz FREQ:CENT? Notes This command sets either the RF or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input. For RF input it is equivalent to FREQ:RF:CENT For I/Q input it is equivalent to FREQ:IQ:CENT Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx) If no terminator (e.g. MHz) is sent the terminator Hz is used. If a terminator with unit other than Frequency is used, an invalid suffix error message is generated. Dependencies The Center Frequency can be limited by Start or Stop Freq limits, if the Span is so large that Start or Stop reach their limit. Couplings When operating in “swept span”, any value of the Center Frequency or Span that is within the frequency range of the analyzer is allowed when the value is being set through the front panel numeric key pad or the SCPI command. The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed, to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer’s frequency range Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input. See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 and "RF Center Freq" on page 610 and Ext Mix Center Freq and "I/Q Center Freq" on page 612. State Saved Saved in instrument state Min Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input.. See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 and "RF Center Freq" on page 610 and "I/Q Center Freq" on page 612. Max Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input.. See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 and "RF Center Freq" on page 610 and "I/Q Center Freq" on page 612. Default Unit Hz Status Bits/OPC Dependencies Non-overlapped Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 608 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Center Frequency Presets The following table provides the Center Frequency Presets for the Spectrum Analyzer mode, and the Max Freq, for the various frequency options: Freq Option CF Max Freq after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset 503 (all but N9000A) 1.805 GHz 3.6 GHz 3.7 GHz 503 (N9000A) 1.505 GHz 3.0 GHz 3.08 GHz 507 (all but N9000A) 3.505 GHz 7.0 GHz 7.1 GHz 507 (N9000A) 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.58 GHz 508 1.805 GHz 3.6 GHz 8.5 GHz 4.205 GHz 8.4 GHz 8.5 GHz 513 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz 13.8 GHz 526 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 27.0 GHz 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 26.55 GHz 1.805 GHz 3.6 GHz 27.0 GHz (can't tune above) (all but N9038A) 508 (N9038A) (all but N9000A and N9038A) 526 (N9000A) 526 (N9038A) 532 16.005 GHz 32.0 GHz 32.5 GHz 543 21.505 GHz 43.0 GHz TBD 544 22.005 GHz 44.0 GHz 44.5 GHz 550 25.005 GHz 50.0 GHz 51 GHz Input 2: Model CF Max Freq after Mode Preset Stop Freq after Mode Preset N9000A opt C75 0.7505GHz 1.5 GHz 1.58 GHz N9038A 505 MHz 1 GHz 1.000025 GHz (can't tune above) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 609 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Tracking Generator Frequency Limits (N9000A only): Tracking Generator Option Min Freq (clips to this freq when turn TG on and can’t tune below while TG on) If above this Freq, Stop Freq clipped to this Freq when TG turned on Max Freq (can't tune above) while TG on T03 9 kHz 3.0 GHz 3.08 GHz T06 9 kHz 6.0 GHz 6.05 GHz The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets for modes other than Spectrum Analyzer: Mode CF Preset for RF WCDMA 1 GHz WIMAXOFDMA, 1 GHz BASIC 1 GHz ADEMOD 1 GHz VSA 1 GHz TDSCDMA 1 GHz PNOISE 1 GHz LTE 1 GHz LTETDD 1 GHz MSR 1 GHz GSM 935.2 MHz NFIGURE 1.505 GHz RF Center Freq SCPI command for specifying the RF Center Frequency. This command will set the Center Frequency to be used when the RF input is selected, even if the RF input is not the input that is selected at the time the command is sent. Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input. Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:RF:CENTer <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:RF:CENTer? Example FREQ:RF:CENT 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode. Dependencies If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Center Frequency such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI 610 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Center Freq is therefore limited by the limits of the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if these limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep. Preset See table above State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min –79.999995 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum frequency of the Source Max See table above. Basically instrument maximum frequency – 5 Hz. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum frequency. If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters Span, Start Frequency and Stop Frequency Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Ext Mix Center Freq SCPI command for specifying the External Mixer Center Frequency. This command will set the Center Frequency to be used when the External Mixer is selected, even if the External Mixer input is not the input which is selected at the time the command is sent. Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input. Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:EMIXer:CENTer <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:EMIXer:CENTer? Example :FREQ:EMIX:CENT 60 GHz :FREQ:EMIX:CENT? Notes This command is the same in all modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode. Couplings When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs (e.g., RF), you will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing. So you will come back to the band you were in with the Center Frequency that you had. However, Span is not an inputdependent parameter, therefore you will bring the span over from the other input. Therefore, the analyzer comes back with the span from the previous input, limited as necessary by the current mixer setup. Preset When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Start frequency of the current Mode is set to the nominal Min Freq of the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup. Similarly, the Stop frequency of the current Mode is set to the nominal Max Freq of the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table. The Center Freq thus presets to the point arithmetically equidistant from these two frequencies. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 611 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span shown in the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the measurement allows, and still sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values in the Harmonic Table. When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Start and Stop frequencies are 26.5 and 40 GHz respectively. The center of these two frequencies is 33.25 GHz. Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode Preset while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Center Freq is 33.25 GHz. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min The minimum frequency in the currently selected mixer band + 5 Hz Max The maximum frequency in the currently selected mixer band – 5 Hz If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters Span, Start Frequency and Stop Frequency Initial S/W Revision A.08.01 I/Q Center Freq SCPI command for specifying the I/Q Center Frequency. This command will set the Center Frequency to be used when the I/Q input is selected, even if the I/Q input is not the input which is selected at the time the command is sent. Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input. Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:IQ:CENTer <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:IQ:CENTer? Example FREQ:IQ:CENT: 30 MHz Notes This command is the same in all modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode. Preset 0 Hz State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min –40.049995 MHz Max 40.049995 MHz Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Start Freq Sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule. While adjusting the start frequency, the stop frequency is held constant, which means that both the center frequency and span will change. 612 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Start Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Start or Stop. In Start or Stop mode, the start frequency and stop frequency values are displayed below the graticule, and the default active function in the Frequency menu is Start Freq. Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt? Example FREQ:STAR 200 MHz FREQ:STAR? Notes Max values depends on Hardware Options (5xx) Dependencies By direct entry: You cannot set Start frequency > Stop frequency. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. You cannot set Start Frequency to a value that would create a span of less than 10 Hz. If you try to do any of these, Stop Frequency will change to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop. With the knob or step keys: Cannot increment Start Freq to a value greater than Stop Freq – 10 Hz. If already in zero span, cannot increment at all, and the first decrement will be forced to at least 10 Hz. The Start Frequency can be limited by Span limits, if the Stop Frequency is below its preset value. If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set the Start Frequency such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Start Freq is therefore limited by the limits of the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if these limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep. Couplings In the Spectrum Analyzer, the four parameters Center Freq, Start Freq, Stop Freq and Span are interdependent, as changing one necessarily affects one or more of the others. The couplings between Center Freq and Span are detailed under the key descriptions for those keys. These couplings also affect Start Freq and Stop Freq. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. The instrument will alter the value of the last setting to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop. Preset Start Freq does not preset. On Mode Preset, Span & CF preset, and Start Freq is derived. On a Meas Preset only Span presets, CF does not, so Start Freq will vary depending on CF. When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Start frequency of the current Mode is set to the nominal Min Freq of the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup. If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span shown in the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the measurement allows, and sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values in the Harmonic Table. Thus, in this case, the Start Freq will preset to a frequency below the preset Center Freq by ½ of the maximum Span. When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Start frequency is 26.5 GHz. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 613 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode Preset while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Start Freq is 26.5 GHz. State Saved Saved in instrument state Min –80 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum frequency of the Source If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters While in External Mixing, the minimum Start Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing parameters. It will be close to the minimum LO frequency (3.8 GHz if undoubled, 8.6 GHz if doubled) times the harmonic number, for the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STARt? MIN. Max Depends on the instrument maximum frequency – 10 Hz. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum frequency. If the knob or step keys are being used, it depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters. While in External Mixing, the maximum Start Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if doubled) times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STARt? MAX. Default Unit Hz Status Bits/OPC dependencies Non-overlapped Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Stop Freq Sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule. While adjusting the stop Frequency, the start frequency is held constant, which means that both the center frequency and span will change. Stop Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Start or Stop. In Start or Stop mode, the start frequency and stop frequency values are displayed below the graticule, and the default active function in the Frequency menu is Start Freq. Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP? Example FREQ:STOP 220 MHz FREQ:STOP? Notes Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx) Dependencies By direct entry: You cannot set the Stop frequency < Start frequency. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop 614 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. You cannot set Stop Frequency to a value that would create a span of less than 10 Hz. If you try to do any of these, Start Frequency will change to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop. With the knob or step keys: Cannot decrement Stop Freq to a value less than Start Freq + 10 Hz. If already in zero span, cannot decrement at all, and the first increment will be forced to at least 10 Hz. The Stop Frequency can be limited by Span limits, if the Start Frequency is above its preset value. If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set the Stop Frequency >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Stop Freq is therefore limited by the limits of the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if these limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep. Couplings In the Spectrum Analyzer, the four parameters Center Freq, Start Freq, Stop Freq and Span are interdependent, as changing one necessarily affects one or more of the others. The couplings between Center Freq and Span are detailed under the key descriptions for those keys. These couplings also affect Start Freq and Stop Freq. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. The instrument will alter the value of the last setting to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop. Preset On Mode Preset, Span & CF preset, and Stop Freq is derived. See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 for a table which shows the Stop Freq after Preset for various model and option numbers). On a Meas Preset only Span presets, CF does not, so Stop Freq will vary depending on CF. When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Stop frequency of the current Mode is set to the nominal Max Freq of the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup. If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span shown in the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the measurement allows, and sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values in the Harmonic Table. Thus, in this case, the Stop Freq will preset to a frequency above the preset Center Freq by ½ of the maximum Span. When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Stop frequency is 40 GHz. Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode Preset while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Stop Freq is 40 GHz. State Saved Saved in instrument state Min –79.999999999 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum frequency of the Source If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters While in External Mixing, the minimum Stop Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing parameters. It will be close to the minimum LO frequency (3.8 GHz if undoubled, 8.6 GHz if doubled) times the harmonic number, for the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STOP? MIN. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 615 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Max Depends on instrument maximum frequency. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum frequency. If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters. While in External Mixing, the maximum Stop Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if doubled) times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STOP? MAX. Default Unit Hz Status Bits/OPC dependencies Non-overlapped Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 CF Step Changes the step size for the center frequency and start and stop frequency functions. Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for Center Frequency from remote commands) change the center frequency by the step-size value. The step size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the current frequency span of the analyzer. Note that the start and stop frequencies also step by the CF Step value. Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? Example FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz FREQ:CENT UP increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP? FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Notes Preset and Max values are depending on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526) Notes Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx) Dependencies Freq Offset is not available in External Mixing. In this case the Freq Offset key is grayed out and shows a value of zero. It will once again be available, and show the previously set value, when you return to the RF Input. 616 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Dependencies Span, RBW, Center frequency If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to change the value of the center frequency >3.6 GHz by pressing the Up-arrow key, fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. Couplings When auto-coupled in a non-zero span, the center frequency step size is set to 10% of the span. When auto-coupled in zero span, the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent –3 dB RBW value. Preset Auto ADEMOD: 1 MHz ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Min – (the maximum frequency of the instrument). That is, 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step range of +/– 27 GHz. Note that this is the maximum frequency given the current settings of the instrument, so in External Mixing, for example, it is the maximum frequency of the current mixer band. Max The maximum frequency of the instrument. That is, 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step range of +/– 27 GHz. Note that this is the maximum frequency given the current settings of the instrument, so in External Mixing, for example, it is the maximum frequency of the current mixer band. Default Unit Hz Status Bits/OPC dependencies non-overlapped Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Freq Offset Enables you to set a frequency offset value to account for frequency conversions outside of the analyzer. This value is added to the display readout of the marker frequency, center frequency, start frequency, stop frequency, and all other absolute frequency settings in the analyzer including frequency count. When a frequency offset is entered, the value appears below the center of the graticule. To eliminate an offset, perform a Mode Preset or set the frequency offset to 0 Hz. See "More Information" on page 618. Key Path FREQ Channel Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet? Example FREQ:OFFS 10 MHz Notes Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526) Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 617 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference FREQ Channel Dependencies Freq Offset is not available in External Mixing. In this case the Freq Offset key is grayed out and shows a value of zero. However, the value of CF Offset that was set for the RF Input is retained and restored when the user switches back to the RF Input. Preset See the table in See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min –500 GHz Max 500 GHz Default Unit Hz Status Bits/OPC dependencies Non-overlapped Backwards Compatibility SCPI DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:OFFSet Backwards Compatibility Notes 1. In pre-X-Series instruments, Frequency Offset could not be adjusted by the knob or step keys. That is no longer the case. The DISPlay version of the command is in the instrument for compatibility across platforms and is not recommended for new development. 2. Some previous spectrum analyzers did not adjust frequency counter results for the Frequency Offset. The X-Series does adjust the frequency counter for the offset. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.04.00, A.08.50 More Information This command does not affect any bandwidths or the settings of relative frequency parameters such as delta markers or span. It does not affect the current hardware settings of the analyzer, but only the displayed frequency values. Entering an offset does not affect the trace position or display, just the value of the start and stop frequency and the values represented by the trace data. The frequency values of exported trace data, queried trace data, markers, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points, trace math, etc., are all affected by Freq Offset. Changing the offset, even on a trace that is not updating will immediately change all of the above, without taking new data. If a trace is exported with a nonzero Freq Offset, the exported data will contain the trace data with the offset applied. Therefore, if that trace were to be imported back into the analyzer, you would want Freq Offset to be 0, or the offset would be applied again to data which is already offset. No such care need be taken when saving a State+Trace file because the data and state are saved together. 618 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Input/Output The Input/Output features are common across multiple Modes and Measurements. These common features are described in this section. See the Measurement description for information on features that are unique. The Input/Output key accesses the keys that control the Input/Output parameters of the instrument. In general, these are functions associated with external connections to the analyzer, either to the inputs or the outputs. Since these connections tend to be fairly stable within a given setup, in general, the input/output settings do not change when you Preset the analyzer. Other functions related to the input/output connections, but which tend to change on a measurement by measurement basis, can be found under the Trigger and AMPTD Y Scale keys. In addition, some of the digital I/O bus configurations can be found under the System key. The functions in the Input/Output menu are "global" (common) to all Modes (applications). But individual Input/Output functions only appear in a Mode if they apply to that Mode. Functions that apply to a Mode but not to all measurements in the Mode may be grayed-out in some measurements. "Input/Output variables - Preset behavior" on page 621 The Input Port selection is the first menu under the Input/Output key: Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command [:SENSe]:FEED RF|AIQ|EMIXer [:SENSe]:FEED? Example :FEED RF :FEED? Couplings The [:SENSe]:FEED RF command turns the calibrator OFF Preset This setting is unaffected by a Preset or power cycle. It survives a Mode Preset and mode changes. It is set to RF on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:FEED AREFerence In the PSA the calibrator was one of the inputs and selected using the AREF parameter to the same :FEED command that switched the inputs. In the X-Series it is controlled in a separate menu and overrides the input selection. For code compatibility the [:SENSe]:FEED AREFerence command is provided, and is aliased to [SENSe]:FEED:AREF REF50, which causes the input to be switched to the 50 MHz calibrator. The [:SENSe]:FEED RF command switches the input back to the RF port and turns the calibrator OFF, thus providing full compatibility with the PSA calibrator function. Note that after sending this, the query [:SENSe]:FEED? does not return “AREF” but instead the currently selected input. Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:FEED IQ|IONLy|QONLy [:SENSe]:FEED? The parameters IQ | IONLy | QONLy are supported for backwards compatibility with the E44406A. l [:SENSe]:FEED IQ aliases to [:SENSe]:FEED: IQ:TYPE IQ Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 619 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output l [:SENSe]:FEED IONLy aliases to [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE IONLy l [:SENSe]:FEED QONLy aliases to [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE QONLy The query [:SENSe]:FEED? always returns AIQ, whichever of the legacy parameters IQ | IONLy | QONLy have been specified. Backwards Compatibility Notes Most of the settings in the X-Series Input/Output system, including External Gain, Amplitude Corrections settings and data, etc., are shared by all modes and are not changed by a mode switch. Furthermore, most variables in the Input/Output system key are not affected by Mode Preset. Both of these behaviors represent a departure from legacy behavior. In the X-Series, Input/Output settings are reset by using the "Restore Input/Output Defaults" function. They can also be reset to their default values through the System->Restore System Defaults-> In/Out Config key or through the System ->Restore System Defaults -> All key (and corresponding SCPI). While this matches most use cases better, it does create some code compatibility issues. For example, Amplitude Corrections are no longer turned off by a Mode Preset, but instead by using the "Restore Input/Output Defaults" key/SCPI. Although Input/Output settings are not part of each Mode’s State, they are saved in the Save State files, so that all of the instrument settings can be recalled with Recall State, as in legacy instruments. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :INPut:MIXer EXTernal|INTernal :INPut:MIXer? Example INP:MIX INT INP:MIX? Notes In legacy analyzers you choose between the Internal mixer or an External Mixer. In the X-Series, the External Mixer is one of the choices for the Input and is selected using the FEED command (:SENSe:FEED EXTMixer). For compatibility, the INPut:MIXer EXTernal|INTernal legacy command is mapped as follows: 1. When INPut:MIXer EXTernal is received, SENSe:FEED EMIXer is executed. 2. When INPut:MIXer INTernal is received, SENSe:FEED RF is executed. 3. When INPut:MIXer? is received, the response will be INT if any input other than the external mixer is selected and EXT if the external mixer is selected Preset INT Backwards Compatibility Notes PSA supports the following SCPI Command : :INPut:MIXer:TYPE PRESelected|UNPReselect :INPut:MIXer:TYPE? PXA does not support the :INPut:MIXer:TYPE command. Initial S/W Revision 620 A.08.01 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Input/Output variables - Preset behavior Virtually all the input/output settings are not a part of mode preset. They can be set to their default value by one of the three ways: l by using the Restore Input/Output Defaults key on the first page of the input/output menu, l by using the System->Restore System Defaults->Input/Output Settings or, l by using the System -> Restore System Defaults->All. Also, they survive a Preset and a Power cycle. A very few of the Input/Output settings do respond to a Mode Preset; for example, if the Calibrator is on it turns off on a Preset, and if DC coupling is in effect it switches to AC on a Preset. These exceptions are made in the interest of reliability and usability, which overrides the need for absolute consistency. Exceptions are noted in the SCPI table for the excepted functions. RF Input Selects the front-panel RF input port to be the analyzer signal input. If RF is already selected, pressing this key accesses the RF input setup functions. Key Path Input/Output Example [:SENSe]:FEED RF Readback The RF input port, RF coupling, and current input impedance settings appear on this key as: "XX, YY, ZZ" where XX is RF, RF2, RFIO1, RFIO2, depending on what input is selected (only appears on analyzers with multiple RF inputs) YY is AC or DC ZZ is 50Ω or 75Ω Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Input Z Correction Sets the input impedance for unit conversions. This affects the results when the y-axis unit is voltage or current units (dBmV, dBµV, dBµA, V, A), but not when it is power units (dBm, W). The impedance you select is for computational purposes only, since the actual impedance is set by internal hardware to 50 ohms. Setting the computational input impedance to 75 ohms is useful when using a 75 ohm to 50 ohm adapter to measure a 75 ohm device on an analyzer with a 50 ohm input impedance. There are a variety ways to make 50 to 75 ohm transitions, such as impedance transformers or minimum loss pads. The choice of the solution that is best for your measurement situation requires balancing the amount of loss that you can tolerate with the amount of measurement frequency range that you need. If you are using one of these pads/adaptors with the Input Z Corr function, you might also want to use the Ext Gain key. This function is used to set a correction value to compensate for the gain (loss) through your pad. This correction factor is applied to the displayed measurement values. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 621 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, RF Input Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude] 50|75 [:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]? Example CORR:IMP 75 sets the input impedance correction to 75 ohms. CORR:IMP? Couplings In the N9000A option C75, when RF Input 2 is selected, the Input Z Correction will automatically change to 75 ohms. The user may then change it to whatever is desired. When the main RF Input is selected, the Input Z Correction will automatically change to 50 ohms. The user may then change it to whatever is desired. Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 50 ohms on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Some instruments/options may have 75 ohms available. State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback 50 Ω or 75 Ω. Current setting reads back to the RF key. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 RF Coupling Specifies alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) coupling at the analyzer RF input port. Selecting AC coupling switches in a blocking capacitor that blocks any DC voltage present at the analyzer input. This decreases the input frequency range of the analyzer, but prevents damage to the input circuitry of the analyzer if there is a DC voltage present at the RF input. In AC coupling mode, you can view signals below the corner frequency of the DC block, but below a certain frequency the amplitude accuracy is not specified. The frequency below which specifications do not apply is: X-Series Model Lowest Freq for meeting specs when AC coupled Lowest Freq for meeting specs when DC coupled N9000A–503/507 100 kHz n/a N9000A-C75 Input 2 1 MHz n/a N9000A–513/526 10 MHz 9 kHz N9010A 10 MHz 9 kHz N9020A 10 MHz 20 Hz N9030A 10 MHz 3 Hz Some amplitude specifications apply only when coupling is set to DC. Refer to the appropriate amplitude specifications and characteristics for your analyzer. 622 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output When operating in DC coupled mode, ensure protection of the analyzer input circuitry by limiting the DC part of the input level to within 200 mV of 0 Vdc. In AC or DC coupling, limit the input RF power to +30 dBm (1 Watt). Key Path Input/Output, RF Input Remote Command :INPut:COUPling AC|DC|RLC :INPut:COUPling? Example INP:COUP DC Dependencies This key does not appear in models that are always AC coupled. When the SCPI command to set DC coupling is sent to these models, it results in the error “Illegal parameter value; This model is always AC coupled” In these models, the SCPI query INP:COUP? always returns AC. This key does not appear in models that are always DC coupled.When the SCPI command to set AC coupling is sent to these models, it results in the error “Illegal parameter value; This instrument is always DC coupled” In these models, the SCPI query INP:COUP? always returns DC. Preset AC on models that support AC coupling On models that are always DC coupled, such as millimeter wave models (frequency ranges 30 GHz and above), the preset is DC. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 I/Q This feature is not available unless the "Baseband I/Q (Option BBA)" on page 623 is installed. Selects the front-panel I/Q input ports to be the analyzer signal input. If I/Q is already selected, pressing this key accesses the I/Q setup menu. Key Path Input/Output Mode BASIC, CDMA2K, EDGEGSM, TDSCMDA, VSA89601, WIMAXOFDMA Example FEED AIQ Notes Not all measurements support the use of the I/Q signal input. When I/Q is selected in a measurement that does not support it, the “No Result; Meas invalid with I/Q inputs” error condition message appears. This is error 135 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Baseband I/Q (Option BBA) The Baseband I/Q functionality is a hardware option. It is option BBA. If the option is not installed, none of the I/Q functionality is enabled. The Baseband I/Q has four input ports and one output port. The input ports are I, I-bar, Q, and Q-bar. The I and I-bar together compose the I channel and the Q and Q-bar together compose the Q channel. Each channel has two modes of operation, Single-Ended (also called "unbalanced") and Differential Input (also Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 623 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output called "balanced"). When in Single-Ended operation, only the main port (I or Q) is used and the complementary port (I-bar or Q-bar) is ignored. When in Differential Input mode, both main and complementary ports are used. The input settings (range, attenuation, skew, impedance, external gain) apply to the channels, not the individual ports. The system supports a variety of 1 MΩ input passive probes as well as the Keysight 113x Series active differential probes using the Infinimax probe interface. The Keysight 113x Series active probes can be used for both single ended and differential measurements. In either case a single connection is made for each channel (on either the I or Q input). The input is automatically configured to 50 Ω single ended and the probe power is supplied through the Infinimax interface. The probe can be configured for a variety of input coupling and low frequency rejection modes. In addition, a wide range of offset voltages and probe attenuation accessories are supported at the probe interface. The active probe has the advantage that it does not significantly load the circuit under test, even with unity gain probing. With passive 1 MΩ probes, the probe will introduce a capacitive load on the circuit, unless higher attenuation is used at the probe interface. Higher attenuation reduces the signal level and degrades the signal-to-noise-ratio of the measurement. Passive probes are available with a variety of attenuation values for a moderate cost. Most Keysight passive probes can be automatically identified by the system, setting the input impedance setting required as well as the nominal attenuation. For single ended measurements a single probe is used for each channel. Other passive probes can be used, with the attenuation and impedance settings configured manually. For full differential measurements, the system supports probes on each of the four inputs. The attenuation of the probes should be the same for good common mode rejection and channel match. Both active and passive probes in single ended and differential configurations can be calibrated. This calibration uses the Cal Out BNC connection and a probe connection accessory. The calibration achieves excellent absolute gain flatness in a probed measurement. It matches both the gain and frequency response of the I and Q channels as well as any delay skew, resulting in high accuracy in derived measurements such as Error Vector Magnitude (EVM). When a probe is connected a status message will be displayed. The message will indicate if calibration data is available or not. Calibration data is saved for each type of probe (including "none") for each port and will be reapplied whenever that type of probe is re-connected to the same port. For probes with EEPROM identification, the calibration data will be stored based on the unique probe identifier and will reapply data for that particular probe if it is available. The data will not follow a probe from one port to another. For probes without EEPROM identification, the instrument cannot distinguish between different probes of the same type and it will use the data from the last calibration for that probe type on that port. When in differential mode, both the main and complementary probes are expected to be of the same type. In some situations, the I and Q channels should be configured identically. In other situations it is convenient to control them independently. Some menus have a "Q Same as I" setting that will cause the Q channel configuration to mirror the I channel configuration, avoiding the overhead of double data entry when the channels should be the same. The output port is for calibrating the I/Q input ports, although it can also be manually controlled. 624 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output There are two types of calibrations available: cable calibration and probe calibration. The cable calibration will guide the user through connecting each input port in turn. All ports must be calibrated together. The probe calibration is done for a specific channel (I or Q). If in Single-Ended mode, only the main port is calibrated. When in Differential Input mode, the user is guided through calibrating both main and complementary ports. The front panel I/Q port LEDs indicate the current state of that port. On (green) indicates it is active, and off (dark) indicates it is not in use. For example, the Cal Out port LED is on if and only if there is signal coming out of that port. The input is a context and some parameters have separate values for each context. The SCPI for these parameters has an optional "[:RF|IQ]" node. If the specific context is omitted, the command acts on the current input context's value. Here are the parameters that are input context sensitive: l Center Frequency l Trigger Source It is important to distinguish between the I and Q input ports and the displayed I and Q data values. The I and Q input ports feed into a digital receiver that does digital tuning and filtering. The I and Q data seen by the user (either on the display or through SCPI) corresponds to the real ("I") and the imaginary ("Q") output from the digital receiver. When the input path is I+jQ or I Only and the center frequency is 0 Hz the I input ends up in as the real output from the receiver and appears as "I" data. Likewise, when the input path is I+jQ and the center frequency is 0 Hz, the Q input ends up as the imaginary output from the receiver and appears as "Q" data. However, when the input path is Q Only, the Q input is sent to the receiver as Q+j0, so the receiver output has the Q input coming out on the real output, and so in Q Only, the signal from the Q input port appears as the "I" data. Another situation where the I and Q data do not necessarily correspond directly to the I and Q inputs is when the center frequency is non-zero. The digital processing involved in the tuning is a complex operation. This will result in I Only data appearing as both "I" and "Q" data, the same as that signal would appear if seen through the RF input port. Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility For the Keysight E4406A VSA Series Transmitter Tester, Option B7C provided baseband I/Q inputs. Code compatibility has been provided to allow many of the commands for option B7C to function properly with the X-Series. The X-Series has hardware differences and additional capabilities (e.g., E4406A does not have independent settings of I & Q nor does it provide for probe calibrations) which make 100% compatibility impossible. The following commands are supported: l :CALibration:IQ:FLATness l :INPut:IMPedance:IQ U50|B50|U1M|B1M l :INPut:IMPedance:REFerence <integer> The [:SENSe]:FEED RF|IQ|IONLy|QONLy|AREFerence|IFALign command supports all parameters except IFALign. The FEED? query returns only RF|AIQ|AREF. The following commands are not supported: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 625 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output l :CALibration:GIQ l :CALibration:IQ:CMR l :INPut:IQ:ALIGn OFF|ON|0|1 The Rohde & Schwarz FSQ-B71 also provides baseband I/Q inputs. A certain amount of code compatibility is provided in the X-Series, however hardware differences make this a somewhat limited set. Supported: l The "<1|2>" is supported as "[1]". l INPut<1|2>:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] ON | OFF l INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE I | Q | IQ l INPut<1|2>:IQ:IMPedance LOW | HIGH Not Supported: l INPut<1|2>:SELect AIQ | RF l TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:FORMat COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair> l TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <offset samples>,<# of samples> l TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA? l TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SET <filter type>,<rbw>,<sample rate>,<trigger source>,<trigger slope>, <pretrigger samples>, <# of samples> l TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SRATe 10.0kHz to 81.6MHz l TRACe<1|2>:IQ[:STATe] ON|OFF The Rohde & Schwarz FMU has the following SCPI, which is not supported (these commands start/abort the probe calibration procedure, which is manually interactive from the front panel): l CALibration:ABORt l CALibration:PROBe[:STARt] I/Q Path Selects which I/Q input channels are active. The LED next to each I/Q input port will be on when that port is active. The analysis bandwidth for each channel is the same as that of the instrument. For example, the base N9020A has a bandwidth of 10 MHz. With I/Q input the I and Q channels would each have an analysis bandwidth of 10 MHz, giving 20 MHz of bandwidth when the I/Q Path is I+jQ. With option B25, the available bandwidth becomes 25 MHz, giving 25 MHz each to I and Q and 50 MHz to I+jQ. I/Q voltage to power conversion processing is dependent on the I/Q Path selected. 626 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output • With I+jQ input we know that the input signal may not be symmetrical about 0 Hz, because it has a complex component. Therefore, above 0 Hz only the positive frequency information is displayed, and below 0 Hz only the negative frequency information is displayed. • With all other Input Path selections, the input signal has no complex component and therefore is always symmetrical about 0 Hz. In this case, by convention, the power conversion shows the combined voltage for both the positive and negative frequencies. The information displayed below 0 Hz is the mirror of the information displayed above 0 Hz. This results in a power reading 6.02 dB higher (for both) than would be seen with only the positive frequency voltage. Note also that, in this case the real signal may have complex modulation embedded in it, but that must be recovered by further signal processing. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q Remote Command [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ|IONLy|QONLy|INDependent [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE? Example Set the input to be both the I and Q channels, combined as I + j * Q. FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ Notes The Independent I and Q selection is only available in GPVSA Preset IQ State Saved Yes This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range I+jQ | I Only | Q Only | Independent I and Q Readback Text I+jQ | I Only | Q Only | Ind I/Q Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :INPut[1]:IQ:TYPE IQ|I|Q :INPut[1]:IQ:TYPE? Notes For R&S FSQ-B71 compatibility Preset IQ Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 I+jQ Sets the signal input to be both the I and Q channels. The I and Q channel data will be combined as I + j * Q. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path Example Set the input to be both the I and Q channels, combined as I + j * Q. FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 627 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output I Only Sets the signal input to be only the I channel. The Q channel will be ignored. The data collected is still complex. When the center frequency is 0 the imaginary part will always be zero, but for any other center frequency both the real and imaginary parts will be significant. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path Example Set the input to be only the I channel. FEED:IQ:TYPE IONL Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Only Sets the signal input to be only the Q channel. The I channel will be ignored. The Q channel will be sent to the digital receiver block as Q+j0. The receiver's output is still complex. When the center frequency is 0 the imaginary part will always be zero, but for any other center frequency both the real and imaginary parts will be significant. Note that since the receiver's real output is displayed as the "I" data, when the center frequency is 0, the Q Only input appears as the "I" data. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path Example Set the input to be only the Q channel. FEED:IQ:TYPE QONL Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 I Setup Access the channel setup parameters for the I channel. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 I Differential Input Selects differential input on or off for the I channel. For differential input (also called balanced input), the analyzer uses both main and complementary ports. When differential input is off (also called single-ended or unbalanced input), the analyzer uses only the main port. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup Remote Command :INPut:IQ[:I]:DIFFerential OFF|ON|0|1 :INPut:IQ[:I]:DIFFerential? Example Put the I channel in Differential Input mode INP:IQ:DIFF ON 628 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Notes When I Differential Input = On, the analyzer will check for attenuation mismatches between the I and I-bar ports. If the difference in attenuation values exceeds 0.5 dB a Settings Alert error condition, error 159 will be set. When I Differential Input = On, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q Differential input must also be On. Similarly, when I Differential Input = Off, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q Differential input must also be Off. If the states of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Differential. Couplings Some active probes include built-in differential capability. When one of these probes is sensed, this key is disabled. Since the differential capability is handled in the probe, the Analyzer will use only the main port and the key will show that the Analyzer's Differential Input mode is Off (indicating that the complementary port is not in use). When Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q. Preset Off State Saved Yes This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range Off | On Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :INPut[1]:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :INPut[1]:IQ:BALanced[:STATe]? Notes For R&S FSQ-B71 compatibility, with no independent settings for the I and Q channels. Therefore, it is tied only to the I channel and does not provide an equivalent for the Q channel. For proper operation of the backwards compatibility command Q Same as I should be set to On. Preset OFF Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 I Input Z Selects the input impedance for the I channel. The impedance applies to both the I and I-bar ports. The input impedance controls the hardware signal path impedance match. It is not used for converting voltage to power. The voltage to power conversion always uses the Reference Z parameter. The Reference Z parameter applies to both I and Q channels. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup Remote Command :INPut[1]:IQ[:I]:IMPedance LOW|HIGH :INPut[1]:IQ[:I]:IMPedance? Example Set the I channel input impedance to 1 MΩ INP:IQ:IMP HIGH Notes LOW = 50 Ω, HIGH = 1 MΩ Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 629 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output When IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Input Z setting must be the same as the Q Input Z setting. If the settings of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Input Z. Couplings Input impedance is a built-in characteristic of a probe. Therefore, whenever a probe is sensed, this key is disabled and the value is set to match the probe. When no probe is sensed on Q and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q. Preset LOW State Saved Yes This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range 50 Ω | 1 MΩ Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 I Skew Sets the skew factor for the I channel. The skew will shift the channel's data in time. Use this to compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due to cabling. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ[:I]:SKEW <seconds> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ[:I]:SKEW? Example Delay the data for the I channel by 10 ns. CORR:IQ:SKEW 10 ns Preset 0 State Saved Yes This is unaffected by Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range 0 s to 100 ns Min 0s Max +100 ns Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 I Probe Access the probe setup parameters for the I channel. See "I/Q Probe Setup" on page 640. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup State Saved No Readback Text [<I port probe id>] This is reporting the type of probe sensed on the I port. There is no parameter for overriding what is 630 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output sensed. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Attenuation The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is initially the value that was returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value and any changes will be stored with the calibration data and will survive power cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the attenuation value will be overwritten by the calibration. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio <real> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio? Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT:RAT 100 Notes Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged. When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation setting within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Attenuation. Preset Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1. State Saved Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or Restore. Range 0.001 to 10000 Min 0.001 Max 10000 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation? Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB Range –60 dB to +80 dB Min –60 dB Max +80 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 631 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Calibrate Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context sensitive and depends on the channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The calibration is only performed on the selected channel. When Differential Input is on, both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe attached to the main port is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling Readback Text The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)". Last: <cal date> <cal time> Example: Last: 8/22/2007 1:02:49 PM Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Clear Calibration Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data for other probe types or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification, only the data for that specific probe is cleared. After this command has completed, the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe calibration had ever been performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response corrections will be used. This command is dependent on the Differential Input state. When Differential Input is on, both the data for the probe attached to the main port and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are cleared. When Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|Q:CLEar Example Clear the calibration data for the I channel and the current probe (with EEPROM identification) or probe type (without EEPROM identification). :CAL:IQ:PROBe:I:CLE Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only) This is Remote Command only (no front panel) and is for backwards compatibility only. It combines the Differential Input and Input Z selections into a single SCPI command. Remote Command :INPut:IMPedance:IQ U50|B50|U1M|B1M :INPut:IMPedance:IQ? Example :INPut:IMPedance:IQ U50 This is equivalent to the following two SCPI commands: 632 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output :INP:IQ:DIFF OFF :INP:IQ:IMP 50 Notes Provided for E4406A code compatibility. The enum values translate as follows: U50: Differential Input = Off, Input Z = 50Ω B50: Differential Input = On, Input Z = 50Ω U1M: Differential Input = Off, Input Z = 1 MΩ B1M: Differential Input = On, Input Z = 1 MΩ This command is for backwards compatibility. It combines the Input Z (50Ω or 1 MΩ) parameter with the Differential Input (Off = "Unbalanced", On = "Balanced") parameter into a single enumeration. This backwards compatibility SCPI command was for an instrument without independent settings for the I and Q channels. Therefore, it is tied only to the I channel and does not provide an equivalent for the Q channel. For proper operation of the backwards compatibility command Q Same as I should be set to On. Also, note the subtle difference between this SCPI command and the backwards compatibility command for Input Z. The Input Z SCPI has "IQ" before "IMP" while this command has that order reversed. Couplings This command does not have an independent parameter, but instead is tied to the Differential Input and Input Z parameters. The coupling for those parameters apply to this command too. Preset U50 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Setup Access the channel setup parameters for the Q channel. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q Readback Text When Q Same as I is On the readback is "Q Same as I". Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Same as I Many, but not all, usages require the I and Q channels have an identical setup. To simplify channel setup, the Q Same as I will cause the Q channel parameters to be mirrored from the I channel. That way you only need to set up one channel (the I channel). The I channel values are copied to the Q channel, so at the time Q Same as I is turned off the I and Q channel setups will be identical. This does not apply to Probe settings or to parameters that are determined by the probe. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup Remote Command :INPut:IQ:MIRRored OFF|ON|0|1 :INPut:IQ:MIRRored? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 633 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Example Turn off the mirroring of parameters from I to Q. INP:IQ:MIRR OFF Couplings Only displayed for the Q channel. When Yes, the I channel values for some parameters are mirrored (copied) to the Q channel. However, when a parameter is determined by the type of probe and a probe is sensed, the probe setting is always used and the I channel setting is ignored. The following parameters are mirrored: Differential Input (when not determined by probe) Input Z (when not determined by probe) Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value (Q Same as I set to "On") on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range On | Off Readback Text "Q Same as I" when On, otherwise none. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Differential Input Selects differential input on or off for the Q channel. For differential input (also called balanced input), the analyzer uses both the Q and Q-bar ports. When differential input is off (also called single-ended or unbalanced input), the analyzer uses only the Q port. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup Remote Command :INPut:IQ:Q:DIFFerential OFF|ON|0|1 :INPut:IQ:Q:DIFFerential? Example Put the Q channel in Differential Input mode INP:IQ:Q:DIFF ON Notes When Differential Input = On, the analyzer will check for attenuation mismatches between the Q and Q-bar ports. If the difference in attenuation values exceeds 0.5 dB a Settings Alert error condition, error 159 will be set. When Q Differential Input = On, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Differential input must also be On. Similarly, when Q Differential Input = Off, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Differential input must also be Off. If the states of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Differential. Couplings Some active probes include built-in differential capability. When one of these probes is sensed, this key is disabled. Since the differential capability is handled in the probe, the Analyzer will use only the main port and the key will show that the Analyzer's Differential Input mode is Off (indicating that the complementary port not in use). When a differential probe is not sensed and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will be copied to Q. This key is disabled when Q Same as I is On. Preset Off State Saved On This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" 634 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Range Off | On Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Input Z Selects the input impedance for the Q channel. The impedance applies to both the Q and Q-bar ports. The input impedance controls the hardware signal path impedance match. It is not used for converting voltage to power. The voltage to power conversion always uses the Reference Z parameter. The Reference Z parameter applies to both I and Q channels. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup Remote Command :INPut[1]:IQ:Q:IMPedance LOW|HIGH :INPut[1]:IQ:Q:IMPedance? Example Set the Q channel input impedance to 1 MΩ INP:IQ:Q:IMP HIGH Notes LOW = 50 Ω, HIGH = 1 MΩ When IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Input Z setting must be the same as the Q Input Z setting. If the settings of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Input Z. Couplings Input impedance is a built-in characteristic of a probe. Therefore, whenever a probe is sensed, this key is disabled and the value is set to match the probe. When no probe is sensed and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q. This key is disabled when Q Same as I is On. Preset LOW State Saved On This is unaffected by Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range 50 Ω | 1 MΩ Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Skew Sets the skew factor for the Q channel. The skew will shift the channel's data in time. Use this to compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due to cabling and probes. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:SKEW <seconds> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:SKEW? Example Delay the data for the Q channel by 10 ns. CORR:IQ:Q:SKEW 10 ns Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 635 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Preset 0 State Saved Yes This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range 0 s to 100 ns Min 0s Max +100 ns Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Probe Accesses the probe setup parameters for the Q channel. See "I/Q Probe Setup" on page 640. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup State Saved No Readback Text [<Q port probe id>] This is reporting the type of probe sensed on the Q port. There is no parameter for overriding what is sensed. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Attenuation The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is initially the value that was returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value and any changes will be stored with the calibration data and will survive power cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the attenuation value will be overwritten by the calibration. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio <real> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio? Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT:RAT 100 Notes Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged. When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation setting within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Attenuation. Preset Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1. State Saved Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or Restore. 636 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Range 0.001 to 10000 Min 0.001 Max 10000 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation? Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB Range –60 dB to +80 dB Min –60 dB Max +80 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Calibrate Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context sensitive and depends on the channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The calibration is only performed on the selected channel. When Differential Input is on, both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe attached to the main port is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling Readback Text The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)". Last: <cal date> <cal time> Example: Last: 8/22/2007 1:02:49 PM Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Next Perform the Q port calibration. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup, Q Probe, Calibrate Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q Example CAL:IQ:PROB:Q Notes The Q port must be connected to the Cal Out port before issuing the SCPI command. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 637 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles. It is not reset by any preset or restore data commands. State Saved No Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Clear Calibration Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data for other probe types or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification, only the data for that specific probe is cleared. After this command has completed, the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe calibration had ever been performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response corrections will be used. This command is dependent on the Differential Input state. When Differential Input is on, both the data for the probe attached to the main port and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are cleared. When Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|Q:CLEar Example Clear the calibration data for the I channel and the current probe (with EEPROM identification) or probe type (without EEPROM identification). :CAL:IQ:PROBe:I:CLE Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Reference Z Sets the value of the impedance to be used in converting voltage to power for the I and Q channels. This does not change the hardware's path impedance (see "I Input Z" on page 629 ). Key Path Input/Output, I/Q Remote Command :INPut:IMPedance:REFerence <integer> :INPut:IMPedance:REFerence? Example Set the I/Q reference impedance to 50 Ω INP:IMP:REF 50 Preset 50 Ω State Saved Yes This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range 1 Ω to 1 MΩ Min 1Ω Max 1 MΩ Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 638 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output I/Q Cable Calibrate… The I/Q cable calibration creates correction data for each of the front panel I/Q ports. This calibration data is used whenever no probe specific calibration data is available. It is important that all ports are calibrated using the same short BNC cable so that the data is comparable from port to port. The guided calibration (front panel only) will show connection diagrams and guide you through the isolation calibration and calibrating each port. The calibration data for each port is stored separately, so as soon as a port is calibrated that data is saved and will be used. If you press "Exit" to exit the calibration process, the data for the ports already completed will still be used. It is recommended that a calibration be completed once started, or if exited, that it be properly done before the next use of the I/Q ports. The "Next" button will perform the calibration for the current port and then proceed to the next step in the calibration procedure. The "Back" button will return to the prior port in the procedure. Both keys and dialog buttons are supplied for ease of use. The dialog buttons are for mouse use and the softkeys for front panel use. The calibration can also be done via SCPI, but no connection diagrams will be shown. You will have to make the correct connections before issuing each port calibration command. Again, it is recommended that all ports be calibrated at the same time. The instrument state remains as it was prior to entering the calibration procedure except while a port is actually being calibrated. Once a port is calibrated it returns to the prior state. A port calibration is in process only from the time the "Next" button is pressed until the next screen is shown. For SCPI, this corresponds to the time from issuing the CAL:IQ:FLAT:I|IB|Q|QB command until the operation is complete. For example, if the prior instrument state is Cal Out = Off, Input = I+jQ, and Differential = Off, then up until the time the "Next" button is pressed the I Input and Q Input LEDs are on and the Cal Out, I-bar Input and Q-bar Input LEDs are off. Once the "Next" button is pressed for the I port calibration, only the Cal Out and I Input LEDs will be on and the others will be off. When the screen progresses to the next step ("Next" button again enabled), the prior state is restored and only the I Input and Q Input LEDs are on (Cal Out is off again). The last calibration date and time for each port will be displayed. Any calibrations that are more than a day older than the most recent calibration will be displayed with the color amber. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Next Perform the I/Q Isolation calibration. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibration Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:ISOLation Example CAL:IQ:ISOL Notes All front panel I/Q ports must not be connected to anything. Notes All cables and probes should be disconnected from the I/Q ports before issuing the SCPI command. State Saved No. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 639 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Exit Exits the calibration procedure. All ports calibrated before pressing Exit will use the newly acquired calibration data. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibration Notes Using the Exit button does not restore the calibration data to the state prior to entering the guided calibration. Once a port is calibrated the data is stored immediately and the only way to change it is to redo the calibration step. When the calibration may be left in an inconsistent state, a confirmation dialog is displayed (see "Exit Confirmation" on page 640 ). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Exit Confirmation When Exit is pressed during one of the calibration routines, the calibration may be in an inconsistent state, with some of the ports having newly measured calibration data and others with old data. If this is the case, a dialog box appears, to confirm that you really want to exit. l l A "Yes" answer exits the calibration procedure, leaving potentially inconsistent calibration data in place. A "No" answer returns you to the calibration procedure. I/Q Probe Setup The set of I/Q probe setup parameters will change based on the type of probe that is sensed. All probe types have the Attenuation parameter, and all probe types can be calibrated. The remaining parameters are only available for some probe types and will not be shown when not available. The probe type is determined by and reported for only for the I and Q ports, never the I-bar or Q-bar ports. The menu title will be "<ch>: <probe id>", where "<ch>" is either "I" or "Q" and "<probe id>" is the type of probe. For example, for the I Probe setup with a Keysight 1130A probe connected to the I port, the title will be "I: 1130A". Probe calibration data is stored for each probe type for each channel. When no probe is sensed, the probe type "Unknown" is used, and this is also treated like a probe type with its own calibration data. When a probe is changed, the calibration data for that probe type for that port is restored. An advisory message will be displayed showing the new probe type and the calibration status. The calibration data is stored permanently (survives a power cycle) and is not affected by a Preset or any of the Restore commands. When the probe has EEPROM identification (most newer Keysight probes have this), the calibration data is stored by probe serial number and port, so if you have two probes of the same type, the correct calibration data will be used for each. For probes that do not have EEPROM identification, the calibration data is stored by probe type and port and the instrument cannot distinguish between different probes of the same type. In all cases (with or without EEPROM identification), the calibration data is port specific, so it will not follow a specific probe from port to port if the probe is moved. The "Unknown" probe type is used whenever no probe is sensed. When no calibration data exists for "Unknown" the latest cable calibration data is used (see Section "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688). 640 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Attenuation The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is initially the value that was returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value and any changes will be stored with the calibration data and will survive power cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the attenuation value will be overwritten by the calibration. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio <real> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio? Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT:RAT 100 Notes Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged. When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation setting within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q mismatch:Attenuation. Preset Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1. State Saved Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or Restore. Range 0.001 to 10000 Min 0.001 Max 10000 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation? Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB Range –60 dB to +80 dB Min –60 dB Max +80 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Offset Some active probes have DC offset capability. When one of these probes is connected this control will be visible. The signal is adjusted for the DC offset before entering the analyzer's port. This allows for removal of a DC offset before reaching the analyzer's input port voltage limits. For example, a signal that varies 1 V peak-to-peak with a DC offset equal to the analyzer's max input voltage would exceed the input limits of Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 641 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output the analyzer for half its cycle. Removing the DC offset allows the analyzer to correctly process the entire signal. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command :INPut:OFFSet:I|Q <voltage> :INPut:OFFSet:I|Q? Example Remove a DC offset of –0.5 V from the I channel input. INP:OFFS:I –0.5 Notes Only some probe types support Offset. For those that do, each probe type has its own Offset setting. As probes are changed the Offset value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the Offset affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged. Preset 0V State Saved Saved with probe calibration data. It survives power cycle and is not affected by Preset or Restore. Range –18 V to +18 V Min –18 V Max +18 V Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Coupling Some probe types allow coupling to reject low frequencies. This will filter out the DC component of a signal that is composed of a DC bias plus some AC signal. This control is visible only for probe types that have this capability. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command :INPut:COUPling:I|Q DC|LFR1|LFR2 :INPut:COUPling:I|Q? Example Set the probe to low frequency rejection below 1.7 Hz. INP:COUP:I LFR1 Notes Only some probe types support Coupling. For those that do, each probe type has its own Coupling setting. As probes are changed the Coupling value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the Coupling affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged. Preset DC State Saved Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or Restore. Range DC | AC 1.7 Hz LFR1 | AC 0.14 Hz LFR2 Readback Text DC | LFR1 | LFR2 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 DC Turns off low frequency rejection, allowing signals down to DC. 642 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling Example Turn off low frequency rejection on the I channel INP:COUP:I DC Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 LFR1 Turns on low frequency rejection, rejecting signal component lower than 1.7 Hz. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling Example Turn on low frequency rejection on the I channel for frequencies lower than 1.7 Hz INP:COUP:I LFR1 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 LFR2 Turns on low frequency rejection, rejecting signal component lower than 0.14 Hz. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling Example Turn on low frequency rejection on the I channel for frequencies lower than 0.14 Hz INP:COUP:I LFR2 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Calibrate Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context sensitive and depends on the channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The calibration is only performed on the selected channel. When Differential Input is on, both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe attached to the main port is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling Readback Text The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)". Last: <cal date> <cal time> Example: Last: 8/22/2007 1:02:49 PM Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 643 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Clear Calibration Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data for other probe types or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification, only the data for that specific probe is cleared. After this command has completed, the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe calibration had ever been performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response corrections will be used. This command is dependent on the Differential Input state. When Differential Input is on, both the data for the probe attached to the main port and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are cleared. When Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|Q:CLEar Example Clear the calibration data for the I channel and the current probe (with EEPROM identification) or probe type (without EEPROM identification). :CAL:IQ:PROBe:I:CLE Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only) Returns the last date and time that the I/Q Cable Calibration was performed for a specific port. This is a remote query command only. Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:I|IBAR|Q|QBAR:TIME? Example :CAL:IQ:FLAT:I:TIME? Notes This returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been performed, all values will be 0. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only) Return the last date and time that the I/Q Probe Calibration was performed for a specific port. This is a remote query command only. Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|IBAR|Q|QBAR:TIME? Example :CAL:IQ:PROB:I:TIME? Notes This returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been performed, all values are 0. The value is specific to both the port and probe, so the value will change as probes are connected or disconnected. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 RF Calibrator Lets you choose a calibrator signal to look at or turns the calibrator "off". 644 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output Remote Command [:SENSe]:FEED:AREFerence REF50|REF4800|OFF [:SENSe]:FEED:AREFerence? Example FEED:AREF REF50 selects the 50 MHz amplitude reference as the signal input. FEED:AREF REF4800 selects the 4.8 GHz amplitude reference as the signal input FEED:AREF OFF turns the calibrator "off" (switches back to the selected input – RF or I/Q) Dependencies Selecting an input (RF or I/Q) turns the Calibrator OFF. This is true whether the input is selected by the keys or with the [:SENSe]:FEED command. The 4.8 GHz internal reference is only available in some models and frequency range options. If the 4.8 GHz reference is not present, the 4.8 GHz softkey will be blanked, and if the REF4800 parameter is sent, the analyzer will generate an error. Couplings When one of the calibrator signals is selected, the analyzer routes that signal (an internal amplitude reference) to the analyzer, and changes the main input selection to RF so the calibrator signal can be seen. When you turn the calibrator off it does not switch back to the previously selected input. Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Off, 50 MHz, 4.8 GHz Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :CALibration:SOURce:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 :CALibration:SOURce:STATe? Notes For ESA backwards compatibility. In the ESA the calibrator was a separate output which you connected to the input and switched on with this command. In the X-Series, the ON parameter is aliased to the [SENSe]:FEED:AREF REF50 command and the OFF parameter is aliased to [SENSe]:FEED:AREF OFF. When CALibration:SOURce:STATe? is received, 1 will be returned if any of the references is selected and 0 if the Calibrator is "Off" Preset OFF Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 50 MHz Selects the 50 MHz internal reference as the input signal. Key Path Input/Output, RF Calibrator Example :FEED:AREF REF50 Readback 50 MHz Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 645 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output 4.8 GHz Selects the 4.8 GHz internal reference as the input signal. Key Path Input/Output, RF Calibrator Example :FEED:AREF REF4800 Dependencies The 4.8 GHz internal reference is only available in some models and frequency range options. If the 4.8 GHz reference is not present, the 4.8 GHz softkey will be blanked, and if the REF4800 parameter is sent, the analyzer will generate an error. Readback 4.8 GHz Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Off Switches the input back to the selected input (RF or I/Q) Key Path Input/Output, RF Calibrator Example :FEED:AREF OFF Readback Off Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 External Gain Compensates for gain or loss in the measurement system outside the spectrum analyzer. The External Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout (or the loss is added to the amplitude readout). So, the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the output of the device-under-test, which can be the input of an external device that provides gain or loss. Entering an External Gain value does not affect the Reference Level, therefore the trace position on screen changes, as do all of the values represented by the trace data. Thus, the values of exported trace data, queried trace data, marker amplitudes, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points, trace math, peak threshold, etc., are all affected by External Gain. Changing the External Gain, even on a trace that is not updating, will immediately change all of the above, without new data needing to be taken. Changing the External Gain causes the analyzer to immediately stop the current sweep and prepare to begin a new sweep. The data will not change until the trace data updates because the offset is applied to the data as it is taken. If a trace is exported with a nonzero External Gain, the exported data will contain the trace data with the offset applied. In the Spectrum Analyzer mode, a Preamp is the common external device providing gain or loss. In a measurement application mode like GSM or W-CDMA, the gain or loss could be from a BTS (Base Transceiver Station) or an MS (Mobile Station). So in the Spectrum Analyzer mode MS and BTS would be grayed out and the only choice would be Ext Preamp. Similarly in some of the digital communications applications, Ext Preamp will be grayed out and you would have a choice of MS or BTS. 646 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output Couplings The Ext Preamp, MS, and BS keys may be grayed out depending on which measurement is currently selected. If any of the grayed out keys are pressed, or the equivalent SCPI command is sent, an advisory message is generated. Readback 1-of-N selection | [variable] Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Ext Preamp This function is similar to the reference level offset function. Both affect the displayed signal level. Ref Lvl Offset is a mathematical offset only, no analyzer configuration is affected. Ext Preamp gain is used when determining the auto-coupled value of the Attenuator. The External Gain value and the Maximum Mixer Level settings are both part of the automatic setting equation for the RF attenuation setting. (10 dB of Attenuation is added for every 10 dB of External Gain.) Note that the Ref Lvl Offset and Maximum Mixer Level are described in the Amplitude section. They are reset by the instrument Preset. The External Preamp Gain is reset by the "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All functions. . The External Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the output of the device-under-test, which is the input of the external device that is providing gain or loss. Key Path Input/Output, External Gain Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:SA[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:SA[:RF]:GAIN? Example CORR:SA:GAIN 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB CORR:SA:GAIN –10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB (that is, an attenuation of 10 dB) Notes Does not auto return. Dependencies The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain/Atten, Max Mixer Level, and RF Atten. This key is grayed out in Modes that do not support External Gain Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state Min –120 dB Max 120 dB Readback Preamp Gain, <Ext Gain value> dB Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude] Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 The legacy "Ext Preamp Gain" key is now called "Ext Gain" and the sub-menu has choices of Ext Preamp | MS | BTS for backwards compatibility. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 647 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output MS Sets an external gain/attenuation value for MS (Mobile Station) tests. Key Path Input/Output, External Gain Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:GAIN? Example CORR:MS:GAIN 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB CORR:MS:GAIN –10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.) Notes Does not auto return. Dependencies The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain, Max Mixer Level, RF Atten This key is grayed out in modes that do not support MS. Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min –100 dB Max 100 dB Readback MS, <Ext Gain value> dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:LOSS <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:LOSS? Example CORR:MS:LOSS 10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give 10 dB CORR:MS:LOSS –10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give –10 dB Notes A positive value of <rel_ampl> in the above command means a loss and a negative value indicates a gain. Anytime :LOSS is set it sets :GAIN to the negative value of the parameter sent. Anytime :LOSS is queried it gives the negative of :GAIN Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Min 100 dB Max –100 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 648 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output BTS Sets an external attenuation value for BTS (Base Transceiver Station) tests. Key Path Input/Output, External Gain Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN? Example CORR:BTS:GAIN 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB CORR:BTS:GAIN –10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.) Notes Does not auto return. Dependencies The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain, Max Mixer Level, RF Atten This key is grayed out in modes that do not support BTS. Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min –100 dB Max 100 dB Readback BTS, <Ext Gain value> dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:LOSS <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:LOSS? Example CORR:BTS:LOSS 10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give 10 dB CORR:BTS:LOSS –10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give – 10 dB Notes A positive value of <rel_ampl> in the above command means a loss and a negative value indicates a gain. Anytime :LOSS is set it sets :GAIN to the negative value of the parameter sent. Anytime :LOSS is queried it gives the negative of :GAIN Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Min 100 dB Max –100 dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 649 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output I Ext Gain This function affects only the I channel input, except when the Input Path is I+jQ. In I+jQ this setting is applied to both I and Q channel inputs. It is not available unless the Baseband I/Q option (BBA) is installed. Key Path Input/Output, External Gain Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:GAIN <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:GAIN? Example Set the I Ext Gain to 10 dB CORR:IQ:I:GAIN 10 Set the I Ext Gain to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.) CORR:IQ:I:GAIN –10 Notes Not available unless option BBA is installed Preset 0 dB This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min –100 dB Max 100 dB Readback Text I Gain, <I Ext Gain> dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Ext Gain This function affects only the Q channel input and only when the Input Path is not I+jQ. It is not available unless the Baseband I/Q option (BBA) is installed. Key Path Input/Output, External Gain Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN? Example Set the Q Ext Gain to 10 dB CORR:IQ:Q:GAIN 10 Set the Q Ext Gain to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.) CORR:IQ:Q:GAIN –10 Notes Not available unless option BBA is installed. Preset 0 dB This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min –100 dB Max 100 dB 650 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Readback Text Q Gain, <I Ext Gain> dB Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Restore Input/Output Defaults This selection causes the group of settings and data associated with the Input/Output key to be a reset to their default values. In addition, when a Source is installed, licensed and selected, Restore Input/Output defaults will initiate a Source Preset. This level of Restore System Defaults does not affect any other system settings or mode settings and does not cause a mode switch. All the features described in this section are reset using this key, including Input Corrections and Data (described in the Corrections section). Key Path Input/Output Example :SYST:DEF INP presets all the Input/Output variables to their factory default values. Notes Refer to the Utility Functions for information about Restore System Defaults and the complete description of the :SYSTem:DEFault INPut: command. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Corrections This key accesses the Amplitude Corrections menu. Amplitude Corrections arrays can be entered, sent over SCPI, or loaded from a file. They allow you to correct the response of the analyzer for various use cases. The X-series supports four separate Corrections arrays, each of which can contain up to 2000 points. They can be turned on and off individually and any or all can be on at the same time. Trace data is in absolute units and corrections data is in relative units, but we want to be able to display trace data at the same time as corrections data. Therefore we establish a reference line to be used while building or editing a Corrections table. The reference line is halfway up the display and represents 0 dB of correction. It is labeled “0 dB CORREC”. It is drawn in blue. Corrections data is always in dB. Whatever dB value appears in the correction table represents the correction to be applied to that trace at that frequency. So if a table entry shows 30 dB that means we ADD 30 dB to each trace to correct it before displaying it. In zero span, where the frequency is always the center frequency of the analyzer, we apply the (interpolated) correction for the center frequency to all points in the trace. In the event where there are two correction amplitudes at the center frequency, we apply the first one in the table. Note that the corrections are applied as the data is taken; therefore, a trace in View (Update Off) will not be affected by changes made to the corrections table after the trace is put in View. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 651 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA, DVB-T/H, DTMB, SEQAN, TDSCDMA Dependencies This key will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument. Amplitude correction may not be available in all modes; if a mode does not support amplitude correction, the Corrections key should be blanked while in that mode. If an application supports corrections but the current measurement does not, then the key should be grayed out in that measurement Preset Corrections arrays are reset (deleted) by Restore Input/Output Defaults. They survive shutdown and restarting of the analyzer application, which means they will survive a power cycle. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. 652 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 653 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Correction On/Off Turning the Selected Correction on allows the values in it to be applied to the data. This also automatically turns on "Apply Corrections" (sets it to ON), otherwise the correction would not take effect. A new sweep is initiated if an amplitude correction is switched on or off. Note that changing, sending or loading corrections data does NOT directly initiate a sweep, however in general these operations will turn corrections on, which DOES initiate a sweep. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6[:STATe]? Example SENS:CORR:CSET1 ON Dependencies Turning this on automatically turns on "Apply Corrections" Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units. When this array is turned on, and it contains an Antenna Unit other than “None”, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced to that Antenna Unit. All other Y Axis Unit choices are grayed out. Note that this means that a correction file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the Corrections 1 register. Consequently only for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall dialog include.ant, and if an attempt is made to load a correction file into any other Correction register which DOES contain an antenna unit, a Mass Storage error is generated. This command will generate an “Option not available” error unless you have the proper option installed in your instrument. Preset Not affected by a Preset. Set to OFF by Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state. Backwards Compatibility Unlike legacy analyzers, Preset does not turn Corrections off (Restore Input/Output Defaults does). 654 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Notes Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Properties Accesses a menu that lets you set the properties of the selected correction. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 655 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults 656 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Mode SA Notes The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu. Preset Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults Readback Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Antenna Unit For devices (like antennas) that make measurements of field strength or flux density, the correction array should contain within its values the appropriate conversion factors such that, when the data on the analyzer is presented in dBµV, the display is calibrated in the appropriate units. The "Antenna Unit" used for the conversion is contained within the corrections array database. It may be specifiedor loaded in from an external file or SCPI. When an array with an Antenna Unit other than "None" is turned on, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced to that unit. When this array is turned on, and it contains an Antenna Unit other than “None”, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced to that Antenna Unit., and all other Y Axis Unit choices are grayed out. Antenna Unit does not appear in all Modes that support Corrections. Only the modes listed in the Mode row of the table below support Antenna Units. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties Mode SA Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]:ANTenna[:UNIT] GAUSs | PTESla | UVM | UAM | UA | NOConversion [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]:ANTenna[:UNIT]? Example CORR:CSET:ANT GAUS Dependencies Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units. Note that this means that a correction file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the Corrections 1 register. Consequently only for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall dialog include.ant, and if an attempt is made to load a correction file into any other Correction register which DOES contain an antenna unit, a Mass Storage error is generated. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 657 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Preset Unaffected by Preset. Set to NOC by Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 None Selects no antenna unit for this Correction set. Thus no Y Axis unit will be forced. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT NOC Readback "None" Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµV/m Sets the antenna unit to dBµV/m. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBµV/m and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT UVM Readback "dBµV/m" Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA/m Sets the antenna unit to dBµA/m. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBµA/m and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT UVA Readback " dBµA/m" Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBpT Sets the antenna unit to dBpT. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBpT and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT PTES 658 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Readback "dBpT" Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBG Sets the antenna unit to dBG. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBG and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT GAUS Readback " dBG" Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA Sets the antenna unit to dBµA. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBµA and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT UA Readback " dBµA" Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Frequency Interpolation This setting controls how the correction values per-bucket are calculated. We interpolate between frequencies in either the logarithmic or linear scale. This setting is handled and stored individually per correction set. See "Interpolation" on page 660 Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:X:SPACing? Example CORR:CSET:X:SPAC LIN Preset Unaffected by a Preset. Set to Linear by Restore Input/Output Defaults. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 659 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Interpolation For each bucket processed by the application, all of the correction factors at the frequency of interest (center frequency of each bucket) are summed and added to the amplitude. All trace operations and post processing treat this post-summation value as the true signal to use. To effect this correction, the goal, for any particular start and stop frequency, is to build a correction trace, whose number of points matches the current Sweep Points setting of the instrument, which will be used to apply corrections on a bucket by bucket basis to the data traces. For amplitudes that lie between two user specified frequency points, we interpolate to determine the amplitude value. You may select either linear or logarithmic interpolation between the frequencies. If we interpolate on a log scale, we assume that the line between the two points is a straight line on the log scale. For example, let’s say the two points are (2,4) and (20,1). A straight line between them on a log scale looks like: On a linear scale (like that of the spectrum analyzer), this translates to: 660 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output If we interpolate on a linear scale, we assume that the two points are connected by a straight line on the linear scale, as below: The correction to be used for each bucket is taken from the interpolated correction curve at the center of the bucket. Description Sets an ASCII description field which will be stored in an exported file. Can be displayed in the active function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to appear in a screen capture. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DESCription "text" [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DESCription? Example :CORR:CSET1:DESC "11941A Antenna correction" Notes 45 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used Preset Unaffected by a Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Comment Sets an ASCII comment field which will be stored in an exported file. Can be displayed in the active function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to appear in a screen capture. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:COMMent "text" [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:COMMent? Example :CORR:CSET1:COMM "this is a comment" Notes 60 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used Preset Unaffected by Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 661 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Edit Invokes the integrated editing facility for this correction set. When entering the menu, the editor window turns on, the selected correction is turned On, Apply Corrections is set to On, the amplitude scale is set to Log, and the Amplitude Correction (“Ampcor”) trace is displayed. The actual, interpolated correction trace is shown in green for the selected correction. Note that since the actual interpolated correction is shown, the correction trace may have some curvature to it. This trace represents only the correction currently being edited, rather than the total, accumulated amplitude correction for all amplitude corrections which are currently on, although the total, accumulated correction for all corrections which are turned on is still applied to the data traces. Because corrections data is always in dB, but the Y-axis of the analyzer is in absolute units, it is necessary to establish a reference line for display of the Corrections data. The reference line is halfway up the display and represents 0 dB of correction. It is labeled “0 dB CORREC”. It is drawn in blue. Corrections data is always in dB. Whatever dB value appears in the correction table represents the correction to be applied to that trace at that frequency. So if a table entry shows 30 dB that means we ADD 30 dB to each trace to correct it before displaying it. By definition all points are connected. If a gap is desired for corrections data, enter 0 dB. Note that a well-designed Corrections array should start at 0 dB and end at 0 dB. This is because whatever the high end point is will be extended to the top frequency of the instrument, and whatever the low end point is will be extended down to 0 Hz. So for a Corrections array to have no effect outside its range, you should start and end the array at 0 dB. The table editor will only operate properly if the analyzer is sweeping, because its updates are tied to the sweep system. Thus, you should not try to use the editor in single sweep, and it will be sluggish during compute-intensive operations like narrow-span FFT sweeps. When exiting the edit menu (by using the Return key or by pressing an instrument front-panel key), the editor window turns off and the Ampcor trace is no longer displayed; however, Apply Corrections remains On, any correction that was on while in the editor remains on, and the amplitude scale returns to its previous setting. Corrections arrays are not affected by a Preset, because they are in the Input/Output system. They also survive shutdown and restarting of the analyzer application, which means they will survive a power cycle. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 662 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Delete Correction Deletes the correction values for this set. When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete correction. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DELete Example CORR:CSET:DEL CORR:CSET1:DEL CORR:CSET4:DEL Notes Pressing this key when no corrections are present is accepted without error. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Apply Corrections Applies amplitude corrections, which are marked as ON to the measured data. If this is set to OFF, then no amplitude correction sets will be used, regardless of their individual on/off settings. If set to ON, the corrections that are marked as ON (see "Correction On/Off" on page 654) are used. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe]? Example SENS:CORR:CSET:ALL OFF This command makes sure that no amplitude corrections are applied, regardless of their individual on/off settings. Preset Not affected by Preset. Set to OFF by Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Delete All Corrections Erases all correction values for all 4 Amplitude Correction sets. When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete all corrections. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete Example CORR:CSET:ALL:DEL Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 663 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Merge Correction Data (Remote Command Only) The command takes an ASCII series of alternating frequency and amplitude points, each value separated by commas. The difference between this command and Set Data is that this merges new correction points into an existing set. Any new point with the same frequency as an existing correction point will replace the existing point’s amplitude with that of the new point. An Ampcor array can contain a maximum of 2000 points. Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DATA:MERGe <freq>, <ampl>, ... Example CORR:CSET1:DATA:MERGE 15000000, –5.0, 25000000, 5.0 This adds two correction points at (15 MHz, –5.0 dB) and (25 MHz, 5.0 dB) to whatever values already exist in correction set 1. Preset Empty after Restore Input/Output Defaults. Survives shutdown/restart of analyzer application (including power cycle) Min Freq: 0 Hz Amptd: –1000 dBm Max Freq: 1 THz Amptd: +1000 dBm Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only) The command takes an ASCII series of alternating frequency and amplitude points, each value separated by commas. The values sent in the command will totally replace all existing correction points in the specified set. An Ampcor array can contain a maximum of 2000 points. Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DATA <freq>, <ampl>, . . . [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DATA? Example CORR:CSET1:DATA 10000000, –1.0, 20000000, 1.0 This defines two correction points at (10 MHz, –1.0 dB) and (20 MHz, 1.0 dB) for correction set 1. Preset Empty after Restore Input/Output Defaults. Survives a shutdown or restart of analyzer application (including a power cycle). State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min Freq: 0 Hz Amptd: –1000 dBm Max Freq: 1 THz Amptd: +1000 dBm Initial S/W Revision 664 A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Freq Ref In Specifies the frequency reference as being the internal reference, external reference or sensing the presence of an external reference. When the frequency reference is set to internal, the internal 10 MHz reference is used even if an external reference is connected. When the frequency reference is set to external, the instrument will use the external reference. However, if there is no external signal present, or it is not within the proper amplitude range, a condition error message is generated. When the external signal becomes valid, the error is cleared. If Sense is selected, the instrument checks whether a signal is present at the external reference connector and will automatically switch to the external reference when a signal is detected. When no signal is present, it automatically switches to the internal reference. No message is generated as the reference switches between external and internal. The monitoring of the external reference occurs approximately on 1 millisecond intervals, and never occurs in the middle of a measurement acquisition, only at the end of the measurement (end of the request). If for any reason the instrument’s frequency reference is not able to obtain lock, Status bit 2 in the Questionable Frequency register will be true and a condition error message is generated. When lock is regained, Status bit 2 in the Questionable Frequency register will be cleared and the condition error will be cleared. If an external frequency reference is being used, you must enter the frequency of the external reference if it is not exactly 10 MHz. The External Ref Freq key is provided for this purpose. Key Path Input/Output Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE INTernal|EXTernal|SENSe [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE? Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to SENSe on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All". State Saved Saved in instrument state. Status Bits/OPC dependencies STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency bit 2 set if unlocked. Backwards Compatibility Notes Freq Ref In was not saved in state in the legacy instruments. It is a part of state in the X-Series. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce? Notes The query [SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce? returns the current switch setting. This means: 1. If it was set to SENSe but there is no external reference so the instrument is actually using the internal reference, then this query returns INTernal and not SENSe. 2. If it was set to SENSe and there is an external reference present, the query returns EXTernal and not SENSe. 3. If it was set to EXTernal, then the query returns "EXTernal" 4. If it was set to INTernal, then the query returns “INTernal” Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 665 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Preset SENSe Backwards Compatibility Notes The query [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce? was a query-only command in ESA which always returned whichever reference the instrument was using. The instrument automatically switched to the ext ref if it was present. In PSA (which had no sensing) the command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce set the reference (INT or EXT), so again its query returned the actual routing. Thus the query form of this command is 100% backwards compatible with both instruments. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal Notes For PSA compatibility the command form is provided and is directly mapped to [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Sense The external reference is used if a valid signal is sensed at the Ext Ref input. Otherwise the internal reference is used. Key Path Input/Output, Freq Ref In Example :ROSC:SOUR:TYPE SENS Readback Sense Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Internal The internal reference is used. Key Path Input/Output, Freq Ref In Example :ROSC:SOUR:TYPE INT Readback Internal Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 External The external reference is used. Key Path 666 Input/Output, Freq Ref In Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Example :ROSC:SOUR:TYPE EXT Readback External Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Ext Ref Freq This key tells the analyzer the frequency of the external reference. When the external reference is in use (either because the reference has been switched to External or because the Reference has been switched to Sense and there is a valid external reference present) this information is used by the analyzer to determine the internal settings needed to lock to that particular external reference signal. For the instrument to stay locked, the value entered must be within 5 ppm of the actual external reference frequency. So it is important to get it close, or you risk an unlock condition. Note that this value only affects the instrument’s ability to lock. It does not affect any calculations or measurement results. See "Freq Offset" in the Frequency section for information on how to offset frequency values. Key Path Input/Output, Freq Ref In Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <freq> [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency? Example ROSC:EXT:FREQ 20 MHz sets the external reference frequency to 20 MHz, but does not select the external reference. ROSC:SOUR:TYPE EXT selects the external reference. Notes Still available with Internal selected, to allow setup for when External is in use. Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 10 MHz on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Min CXA: 10 MHz EXA: 10 MHz or 13 MHz, depending on whether N9010A-R13 is licensed MXA: 1 MHz PXA: 1 MHz Max CXA: 10 MHz EXA: 10 MHz MXA: 50 MHz PXA: 50 MHz Default Unit Hz Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 667 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output External Reference Lock BW This control lets you adjust the External Reference phase lock bandwidth. This control is available in some models of the X-Series. The PXA variable reference loop bandwidth allows an external reference to be used and have the analyzer close-in phase noise improved to match that of the reference. This could result in an improvement of tens of decibels. The choice of “Wide” or “Narrow” affects the phase noise at low offset frequencies, especially 4 to 400 Hz offset. When using an external reference with superior phase noise, we recommend setting the external reference phase-locked-loop bandwidth to wide (60 Hz), to take advantage of that superior performance. When using an external reference with inferior phase noise performance, we recommend setting that bandwidth to narrow (15 Hz). In these relationships, inferior and superior phase noise are with respect to −134 dBc/Hz at 30 Hz offset from a 10 MHz reference. Because most reference sources have phase noise behavior that falls off at a rate of 30 dB/decade, this is usually equivalent to −120 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz offset. Key Path Input/Output, Freq Ref In Scope Mode Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth WIDE|NARRow [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth? Example ROSC:BAND WIDE Dependencies This key only appears in analyzers equipped with the required hardware. Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to Narrow on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults -> All" State Saved Saved in Input/Output state. Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 External Ref Coupling Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed. This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the External Reference. If Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of the state of the External Reference. When you select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when either the "521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error message is asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is External. With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs in the middle of a sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ? or MEASure? query; that is, these queries will not complete because the analyzer will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be generated to a *WAI? or *OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the acquisition stops during the requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for predictable operation of this function, it is best to operate the analyzer in single measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous 668 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output mode, the analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with data left over from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF :INIT:IMM;*OPC? -:INIT:CONT OFF :INIT:IMM;*WAI? -:INIT:CONT OFF :READ? -:INIT:CONT OFF :MEASure? When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a popup error message will be generated informing you that the acquisition has ceased due to an invalid external reference. This message will stay on the screen while the acquisition is suspended. If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new acquisition will be attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the message will re-appear. You can also remove the message by changing back to the Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In, Internal, or Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults. The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not reset with a Preset. It is reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart normal data acquisition. The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the external reference becomes invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error condition will be detected or reported and therefore the acquisition will not be stopped. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 669 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Freq Ref In Mode All Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling NORMal|NACQuisition [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling? Preset This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore Input/Output defaults. State Saved Not saved in instrument state Readback Normal|Stop Acq Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 External Ref Coupling Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed. This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the External Reference. If Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of the state of the External Reference. When you select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when either the "521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error message is asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is External. With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs in the middle of a sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ? or MEASure? query; that is, these queries will not complete because the analyzer will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be generated to a *WAI? or *OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the acquisition stops during the requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for predictable operation of this function, it is best to operate the analyzer in single measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous mode, the analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with data left over from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF :INIT:IMM;*OPC? -:INIT:CONT OFF :INIT:IMM;*WAI? -:INIT:CONT OFF :READ? -:INIT:CONT OFF 670 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output :MEASure? When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a popup error message will be generated informing you that the acquisition has ceased due to an invalid external reference. This message will stay on the screen while the acquisition is suspended. If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new acquisition will be attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the message will re-appear. You can also remove the message by changing back to the Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In, Internal, or Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults. The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not reset with a Preset. It is reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart normal data acquisition. The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the external reference becomes invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error condition will be detected or reported and therefore the acquisition will not be stopped. Key Path Input/Output, Freq Ref In Mode All Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling NORMal|NACQuisition [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling? Preset This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore Input/Output defaults. State Saved Not saved in instrument state Readback Normal|Stop Acq Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 External Ref Coupling Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 671 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the External Reference. If Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of the state of the External Reference. When you select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when either the "521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error message is asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is External. With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs in the middle of a sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ? or MEASure? query; that is, these queries will not complete because the analyzer will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be generated to a *WAI? or *OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the acquisition stops during the requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for predictable operation of this function, it is best to operate the analyzer in single measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous mode, the analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with data left over from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF :INIT:IMM;*OPC? -:INIT:CONT OFF :INIT:IMM;*WAI? -:INIT:CONT OFF :READ? -:INIT:CONT OFF :MEASure? When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a popup error message will be generated informing you that the acquisition has ceased due to an invalid external reference. This message will stay on the screen while the acquisition is suspended. 672 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new acquisition will be attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the message will re-appear. You can also remove the message by changing back to the Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In, Internal, or Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults. The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not reset with a Preset. It is reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart normal data acquisition. The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the external reference becomes invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error condition will be detected or reported and therefore the acquisition will not be stopped. Key Path Input/Output, Freq Ref In Mode All Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling NORMal|NACQuisition [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling? Preset This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore Input/Output defaults. State Saved Not saved in instrument state Readback Normal|Stop Acq Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Output Config Accesses keys that configure various output settings, like the frequency reference output, trigger output and analog output. Key Path Input/Output Backwards Compatibility Notes In ESA there was not a user interface to enable the Video Output (Analog Output), Trigger Output, or Gate Output. In the X-Series each of these physical connectors requires configuration, thus the user interface has been added for X-Series, along with the potential for an output you think is always on to be switched off. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Trig Out (1 and 2) Select the type of output signal that will be output from the rear-panel Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connectors. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config Remote Command :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut HSWP | MEASuring | MAIN | GATE | GTRigger | OEVen | SPOint | SSWeep | SSETtled | S1Marker | S2Marker | S3Marker | S4Marker | OFF :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 673 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Example TRIG:OUTP HSWP TRIG2:OUTP GATE Dependencies The second Trigger output (Trig 2 Out) does not appear in all models; in models that do not support it, the Trig 2 Out key is blanked, and sending the SCPI command for this output generates an error, “Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” In models that do not support the Trigger 2 output, this error is returned if trying to set Trig 2 Out and a query of Trig 2 Out returns OFF. Preset Trigger 1: Sweeping (HSWP) Trigger 2: Gate This is unaffected by a Preset but is preset to the above values on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Polarity Sets the output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector to trigger on either the positive or negative polarity. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Remote Command :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity POSitive | NEGative :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity? Example TRIG1:OUTP:POL POS Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to POSitive on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Off Selects no signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP OFF Readback Off Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 674 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Sweeping (HSWP) Selects the Sweeping Trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector when a measurement is made. This signal has historically been known as "HSWP" (High = Sweeping), and is 5 V TTL level with 50 ohm output impedance. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP HSWP Readback Sweeping Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Measuring Selects the Measuring trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This signal is true while the Measuring status bit is true. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP MEAS Readback Measuring Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Main Trigger Selects the current instrument trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP MAIN Readback Main Trigger Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Gate Trigger Selects the gate trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This is the source of the gate timing, not the actual gate signal. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP GTR Readback Gate Trigger Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 675 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Gate Selects the gate signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. The gate signal has been delayed and its length determined by delay and length settings. When the polarity is positive, a high on the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out represents the time the gate is configured to pass the signal. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP GATE Readback Gate Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Odd/Even Trace Point Selects either the odd or even trace points as the signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector when performing swept spectrum analysis. When the polarity is positive, this output goes high during the time the analyzer is sweeping past the first point (Point 0) and every other following trace point. The opposite is true if the polarity is negative. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP OEV Readback Odd/Even Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Trig Out (1 and 2) Select the type of output signal that will be output from the rear-panel Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connectors. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config Remote Command :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut HSWP | MEASuring | MAIN | GATE | GTRigger | OEVen | SPOint | SSWeep | SSETtled | S1Marker | S2Marker | S3Marker | S4Marker | OFF :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut? Example TRIG:OUTP HSWP TRIG2:OUTP GATE Dependencies The second Trigger output (Trig 2 Out) does not appear in all models; in models that do not support it, the Trig 2 Out key is blanked, and sending the SCPI command for this output generates an error, “Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” In models that do not support the Trigger 2 output, this error is returned if trying to set Trig 2 Out and a query of Trig 2 Out returns OFF. Preset Trigger 1: Sweeping (HSWP) Trigger 2: Gate This is unaffected by a Preset but is preset to the above values on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 676 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Polarity Sets the output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector to trigger on either the positive or negative polarity. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Remote Command :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity POSitive | NEGative :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity? Example TRIG1:OUTP:POL POS Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to POSitive on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Off Selects no signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP OFF Readback Off Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Sweeping (HSWP) Selects the Sweeping Trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector when a measurement is made. This signal has historically been known as "HSWP" (High = Sweeping), and is 5 V TTL level with 50 ohm output impedance. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP HSWP Readback Sweeping Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Measuring Selects the Measuring trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This signal is true while the Measuring status bit is true. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 677 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP MEAS Readback Measuring Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Main Trigger Selects the current instrument trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP MAIN Readback Main Trigger Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Gate Trigger Selects the gate trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This is the source of the gate timing, not the actual gate signal. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP GTR Readback Gate Trigger Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Gate Selects the gate signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. The gate signal has been delayed and its length determined by delay and length settings. When the polarity is positive, a high on the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out represents the time the gate is configured to pass the signal. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP GATE Readback Gate Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Odd/Even Trace Point Selects either the odd or even trace points as the signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector when performing swept spectrum analysis. When the polarity is positive, this output goes high 678 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output during the time the analyzer is sweeping past the first point (Point 0) and every other following trace point. The opposite is true if the polarity is negative. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP OEV Readback Odd/Even Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Analog Out This menu lets you control which signal is fed to the “Analog Out” connector on the analyzer rear panel. See "More Information" on page 679 Key Path Input/Output, Output Config Remote Command :OUTPut:ANALog OFF|SVIDeo|LOGVideo|LINVideo|DAUDio :OUTPut:ANALog? Example OUTP:ANAL SVIDeo ! causes the analog output type to be Screen Video Preset OFF Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to DAUDio on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All State Saved Saved in Input/Output State Readback line 1-of-N selection [variable] Backwards Compatibility Notes Prior to A.04.00, OFF was the default functionality except when in the Analog Demod application or with Tune and Listen, in which case it was DAUDio, and there was no selection menu. So for backwards compatibility with earlier X-Series firmware versions, Auto (:OUTP:ANAL:AUTO ON) will duplicate the prior behavior. The DNWB and SANalyzer parameters, which were legal in PSA but perform no function in the XSeries, are accepted without error. Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 More Information The table below gives the range for each output. Analog Out Nominal Range exc. (10% overrange) Off 0V Screen Video Log Video Scale Factor Notes 0 – 1 V open circuit 10%/division 8566 compatible 0 –1 V terminated 1/(192.66 dB/V) dB referenced to mixer level, 1V out for –10 dBm at the mixer. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 679 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Linear Video 0 –1 V terminated 100%/V Demod Audio (varies with analyzer setting) Linear referenced to Ref Level, 1 V out for RF envelope at the Ref Level. Auto Selects the Auto state for the Analog Output menu. In this state, the Analog Output will automatically be set to the most sensible setting for the current mode or measurement. If you make a selection manually from the Analog Out menu, this selection will remain in force until you change it (or re-select Auto), even if you go to a mode or measurement for which the selected output does not apply. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out Remote Command OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO? Example OUTP:ANAL:AUTO ON Preset ON State Saved Saved in Input/Output State Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Off Turns off the analog output. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out Example OUTP:ANAL OFF ! causes the analog output to be off Readback Text Off Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Screen Video Selects the analog output to be the screen video signal. In this mode, the pre-detector data is output to the Analog Out connector. The output looks very much like the trace displayed on the analyzer’s screen, and depends on the Log/Lin display Scale, Reference Level, and dB per division, but is not influenced by the selected detector or any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing (like Trace Averaging). Note that this mode is similar to the Analog Output of the HP 8566 family and the Video Out (opt 124) capability of the Keysight PSA analyzer (E444x), although there are differences in the behavior. Key Path 680 Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Example OUTP:ANAL SVID Dependencies Because the Screen Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is available while Screen Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector as the selected trace when Screen Video is activated. Screen Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS Average or EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Screen Video output. The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count. After a sweep: l l If a new sweep is to follow (as in Continuous sweep mode), the output holds at its last value during the retrace before the next sweep starts. If the analyzer is in zero-span, there is no retrace, as the analyzer remains tuned to the Center Frequency and does not sweep. Therefore, in zero-span, the output simply remains live between display updates. If no new sweep is to follow (as in Single sweep mode), the output remains live, and continues to show the pre-detector data This function depends on optional capability; the key will be blanked and the command will generate an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV or YAS licensed in your instrument. Couplings Screen Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Screen Video output will look different than it does in swept mode. Readback Text Screen Video Backwards Compatibility Notes See "Backwards Compatibility:" on page 681, below. Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Backwards Compatibility: The Screen Video function is intended to be very similar to the 8566 Video Output and the PSA Option 124. However, unlike the PSA, it is not always on; it must be switched on by the Screen Video key. Also, unlike the PSA, there are certain dependencies (detailed above) – for example, the Quasi Peak Detector is unavailable when Screen Video is on. Furthermore, the PSA Option 124 hardware was unipolar and its large range was padded to be exactly right for use as a Screen Video output. In the X-Series, the hardware is bipolar and has a wider range to accommodate the other output choices. Therefore, the outputs won’t match up exactly and users may have to modify their setup when applying the X-Series in a PSA application. Log Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Mixer Level) Selects the analog output to be the log of the video signal. In this mode, the pre-detector data is output to the Analog Out connector with a Log scaling. The output is referenced to the current level at the mixer, does not depend on display settings like Reference Level or dB per division, and it is not influenced by the selected detector or any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing (like Trace Averaging), but does change with input attenuation. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 681 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output The output is designed so that full scale (1 V) corresponds to –10 dBm at the mixer. The full range (0–1 V) covers 192.66 dB ; thus, 0 V corresponds to –202.66 dBm at the mixer. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out Example OUTP:ANAL LOGV Dependencies Because the Log Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is available while Screen Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector as the selected trace when Log Video is activated. Log Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS Average or EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Log Video output. The output holds at its last value during an alignment, during a marker count, and during retrace (after a sweep and before the next sweep starts). This function depends on optional capability. The key will be blanked and the command will generate an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV licensed in your instrument. Couplings Log Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Log Video output will look different than it does in swept mode. Readback Text Log Video Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Linear Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Ref Level) Selects the analog output to be the envelope signal on a linear (voltage) scale. In this mode, the predetector data is output to the Analog Out connector with a Linear scaling. The output is based on the current Reference Level, and is not influenced by the selected detector or any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing (like Trace Averaging). The scaling is set so that 1 V output occurs with an instantaneous video level equal to the reference level, and 0 V occurs at the bottom of the graticule. This scaling gives you the ability to control the gain without having another setup control for the key. But it requires you to control the look of the display (the reference level) in order to control the analog output. This mode is ideal for looking at Amplitude Modulated signals, as the linear envelope effectively demodulates the signal. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out Example OUTP:ANAL LINV Dependencies Because the Linear Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is available while Linear Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector as the selected trace when Log Video is activated. Linear Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS Average or EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Linear Video output. The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count and during retrace (after a sweep and before the next sweep starts). 682 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output This function depends on optional capability; the key will be blanked and the command will generate an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV licensed in your instrument. Couplings Linear Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Linear Video output will look different than it does in swept mode. Readback Text Linear Video Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Demod Audio Selects the analog output to be the demodulation of the video signal. When Demod Audio is selected, the demodulated audio signal appears at this output whenever the Analog Demod application is demodulating a signal or when Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the Swept SA measurement. When Analog Out is in the Auto state, this output is auto-selected when in the Analog Demod mode or when Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the Swept SA measurement. If any other Analog Output is manually selected when in the Analog Demod mode or when Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the Swept SA measurement, a condition warning message appears. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out Example OUTP:ANAL DAUD Dependencies This key only appears if the Analog Demod application (N9063A), the N6141A or W6141A application, or Option EMC is installed and licensed, otherwise the key will be blanked and the command will generate an “Option not available” error. The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count. It is not held between sweeps, in order for Tune and Listen to work properly. When Demod Audio is the selected Analog Output: • all active traces are forced to use the same detector. • CISPR detectors (QPD, EMI Avg, RMS Avg) are unavailable Readback Text Demod Audio Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 (this was the default functionality, and there was no selection) Modified at S/W Revision A.04.00 Digital Bus This menu allows you to configure the LVDS connector located on the rear panel of the instrument. It is a unidirectional link of real time data at a 90 MSa/s rate. The ADC is sampling a 22.5 MHz IF. The data that appears on this port is raw, uncorrected ADC samples, unless you have option RTL. With option RTL, you get fully corrected I/Q data. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 683 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output This connector will only be active when the Narrowband IF Path is currently in use. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Bus Out On/Off When Bus Out is on, all acquisitions are streamed to the output port including acquisitions for internal purposes such as Alignment. The internal processing and routing of acquisitions continues as usual and is unaffected by the state of Bus Out. When Bus Out is off, no signal appears on the LVDS port. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Digital Bus Scope Mode Global Remote Command :OUTPut:DBUS[1][:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :OUTPut:DBUS[1][:STATe]? Example OUTP:DBUS ON Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to Off on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults -> All" State Saved Saved in Input/Output State Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.04.00 I/Q Cal Out The Baseband I/Q "Cal Out" port can be turned on with either a 1 kHz or a 250 kHz square wave. This can be turned on independent of the input selection. A Preset will reset this to Off. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config Remote Command :OUTPut:IQ:OUTPut IQ1|IQ250|OFF :OUTPut:IQ:OUTPut? Example OUTP:IQ:OUTP IQ1 Couplings An I/Q Cable Calibration or an I/Q Probe Calibration will change the state of the Cal Out port as needed by the calibration routine. When the calibration is finished the I/Q Cal Out is restored to the pre-calibration state. Preset Off State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range 1 kHz Square Wave|250 kHz Square Wave|Off Readback Text 1 kHz|250 kHz|Off Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Saved State Saved in instrument state 684 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output 1 kHz Square Wave Turns on the 1 kHz square wave signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only available with option BBA. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out Readback I/Q 1kHz Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 250 kHz Square Wave Turns on the 250 kHz square wave signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only available with option BBA. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out Readback I/Q 250kHz Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Off Turns off the signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only available with option BBA. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out Readback Off Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Aux IF Out This menu controls the signals that appear on the SMA output on the rear panel labeled “AUX IF OUT The Aux IF Out functionality is only valid for RF and External Mixer inputs. When using the External Mixing path, the Aux IF Out levels (for all three Options CR3, CRP, and ALV) will be uncalibrated because the factory default Aux IF level was set to accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config Remote Command :OUTPut:AUX SIF|AIF|LOGVideo|OFF :OUTPut:AUX? Dependencies The softkey does not appear in models that do not support the Aux IF Out. Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to OFF on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All” State Saved Saved in Input/Output state Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 685 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Readback line 1-of-N selection [variable] Backwards Compatibility Notes In the PSA, the IF output has functionality equivalent to the "Second IF" function in the X-Series’ Aux IF Out menu. In the X-Series, it is necessary to switch the Aux IF Out to “Second IF” to get this functionality, whereas in PSA it is always on, since there are no other choices. Hence a command to switch this function to “Second IF” will have to be added by customers migrating from PSA who use the IF Output in PSA. Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Off In this mode nothing comes out of the “AUX IF OUT” connector on the rear panel. The connector appears as an open-circuit (that is, it is not terminated in any way). Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out Example OUTP:AUX OFF causes the aux output type to be off Readback Text Off Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Second IF In this mode the 2nd IF output is routed to the rear panel connector. The annotation on the key shows the current 2nd IF frequency in use in the analyzer. The frequency of the 2nd IF depends on the current IF signal path as shown in the table below: IF Path Selected Frequency of “Second IF” Output 10 MHz 322.5 MHz 25 MHz 322.5 MHz 40 MHz 250 MHz 140 MHz 300 MHz The signal quality, such as signal to noise ratio and phase noise, are excellent in this mode. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out Example OUTP:AUX SIF causes the aux output type to be Second IF Dependencies Does not appear unless Option CR3 is installed. Readback Text Second IF Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 686 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output Arbitrary IF In this mode the 2nd IF output is mixed with a local oscillator and mixer to produce an arbitrary IF output between 10 MHz and 75 MHz with 500 kHz resolution. The phase noise in this mode will not be as good as in Second IF mode. The IF output frequency is adjustable, through an active function which appears on the Arbitrary IF selection key, from 10 MHz to 75 MHz with 500 kHz resolution. The bandwidth of this IF output varies with band and center frequency, but is about 40 MHz at the –3 dB width. When the output is centered at lower frequencies in its range, signal frequencies at the bottom of the bandwidth will “fold”. For example, with a 40 MHz bandwidth (20 MHz half-bandwidth), and a 15 MHz IF center, a signal –20 MHz relative to the spectrum analyzer center frequency will have a relative response of about –3 dB with a frequency 20 MHz below the 15 MHz IF center. This –5 MHz frequency will fold to become a +5 MHz signal at the IF output. Therefore, lower IF output frequencies are only useful with known band-limited signals. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out Example OUTP:AUX AIF causes the aux output type to be the Arbitrary IF Dependencies Does not appear unless Option CRP is installed. Readback Text Arbitrary IF Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out Scope Mode Global Remote Command :OUTPut:AUX:AIF <value> :OUTPut:AUX:AIF? Example :OUTP:AUX:AIF 50 MHZ Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 70 MHz on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All” State Saved Saved in Input/Output State Min 10 MHz Max 75 MHz Default Unit Hz Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Fast Log Video In this mode the 2nd IF output is passed through a log amp and the log envelope of the IF signal is sent to the rear panel. The open circuit output level varies by about 25 mV per dB, with a top-of-screen signal producing about 1.6 Volts. The output impedance is nominally 50 ohms. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 687 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Input/Output This mode is intended to meet the same needs as Option E4440A-H7L Fast Rise Time Video Output on the Keysight E4440A PSA Series, allowing you to characterize pulses with fast rise times using standard measurement suites on modern digital scopes. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out Example OUTP:AUX LOGVideo causes the aux output type to be Fast Log Video Dependencies Does not appear unless Option ALV is installed. The output is off during an alignment but not during a marker count, and is not blanked during retrace (after a sweep and before the next sweep starts). Readback Text Fast Log Video Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 I/Q Guided Calibration Calibrating the Baseband I/Q ports requires several steps and manual connections. The Guided Calibration interactively guides you through the required steps, displaying diagrams to help with the connections. The steps vary depending on the setup. In the Guided Calibration windows, the date and time of the last calibration are displayed. If any of the items listed are displayed in yellow, this indicates that the calibration for that item is inconsistent with the latest calibration, and you should complete the entire calibration process before you exit the calibration. I/Q Isolation Calibration The I/Q Isolation Calibration must be run before calibrating any port with either the I/Q Cable Calibration or I/Q Probe Calibration. This calibration is performed with nothing connected to any of the front panel I/Q ports. This is the first step in both the I/Q Cable Calibration and the I/Q Probe Calibration. I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Command Only) Returns the last date and time that the I/Q Isolation Calibration was performed. This is a remote query command only. Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:ISOLation:TIME? Example :CAL:IQ:ISOL:TIME? Notes This returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been performed, all values will be 0. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 688 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Marker The Marker key accesses the Marker menu. A marker can be placed on a trace to allow the value of the trace at the marker point to be determined precisely. The functions in this menu include a 1-of-N selection of the control mode Normal, Delta, Fixed, or Off for the selected marker. The fundamental marker operation involves setting a Marker’s X-Axis value and then reading the marker’s Y-Axis value. From the front panel you do this using the Marker menu and the green marker readout in the upper right corner of the display. Programmatically, to set the Marker’s X-Axis value use :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10|11|12:X <freq|time> . To query the Marker’s Y-Axis value, use :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10|11|12:Y? . See "Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value" on page 690 and "Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value" on page 692 for information on these functions. When Marker is pressed, if the selected marker is Off, pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. If the selected marker is already On it will remain at the frequency/time and amplitude to which it is already set, even if this means it will be offscreen. Markers can be on and not be visible because they are offscreen. This may occur if you set a marker to a frequency outside of the current settings of the Start and Stop frequencies, or in Spectrogram View, you place a marker on a Display Trace other than 0. To move the marker on to the display, press Peak Search. Markers may also be used in pairs to read the difference (or delta) between two data points. They can be used in Marker Functions to do advanced data processing, or to specify operating points in functions like Signal Track and N dB Points. The command in the table below selects the marker and sets the marker control mode as described under Normal, Delta, Fixed and Off, below. All interactions and dependencies detailed under the key description are enforced when the remote command is sent. See "Marker Control Mode" on page 690. See "Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value" on page 690. See "Setting the Marker X Position in Trace Points" on page 691. See "Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value" on page 692. See "Marker Backwards Compatibility" on page 693 Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE POSition|DELTa|FIXed|OFF :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE? Preset OFF (all markers) State Saved The marker control mode is saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE SPAN|BAND Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 To support band function backwards compatibility, both of these legacy parameters are accepted and aliased to POSition. They are never returned to a query. See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 for more information. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 689 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Marker Control Mode There are four control modes for markers: l l l l Normal (POSition) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value, and who's absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value. Delta (DELTa) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis offset from a reference marker, and whose absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value. Fixed (FIXed) - A marker whose X Axis and Y Axis values may be directly or indirectly specified by you, but whose Y Axis value remains fixed, once specified, and does not follow the trace. Fixed markers are useful as reference markers for Delta markers, as operands in a Peak Search operation, and as arbitrary reference points settable by you. These markers are represented on the display by an “X” rather than a diamond. Off (OFF) - A marker that is not in use. In the Swept SA measurement, the Preset control mode is Off for all markers. Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value The command below sets the marker X Axis value in the current marker X Axis Scale unit. In each case the marker that is addressed becomes the selected marker. It has no effect (other than to cause the marker to become selected) if the control mode is Off, but it is the SCPI equivalent of entering an X value if the control mode is Normal,Delta, or Fixed. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X <freq|time> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X? Notes If no suffix is sent it will use the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis Scale. If a suffix is sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit, an invalid suffix message will be generated. If the specified marker is Fixed and a Marker Function is on, a message is generated. If the key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. The query returns the marker’s absolute X Axis value if the control mode is Normal or Fixed. It returns the offset from the marker’s reference marker if the control mode is Delta. The query is returned in the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis scale: Hz for Frequency and Inverse Time, seconds for Period and Time. If the marker is Off the response is not a number. Preset After a preset, if X is queried with no value sent first, the center of screen value will be returned. This will depend on the frequency range of the instrument. 13.255 GHz is correct for 26 GHz instruments only (Option 526). Min – ∞ (minus infinity) Max + ∞ (plus infinity). Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series 690 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker marker values are not limited and do not clip Default Unit determined by X Axis Scale Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:CENTer Backwards Compatibility Notes In earlier Agilent analyzers, markers were position markers, which means that Normal and Delta markers stayed at the same screen position when X Axis parameters were changed. In the X-Series, markers are value markers, which means that when the analyzer’s X Axis settings are changed, the marker’s X Axis value in fundamental X Axis units remains unchanged. See "Marker Backwards Compatibility" on page 693 for a full discussion of this change. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 This alias is provided for compatibility with the Band Power function in PSA and ESA. See details in the “Marker Function” section under "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 Setting the Marker X Position in Trace Points The command below sets the marker X position in trace points. It has no effect if the marker control mode is Off. But it is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is Normal or Delta or Fixed – except the setting is in trace points rather than X Axis Scale units. The entered value in Trace Points is immediately translated into the current X Axis Scale units for setting the value of the marker. The marker’s value in X Axis Scale Units, NOT trace points, will be preserved if a change is made to the X Axis scale settings. Thus, if you use this command to place a marker on bucket 500, which happens at that time to correspond to 13 GHz, and then you change the Start Frequency so that bucket 500 is no longer 13 GHz, the marker will stay at 13 GHz, NOT at bucket 500! This is important to realize as it differs from the behavior of past Agilent analyzers. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:POSition <real> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:POSition? Notes If the specified marker is Fixed and a Marker Function is on, a message is generated. If the key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. The query returns the marker’s absolute X Axis value in trace points if the control mode is Normal or Fixed. It returns the offset from the marker’s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is Delta. The value is returned as a real number, not an integer, corresponding to the translation from X Axis Scale units to trace points Preset After a preset, if X is queried with no value sent first, the center of screen value will be returned. So if per default, the number of Trace points is 1001, the center value will be 500. Min 0 Max Number of trace points – 1 Default Unit unitless Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:CENTer This alias is provided for compatibility with the Band Power function in PSA and ESA. See details in Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 691 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker the “Marker Function” section under "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value The fundamental item of marker data accessed by users is the marker’s Y-Axis value. The query below is used to select the marker and read the marker’s Y-Axis value. In the command form, it selects the marker and sets the marker Y Axis value; the default unit is the current Y Axis unit. The command form has no effect (other than selecting the marker) unless the marker control mode is Fixed. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Y <real> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Y? Example CALC:MARK2:MODE POS turns on marker 2 as a normal marker. CALC:MARK2:X 20 GHZ moves marker 2 to 20 GHz if X Axis Scale is Frequency. If X Axis Scale is Time, an Invalid Suffix error is generated. Notes The command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10|11|12:Y? returns the marker Y-axis result, if the control mode is Normal, Fixed or Delta. If the marker is Off the response is 9.91e37 (“Not A Number”). If no suffix is sent it will use the current Y Axis unit. If a suffix is sent that does not have units of absolute amplitude, an invalid suffix error is generated. If a marker function is on for the specified marker, a Settings Conflict message is generated. Preset Trace value at center of screen. There is no way to predict what this will be after a preset. Min – ∞ (minus infinity) Max + ∞ (plus infinity) Backwards Compatibility Notes As a result of the change from position markers to value markers (see below), markers can be at a frequency which is offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the screen edges and hence were never offscreen. In the past, since markers could never be offscreen they always returned a valid result. In the X-Series, markers which are offscreen return not a number as a result; hence the potential now exists for not a number to be returned for a marker Y-Axis query. Also, in some previous analyzers linear ratios read out on the display in %. In the X-Series they display as dimensionless quantities. Eg, a quantity which used to display as 52% now displays as .52. The SCPI behavior is unaffected as it has always read out the ratio rather than the percentage. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Querying the Marker Z Axis Value The command below queries the marker Z Axis value in the Spectrogram View only. The Z Axis value of a marker represents the time value of the marker (see “Representation of Time” under the Spectrogram View description). In each case the marker that is addressed becomes the selected marker. Remote Command 692 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Z? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Notes The query returns the marker’s absolute Z Axis value if the control mode is Normal or Fixed. It returns the offset from the marker’s reference marker if the control mode is Delta. For Spectrogram, the Z Axis value represents the amount of time transpired since the start of the recording of traces. Preset 9.91E+37 Min -Infinity Max +Infinity Setting or Querying the Marker Z Position The command below sets the Marker Z position in the Spectrogram View only. Setting the Z Position sets which of the 300 traces in the Spectrogram the selected marker will appear on. In each case the marker that is addressed becomes the selected marker. It has no effect (other than to cause the marker to become selected) if the control mode is Off, but it is the SCPI equivalent of making a Marker Z entry if the control mode is Normal,Delta, or Fixed. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Z:POSition <integer> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Z:POSition? Notes The command sets or queries the Z Axis position. In the Spectrogram View, this value correlates to be one of the 300 stored traces. Each Z Axis position represents a different stored trace. Preset 0 Min 0 Max Number of traces stored is limited to 300. Default Unit unitless Marker Backwards Compatibility In earlier Agilent analyzers, markers were position markers, which means that Normal and Delta markers stayed at the same screen position when X Axis parameters were changed. So a marker at center screen stayed at center screen even if Center Frequency was changed (which means that the marker’s frequency changed). In the X-Series, markers are value markers, which means that when the analyzer’s X Axis settings are changed, the marker’s X Axis value in fundamental X Axis units remains unchanged. For example, if you put a marker at a particular frequency, it will stay at that frequency regardless of whether or not you change the Center Frequency of the analyzer, even if that means that the marker ends up offscreen. While this change resulted in an overall higher level of usability of the marker system, there are some use cases where the user depends on the marker staying at the center of the screen. The most common one is where the user turns on a marker at center screen and uses it to measure the trace amplitude at the center frequency or at a series of center frequencies, without the need to ever move the marker. In the X-Series, to mimic the legacy behavior for this use case, the user must turn the marker off and then back on after changing the center frequency of the analyzer. This causes the marker to reappear in the center of the screen. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 693 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Also as a result of the change from position markers to value markers, markers can be at a frequency which is offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the screen edges and hence were never offscreen. Users who depended on this clipping behavior to force markers to the edges of the screen will have to rewrite their code. Furthermore, since markers could never be offscreen they always returned a valid result. In the X-Series, markers which are offscreen return not a number as a result; hence the potential now exists for not a number to be returned for a marker query. Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 694 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 695 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. 696 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 697 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Normal Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Normal and turns on the active function for setting its value. If the selected marker was Off, it is placed at the center of the screen on the trace specified by the marker’s Trace attribute. A Normal mode (POSition type) marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value. Key Path Marker Example :CALC:MARK:MODE POS sets Marker 1 to Normal. Notes See the description under the “ Marker” key. Couplings The marker addressed by this command becomes the selected marker on the front panel. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X Axis value are saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Backwards Compatibity SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe ON|1 Setting a marker which is OFF to ON or 1 selects the marker, puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the screen. Setting a marker which is not OFF to ON has no effect (does not change its control mode). Example: CALC:MARK2:STAT ON sets Marker 2 to Normal if it was off; otherwise it does nothing. The response to the query will be ON unless the marker is OFF. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe? Preset OFF Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Delta Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta and turns on the active function for setting its delta value. If the selected marker was Off, it is placed at the center of the screen on the trace specified by the marker’s Trace attribute. In Delta mode the marker result shows the relative result between the selected (Delta) marker and its reference marker. A delta marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis offset from a reference marker. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value. Key Path 698 Marker Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Example :CALC:MARK:MODE DELT sets marker 1 to Delta. Notes See the description under the “ Marker” key. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X Axis value are saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes Previously, pressing Delta (or sending the CALC:MARK:MODE:DELTa command) always moved the reference marker to the delta marker. Now it only does so if the marker was already a delta marker. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Fixed Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Fixed. A fixed marker is fixed in the sense that it stays where you place it. It can be directly moved in both X and Y. It can be moved with a Peak Search. It can also be indirectly moved by re-zeroing the delta if it is a relative marker. If it is moved, it again becomes fixed at the X Axis point it moved to and it has a Y-axis result that it took on when it moved there. If a Normal or Delta marker is changed to Fixed it becomes fixed at the X Axis point it was at, and with the Y-axis result it had when it was set to Fixed. In Fixed mode the marker result shows: • If no Marker Function is on, the absolute X Axis and Y axis value of the marker • If a Marker Function is on, the X Axis value and the Y-axis function result the marker had when it became fixed. See "Fixed Marker X Axis Value" on page 699. See "Fixed Marker Y Axis Value" on page 700. See Fixed Marker Z Axis Value Fixed Marker X Axis Value Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed. Notes See the description under the “ Marker” key, above. Dependencies • You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is generated. • You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an attempt is made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes In legacy analyzers, only a Reference marker could be Fixed, and it was always Fixed. Additionally it could not be noved. In the X-Series, any marker can be set to Fixed and can be moved to any X or Y value. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 699 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Fixed Marker Y Axis Value Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed. Notes See the description under the Marker key. Dependencies You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is generated. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument state Default Unit depends on the current selected Y axis unit Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Fixed Marker Z Axis Value The Marker Z position determines which of the 301 traces (0–300) the selected marker is on. It cannot be set above the maximum trace in the Spectrogram window and, unlike the Marker X position, will not move off screen in the Spectrogram Window if the storage size is smaller than the number of traces that can be viewed. If Spectrogram is on, the marker result block has a third line displaying the time value of Marker Z. If the marker is a delta marker, the delta time value is displayed. Although the Z Marker position can be moved to trace 0, this is not recommended, as the current trace value is constantly being updated by new acquisitions and therefore the Z time value for trace 0 is not completely registered until the trace is completed. Marker Z position is only available in the Spectrogram View Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK2:MODE FIX sets Marker 2 to Fixed. :CALC:MARK2:Z:POS 150 puts Marker 2 on Trace 150 Dependencies Only appears in the Spectrogram view, otherwise blanked State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X, Y and Z Axis values are saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.07.01 Fixed Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Fixed. A fixed marker is fixed in the sense that it stays where you place it. It can be directly moved in both X and Y. It can be moved with a Peak Search. It can also be indirectly moved by re-zeroing the delta if it is a relative marker. If it is moved, it again becomes fixed at the X Axis point it moved to and it has a Y-axis result that it took on when it moved there. If a Normal or 700 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Delta marker is changed to Fixed it becomes fixed at the X Axis point it was at, and with the Y-axis result it had when it was set to Fixed. In Fixed mode the marker result shows: • If no Marker Function is on, the absolute X Axis and Y axis value of the marker • If a Marker Function is on, the X Axis value and the Y-axis function result the marker had when it became fixed. See "Fixed Marker X Axis Value" on page 701. See "Fixed Marker Y Axis Value" on page 701. See Fixed Marker Z Axis Value Fixed Marker X Axis Value Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed. Notes See the description under the “ Marker” key, above. Dependencies • You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is generated. • You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an attempt is made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes In legacy analyzers, only a Reference marker could be Fixed, and it was always Fixed. Additionally it could not be noved. In the X-Series, any marker can be set to Fixed and can be moved to any X or Y value. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Fixed Marker Y Axis Value Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed. Notes See the description under the Marker key. Dependencies You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is generated. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument state Default Unit depends on the current selected Y axis unit Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 701 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Fixed Marker Z Axis Value The Marker Z position determines which of the 301 traces (0–300) the selected marker is on. It cannot be set above the maximum trace in the Spectrogram window and, unlike the Marker X position, will not move off screen in the Spectrogram Window if the storage size is smaller than the number of traces that can be viewed. If Spectrogram is on, the marker result block has a third line displaying the time value of Marker Z. If the marker is a delta marker, the delta time value is displayed. Although the Z Marker position can be moved to trace 0, this is not recommended, as the current trace value is constantly being updated by new acquisitions and therefore the Z time value for trace 0 is not completely registered until the trace is completed. Marker Z position is only available in the Spectrogram View Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK2:MODE FIX sets Marker 2 to Fixed. :CALC:MARK2:Z:POS 150 puts Marker 2 on Trace 150 Dependencies Only appears in the Spectrogram view, otherwise blanked State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X, Y and Z Axis values are saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.07.01 Fixed Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Fixed. A fixed marker is fixed in the sense that it stays where you place it. It can be directly moved in both X and Y. It can be moved with a Peak Search. It can also be indirectly moved by re-zeroing the delta if it is a relative marker. If it is moved, it again becomes fixed at the X Axis point it moved to and it has a Y-axis result that it took on when it moved there. If a Normal or Delta marker is changed to Fixed it becomes fixed at the X Axis point it was at, and with the Y-axis result it had when it was set to Fixed. In Fixed mode the marker result shows: • If no Marker Function is on, the absolute X Axis and Y axis value of the marker • If a Marker Function is on, the X Axis value and the Y-axis function result the marker had when it became fixed. See "Fixed Marker X Axis Value" on page 702. See "Fixed Marker Y Axis Value" on page 703. See Fixed Marker Z Axis Value Fixed Marker X Axis Value Key Path 702 Marker, Fixed Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Example :CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed. Notes See the description under the “ Marker” key, above. Dependencies • You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is generated. • You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an attempt is made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes In legacy analyzers, only a Reference marker could be Fixed, and it was always Fixed. Additionally it could not be noved. In the X-Series, any marker can be set to Fixed and can be moved to any X or Y value. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Fixed Marker Y Axis Value Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed. Notes See the description under the Marker key. Dependencies You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is generated. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument state Default Unit depends on the current selected Y axis unit Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Fixed Marker Z Axis Value The Marker Z position determines which of the 301 traces (0–300) the selected marker is on. It cannot be set above the maximum trace in the Spectrogram window and, unlike the Marker X position, will not move off screen in the Spectrogram Window if the storage size is smaller than the number of traces that can be viewed. If Spectrogram is on, the marker result block has a third line displaying the time value of Marker Z. If the marker is a delta marker, the delta time value is displayed. Although the Z Marker position can be moved to trace 0, this is not recommended, as the current trace value is constantly being updated by new acquisitions and therefore the Z time value for trace 0 is not completely registered until the trace is completed. Marker Z position is only available in the Spectrogram View Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 703 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Key Path Marker, Fixed Example :CALC:MARK2:MODE FIX sets Marker 2 to Fixed. :CALC:MARK2:Z:POS 150 puts Marker 2 on Trace 150 Dependencies Only appears in the Spectrogram view, otherwise blanked State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X, Y and Z Axis values are saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.07.01 Off Turns off the selected marker. In addition, Off removes the marker annunciation from the display, turns off any active function and any marker function, and resets the following properties to their default value: • X Axis scale: Auto • Band/Interval Span: 0 • Auto Trace: On Off does not affect which marker is selected. Key Path Marker Example :CALC:MARK:MODE OFF sets Marker 1 to Off. Notes See the description under the “ Marker” key. State Saved The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) is saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Backwards Compatibity SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe OFF|0 The response to the query will be OFF unless the marker is ON. Properties Opens a menu used to set certain properties of the selected marker. Key Path Marker Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. 704 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 705 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 706 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 707 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Relative To Selects the marker that the selected marker will be relative to (its reference marker). Every marker has another marker to which it is relative. This marker is referred to as the “reference marker” for that marker. This attribute is set by the Marker, Properties, Relative To key. The marker must be a Delta marker to make this attribute relevant. If it is a Delta marker, the reference marker determines how the marker is controlled and how its value is displayed. A marker cannot be relative to itself. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:REFerence <integer> 708 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:REFerence? Example CALC:MARK1:REF 2 sets the marker 1 reference marker to 2 and turns marker 1 on as a delta marker. Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. Notes This command causes the marker specified with the subopcode to become selected. Range (for SCPI command): 1 to 12. If the range is exceeded the value is clipped. Couplings The act of specifying the selected marker’s reference marker makes the selected marker a Delta marker. If the reference marker is off it is turned on in Fixed mode at the delta marker location. Preset The preset default “Relative To” marker (reference marker) is the next higher numbered marker (current marker +1). For example, if marker 2 is selected, then it’s default reference marker is marker 3. The exception is marker 12, which has a default reference of marker 1. Set to the defaults by using Restore Mode Defaults. This is not reset by Marker Off, All Markers Off, or Preset. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Not affected by Marker Off and hence not affected by Preset or power cycle. Min 1 Max 12 Status Bits/OPC dependencies none Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Default (selected when Restore Mode Defaults is pressed): next higher numbered marker or 1 if marker 12. Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 709 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 710 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 711 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 712 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 X Axis Scale Accesses a menu that enables you to affect how the X Axis information for the selected marker is displayed in the marker area (top-right of display) and the active function area of the display, and how the marker is controlled. The available settings for the X Axis Scale are Frequency, Period, Time, and Inverse Time. See "More Information" on page 713. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout FREQuency | TIME | ITIMe | PERiod :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout:AUTO? Example CALC:MARK3:X:READ TIME sets the marker 3 X Axis Scale to Time. Notes This command causes the specified marker to become selected. Preset AUTO Marker Preset (selected when a marker is turned Off): Auto (see below). In most measurements the Auto settings results in Frequency being the preset readout. State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes The X Axis Scale of a marker (Readout in legacy analyzers) now has only one value, not one value for frequency domain and another value for time domain. The value changes (if in Auto) when the domain of the trace it is on changes. This means that the default behaviors are identical, but if the user changes the readout manually in swept and expects the default to remain in zero span, there may be some backwards compatibility problems. As an example, in the old instruments, if the user set Readout to Period in a swept span, and the instrument was set to zero span, the readout changed to Time, the default for Zero Span. Now, it will stay in Period even in Zero Span until the user changes it or sets it back to Auto. Additionally, all choices for X Axis Scale are now always allowed. In legacy analyzers the choices of X Axis Scale were restricted based on the domain the instrument was currently in. Since the new behavior is less restrictive this should not show up as a backwards compatibility issue. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 More Information The X Axis Scale of a marker is the scale of its X Axis value. This affects the units displayed in the Marker Result block and used to specify the marker’s X Axis location. The X Axis Scale is specified using the Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale key. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 713 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker All markers in swept spans have both a time and frequency value. Which of these is used for the result display, and for positioning the marker, depends on the X Axis Scale setting. The X Axis Scale setting can be Frequency or Time, as well as the reciprocal of either (Period or Inverse Time). There is also an Auto setting - when in Auto, a marker’s X Axis Scale changes whenever the domain of the trace, upon which it set, changes. All choices for X Axis Scale are allowed. Note that this behavior differs from the behavior in previous instruments: previously the instrument remembered a different X Axis Scale (formerly called Readout) for each domain, and the choices of X Axis Scale were restricted. These restrictions were based on the current domain of the instrument. Auto When in Auto, the X-Axis Scale is Frequency if the Marker Trace is a frequency domain trace, Time if the Marker Trace is a time domain trace. When in Auto, if the marker changes traces, or the domain of the trace the marker is on changes, the auto result is re-evaluated. If the X Axis Scale is chosen manually, that Scale is used regardless of the domain of the trace. Key Path Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale Example CALC:MARK2:X:READ:AUTO ON sets the marker 2 X-axis scaling to automatically select the most appropriate units. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Frequency Sets the marker X Axis scale to Frequency, displaying the absolute frequency of a normal marker or the frequency of the delta marker relative to the reference marker. Frequency is the auto setting for frequency domain traces. If Frequency is selected for a time domain trace, all of the points in the trace will show the same value. Attempting to use the knob or step keys to adjust the X Axis value of the marker or entering an X Axis value from the numeric keypad or remotely will have no effect but will generate no error. Key Path Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale Example CALC:MARK2:X:READ FREQ sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Frequency. Notes 1-of-N readback is Frequency State Saved The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Period Sets the marker X Axis scale to Period, displaying the reciprocal of the frequency of the marker, or the reciprocal of the frequency separation of the two markers in a delta-marker mode. The units are those of time (sec, msec, etc). If the markers are at the same frequency in a delta marker mode, the result will be the reciprocal of 0, which is infinitely large. The display will show “---” and a SCPI query will return infinity. 714 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker If Period is selected for a time domain trace, all of the points in the trace will show the same value. Attempting to use the knob or step keys to adjust the X Axis value of the marker or entering an X Axis value from the numeric keypad or remotely will have no effect but will generate no error. Key Path Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale Example CALC:MARK2:X:READ PER sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Period. Notes 1-of-N readback is Period State Saved The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Time Sets the marker X Axis scale to Time, displaying the time interval between a normal marker and the start of a sweep or the time of the delta marker relative to the reference marker. Time is the auto setting for time domain traces. In a delta-marker mode it is the (sweep) time interval between the two markers. Key Path Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale Example CALC:MARK2:X:READ TIME sets the marker 2 X Axis Scale to Time.. Notes 1-of-N readback is Time Couplings Frequency domain traces taken in FFT mode have no valid time data. Therefore when Time is selected for markers on such traces, the X Axis value is taken as the appropriate percentage of the displayed sweep time, which is a calculated estimate. State Saved The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Inverse Time Sets the marker X Axis scale to Inverse Time, displaying the reciprocal time. It is useful in a delta mode to show the reciprocal of (sweep) time between two markers. This function is only meaningful when on a time domain trace and in the Delta control mode. If the markers are at the same X Axis value, the time between them is 0, so the reciprocal of sweep time is infinitely large. The display will show “---” and a SCPI query will return infinity. Key Path Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale Example :CALC:MARK2:X:READ ITIM sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Inverse Time. Notes 1-of-N readback is Inverse Time Couplings Frequency domain traces taken in FFT mode have no valid time data. Therefore when Inverse Time is selected for markers on such traces, the X Axis value is undefined, shows as “---” and returns not a number to a query. State Saved The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 715 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 716. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 717. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 717. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset Presets on Preset or All Markers Off State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. 716 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 717 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 716, "Auto Init OFF" on page 717 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 717 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 719. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 719. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 719. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset Presets on Preset or All Markers Off State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 718 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 719 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 719, "Auto Init OFF" on page 719 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 719 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 721. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 721. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 722. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. 720 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset Presets on Preset or All Markers Off State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 721 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. 722 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 721, "Auto Init OFF" on page 722 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 721 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 723. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 724. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 724. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset Presets on Preset or All Markers Off State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 723 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. 724 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 723, "Auto Init OFF" on page 724 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 724 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 726. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 726. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 727. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset Presets on Preset or All Markers Off Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 725 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: 726 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 727 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 726, "Auto Init OFF" on page 727 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 726 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 728. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 729. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 729. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset Presets on Preset or All Markers Off State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). 728 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 729 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 728, "Auto Init OFF" on page 729 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 729 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 731. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 731. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 732. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset 730 Presets on Preset or All Markers Off Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 731 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. 732 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 731, "Auto Init OFF" on page 732 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 731 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Trace Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers. See "Auto Init On" on page 733. See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 734. See "Auto Init OFF" on page 734. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe? Example CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2. Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset Presets on Preset or All Markers Off State Saved The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state. Min 1 Max 6 Readback line [TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently assigned. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Auto Init On When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on). Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 733 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change). Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this means it will be at negative time! Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off. Auto Init Rules Flowchart The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules: This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View. Auto Init OFF This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in Auto mode. 734 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO? Notes Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed. The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON. Couplings The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key. Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off. If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately set according to the above flowchart. Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset ON Backwards Compatibility Notes The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 733, "Auto Init OFF" on page 734 and the "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 734 for details. The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or out of View will have to modify their code. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Lines When on, displays a vertical line of graticule height and a horizontal line of graticule width, intersecting at the indicator point of the marker (that is, the center of the X or the bottom tip of the diamond. The lines are blue in color. If the marker is off screen the lines should be extended from the marker so that they go thru the screen area if possible. This is really useful for off screen Fixed markers as it lets you see their amplitude even though they are off the X Axis. Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:LINes[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:LINes[:STATe]? Example :CALC:MARK2:LIN:ON turns Lines on for marker 2. Couplings Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Table When set to On, the display is split into a measurement window and a marker data display window. For each marker which is on, information is displayed in the data display window, which includes the marker Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 735 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker number, control mode, trace number, X axis scale, X axis value, and the Y-axis result. Additional information is shown for markers which have marker functions turned on. Turning the Marker Table on turns the Peak Table off and vice versa. Key Path Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe]? Example CALC:MARK:TABL ON turns on the marker table. Preset OFF State Saved The on/off state of the Marker Table is saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Count Accesses the marker count menu. Key Path Marker Readback line [On] if count on for the selected marker, [Off] if it is off. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Counter Turns the marker frequency counter on and off. The selected marker is counted, and if the selected marker is a delta marker and its reference marker is not fixed, the reference marker is counted as well. See "Understanding the Marker Counter" on page 737. See "Query Count Value" on page 737. Key Path Marker, Marker Count Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt[:STATe]? Example CALC:MARK2:FCO ON selects marker 2, turns it on, and turns on the counter CALC:MARK2:FCO:X? returns the counted frequency. Notes Fixed markers are not counted, but a Fixed marker will have a count stored in it if it is selected or is the reference marker for the selected marker. The count already in the marker is stored when the marker becomes fixed and if there is none or the marker moves (for example, Pk Search) it is counted and stored after the next sweep. If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, that count will be displayed when the marker is selected, and used as the reference count when that marker is a reference marker. If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, that count will be deleted if the marker X is adjusted. 736 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, and a Search function is performed using the Fixed marker, while the counter is on, the count stored in the marker will be updated. If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, and is a reference marker, and the reference is moved to a valid trace point by re-zeroing the delta (by pressing Delta again or sending the DELTa SCPI command), while the counter is on, the count stored in the marker will be updated. Notes This command causes the specified marker to become selected. Dependencies Marker Count is unavailable (grayed out and Off) if the Gate function is on. Couplings If the selected marker is Off when the counter is turned on, the selected marker is set to Normal and placed at center of screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. If a marker that is OFF is selected while the counter is on, the counter remains on, but since the marker is off, the count is undefined. In this case the analyzer will return not a number to a SCPI count query. The counter is turned OFF when the selected marker is turned OFF. Preset OFF State Saved The state of the counter (on/off) is saved in instrument state. In the case of Fixed markers, the count stored in the marker is saved in instrument state. Backwards Compatibility Notes In some legacy analyzers (e.g., the 8560 series) the FreqOffset value was applied to the Marker Count. In others (e.g., ESA and PSA) it was not. The X-Series follows the ESA/PSA model and does not apply Freq Offset to the Marker Count. In ESA and PSA the reference marker for Delta markers was always counted. In the X-Series the marker is counted for Normal and Delta markers; but for the reference marker, if it is a Fixed marker, we use the count stored in the Fixed marker. This enhanced capability may require a change to some users’ code and/or test procedures. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Query Count Value Queries the frequency count. The query returns the absolute count unless the specified marker is in Delta mode, then it returns the relative count. If the marker is off, or the marker is on but the counter is off, the analyzer will return not a number to a SCPI count query. A marker with no stored count, or a non-Fixed marker on a stored trace, will also return not a number to a SCPI count query. Note this result may simply mean that the first sweep after the counter turned on has not yet completed. Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:X? Notes This query does NOT cause the specified marker to become selected. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Understanding the Marker Counter See "Counting Off-screen Markers" on page 738. See "Delta Marker" on page 738. See "Fixed Markers" on page 738. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 737 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker See "More Information on "Counter"" on page 738. Using the internal counter we can count the frequency of a marker, but we cannot count while we are actually sweeping. So, once we are done with a sweep, we move to the selected marker frequency and count that frequency. Then, if the marker is a Delta marker, the count is also taken for its reference marker. The count is actually performed by moving the LO to the frequency (or frequencies in the case of a delta marker) we wish to count. The count is executed on a marker by marker basis and no further count is taken until after the next sweep (even if the marker moves before another sweep has completed). The Marker Count is taken by tuning the instrument to the frequency of the marker and counting the IF, with the instrument not sweeping. The count is adjusted for display by adding or subtracting it (as appropriate) from the LO frequency, so that you see a count that represents the signal frequency. This is true even if External Mixing is on. Since all this happens between sweeps, you never see the instrument retuning to do the counts. If you wish to see the entered frequency of a counted marker it will appear in the active function area when that marker is selected (for Fixed markers, you have to press the Marker, Fixed key to select Fixed markers and then press it a second time to view or adjust the x or y marker values). Counting Off-screen Markers If the selected marker is off the X-axis the instrument can still be tuned to the marker (unless it is outside the current range of the instrument), so the count can still be displayed. This means you can see a count for an off-screen marker even though there may be no valid Y-value for the marker. If the marker frequency is outside the range of the instrument, the display will show three dashes in the count block (---), and not a number is returned to a SCPI count query. Delta Marker When a Delta Marker is selected while Marker Count is on: 5. If the reference marker is not a fixed marker, the display shows the difference between the count of the selected marker and the count of the reference marker 6. If the reference marker is a fixed marker and there is a count stored in the marker (because Marker Count was on when the marker became a fixed marker), the display shows the difference between the count at the marker and the count stored in the reference marker. Marker Count works in zero span as well as in Swept SA. The instrument tunes to the frequency of the selected marker, which, for active zero span traces, is simply the center frequency of the analyzer. Fixed Markers Fixed markers have a count stored in them that is generally kept fixed and not updated. If a fixed marker is selected, or used as a reference, the signal at the marker frequency is not counted; rather the stored count is seen or used as the reference. The count is stored, if Count is on, when the marker becomes fixed or when, while fixed, the marker is moved by re-zeroing the reference (if it is the reference marker) or via a peak search (since both of these, by definition, use valid trace data). The count stored in a Fixed marker is lost if the counter is turned off, if the marker is moved to an inactive trace, or if the marker is moved by adjusting its x-value. More Information on "Counter" When the counter is on, the count (or the delta count) for the selected marker is displayed. 738 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker The invalid data indicator (*) will turn on until the completion of the first count. Marker Count frequency readings are corrected using the Freq Offset function (in some previous analyzers, they were not). Note however that Marker Delta readings are not corrected, as any offset would be applied to both. In zero span on active traces the counter continues to function, counting any signal near the center frequency of the analyzer. No signal farther from the marker frequency than the Res BW will be seen by the counter. The above command turns on or off the frequency counter. If the specified marker number in the command is not the selected marker, it becomes the selected marker. If the specified marker number is not on, FCOunt ON sets it to Normal and places it at center of screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. Once the marker count is on, it is on for any selected marker, not just for the one used in the command. A 1 is returned to the state query only if marker count is on and the specified number is the selected marker. The invalid data indicator (*) will turn on until the completion of the first count but this does not keep a value from being returned. Gate Time Controls the length of time during which the frequency counter measures the signal frequency. Longer gate times allow for greater averaging of signals whose frequency is “noisy”, though the measurement takes longer. If the gate time is an integer multiple of the length of a power-line cycle (20 ms for 50 Hz power, 16.67 ms for 60 Hz power), the counter rejects incidental modulation at the power line rate. The shortest gate time that rejects both 50 and 60 Hz modulation is 100 ms, which is the value chosen in Auto, or on Preset or when Auto Couple is pressed. The start time of the Gate Time of the counter must be controlled by the same trigger parameters as controls the sweep. Thus, if the Trigger is not in Free Run, the counter gate must not start until after the trigger is received and delayed. Key Path Marker Function, Marker Count Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime <time> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime:AUTO? Example :CALC:MARK2:FCO:GAT 1e–2 sets the gate time for Marker 2 to 10^(–2) s = 10 ms. Notes When Auto Couple is pressed, Gate Time is set to 100 ms. Notes This command causes the specified marker to become selected. Preset 100 ms ON State Saved Saved in instrument state. Min 1 us Max 500 ms Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 739 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO? Notes This command is provided for ESA compatibility, which allowed the user to control the gate resolution, rather than the gate time. :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> Sets the gate time to 1/freq :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution? Returns 1/gate_time :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 is accepted and ignored :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO? Always returns 1 All of these commands cause the marker to become selected. Preset 1Hz ON Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Couple Markers When this function is On, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every other marker which is not Fixed or Off. By “equal X Axis movement” we mean that we preserve the difference between each marker’s X Axis value (in the fundamental x-axis units of the trace that marker is on) and the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units). Note that Fixed markers do not couple. They stay where they were while all the other markers move. Of course, if a Fixed marker is being moved, all the non-fixed markers do move with it. This may result in markers going off screen. Key Path Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? Example :CALC:MARK:COUP ON sets Couple Markers on. Preset Off, presets on Mode Preset and All Markers Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 All Markers Off Turns off all markers. See Marker, "Off " on page 704. Key Path Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF 740 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Example CALC:MARK:AOFF turns off all markers. Couplings Sets the selected marker to 1. Preset n/a. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 741 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Marker Function The Marker Function key opens up a menu of softkeys that allow you to control the Marker Functions of the instrument. Marker Functions perform post-processing operations on marker data. Band Functions are Marker Functions that allow you to define a band of frequencies around the marker. The band defines the region of data used for the numerical calculations. These marker functions also allow you to perform mathematical calculations on trace and marker data and report the results of these calculations in place of the normal marker result. Unlike regular markers, marker function markers are not placed directly on the trace. They are placed at a location which is relative to the result of the function calculation. l See "More Information" on page 742. l See "Fixed marker functions" on page 743. l See "Interval Markers" on page 743. Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion NOISe | BPOWer | BDENsity | OFF :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion? Notes Sending this command selects the sub-opcoded marker The marker function result is queried in the same way as the Marker Result, as outlined in the Marker section, with the CALC:MARK:Y? command. Dependencies Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker; so all of the Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker. If a marker function was already on when the marker became Fixed, then the selected Band Function is shown but cannot be changed. Therefore, you cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker that has a marker function turned on. To turn off the function, turn off the marker. Preset OFF State Saved The band function for each marker is saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes The introduction of adjustable-width Band Functions in the X-Series fundamentally changes the way Band Power markers are controlled. See the section entitled "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 below for a complete discussion of programming Band Functions in a backwards compatible fashion. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 More Information The units to be used for displaying Marker Function results in Delta mode vary depending on what is the reference marker and what it is referenced to. Marker Functions are different from Measurements, which automatically perform complex sequences of setup, data acquisition, and display operations in order to measure specified signal characteristics. Marker Functions are specified for each individual marker and may be turned on individually for each marker. 742 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function The Marker Fctn menu controls which marker functions are turned on and allows you to adjust setup parameters for each function. The Marker Functions are Marker Noise, Band/Interval Power, and Band/Interval Density, only one of which can be on for a given marker. If the selected marker is off, pressing Marker Fctn sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the display on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. However, if the selected marker was Off, Marker Function Off had to be the selected function, and it remains so even after the marker is thus turned on, although you may then change it. Fixed marker functions In the case of a fixed marker, it is not possible to turn on or change a band function. This is because a Fixed marker holds the value it had when it became fixed; the trace it was on may keep on changing, so the function value, which depends on trace data, could not be calculated on an ongoing basis. It is possible to have a Marker Function on for a Fixed marker, in the case where a function was already on when the marker became Fixed. In this case the function value will be retained in the marker. It is also possible to have a Marker Function on for a Fixed marker in the case when the marker was off and was turned on as Fixed because Delta was pressed to create a reference marker - in which case the marker function, marker function width, Y Axis value and marker function result that the Delta marker had when Delta was pressed are copied into the Fixed marker. If Delta is pressed again, causing the fixed reference marker to move to the delta marker’s position, the marker function, marker function width, Y Axis value and marker function result that the Delta marker had when Delta was pressed are again copied into the fixed reference marker. If a Marker Function is on for a Fixed marker, the marker’s reported value is derived by the function. Therefore you cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. Indirect setting as detailed above or when a Peak Search is performed is allowed, as the Fixed marker is always placed on a trace and can derive its function value from the trace at the moment when it is placed. Interval Markers What is an interval marker? The band power marker computes the total power within a span in a nonzero span. The results computation must include the RBW. The interval power marker measures the average power across some time interval in zero span. Interval Density is defined to be Interval Power divided by Bn. Bn is the noise bandwidth of the RBW filter, as noted and used within the Band Power computation. Band Function Backwards Compatibility To define the Band Power function, the ESA and PSA analyzers used Delta Marker functionality with two markers, for example, Marker 1 and its Reference Marker, as shown below: Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 743 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function e The marker modes known as Span Pair and Delta Pair (Band Pair in ESA) were used to set two markers for the primary purpose of defining the band of a Band Power function. The two markers were set by adjusting their span and centerpoint (Span Pair mode) or by adjusting their locations independently to directly define the Start and Stop edges of the band (Band Pair/Delta Pair modes). In the X-Series, the introduction of adjustable-width Band Functions fundamentally changes the way Band Power markers are controlled, by using a single marker to completely define the function, as shown below: 744 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function . In the X-Series the marker itself has a width attribute, which you set using the Band Span function. The marker shows “wings” that define the edges of the band in which the Band Power is being measured. You only need one marker, not a pair of markers, to completely define a Band Power function (making it possible to do Delta Band Power, which PSA and ESA could not do). Additional control functions of Band Left and Band Right are provided for the case when you need to precisely set the band edges. Note that the marker itself always remains centered in the band. To map the old Span Pair and Band Pair/Delta Pair functions to the X-Series for code compatibility, aliases and compatibility commands were added. Since Span Pair and Band Pair/Delta Pair were primarily used for making band power measurements, the aliases are provided for setting the parameters of a Band Function. If the user was using the old commands for anything other than Band Power these aliases will likely not yield compatible results. For example, some users took advantage of the fact that the Band Pair commands let you arbitrarily set the frequency (time) of a delta marker and its non-fixed reference marker. In these cases, which had nothing to do with band Power, the new commands will not be compatible. For these use cases the user must use two markers and position each using the CALC:MARK:X commands, since “marker pairs” do not exist anymore. Note that all of the alias commands described below cause the specified marker to become selected. 1. Marker Mode compatibility To setup Band Power measurements in the ESA and PSA, you had to send the :CALCulate:MARKer[1] |2|3|4:MODE POSition|DELTa|BAND|SPAN|OFF command with either the BAND or SPAN parameter, in order to turn on the marker control modes that let Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 745 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function you use a pair of delta markers as Band Power markers. In the X-Series this is no longer necessary, as there are no special marker modes for Band power. So when this command is sent with either a BAND or SPAN parameter it is aliased to simply turn on Normal markers. Thus: Old command Aliased to :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:BAND :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:POSition :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:SPAN :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:POSition 2. Span Pair Compatibility In the past, the Span Pair function was used with a marker pair to set the band for Band Power. The following SCPI commands were used when performing this setup programmatically: :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN? These commands are now aliased as follows to preserve the old functionality as much as possible: Old command Aliased to :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN 3. Delta Pair/Band Pair functionality Another way to set the marker pair for Band Power was with the Delta Pair function (Band Pair in ESA). The following SCPI commands were used when performing this setup programmatically: :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP? These commands are now aliased as follows to preserve the old functionality as much as possible: Old command Aliased to :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt 746 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function 4. Arbitrary Marker Pair functionality Another use case was to use the STARt and STOP commands to arbitrarily set the frequency (time) of a delta marker and its reference marker without being in Band Power mode. This use case is not supported with a backwards compatibility command, but since in the X-Series you can arbitrarily set any marker’s value and any reference marker’s value, it is easy to fix this problem in code; but the user will have to change their code. Old command User must change to :CALCulate:MARKer1:X:STARt <param> :CALCulate:MARKer1:X <param> :CALCulate:MARKer1:X:STOP <param> :CALCulate:MARKer2:X <param> (in the example marker 1 and marker 2 are used; in practice, use the reference marker number for the STOP marker number, which is usually marker number+1) 5. Band changes with analyzer settings In the past, when a marker pair was used to set the width of the band for Band Power, the markers held their screen positions when analyzer frequency settings such as Span changed. The result of this was that as the Span changed, the frequency difference and hence the width of the band changed as well. In the X-Series, as a result of the change from position markers to value markers, the width of the band remains constant as frequency settings of the analyzer change. 6. Offscreen Markers As a result of the change from position markers to value markers, markers can be at a frequency which is offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the screen edges and hence were never offscreen. Users who depended on this clipping behavior by setting Band Span to a high value in order to force Band Power markers to the left and right edges of the screen will have to rewrite their code. Furthermore, since markers could never be offscreen, Band Power always returned a valid result. In the XSeries, if either edge of the Band is offscreen, Band Power returns not a number as a result. 7. Direct Marker Positioning The following commands were used in ESA and PSA to directly set the marker to a specific trace point (“bucket”) position when they were being used in Span Pair and Delta Pair/Band Pair modes: :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP? Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 747 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function They are aliased very similarly to the non-position commands (above) however a translation to/from trace points (buckets) is also performed: Old command Aliased to :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNC:BAND:SPAN :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNC:BAND:LEFT :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNC:BAND:RIGHt In each case but the first (:X:POSition:CENTer),the analyzer first converts the specified value in trace points to the current X Axis Scale Units (for example, frequency or time) of the trace upon which the marker resides. Then, that value is used in the alias command to set the desired value. The query form of the command returns the marker function span in trace points (buckets) by translating back based on the X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent. The value in Trace Points is translated into the current X Axis Scale units for the purpose of setting the value of the marker. However, the marker’s span value, LEFT value, or RIGHt value in X Axis Scale Units, not trace points, are preserved if a change is made to the X Axis scale settings. For example, if you use this command to set a marker function span of 500 buckets, which happens at that time to correspond to 13 GHz, and then you change the analyzer’s Start Frequency so that 500 buckets is no longer 13 GHz, the span stays at 13 GHz, not at 500 buckets! This is important to realize as it differs from the legacy behavior. The UP/DOWN parameters increment/decrement by one bucket. For this, the analyzer performs a conversion to buckets and back. Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is 748 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 749 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. 750 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 751 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak. Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Marker Noise Turns on the Marker Noise function for the selected marker, making it a noise marker. If the selected marker is off, it is turned on in Normal mode and located at the center of the screen. When Marker Noise is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the Band Span or Interval Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width. When Marker Noise is on, the marker’s Y Axis Result is the average noise level, normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth, in the band specified under the Band Adjust key. See "More Information" on page 753. See "Off-trace Markers" on page 753. Key Path Marker Function Example CALC:MARK:FUNC NOIS turns on marker 1 as a noise marker. CALC:MARK:FUNC? returns the current marker function for the marker specified. In this case it returns the string: NOIS. CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Marker Noise function for marker 1 (if Marker Noise is ON for marker 1). Note that the delta value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta value when the Y axis unit is Volt. For example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely you have to know whether your Y Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W). Notes See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 742” key. Dependencies Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker; so all of the Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker. 752 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Couplings Average detector and Power Averaging auto selected when Marker Noise on If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Marker Noise via front panel or SCPI will turn the marker on. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 More Information To guarantee accurate data for noise-like signals, a correction for equivalent noise bandwidth is made by the analyzer. The Marker Noise function accuracy is best when the detector is set to Average or Sample, because neither of these detectors will peak-bias the noise. The tradeoff between sweep time and variance of the result is best when Average Type is set to Power Averaging. Therefore, Auto coupling chooses the Average detector and Power Averaging when Marker Noise is on. Though the Marker Noise function works with all settings of detector and Average Type, using the positive or negative peak detector gives less accurate measurement results. Off-trace Markers If a Normal or Delta noise marker is so near to the left or right edge of the trace that some of the band is off the trace, then it uses only that subset of the Band Width that is on-trace. If the marker itself is off-trace, its value becomes undefined. Neither band/interval power nor band/interval density markers are defined if any part of the band is offtrace (unless they are Fixed with a stored function value in them), except that when the edges of the bandwidth are trivially off-screen, due to mathematical limitations in the analyzer or in the controlling computer, the result will still be considered valid. Band/Interval Power Turns on the Band/Interval Power function for the selected marker. If the selected marker is off it is turned on in Normal marker and located at the center of the screen. When Band/Interval Power is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the Band Span or Interval Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width. If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected. Other choices for the detector or Average type will usually cause measurement inaccuracy. Key Path Marker Function Example CALC:MARK:FUNC BPOW turns on marker 1 as a band power marker. CALC:MARK2:FUNC? returns the current setting of marker function for marker 2. In this case it returns the string: BPOW. CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Band Power function for marker 1. Note that the delta value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta value when the Y axis unit is Volt. For example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely you have to know whether your Y Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 753 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W). Notes See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 742” key, above. Dependencies Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker. Couplings If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected. If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Band Power via thefront panel or SCPI will turn the marker on. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Band/Interval Density Turns on the Band/Interval Density function for the selected marker. If the selected marker is off it is turned on in Normal marker mode and located at the center of the screen. When Band/Interval Density is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the Band Span or Interval Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width. See "More Information" on page 755. See "What is band/interval density? " on page 755 Key Path Marker Function Example CALC:MARK:FUNC BDEN turns on marker 1 as a band density marker. CALC:MARK:FUNC? returns the current setting of band function for the marker specified. In this case it returns the string: BDEN. CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Band Density function for marker 1. Note that the delta value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta value when the Y axis unit is Volt. For example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely you have to know whether your Y Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W). Notes The zero-width case is treated as one bucket wide although it shows a width of 0. When the trace the marker is on crosses domains, the width crosses domains as well, to remain the same percentage of the trace. Notes See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 742” key. Dependencies Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker. Couplings If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected. If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Band Density via front panel or SCPI will turn the marker on. 754 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function State Saved n/a. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 More Information It may seem like the band density marker function is exactly like a function of a noise marker with variable width. But they are somewhat different. The Noise markers assume that the signal to be measured is noise-like. Based on this assumption, we can actually make reasonable measurements under very nonideal conditions: any detector may be used, any averaging type, any VBW. In contrast, the Band Power and Band Density markers make no assumption about the statistics of the signal. If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected. Other choices for the detector or Average type will usually cause measurement inaccuracy. What is band/interval density? On frequency domain traces, the average density across a band is the total band power divided by the bandwidth over which it is measured. On time domain traces, interval density is the average power in the interval divided by the noise bandwidth of the RBW of the trace. Marker Function Off Turns off band functions for the selected marker. Key Path Marker Function Example :CALC:MARK:FUNC OFF turns off marker functions for marker 1 Notes See the description under the "Marker" on page 689 key, above. Dependencies Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the Band Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker, including Off Couplings Turning off the marker function has no effect on the band span nor does it turn the marker off. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Band Adjust Opens a menu that lets you set the width or left or right edges of the band. It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on. Key Path Marker Function Dependencies If the marker is Fixed, Band Adjust is grayed out. If the marker function is Off, Band Adjust is grayed out. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 755 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Couplings If any of the Band Adjust functions are the active function, the wings and arms of the selected marker display in green; otherwise they display in white. Backwards Compatibility Notes If any of the band adjust SCPI commands (including the legacy compatibility commands documented under "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743) are sent while the marker function is off, they will be accepted and the value stored. If sent while the marker is off, they will be accepted and ignored. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Band/Interval Span Sets the width of the span for the selected marker. It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on. In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the number of sweep points, set in the Sweep menu. Key Path Marker Function, Band Adjust Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN <freq> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN? Example :CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:SPAN 20 MHz sets the band span of marker 12 to 20 MHz :CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:SPAN? queries the band span of Marker 1 Notes Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on, or an invalid suffix error will be generated. If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace domain will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces). Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the current domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain, the Preset value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245 GHz is appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz Instrument, the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz. Couplings Changing the Band/Interval Span necessarily changes the Band/Interval Left and Band/Interval Right values Band/Interval Span is set to 0 when the marker is turned off Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is zero at that time Preset If 0, set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Hz Max Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series marker values are not limited and do not clip 756 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:SPAN Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:SPAN <param> See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:SPAN? Preset 50 Backwards Compatibility Notes The old command, :CALCulate:MARKer[n]:X:POSition:SPAN <param> was used to set the span between a delta marker and its reference marker in trace points (buckets) in Span Pair mode. There is no new command for setting the span of a Band Function in trace points. So, when this command is received, the analyzer first converts the specified span in trace points to the current X Axis Scale Units (e.g., frequency or time) of the trace upon which the marker resides. Then, that value is sent to the :CALC:MARKer[n]:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN <param> command to set the span of the marker’s Band Function. The query form of the command will return the marker function span in trace points (buckets) by translating back based on the X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent. ! See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 for more information Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Band/Interval Left Sets the left edge frequency or time for the band of the selected marker. The right edge is unaffected. It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on. In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the number of sweep points, set in the Sweep menu. Key Path Marker Function, Band Adjust Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT <freq> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT? Example :CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:LEFT 20 GHz sets the left edge of the band span of marker 12 to 20 GHz :CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:LEFT? queries the band span of Marker 1 Notes Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. When the left edge is moved, the right edge stays anchored; thus, the marker’s frequency will change. Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 757 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on, or an invalid suffix error will be generated.If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace domain will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces). Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the current domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain, the Preset value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245 GHz is appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz Instrument, the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz. Couplings Changing the Band/Interval Left necessarily changes the Band/Interval Span and Band/Interval Center values. Band/Interval Span is set to 0 when the marker is turned off so that means Band/Interval Left is set to the center value at this time. Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is zero at that time. Preset If 0, Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on, which affects Band/Interval Left. State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Hz Max Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series marker values are not limited and do not clip Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STARt Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STARt <integer> See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STARt? Preset 0 Backwards Compatibility SCPI The legacy command, :CALCulate:MARKer[n]:X:POSition:STARt <param> was used to control the Reference marker in trace points (buckets) in Band Pair/Delta Pair mode. There is no new command for setting the start of a Band Function in trace points. So, when this command is received, the analyzer first converts the specified span in trace points to the current X Axis Scale Units (e.g., frequency or time) of the trace upon which the marker resides. :CALC:MARKer[n]:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT <param> command to set the start of the marker’s Band Function. The query form of the command will return the marker function LEFT value in trace points (buckets) by translating back based on the current X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent. See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 for more information Initial S/W Revision 758 Prior to A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Band/Interval Right Sets the right edge frequency or time for the band of the selected marker. The left edge is unaffected In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the number of sweep points, set in the Sweep menu. It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on. Key Path Marker Function, Band Adjust Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt <freq> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt? Example :CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:RIGHt 20 GHz sets the right edge of the band span of marker 12 to 20 GHz :CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:RIGHt? queries the band span of Marker 1 Notes Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. When the right edge is moved, the left edge stays anchored; thus, the marker’s frequency will change. Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on, or an invalid suffix error will be generated. If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace domain will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces). Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the current domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain, the Preset value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245 GHz is appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz Instrument, the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz. Couplings Changing the Band/Interval Right necessarily changes the Band/Interval Span and Band/Interval Center values Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is zero at that time Preset If 0, Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on, which affects Band/Interval Right State Saved Saved in instrument state Min 0 Hz Max Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series marker values are not limited and do not clip Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STOP Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STOP <integer> See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 759 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STOP? Preset 1000, the actual value is dependent on the selected number of sweep points. Backwards Compatibility SCPI The legacy command, :CALCulate:MARKer[n]:X:POSition:STOP <param> was used to control the Delta marker in trace points (buckets) in Band Pair/Delta Pair mode. There is no new command for setting the stop of a Band Function in trace points. So, when this command is received, the analyzer first converts the specified span in trace points to the current X Axis Scale Units (e.g., frequency or time) of the trace upon which the marker resides. Then, that value is sent to the :CALC:MARKer[n]:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt <param> command to set the stop of the marker’s Band Function. The query form of the command will return the marker function RIGHt value in trace points (buckets) by translating back based on the current X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent. See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 for more information Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Band Span Auto/Man Determines whether the Band Span for Marker Noise will track the analyzer’s Span. Band Span is initialized as specified above, under Band/Interval Span. Subsequently, if the analyzer’s Span is changed, the effect on Band Span depends on the Auto/Man setting of Band Span: • If in Auto, then whenever the Span changes, the Band Span for Marker Noise is changed to 5% of the new Span. • If in Man, the Band Span does not change when the Span is changed. The Band Span is set to 5% regardless of whether or not this would place part of the Band offscreen. The Marker Noise function is well able to function with part of the band offscreen. This function only affects Marker Noise. The key only appears when Maker Noise is the Marker Function for the selected marker. Note that, if in Zero Span, “Span” should be replaced by “Sweep Time” and “Band Span” should be replaced by “Band Interval”, in the above specification and in the table below: Key Path Marker Function, Band Adjust Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN:AUTO ON|OFF :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN:AUTO? Example :CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:SPAN:AUTO ON sets the band span of marker 12 to Auto :CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:SPAN:AUTO? queries the auto band span state of Marker 1 Dependencies 760 This only appears when the Marker Function for the selected marker is Marker Noise. If the SCPI command is sent to a marker that does not have Marker Noise selected, it is honored but of course, the user will not see any indication of this. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Couplings When Auto Band Span is turned on, it immediately adjusts the band span to 5% of the Span. If the Band Span is changed, either by the Band/Interval Span key, the Band/Interval Left key, or the Band/Interval Right key, or the equivalent SCPI commands, this function is set to Man. This function is set to Auto on Preset and when the Auto Couple key is pressed. This function is set to Auto when Marker Noise is turned on, if the value of Band/Interval Span is 0. Note that this test must be performed before Band/Interval Span is initialized, because Band/Interval Span is initialized to 5% if Band/Interval Span is 0 when the marker function is turned on. Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker. Preset Auto State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility Notes Initial S/W Revision In legacy analyzers, the Noise Marker had a width that was always equal to 5% of the span. But in the X-Series it is possible for the user to change the span of the Marker Noise band using the Band Adjust function. To preserve the legacy behavior, the Band Span Auto/Man function is provided. When it is in Auto, which it is by default, the Maker Noise band is always held at 5% of Span, even if the Span changes. When the user adjusts the Marker Noise Band Span, Band Span Auto/Man is set to Manual. So the legacy behavior is preserved, but now the user can set the Marker Noise Span as well and that setting will be preserved when Span is changed. Prior to A.02.00 Measure at Marker This key and all the keys in this menu only appear with the N6141A or W6141A application or when Option EMC is installed and licensed. Key Path Marker Function Dependencies The Measure at Marker menu is not available in Spectrogram. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Measure at Marker When this key is pressed, the analyzer executes one Measure at Marker function and then returns. Measure at Marker goes to the frequency of the selected marker and takes a reading with each of the three detectors selected in the Detectors menu, using the dwell times specified there, then displays the readings in a window on the display, using the current Y-Axis Unit. When the Measure at Marker is complete, the analyzer restores all settings to their pre-Measure-atMarker values and normal sweeps resume. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:MAMarker? Example :CALC:MARK2:FUNC:MAM? Performs a Measure at Marker function at Marker 2’s current frequency and, when completed, returns the results of the measure at marker window in a query Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 761 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Notes This query command returns comma separated values for the 3 specified detectors and the frequency value of the marker. If a Detector is off or if no measurement has yet completed, –999.0 will be returned. This can happen, for example, if you are operating with too large a value of (span/sweep points) and the Measure at Marker function does not execute but instead puts up the advisory message, “Span per point too large, narrow span or increase RBW or number of points” (see below). The size of the return data array is fixed at 4. The elements are: 1. Detector 1 value ( if off, –999.0 for backwards compatibility) 2. Detector 2 value ( if off, –999.0 for backwards compatibility) 3. Detector 3 value ( if off, –999.0 for backwards compatibility) 4. Frequency of Marker If a sweep is in process when this function executes it aborts, and restarts after the function is complete. Dependencies If BW & Avg Type is in an Autocoupled state, the (up to three) measurements taken by Measure at Marker are taken with Auto Coupled settings for the functions in the BW menu, even if those functions are in manual. Couplings If the specified Marker is not on, the analyzer turns it on at the center of the screen and does a peak search before performing the function. Status Bits/OPC dependencies OPC goes true when the measurement is complete Backwards Compatibility SCPI :MEASure:EMI:MARKer[1]|2|...12? Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 This command is included for compatibility with the E7400 and PSA option 239 . Performs a Measure at Marker function at the specified marker’s current frequency and returns the results. Measure at Marker presents its information in a separate window that normally appears in the upper right of the display, but it can be repositioned to the upper left. 762 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function The Measure at Marker box shows the detector name for the selected detectors and “Off” for those not selected. The names used are: Name Detector Normal Normal Peak Peak Sample Sample Neg Peak Negative Peak RMS Average detector with Power Average (RMS) Log Avg Average detector with Log-Pwr Average VoltageAvg Average detector with Voltage Average Quasi Peak Quasi Peak EMI Avg EMI Average RMS Avg RMS Average The marker frequency is shown in the “Freq” field. The measured value is shown for all detectors except those that are “Off.” For these, --- is displayed. The current Y-Axis unit is used, and the precision that is used for the detector value displays is exactly the same as for the Marker. The precision used for the Frequency display is six significant digits. The sequence of steps in the measurement is as follows: • Any sweep in progress is aborted. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 763 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function • If in Zero Span, the Center Frequency is used as the frequency at which to take the reading, since in Zero Span, all markers are by definition at the Center Frequency • If not in Zero Span: −If the selected marker is Off, it is first turned on in the center of the screen and a peak search performed. −If the selected marker is on, but offscreen, it is first moved to the center of the screen and a peak search performed. . −A frequency “zoom” function is performed to determine the frequency of the selected marker to the required precision. If you are operating with too large a value of (span/sweep points) then the Measure at Marker window will not display, but instead an advisory message, “Span per point too large, narrow span or increase RBW or number of points”.This means you have chosen a combination of RBW, span and sweep points that makes each trace point much wider than the RBW, so that the trace point in which the signal appears is an inadequately precise measure of its frequency—for example, with a 30 MHz to 1000 MHz span, 601 trace points and 120 kHz RBW, each trace point is 13 times as wide as the RBW. In this case, a SCPI query of the results will yield –999 dBm for each detector. −If the zoom is successful, the analyzer goes to zero span at this frequency. • Each detector is then read in successive single-point zero span sweeps, using a sweep time equal to the specified dwell time. The value displayed by Measure at Marker represents the maximum value output by the detector during the dwell timeAutocoupled bandwidth and average type settings are used for each detector unless the BW & Avg Type key is set to As Set, in which case the current bandwidth and average type settings are used. • Each result is then displayed in the measure at marker window as it becomes available. • The analyzer returns to its pre-Measure at Marker span and settings after executing a Measure at Marker function, including Bandwidth, Avg Type, and EMC Std - regardless of the setting of BW & Avg Type. • Finally, if the sweep had to be aborted, the aborted sweep is restarted. While the function is executing, all the fields except Freq show “---“ for their values until the measurement is complete for that detector. As each detector is read, an informational message is displayed in the status line, for example: Measuring with detector 1 (Peak) with RBW=120 kHz After the last detector, the status line is cleared. Meas at Marker Window This key opens a menu which controls the Measure at Marker window. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker Readback In square brackets, the state of the window then the window position, separated by commas, as [On, Left] Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 764 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Window This key turns the Measure at Marker window on and off. It turns on automatically when Measure at Marker is initiated and turns off on a Preset. If the Window is turned on without a Measure at Marker result, “---“ is displayed for each result for which the detector is not “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Meas at Marker Window Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker[:STATe]? Example :DISP:WIND:MAM ON Couplings The window turns on automatically when Measure at Marker is initiated and turns off on a Preset. Preset Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text On|Off Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Position This key controls the placement of the Measure at Marker window on the display. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Meas at Marker Window Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition LEFT|RIGHt :DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition? Example :DISP:WIND:MAM:POS RIGH Preset Right State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Left|Right Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detectors This key opens up a menu that allows you to configure the detectors to be used for the Measure at Marker reading. Any of the analyzer’s detectors can be used for each of the three detectors, or any of the three can be turned off. The dwell time for each detector is also settable. When performing a Meas at Marker, the dwell time settings that you select will depend on the characteristics of the emission you are measuring. The default dwell time (200 ms) should work well for typical EUT emissions, but sometimes you will encounter emissions for which the defaults are not optimal. This is especially the case for emissions that vary slowly over time or have a slow repetition rate. By lengthening the dwell times you can increase the likelihood of accurately measuring these low repetition rate signals. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 765 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function When Measure at Marker is activated, the receiver makes a zero span measurement for each of the (up to) three detectors selected, using the Dwell Time set for each detector. If the signal's repetition period is greater than 200 ms (the default setting), the dwell time should be increased to capture at least two and preferably more repetitions of the signal. Additionally, if you do not need or do not wish to use a detector to make a measurement, that specific detector may be turned off. If the Measure at Marker window is being displayed, and one of the detectors is changed, any value being displayed for that detector changes to “---“ until the next successful reading from that detector. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Remote Command :CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1] | 2 | 3 OFF | NORMal | AVERage | POSitive | SAMPle | NEGative | QPEak | EAVerage | RAVerage :CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1]|2|3? Example :CALC:MAM:DET2 QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 2 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Remote Command :CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1]|2|3:DWELl <dwell time> :CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1]|2|3:DWELl? Example :CALC:MAM:DET2:DWEL 500 ms Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 2 to dwell for 500 ms State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:DWELl <dwell time> Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 This command is included for compatibility with the E7400 and PSA option 239 . Sets all of the detectors’ dwell times to the specified amount Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF 766 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 767 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF 768 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference 769 7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference Marker Function Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors Remote Command See "Detectors" on page 765. Example :CALC:MAM:DET QPE Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak :CALC:MAM:DET OFF Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off Preset Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback Text Detector name Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Detector 1 This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”. Key Path Marker Function,